Instruction Operation and Maintenance Manual Unit Control Panel

g GE Oil & Gas Nuovo Pignone
INSTRUCTION, OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(CENTRIFUGAL COMPRESSOR BCL 456/A, STEAM TURBINE SNC 1-3)
Volume VII
Unit Control Panel
NUOVO PIGNONE JOBS : 110.2313/190.0533

N.P. SERIAL NUMBERS : C13466 – V01694
CUSTOMER : COLT ENGINEERING FOR
SUNCOR ENERGY
SERVICE : RECYCLE GAS COMPRESSOR
PLANT LOCATION : NORTH OF FORT McMURRAY,
ALBERTA (CANADA)
PLANT : VOYAGEUR HYDROTREATERS
ITEM N° : 207K-300
MANUFACTURER : GE Oil & Gas

Nuovo Pignone
Via F. Matteucci, 2
50127 Florence - Italy
Telephone (055) 423211
Telefax (055) 4232800
10-08-E 110.2313/190.0533 P. 1-1
MOD. INPR/SVIL/ P.F. 01/01

INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL
Status and description of the revisions
Stato di revisione Data Eseguito Controllato Approvato Descrizione della revisione
Revision Status Date Prepared Checked Approved Description of the revisions
ISSELnord Nuovo Pignone Nuovo Pignone

00 05.10.08
Pedrazzi E. Paoletti S. Palma FIRST ISSUE – O.&M.M.
ISSELnord Nuovo Pignone Nuovo Pignone REVISED VOLUME VI ACCORDING
01 13.01.08
Pedrazzi E. Paoletti S. Palma TO INSTRUMENT LIST SOS 9954140
ISSELnord Nuovo Pignone Nuovo Pignone SECOND ISSUE- O.& M.M.
02 02.11.09 Pedrazzi E Paoletti S Palma (ACCORDING TO CUSTOMER COMMENTS)
ISSELnord Nuovo Pignone Nuovo Pignone THIRD ISSUE- O.& M.M.
ISSELnord Nuovo Pignone Nuovo Pignone FOURTH ISSUE- O.& M.M.
ISSELnord Nuovo Pignone Nuovo Pignone FIFTH ISSUE- O.& M.M.
ISSELnord Nuovo Pignone Nuovo Pignone SIXTH ISSUE- O.& M.M.
ISSELnord Nuovo Pignone Nuovo Pignone
07 22.03.13 Pedrazzi E Paoletti S Palma CERTIFIED FINAL MANUAL
This Operating and Maintenance Manual is and contains confidential and proprietary information of
Nuovo Pignone S.r.l, as properly indicated which shall not be used or disclosed to others, except with the
written permission of Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
Within this Manual, subsections of sub supplier documentation are present as originally received.
DATE: 05-10-2008 N.P. JOB: 110.2313/190.0533 P. 1-1

After Sales Service
Introduction to Nuovo Pignone after-sales service
Nuovo Pignone organization is structured in such a way as to guarantee a comprehensive and

effective after-sales service for its machinery.
Here is briefly described the organization of the company, based on its experience as a
manufacturer and on a continuos effort to meet customers needs.
Being aware of the importance of maintenance in all operational activities, Nuovo Pignone deals
with its various aspects from the design stage, through:
- the use of design criteria that enhance maintainability,

- the continuos research of innovative solutions to improve availability,
- the selection of components and advanced technologies to enhance equipment maintenance,
- the inspection procedures and topics, to be used in connection with a detailed schedule of
maintenance operations,
- the choice of the spare parts to be kept in stock, optimizing investment cost vs plant
downtime.
In late years Nuovo Pignone after-sales service has also been brought up-to-date to guarantee the
best support to its customers. In more details:
- worldwide,
where Nuovo Pignone has been operating for tens of years, the structure consists of a service
network which is the natural expansion of the "Customer Service Division" in Florence.
There are localized Service Units and authorized Service Shops at strategic points of the world, to
cover areas where plants with Nuovo Pignone machinery are located.
- in Florence, ( Headquarters)
specialized depts. which are active from the receipt of the enquiry, to the issue of the offer and, in
case of an order, to the management of all activities connected with the job, up to its completion.
This organization, available for all customers, ensures a qualified interface to refer to for any
requirements in connection with operation/maintenance of machinery.
The names and address for localized Service Units and authorized Service Shops are available at
GE POWER SYSTEM WEB SITE (URL: http://www.gepower.com) selecting from its home
page the following choices: Business sites/GE Nuovo Pignone/Sales Organization (complete URL:
http://www.gepower.com/geoilandgas/oil_gasbrands/nuovo_pignone/sales_org.html).
In the section “Service” of this page are available the names and addresses of localized Service
Units divided into geographical areas.
In the above indicated web site, in the section “New Units” are available the names and addresses
of the Branch Offices Abroad divided into geographical areas.
06-01-E After-Sales Service P. 1-2
MOD. INPR/SVIL/D.L./P.F. 06/01

After Sales Service
Nuovo Pignone has been managing for many years special after sales "Support Packages". These
packages typically include:
- diagnostic analysis of machines in operation

- consultancy in scheduling maintenance based on operational requirements
- field maintenance
- refurbishing of worn components
- original spare parts supplies
- technical expertise in updating machines
Product engineering departments are staffed with experts in analysing machinery operating data,
who provide users with technical consulting services aimed at optimizing use of equipment. The
entire service organization guarantees users get the most suitable maintenance to restore original
design conditions and the total information relevant to all technological innovations introduced in
Nuovo Pignone's products as applicable to the installed machinery.
Full flexibility allows us to adapt each maintenance contract upon User's needs.Service Agreements
in force today, range from "On call" basis to "Global Service"
06-01-E After-Sales Service P. 2-2
MOD. INPR/SVIL/D.L./P.F. 06/01

VOLUMES INDEX
The complete instructions of the compressor unit are subdivided into ten Volumes as
follows:
- DESCRIPTION & OPERATION - CENTRIFUGAL COMPRESSOR Volume I
- COMPRESSOR DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST Volume II
- DESCRIPTION & OPERATION - STEAM TURBINE Volume III
- TURBINE DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST Volume IV
- AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Volume V
- INSTRUMENTATION Volume VI
- UNIT CONTROL PANEL Volume VII
- PLC CONTROL SYSTEM Volume VIII
- OVERSPEED MONITORING SYSTEM Volume IX
- VIBRATION MONITORING SYSTEM Volume X
Each Volume is subdivided into Sections. Each Section can be subdivided into Paragraphs
and/or Parts.
10-08-E .2313/.0533 P. 1-1

g GE Oil & Gas Volume VII Nuovo Pignone
N.P. Job: 110.2313/190.0533
UNIT CONTROL PANEL
MAIN INDEX
The included documentation proper of this instructions manual is subdivided into two
sections as follows:
NAME SECTION
DRAWINGS A
MANUALS B
10-08-E .2313/.0533 P. 1-1

Volume VII Section A
N.P. Job: 110.2313/190.0533
DRAWINGS
POS. NAME DRAWING N°
1 CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL SOS 9971645/4

DESCRIPTION (VP207-K-3029-1)
2 UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM SOS 9971994/3

(VP207-K-3056-1)
3 CONTROL SYSTEM SCHEMATIC SOS 9971568/3

(VP207-K-3009-1)
4 CONTROL SYSTEM I/O LIST SOS 9972092/3

(VP207-K-3039-1)
5 FUNCTIONAL LOGIC DIAGRAM SOS 9971642/4

(VP207-K-3037-1)
6 UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM LAYOUT AND MAIN SOS 9971691/3

COMPONENTS LIST (VP207-K-3016-1)
7 CAUSE/EFFECT DIAGRAM SOS 9971591/3

(VP207-K-3012-1)
8 UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM LOOP DIAGRAM SOS 9972157/3

(VP207-K-3057-1)
9 LOCAL CONTROL PANEL LAYOUT SOS 9971701/3

(VP207-K-3014-1)
10 UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST SOS 9971995/3
11 LOCAL CONTROL PANEL WIRING DIAGRAM SOS 9972008/3

(VP207-K-3056-1)
10-08-E .2313/.0533 P. 1-1

Volume VII Section A
POS. NAME DRAWING N°
12 STEAM TURBINE GOVERNOR CONFIGURATION SOL 45717/4

WORK SHEET
13 HMI VIDEO PAGES SOS 9971996/3

(VP207-K-3075-1)
10-08-E .2313/.0533 P. 1-1

INDEX:
1. SCOPE .................................................................................................................4
2. CONTROL SYSTEM OVERALL DESCRIPTION............................................ 4
3. MACHINERY PREPARATION FOR START-UP............................................ 6
3.1 AUXILIARIES START-UP PROCEDURE ............................................................................................6
3.2 LUBE OIL TANK HEATERS ............................................................................................................6
3.3 MAIN & STAND-BY LUBE OIL PUMPS ..........................................................................................7
3.3.1 Lube Oil Stand-by pump - Manual procedure......................................................................7
3.3.2 Lube Oil Stand-by pump - Automatic procedure..................................................................7
3.4 RUN DOWN / COOL DOWN TANK ....................................................................................................................8
3.5 LUBE OIL TEMPERATURE CONTROL...................................................................................................................8
3.6 ELECTRIC TURNING GEAR ................................................................................................................................9
4. SEAL GAS SYSTEM CONTROL....................................................................... 10
4.1 FILTERED GAS SUPPLY (SEAL GAS) .............................................................................................10
4.2 SEALS LEAKAGE MONITORING ....................................................................................................10
4.3 NITROGEN INJECTION (SEPARATION GAS)...................................................................................11
4.4 SECONDARY SEAL GAS (PURGE GAS) ..........................................................................................11
4.5 SEAL GAS CONDITIONING SKID ..................................................................................................11
5. STEAM TURBINE OPERATING PROCEDURE ............................................ 13
5.1 TURBINE STEAM VALVE CONTROL ..............................................................................................13
5.2 TEST BEFORE START-UP ..............................................................................................................16
5.3 START-UP PROCEDURE ...............................................................................................................18
5.3.1 Semiautomatic Start-up procedure .....................................................................................19
5.3.2 Automatic Start-up..............................................................................................................21
5.3.3 Sequence after Start-up.......................................................................................................23
5.4 CONTROLLED STOP ....................................................................................................................23
5.5 OVER-SPEED TEST ......................................................................................................................24
6. EMERGENCY SHUT DOWN ............................................................................. 25
6.1 MACHINE SHUT DOWN ...............................................................................................................25
6.2 ISOLATION AND BLOWDOWN VALVES SEQUENCE DURING SHUTDOWN .......................................26
6.3 TRIP SOLENOID VALVES AUTOMATIC TEST ................................................................................27
7. OVERSPEED PROTECTION SYSTEM ........................................................... 29
8. BENTLY NEVADA MACHINE MONITORING SYSTEM............................ 29
9. PROCESS GAS CIRCUIT VALVE SEQUENCE ............................................. 30
9.1 GENERAL FEATURES ..................................................................................................................30
9.2 PERFORMANCE CONTROLLER .....................................................................................................31
9.3 PRESSURE OVERRIDE CONTROLLER (POC)................................................................................32
10. COMPRESSOR SUCTION & DISCHARGE ISOLATION VALVES ......... 33
CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL

TITLE: DOCUMENT CODE REVISION
DESCRIPTION SOS9971645 4
REVISION DESCRIPTION: PAGE MARKER SECURITY CODE
REVISED WHERE SHOWN <4> N/A N
ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE SHEET
WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.l. . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 2 of 63
11. GE O&G CONTROLLERS DESCRIPTION .................................................. 34
11.1 PROCESS CONTROL............................................................................................................34
11.1.1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................34
11.1.2 CONTROL OVERVIEW....................................................................................................35
11.1.2.1 Process Controller.........................................................................................................36
11.1.2.2 Pressure Override Control ............................................................................................38
11.1.2.3 Coupling Control ...........................................................................................................38
Selection Logic.........................................................................................................................................................................38
Start/Stop sequence...................................................................................................................................................................41
Valve Repositioning .................................................................................................................................................................42
11.2 ANTISURGE CONTROL ..............................................................................................................44
11.2.1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................44
11.2.2 CONTROL OVERVIEW....................................................................................................46
11.2.2.1 Antisurge Control Law ..................................................................................................49
11.3 STEAM TURBINE GOVERNOR ....................................................................................................53
11.3.1 Steam Turbine (Note 1).....................................................................................................53
11.3.1.1 Operation Mode.............................................................................................................53
Turbine Start.............................................................................................................................................................................54
Normal Stop..............................................................................................................................................................................57
Emergency Shutdown...............................................................................................................................................................59
11.3.1.2 Controllers.....................................................................................................................60
Speed Controll ..........................................................................................................................................................................60
Cascade Control........................................................................................................................................................................62

1900533 4 A
1. SCOPE
The present document outlines the Operating and Control Philosophy of a gas compressor
Set, driven by a Steam Turbine SNC1 3 model.
2. CONTROL SYSTEM OVERALL DESCRIPTION

The following main parts compose the Control System:
1. Distributed Control System (DCS) (supplied by customer)

2. Motor Control Center (MCC) (supplied by customer)
3. Unit Control Panel (UCP) (supplied by N.P.)
4. Local Control Panel (LCP) (supplied by N.P.)
5. Safety Instrumented System (SIS) (supplied by customer)
The Unit Control Panel consists of the following major components:
1. PLC Triconex TMR for all logic sequences, Antisurge and Performance Controllers,
Steam Turbine Speed Controller.
3. Bently Nevada (3500 series) monitoring system for Radial Vibration, Axial
Displacement, Temperatures.
4. Turbine Overspeed System Bently Nevada 3500 Series.
5. Personal Computer System with monitor, keyboard and printer (REMOTE HMI).
Video pages are developed with Wonderware software.
NOTES:
 The Bently Nevada System transmits data to PLC system in serial link and trip
signals to PLC in hardwired mode.
 The auxiliary Equipment sequences (pumps, motors, etc.) commads are managed by
LOC.HMI and REM.HMI.
 A selection “LOC.HMI/REM.HMI mode” (HS 3200) located on local and remote

HMI enables the operator to select whether to perform the auxiliares control from
LOC.HMI or REM.HMI.

1900533 4 A
 The LCP Panel (installed off skid, near the compressor train) is provided with the
following instrumentation:
- Compressor Start/Stop (HS 3118, HS 3084) ESD (XHS 3120) and ESD reset Push Button
<3> (HS 3085).
- Compressor Running (XL 3314), Permissive OK (XL 3313), Common Alarm (XL 3312)
and Trip Indications (XL 3311).
- Suction valve open/close push button (XHSO 3030, XHSC 3030).
- Discharge valve open/close push button (XHSO 3031, XHSC 3031).
- Suction valve open/close indication (XZLO 3030, XZLC 3030).
- Discharge valve open/close indication (XZLO 3031, XZLC 3031).
- Suction/Discharge pressure indication (PI 3095B, PI 3096B).
- Suction flow indication (FI 3290B).
- Lube oil, control oil pressure indication (PI 3403E, PI 3471B).
- Seal gas diff. pressure indication (PDI 3461B).
- A/S valve position indication (UZI 3293B).
- Turbine speed indication (SI 3049E).
STEAM TURBINE SPEED CONTROL

- Maint. By-pass enable (XHS 3316)
- Lube Oil Tank Heater ON/OFF (NCR 3741)
- Open Steam Turbine trip valve (XHSO 3315) pushbutton
- Turbine starting sequence auto/semi (HS 3117) selector switch
- Turbine speed control local/remote (SHS 3116) enable process controller selector switch
- Minimum Governor Speed / Load (HS 3115) selector switch
- Autostart sequence Halt (HS 3113) pushbutton
- Autostart sequence continue (HS 3114) pushbutton
- Speed setpoint raise (SHS 3111) pushbutton
- Speed setpoint lower (SHS 3112) pushbutton
- Turning gear auto/off (HS 3126) selector switch
- Lamp Test (HS 3111)
- Operator Interface Terminal (LOCAL HMI) – GE Wolverine Panel PC with

Wonderware software for Video pages.
- Emergency shutdown (XHS 3120) pullbutton – red mushroom type
 Maintenance By-Pass Switches can only be operated from DCS.

 The Speed Controller commands are managed by LCP, LOC/REM. HMI and DCS.
 The time remaining on all timers are shown on HMI video pages.

1900533 4 A
3. MACHINERY PREPARATION FOR START-UP
3.1 Auxiliaries start-up procedure
The auxiliary equipments shall be started-up as follow;
A) Lube oil Tank Electric heaters

B) Main lube oil pump
C) Turbine barring gear
D) Seal Gas system conditioning skid auxiliaries startup
E) Turbine seals system steam
NOTE:
All auxiliaries are under PLC control.
The auxiliaries start-up sequence is relative to the first machine start-up; during following
start-ups, all auxiliaries start-up may not be needed because not strictly mandatory or already
running. TC 3740 must be put to Auto Mode with 122° F setpoint before auxiliary Start-up
sequence.
3.2 Lube Oil Tank Heaters
The lube oil tank heaters are managed by the ON/OFF hand selector installed on LCP
<3> (NCR 3741).HS 3200 LOC/REM must be in LOC position to operate from LCP or
<4> LOC.HMT. When “OFF” mode is selected the heaters are OFF. When “ON mode” is
selected, the heaters are controlled by TE 3744, TSHH 3745A, TSHH 3745B and LT 3404
as follows :
- TSL 3744 Lube Oil Reservoir Temperature Low causes the activation of the
heaters. (Temperature  77°F)
- TSH 3744 Lube Oil Reservoir Temperature High causes the deactivation of the
heaters.
(Temperature > 104°F)
If one of following condition occurs the heater must be CUT-OUT .
<3> - TSHH 3745A/B Lube Oil Heater cut-out switch (Temperature>185°F)(MCC) for
207RM- 330A/B
- LSL 3404 Lube oil reservoir low level

1900533 4 A
3.3 Main & Stand-by Lube Oil Pumps
There are two lube oil pumps, KG 330A and KG 330B.
3 REVISED
KG WHERE
330B is<3an
> electric pump and KG 330A is a pump driven by a turbine.
3.3.1 Lube Oil Stand-by pump - Manual procedure

If the following conditions are satisfied:
- LSL 3404 L.O. reservoir not low level;
- TSLL 3744 L.O. reservoir not low low temperature (temp. > 50°F);
- PSL 3449 Compr. seal gas (N2) inlet not low pressure (press. > 65 Psig).
Stand-by lube oil pump (KG 330B) can be manually started from LOC.HMI, REM.HMI
by relevant Start command (NCR 3201 on LOC/REM.HMI).
Stand-by oil pump can be manually stopped from LOC.HMI, REM.HMI, DCS by relevant
stop commands (NCS 3201B on LOC/REM.HMI, NCS 3201A on DCS).
3.3.2 Lube Oil Stand-by pump - Automatic procedure
Lube oil stand-by pump starts automatically when turbine speed is not zero (SSLL 3101) and
one of the following conditions occur:
- PSL 3411 Lube oil delivery pumps low pressure (press. < 116 Psig);
- PSL 3403 Lube oil header low pressure (press. < 23.21 Psig);
NOTE:
1. The stand-by pump keeps on running until an action is taken by the operator
2. The stand-by pump can only be stopped if both pressures are normal or the turbine is
stopped.

1900533 4 A
3.4 Run Down / Cool Down Tank
The Run Down / Cool Down Tank is a system that guarantees a safe amount of oil to
the machine during its deceleration after the detection of lube oil system trip caused by
both pump failures.
Three phases must be described in order to define the behaviour of the Run Down
Tank:
o The filling-up phase: during which the tank is quickly filled up of oil through
valve XV 3302. In detail LT-3401 controls the XV 3302
valve according to following indications:
LSL 3401=0 Run Down Tank low level is detected, then XV-3302 is
opened
(solenoid energized).
LSL 3401=1 Run Down Tank low level is not detected, then XV 3302 is
closed (solenoid de-energized).
o The feeding phase: during which the tank is kept filled with a small stream of oil
through the orifice FO 3702. This is done to maintain the
tank oil temperature close to the lube oil system temperature.
<3> o The emptying phase: during which the tank is emptied to the machines. This event will
o occur only in case of an emergency shutdown for loss of
lube oil pressure.
3.5 Lube Oil Temperature Control
The lube oil control temperature is performed by mixing two streams of oil at different
temperatures: the cold one from lube oil coolers and the warm one directly from lube
oil pumps delivery.
TC 3740 on PLC regulates the warm oil flow through TV 3740 in order to maintain
the resulting mixed lube at the desired set point (122 °F).

1900533 4 A
3.6 Electric Turning Gear
Turning Gear can be enabled manually by actuating the Turning gear auto/off (HS
3126) selector switch on LCP. ETG must be enabled (switched in AUTO HS 3126)
during machine operation in order for it to be ready to perform steam turbine
cooldown phase in case of a TRIP or a normal shutdown . Upon detection of
ZEROSPEED condition the ETG will be started from the PLC automatically.
A soft start-stop panel (supplied by GENP and installed in auxiliary electrical room)
will provide electric power to the turning gear increasing its speed gradually up to the
full speed. Electric Turning Gear is automatically stopped if at least one of the
following conditions occurs:
- Turbine speed higher than 300rpm.

- Low low L.O. Pressure PSLL 3403.
- Turbine start command
- HS 3126 is turned to OFF position on the LCP (directly to ETG Panel)
Alarm functions are provided on the control system for:

- TURNING GEAR STOPPED DURING COOLDOWN PHASE - XA 3238
- TURNING GEAR DISENGAGED – XA 3237
- TURNING GEAR NOT STARTED – XA 3239
Once stopped, ETG disengages automatically due to the mechanical clutch operation when
steam turbine speed is higher than turning gear speed.

1900533 4 A
4. SEAL GAS SYSTEM CONTROL
The dry gas seal system, is composed by 3 different parts: the 1st one has the scope to
inject filtered seal gas to the seals, the 2nd one is to monitor the gas leakage and the
proper working of seals, the 3rd one has the scope to inject a separation gas (N2) for a
safe and certain separation between the seals area and the lube oil area.
4.1 Filtered gas supply (seal gas)
Seal gas is taken from compressor discharge. It is connected by piping to the panel where
it is filtered by a special compact design double filter. Filters condition is monitored by a
differential pressure transmitter (PDT 3465) with high differential pressure alarm set at
21.8 Psi and by a local differential pressure gauge (PDG 3464).
The control valve PDV 3461 controlled by a PDC (seals-suction diff. pressure and
balancing line diff. pressure) (PDC 3461), controls filtered buffer gas in order to have a
constant flow injection on both seals at each side of the compressor.
This assures that gas seals work with filtered gas only. The controlled differential
pressure and the balancing drum pressure are monitored by Differential Pressure
Transmitter (PDT 3461) with high differential pressure alarm set at 65.3 Psi
(PDAH 3461).
4.2 Seals leakage monitoring
The leakages passing through the primary seals are connected by piping to the seal gas
panel, where an orifice (FO 3772 and FO 3773) on each side is tuned to maintain a
differential pressure of 4.35 Psi with normal leakage and under normal operating
condition. This differential pressure across the orifices is needed in order to have a certain
flow passing through the secondary seals in order to properly cool the secondary seal
ring. Across each orifice there are pressure differential transmitters with relevant PDAL
and PDAH alarms. If primary seal leakage increases, an alarm shall be activated by PDT
3453 and PDT 3454). In case of first seal face damage, a shutdown signal is activated by
a high high pressure trip detected by (PT 3455A,B,C and PT 3460A,B,C) (2oo3system)
set at 72.52 Psig. A shutdown with compressor depressurization will occur (see
Depressurization Sequence - Chapter 11).
The monitoring of the secondary seal’s condition is carried out with the transmitters on
the primary vent lines. A low PDAL alarm shall be generated using the pressure
differential transmitter signals. This alarm indicates that secondary seal leakage has
increased.
The secondary vent lines are simply connected to an atmospheric vent on safe location,
directly from the compressor connections.

1900533 4 A
4.3 Nitrogen injection (separation gas)
Purpose of nitrogen injection is to keep the lube oil separated from process gas on tertiary
seal ring. The nitrogen flow is controlled by a pressure regulator (PCV 3448) and injected
on both sides of compressor.
Nitrogen to be injected as separation gas is taken from the plant network.
Separation gas for tertiary seal always needs filtration. For this purpose a double filter,
with two transfer valves (3 ways) inlet and outlet, is installed inside the panel. Filter
condition is monitored by a differential pressure transmitter (PDT 3447) .
The injection is carried out adjusting the pressure with a regulating valve PCV 3448 on
the N2 inlet header.
The correct injection on each side is guaranteed by (FO 3768 and FO 3769).
With low signal of the pressure transmitter (PT 3449) Lube Oil Pump is prohibited to
start-up (press. < 65 Psig).
Pressure transmitter PT 3451 is installed on the separation gas header. On detection of
<3> low low pressure on separation gas header (press. < 44 Psig) an alarm is activated and a
shutdown of compressor is activated.
4.4 Secondary seal gas (purge gas)
Purpose of the intermediate nitrogen injection is to avoid the process gas passing through
the secondary ring from the primary one, reaching the secondary vent and, consequently,
the atmosphere.
4.5 Seal Gas conditioning Skid
The seal gas conditioning system is designed to remove liquids in a gas stream and then
heat the gas stream above the dew point. The intent is to remove liquids that may be
present at discharge temperature and pressure, and raise the temperature high enough to
avoid any additional liquid from condensing in the dry gas seal control panel, the dry gas
seal, or anywhere in-between. A provision is also included to boost seal gas flow during
times when the compressor discharge pressure is not enough to supply sufficient flow to
the seals, such as during startup, shutdown, and recycle.
Hydrogen is taken from compressor discharge at discharge pressure and temperature and
enters the seal gas conditioning package at connection TP 160 (see SOS8628460 sh. 1).
Hydrogen enters the Cleanpac seal gas liquid separator (KV 302). Stage one of liquid
separation is accomplished by passing the gas through a vane type separator where bulk
liquid will be removed from the gas stream and fall to the bottom of the lower liquid
holding chamber. Stage two of separation is through a coalescing filter element that will
remove fine aerosol mists, and particulate down to 3 micron. Coalesced liquid will gather
in the upper liquid holding chamber.

1900533 4 A
Liquid levels are monitored using level transmitters (LT 3490A and LT 3490B).
Differential pressure across the Cleanpac is measured using PDT 3442. An alarm set at
10 Psi will signal maintenance is required. Gas exits the top of the vessel, free of liquids
and particulate larger than 3 microns.
If the compressor is generating less than 72.5 Psid of differential pressure (using PT 3096
and PT 3095), the Ampliflow seal gas intensifier (K 301) will be activated by the control
system opening the XY 3303 solenoid valve which will open an air actuated block valve
(XV 3303). Drive gas from connection TP 165 will then be regulated (PCV 3440), and
enter the Ampliflow seal gas intensifier drive piston.
The Ampliflow will then cycle. Seal gas from the outlet of the Cleanpac will enter the
driven or process side of the Ampliflow where the reciprocating action will boost seal gas
flow through the system. If the compressor is generating more than 72.5 Psi of differential
pressure, the Hydrogen will bypass the Ampliflow through a check valve.
After exiting, or bypassing, the Ampliflow the seal gas enters an electric seal gas heater
(207RM 334). Here, the seal gas temperature will be increased above the dew point of the
gas. The heater outlet temperature is controlled using a SCR type temperature controller
mounted in a separate heater control panel (installed in auxiliary electrical room). The
heater control panel receives seal gas temperature from TT 3765. This signal is used for
control of the heater. TT 3763 is mounted to the heater element and the signal TSHH
3763 is used by the heater control panel to shut down the heater in the event of a heater
element over temperature condition (901°F). TT 3764 is mounted to the heater vessel and
is used to shut down the heater in the event of a heater shell over temperature condition
<4> (TSHH 3764 set at 380°F). All 3 temperature transmitters (TT 3765,TT 3763,TT 3764)
are wired directly to the heater control panel and then 4-20mA signals are repeated to the
PLC. Alarms and permissive to start interlock for low seal gas temperature TSL 3765
will be provided inside the PLC and shown in LOCAL HMI, REMOTE HMI and DCS. A
remote setpoint from PLC to heater control panel is sent as a 4-20mA signal. The seal gas
temperature setpoint can be adjusted from LOCAL/REMOTE HMI, only in ENG mode.
Dry, pre-filtered, and heated Hydrogen seal gas then exits the dry gas seal conditioning
system and enters the dry gas seal control panel.

1900533 4 A
5. STEAM TURBINE OPERATING PROCEDURE
5.1 Turbine steam valve control

The Operator shall follow the following procedure to prepare the Steam Turbine Start-up:
A) Check that no Trip condition are active;
PALL 3403 LUBE OIL HEADER LOW LOW PRESSURE

PALL 3451 N2 TO TERTIARY SEALS INLET LOW LOW PRESSURE
XHS 3044 EMERGENCY STOP FROM VCCR (VIA PLANT SIS)
XHS 3318 EMERGENCY STOP (ON UCP)
XS 3048 EXTERNAL TRIP TO COMPRESSOR
XHS 3120 EMERGENCY STOP (ON LCP)
PAHH 3455 COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT HIGH HIGH PRESSURE
PAHH 3460 COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT HIGH HIGH PRESSURE
VAHH 3107A COMPRESSOR TRAIN COMMON HIGH HIGH RADIAL
VIBRATION TRIP
ZAHH 3004 COMPRESSOR TRAIN COMMON AXIAL DISPLACEMENT TRIP
SAHH 3052 STEAM TURBINE HIGH HIGH SPEED
PAHH 3422 STEAM INLET HIGH HIGH PRESSURE
PDAHH 3426 STEAM TURBINE WHEEL CHAMBER HIGH HIGH DIFFERENTIAL
PRESSURE
XS 3047A EXTERNAL EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN (PLANT ESD)
TSHH 3296 COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE HIGH HIGH TEMPERATURE
UALL 3102 TRIP FOR LOW STEAM QUALITY
PAHH 3215 COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE HIGH HIGH PRESSURE (COMMON
FOR PSHH 3215 AND PSHH 3216)
XZSO 3030 ISOLATION VALVE XV 3030 FULLY OPEN POSITION

XZSO 3031 ISOLATION VALVE XV 3031 FULLY OPEN POSITION
XS 3214 TRIP VALVE START UP FAILURE

SSLL 3049A STEAM TURBINE UNDER SPEED TRIP
SSLL 3049B MAX TIME EXCEEDED IN CRITICAL BAND
XS 3211 GOVERNOR FAILURE
Other signal from customer/process

1900533 4 A
B) Check that all Permissive to start conditions are active;
PAL 3403 LUBE OIL HEADER LOW PRESSURE

LAL 3401 RUN-DOWN TANK LOW LEVEL
TAL 3746 LUBE OIL HEADER LOW TEMPERATURE
PDAL 3461 COMPR. SEAL GAS/BAL. LINE LOW DIFF PRESS.
PAL 3401 CONTROL OIL HEADER LOW PRESSURE
PAL 3430 STEAM TURBINE EXHAUST LOW PRESSURE
UZSO 3293 UV-3293 ANTISURGE VALVE OPEN
XZSO 3030 COMPRESSOR SUCTION ISOLATION VALVE FULLY OPEN
XZSO 3031 COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE ISOLATION VALVE FULLY OPEN
NA 3201 PLC CONTROL AVAILABLE
UAL 3101 STEAM INLET INSUFFICIENT QUALITY (WET STEAM)
TAL 3765 SEAL GAS LOW TEMPERATURE
XS 3049 PERMISSIVE TO START FROM SIS <4>
If all above permissives are met, permissives OK signals lamp on LCP (XL
3313) goes ON and HMI shows “Permissive to Start”.
C) Press. “ESD Reset” pushbutton on LCP (HS 3085), LOC/REM HMI or SIS (XS
3046) to generate the following actions:
C1) Set Clear Command to speed governor (PLC)
C2) Inhibit “trip has occurred” from PALL 3471 (Control Oil Pressure);
D) Press “Trip valve open” command on LCP (XHSO 3315), LOC/REM HMI to
generate the following actions:
D1) Activate XY 3052 (Steam Turbine Preloading Solenoid valve);
D2) after 30 seconds activate XY 3306, XY 3307 (Steam Turbine Trip Sol.
Valves CLOSED);
E) On receiving Steam Inlet Trip Valve Open (XZSO 3052, XSZO 3305) the
following actions shall be taken:
E1) “Ready to Start” indication on Speed Control graphic page goes on;
E2) Operator selects to perform the Turbine start-up in an automatic (see
5.2.3), or semiautomatic (see 5.2.1) mode by means of relevant selector
on LCP (HS 3117);
E3) Press “Unit Start” (HS 3118) on LCP;
E4) Run Command to speed governor (PLC) is set;
See flow chart Fig.01 for more details.

1900533 4 A
PERMISSIVE TO START ACTIVE
AUTO OPERATION
RESET S/D
MANUAL OPERATION
TRIP VALVE OPEN

COMMAND DECISION
ENERGIZE PRELOAD DELAY

SOLENOID VALVE
DISPLAY
DELAY 30"
CONNECTOR
ENERGIZE TRIP SOLENOID VALVE
RESET EXTERNAL TRIP SIGNAL
ENABLE I/H CONVERTERS

DELAY 60" DELAY 30"
POWER SUPPLY
DE-ENERGIZE PRELOAD
DISABLE OVERRIDE TRIP
SOLENOID VALVE
READY TO
TRIP VALVE OPEN
START
START-UP SEQUENCE
SELECTOR
(AUTO/SEMIAUTO)
TURBINE START
HS 3117
(ON LCP) 1 2
AUTO SEMIAUTO

1900533 4 A
5.2 Test before start-up
The objective of this test is to verify the capability of TRIP oil system (with only one branch)
to reach a correct depressurization that permit the closure of TRIP Valves XV 3052 and XV
3305.
Automatic test Procedure:

1. Override automatically PSLL 3471
2. Valve XY 3052 in preload condition (ENERGIZED)
3. Delay 30 sec
4. The trip solenoid valves XY 3306 and 3307 are energized
5. CPC I/H converter not fed (SY 3049)
6. De energize solenoid XY 3306
7. Delay 5 sec
8. Verify following conditions for 60 s
 PT 3471 under 11.60 psig
 Relevant limit switch (XZSO 3306) to show OPEN position
 Delay 10 sec
9. Energize solenoid XY 3306
10. Verify following conditions for 60 sec
 PT 3471 above LL threshold
 Relevant limit switch (XZSO 3306 not active) to show NOT-OPEN position
11. De energize solenoid XY 3307

12. Delay 5 sec
 Relevant limit switch (XZSO 3307) to show OPEN position
 Delay 10 sec
14. Energize solenoid XY 3307
 PT 3471 above LL threshold
 Relevant limit switch (XZSO 3307 not active) to show NOT-OPEN position
16. Sequence continues if all previous steps are satisfied otherwise start-up abort
occurs and alarm XA 3214 is generated (see Note 1)
17. As per step 2 the solenoid valve XY 3052 is still energized
<4> 18. Sequence continues by deenergizing the preload solenoid XY 3052 which opens
the TRIP valves XV 3052 and XV 3305

1900533 4 A
General Note
The limit switches installed on solenoid valves XY 3306 and XY 3307 are used in
following criteria:
Energized solenoid:
 XZSO not active (NOT-OPEN)
Denergized solenoid
 XZSO active (OPEN)
Note 1: Problem must be resolved and then start procedure must commence again at Section 5.1

1900533 4 A
5.3 Start-up Procedure
The Steam Turbine start-up is performed from 0 rpm to minimum control speed (7100
rpm) from LCP. Then the control is performed from LCP or from LOC/REM HMI.
On LCP, the “semiautomatic-automatic” selector (HS 3117) allows the operator to choose
either automatic or semiautomatic startup procedures.
The two startup procedures are configured inside the speed controller (Triconex PLC) and
guarantee the correct operation of the steam turbine against operator’s possible mistakes.
Once turbine speed exceeds 300 rpm, XL 3314 on LCP (Compressor Running) will be lit.
All ramp rates and hold times are programmable for both hot and cold start-up conditions.
For commissioning only the control differentiates between hot and cold starts by using an
hours-since-trip timer.
This timer starts when a shutdown has occurred and turbine speed has decreased below the
idle speed setting (1500 rpm).
If the time elapsed from the latest shutdown is longer than the time before which the
turbine is hot and shorter than the time after which the turbine is considered cold, an
interpolation between the two reference values is carried out.
The “speed control LOC/REM” selector (SHS 3116) enables the “speed raise” and “speed
lower” pushbuttons softswitches or the Performance Controller set-point to be cascaded to
the Speed Controller respectively.
Electric Turning Gear must be enabled from selector switch on LCP (HS 3126 switched in
AUTO) in order to be ready for cooldown phase in case of a trip on normal shutdown.

1900533 4 A
5.3.1 Semiautomatic Start-up procedure
When the semi-automatic mode is selected, the start-up sequence is completed in
semiautomatic mode and consists of the following steps:
1. The turbine speed set point is increased in an automatic way to reach the 1st warm
up speed value (1500 rpm). (The ramp slope according to which the set point
changes is set by means of parameter Rate to 1st warm up hot/cold). At the same
time the operator must manually increase the VALVE LIMITER SETPOINT
value from the local HMI (using “valve limiter setpoint raise” HS 3655 and
“valve limiter setpoint lower” HS 3656 soft pushbuttons). Operator must increase
valve limiter set-point in less then 30 seconds after pressing START button, or
machine will trip on zero-speed as it excepts to see some speed after 30 seconds.
This time cannot be changed. By increasing the valve limiter the speed of the
turbine increases up to the 1st warm speed of 1500 rpm. The operator may now
set the valve limiter setpoint to 100%.
2. Once the 1st warm up value is reached, the speed increase stops. After the
warmup time the sequence may be resumed only upon a manual action of the
operator through “Continue” command on LCP (HS 3114), LOC/REM HMI (HS
3222) or DCS (HS 3224) (provided the necessary warm up time had elapsed).
3. The speed set point (the slope of its ramp) increases according to the slope set on
Rate to target hot/cold in the turbine controller parameters.
During this phase the operator will be able to stop the turbine acceleration by the
pressing the “Auostart sequence Halt” pushbutton HS 3113 on LCP or from the
equivalent soft pushbutton on the LOC/REM.HMI (HS 3225), or DCS (HS 3227). If
<3> the turbine speed is in critical band and a halt signal is detected, it will be stored by
the system until the speed is no longer in the critical band, then becomes operative.
To restore the automatic sequence of the turbine speed governor, it is necessary to
actuate the “Continue” command on LCP (HS 3114), LOC/REM.HMI (HS 3222) or
DCS (HS 3224).
During start-up one critical speed band range (6650÷7050 rpm) is provided and the
ramp slope is increased automatically.

3 REVISED WHERE <3> ORIGINAL JOB SIZE LANGUAGE
1900533 4 A
2
VALVE LIMITER
SETPOINT
INCREASE AUTO OPERATION
SPEED SET-POINT MANUAL OPERATION

RAMP TO 1st WARM-UP
DECISION
NO IDLE SPEED
REACHED?
YES IDLE DELAY

SPEED
REACHED
(1500 rpm)
START WARM-UP DISPLAY

TIMER
CONNECTO
R
CONTINUE COMMAND
HS-3114
NO SPEED
SPEED SET-POINT CRITICAL
RAMP TO MIN. OPER. RANGE?
SPEED
YES
SPEED START-UP AUTOMATIC SPEED

HALT COMMAND? YES SEQUENCE HALTED SET-POINT INCREASE
HS 3113
NO CONTINUE COMMAND
HS 3114
NO MIN. OPER.
SPEED
REACHED?
YES MIN.
CONTROL
SPEED
REACHED
(7100 rpm)
ANTISURGE &
PERFORMANCE CONTROL
ENABLE
Fig.02 – Semiautomatic Start-up Procedure

1900533 4 A
5.3.2 Automatic Start-up
When the automatic mode is selected, the start-up sequence is completed in

automatic mode, which consists of the following steps:
1. The turbine speed set point is increased in an automatic way to reach the 1st warm
up speed value. (The ramp slope according to which the set point changes is set by
means of parameter Rate to 1st warm up hot/cold).
If during this phase, the turbine speed should increase over the pre-established
set-point ramp slope, the automatic sequence must be immediately aborted with
operator intervention and the turbine consequently stopped.
2. Once the 1st warm up value is reached, the speed increase stops; when the 1st
warm up time is elapsed (900 sec. on cold-start) the speed set point starts to increase
automatically to reach the target set-point (minimum operating speed) (7100 rpm).
The warm-up time will be automatically calculated, considering the length of time
the unit was shut-down according to the Start-up diagram.
3. During this phase the operator will be able to stop the turbine acceleration by the
“Halt” command on LCP(HS 3113), LOC/REM HMI (HS 3225), DCS (HS 3227).
In case the turbine is in critical speed range, stop command is held by the system and
becomes effective automatically only when the turbine comes out of critical speed
range.
To restore the automatic sequence of the turbine speed governor, it is required to
actuate the “Continue” command on LCP (HS 3114), LOC/REM HMI (HS 3222),
DCS (HS 3224).
While the turbine is going through critical speed band range, the ramp slope is
increased automatically for this time.

1900533 4 A
1 AUTO OPERATION
SPEED SET-POINT MANUAL OPERATION

RAMP TO 1st WARM-UP
DECISION
NO IDLE SPEED
REACHED?
YES IDLE DELAY

SPEED
REACHED
(1500 rpm)
DISPLAY
START WARM-UP
TIMER
CONNECTOR
SPEED SET-POINT
RAMP TO MIN. OPER.
SPEED
NO SPEED
CRITICAL
RANGE?
YES
HALT COMMAND? YES
HS 3113
SPEED START-UP AUTOMATIC SPEED

NO SEQUENCE HALTED SET-POINT INCREASE
CONTINUE COMMAND
HS 3114
NO MIN.
MIN. OPER.
OPER.
SPEED
SPEED
REACHED?
YES MIN.
CONTROL.
SPEED
Fig.03
REACHED
(7100 rpm)
ANTISURGE & PERFORMANCE

CONTROL ENABLE
Fig.03 – Automatic Start-up Procedure

1900533 4 A
5.3.3 Sequence after Start-up
As soon as the turbine reaches the minimum operating speed, the Antisurge and
Performance controller could be enabled either manually and automatically by relevant
selector on LCP.
The operator can increase or decrease the speed by manual operation through the speed
set point Raise / Lower command on LCP (SHS 3111, SHS 3112), LOC/REM HMI (HS
3218, HS 3219) and DCS (SHS 3113, SHS 3114).
Train speed can be automatically increased by the coupled action of performance and
antisurge controllers until the operating point is reached. To enable this feature the
selector SPEED CONTROL LOCAL/REMOTES HS 3116 must be switched to “remote”
position and the antisurge controller activated from the LCP. Once the MIN.GOV
SPEED / LOAD HS 3115 selector is switched to the “load” position, the compressor
working point will be brought up to reach the desired discharge pressure by the combined
action of the antisurge valve closing and turbine speed increase.
5.4 Controlled Stop
The operator may decide to stop the turbo compressor through the Stop command on
LCP (HS 3084), LOC/REM HMI (HS 3228), DCS (HS 3230).
The steam turbine is gradually brought back to the min. operating speed (7100 rpm);
Antisurge controller opens the Antisurge valve until it is fully open. Then the turbine
speed will decrease gradually to the idle value according to the slope rate on start-up
diagram. Then the turbine will be stopped closing both the steam turbine trip valves (XY
3312, XY 3313, XY 3306, XY 3307).
The Controlled Stop sequence can be interrupted by the operator, actuating the
“Raise/lower” speed set point command on LCP (SHS 3111, SHS 3112),
LOC/REM.HMI (HS 3220, HS 3221); in this case, the governor will begin
controlling the turbine speed, interrupting the deceleration ramp (only if outside of the
critical speed band).
Operating the “Continue” command on LCP (HS 3114), LOC/REM.HMI (HS 3222),
DCS (HS 3224), the normal stop sequence will be re-enabled.
The controller STOP procedure can be paused with the “AUTOSTART SEQUENCE
HALT” pushbutton on LCP (SHS 3113) when speed is below minimum control speed
(7100 rpm).
In case of operator wants to cancel the stopping sequence after interrupting it with RAISE
pushbutton (SHS 3111), the speed set-point must be raised manually above the minimum
control speed (7100 rpm) by action of RAISE button.

1900533 4 A
5.5 Over-speed Test
When the “Over-speed Test” pushbutton on LOC/REM/HMI is actuated, it is possible to

verify the over-speed functions trip; an alarm message is displayed on videopages during
this test. The overspeed test function allows the operator to raise the turbine speed above
the overspeed value, actuating the speed set point “Raise” command and “Raise” HP
limiter command, in order to check the protections. After shut-down the overspeed test
will be automatically disabled.

1900533 4 A
6. EMERGENCY SHUT DOWN
6.1 Machine Shut down
The steam turbine trip logic will be managed by the PLC system, which will control the
trip signals coming from the plant, as well as all trip signals coming from the N.P steam
turbine skid, except for the overspeed trip that will be managed directly by the B.N.3500
Overspeed System. The emergency shut-down pushbutton will be present on LCP (XHS
3120), UCP (XHS 3318), DCS (HS 3208). Automatic EXTERNAL EMERGENCY
SHUTDOWN can be initiated by plant SIS interlocks (XS 3047 A/B/C - triplicated NC
contacts).
In case of trip, (except for overspeed trip SSHH 3052 and H.H. Radial Vibration Trip
VSHH 3107B/C) the PLC logic deenergises the Trip solenoid valves XY 3306, XY 3307
causing immediate stop of the turbo-compressor due to closure of the trip steam inlet
valves, (XV 3052, XV 3305) and the immediate opening of the Antisurge valve UV 3293
by means of the solenoid valve UY 3293. At the same time the Emergency Antisurge
valve UV 3294 (quick opening type, installed in parallel to Antisurge valve) will be
opened by means of its solenoid valve UY 3294. Quick opening of the Emergency
antisurge valve will avoid surging phenomenon during machine coast down.
At the same time, PLC disables the antisurge, performance and speed controller
functions. This action will force the governor valve SV 3049 to move into closed
position.
In case of trip for overspeed or high high radial vibration, the relative system (Bently
Nevada 3500) sends a redundant signal to a safety relay installed in the compressor
control panel, in order to de-energize trip, antisurge and emergency antisurge solenoid
valves directly. An additional trip signal is still repeated in hardwired mode to PLC
(SAHH 3052 and VAHH 3107A).

1900533 4 A
6.2 Isolation and blowdown valves sequence during shutdown
Upon detection of zerospeed condition SLL 3101 the PLC will wait 1 minute before
initiating the automatic closure of compressor suction isolation valve XV 3030 and
compressor discharge isolation valve XV 3031. During this delay time the Operator can
manually close the isolation valves by pressing the relevant pushbuttons XHSC 3030 and
XHSC 3031 (on LCP).
In case of shutdown for primary seals rupture (high high primary vent pressure PSHH
3455 or PSHH 3460) it’s necessary to immediately depressurize the machinery. This
procedure will be performed automatically by the PLC system with the following steps:
1) TRIP the steam turbine by closing XV 3052 and XV 3005.

2) OPEN antisurge valve UV 3293
3) OPEN emergency antisurge valve UV 3294
4) CLOSE SV 3049 by action of steam turbine governor
5) WAIT TIME (up to complete stop)
6) Detection of zerospeed SLL 3101
7) START Electric Turning Gear GM 332
8) CLOSE XV 3030
9) CLOSE XV 3031
10) Dection of isolation valve XV 3030 position fully closed (XZLC 3030)
11) Detection of isolation valve XV 3031 position fully closed (XZLC 3031)
12) OPEN blowdown valve XV 3027
The blowdown valve will be closed automatically upon pressure of BLOWDOWN circuit
reset softswitches (LOC/REM HMI) if the trip condition is resolved.
When the compressor is stopped and isolation valves are closed the blowdown valve XV
3027 can be manually opened for testing or maintenance thanks to a dedicated pushbutton
on the local HMI.

1900533 4 A
6.3 Trip solenoid valves Automatic Test
The system consists of 4 solenoid valves divided in 2 branches. One branch is capable to
initiate the trip of the machine. Each solenoid has 1 limit switch (Fully open position)
The solenoids valves XY 3312 and XY 3313 (upstream respect to PT 3476 and PT 3477) are
normally open (normally de-energized), and act as test valves
The solenoids valves XY 3306 and XY 3307 (installed downstream respect to PT 3476 and
PT 3477) are normally closed (normally energized) and act as trip valves.
6.3.1 Automatic On-Line Test (Made each 15 days)
GE NP STRONGLY RECOMMEND TO EXECUTE THIS TEST EVERY 15 DAYS
The online test is activated automatically from the local HMI and consists of the following
steps, applicable for each branch:
Initial condition
The test solenoid valves XY 3312 and XY 3313 (upstream respect to PT 3476 and PT 3477)
are normally open (normally de-energized).
The trip solenoid valves XY 3306 and XY 3307 (downstream respect to PT 3476 and PT
3477) are normally closed (normally energized).
Test Sequence
Energize test solenoid valve
Verify by limit switch the complete closure of test solenoid valve (XZSO not active)
De-energize the trip solenoid valve
Verify by limit switch the opening of trip solenoid valve after 5 sec (XZSO active)
Verify by pressure transmitter the depressurization of line (under 7.25 psig) within 3 sec.
Energize to close the trip solenoid valve
Verify by limit switch the complete closure of trip solenoid valve after 5 sec. (XZSO not
active)
De-Energize test solenoid
Verify by limit switch the opening of test solenoid after 5 sec (XZSO active)
Verify by pressure transmitter the pressurization of line (oil pressare between the two valves
higher than 90% oil trip pressure) within 3 sec.
If the result of test is not Ok the logic will lead the actions showed in following C&E
matrix. In case of trip during the test the logic will de-enerigize all 4 solenoids. During
normal operation in case of loss of limit switch the logic will lead the actions showed in
C&E matrix.

1900533 4 A
6.3.2 C&E matrix
Test after failure limit switch

Test after failure limit switch
PERMISSIVE to machine
installed in 2nd branch
installed in 1st branch

Special Procedure
Test 2nd brach

Normal Stop
Alarm
start
On Line test conditions
Failure Test during start-up X
Failure Test during running machine (1st branch Not Ok ) X X
Succesful test during running machine (Ok) X
Failure Test during running machine (2nd branch Not Ok with Ok 1st branch) X X
Failure Test during running machine (2nd branch Not Ok with Not Ok 1st branch) X X
Failure Test during running machine (2nd branch Ok with Not Ok 1st branch) X X
On line test definition

Contions for OK De-energized Solenoid valves
Relevant PT 3476 / PT3477 under 0.5 barg
6.3.3 Special procedure
The failure of both tests on the two branches means that the machine cannot be normally
stopped by means of the automatic system. It is required that the operator shuts down the
machine by mean of the manual TRIP valve HV 3102 and proceed with the needed
maintenance to the TRIP solenoid valves and associated instrumentation or materials.

1900533 4 A
7. OVERSPEED PROTECTION SYSTEM
Triple redundant “Overspeed protection system” will be realized in the B.N.3500 System.
In case a turbine overspeed should occur, the overspeed protection system must
immediately generate the compressor train shut-down.
The turbine solenoid trip valves XY 3306, XY 3307, directly connected to this system to
avoid delay in the loop response by means of the safety relay, shall be de-energized and
the Antisurge controller output shall be forced to the minimum signal.
8. BENTLY NEVADA MACHINE MONITORING SYSTEM
The compressor steam turbine radial vibration, axial displacement and temperature probes
are connected by means of the Proximitors to the Bently Nevada monitor series 3500,
placed inside UCP cabinet.
To perform the Trip function on PLC, the B.N. monitor transmits triplicated common trip
digital signals.
The machine axial displacement trip is performed in 2oo2 voting logic in each B.N. axial
displacement card.
The machine radial vibration trip is performed in 1oo2 voting logic in each B.N. radial
vibration card.
The Keyphasor probe (VT 3101), provide a precise timing measurement.
<3> In case of any fault of B.N. system, the monitor sends “B.N. monitor failure” hardwired
signal to the logic to perform Alarm function.
Note:
<3> 1) In order to avoid false trip, B.N. monitor will automatically by-pass the fault channel. A
LED indication on bypassed B.N. card informs the operator about the fault channel.

1900533 4 A
9. PROCESS GAS CIRCUIT VALVE SEQUENCE
9.1 General Features
For each compressor speed, it’s possible to determine, on the plane SUCTION FLOW –
COMPRESSION RATIO, a curve that describes all compressor operating points. Each
obtained curve meets its limits on the surge point, corresponding to the maximum
polytropic head. All surge points, defined for different speeds, represent the limit line, on
the left of this line (called SURGE LIMIT LINE “SLL”), the compressor operates in an
unstable area.
The purpose of the “ANTISURGE CONTROL SYSTEM” is to avoid that the operating
point “A” reaches the “SLL”. To achieve this objective, it’s defined, on the right of the
“SLL”, a protection line where (point “B”) the control system will operate opening the
Antisurge valve. This line is called “SURGE CONTROL LINE” (“SCL”). The opening
of the Antisurge valve increases the suction flow moving the operating point along the
speed characteristic curve, from the critical condition to the stable operating area (Fig.
04).
(Fig.04)
The Antisurge regulator avoids that the compressor working point moves to surge zone.
For this reason, inside the Antisurge regulator, the surge curve SLL is set. The
compressor shows instability phenomena on the left side of SLL.
<3> This SLL curve, moved rightward by the multiplication factor Kb (flow margin, normally
10%), represents the SCL protection curve. On this base, the Antisurge regulator set-point
is defined.
When the compressor working point moves at the left side of the SCL the regulator will
intervene by opening the Antisurge valve, increasing the flow at compressor suction.
At this point, the compressor work point will return in the safe zone (right side of SCL
curve).

1900533 4 A
During the start-up phase, the Antisurge solenoid valves are energized as a consequence
of pushing “trip valve open” button on LCP (XHSO 3315). Energizing the solenoid
valve, the 4-20mA signal to Valve Positioner is enabled and the ASV is kept fully open.
Antisurge and Performance Controllers are disabled, during this phase. They can be
enabled either manually or automatically when the minimum control speed is reached. If
enabled, the Antisurge Controller closes gradually the Antisurge Valve following a pre-
set ramp while the Performance Control increases the speed until the working point has
been reached.
In the event of a machine trip or deviation to left of the surge limit line for more than 10
seconds, both solenoid valves on the antisurge, UV 3293 and parallel A/S valve (quick
opening) UV 3294, are de-energized.
9.2 Performance controller
The performance controller function is to keep constant the compressor Discharge Pressure.
The TRICONEX PLC will receive as inputs the following signals:
- PT 3096: compressor discharge pressure
The process controller will measure the discharge pressure PT 3096 and will send a speed
demand to the speed governor in order to meet a pressure setpoint.
The process controller will implement a proportional-integral-derivative PID controller

which will increase or decrease the turbine speed in case the measured discharge pressure is
lower or higher than a remote discharge pressure set point signal between the DCS and the
process controller (sent by serial communication).
During the startup sequence the performance controller will be activated to ramp the
compressor up to the desired discharge pressure. Once the minimum operating speed has
been reached the PIC demand signal will be diverted to the antisurge valve in order to close it
and have the operating point reach the process control line (PCL) in the pressure ratio/flow
diagram. Once the PCL has been reached, the demand will be switched to the turbine control
valve to increase the speed. The working point will follow the plant resistance and move
rightwards up to when the controller limit line (CLL) is reached.
When the LCP switch (SHS 3116) is in the REMOTE position, the PC 3096 output is
cascaded to the speed controller (SIC 3049) set point. This LCP switch is the cascade
enable/disable coupling between the pressure controller and speed controller.
When the LCP switch (SHS 3116) is in the LOCAL position, the turbine speed can be
<3> manually increased/decreased from the LCP, LOC/REM HMI or DCS (see 5.3.3).

1900533 4 A
From this point the switchover between antisurge valve closure and speed raise is repeated
until the pressure set point is reached and the working point moves to the operating point
(Fig. 05).
(Fig.05)
<3> SLL=Surge Limit Line
SCL=Surge Control Line
PCL=Performance Control Line
CLL=Control Limit Line
9.3 Pressure Override Controller (POC)
In order to prevent downstream over-pressure a PRESSURE OVERRIDE CONTROLLER

<3> (POC) functionality is provided integrated with the process controller.
In case PT 3096 overcomes a pre-defined threshold (2169 psig), the POC will open the
antisurge valve that the compressor downstream pressure is reduced.
The POC and antisurge control actions are not conflicting since the controllers outputs are
sent to a common minimum selector before the command is given to the antisurge valve.
In the event of an insufficient control action of the POC an over-pressure trip function (1oo2)
is provided by means of the two transmitters PT 3215 and PT 3216.
<3> MAWP E-306: 2293 psia / 2278 psig

High High Pressure Trip (PAHH): 2293 psia / 2278 psig
POC/ Alarm (Pressure override control): 2184 psia / 2169 psig
Max operating pressure (acc. NP): 2080 psia / 2066 psig
<3> Remarks: The pressure transmitters for PAHH are located near to the compressor, PAHH trip
set point is the MAWP. The pressure drop between the compressor and exchanger allow the
compressor to trip before the overpressure reaches the MAWP of E 306. The maximum
operating pressure are based on the NP compressor datasheet latest issue.

1900533 4 A
10. COMPRESSOR SUCTION & DISCHARGE ISOLATION VALVES
The compressor suction/discharge valve XV 3030 & XV 3031 have the following instruments
and commands:
- XZSC 3030 suction valve close limit switch

- XZSO 3030 A/B/C suction valve open limit switch
- XZSC 3031 discharge valve close limit switch
- XZSO 3031 A/B/C discharge valve open limit switch
- XHSC 3030 suction valve close manual command
- XHSO 3030 suction valve open manual command
- XHSC 3031 discharge valve close manual command
- XHSO 3031 discharge valve open manual command
- XZLC 3030 suction valve close signalling
- XZLO 3030 suction valve open signalling
- XZLC 3031 discharge valve close signalling
- XZLO 3031 discharge valve open signalling
The above open limit switches are permissive to start commands.
These valves, after a trip command or a controlled stop, close automatically upon reaching
zerospeed signal.
Operator can also close the valves with the closing manual command. The close manual
commands, however, are disabled during normal operation.

1900533 4 A
11. GE O&G CONTROLLERS DESCRIPTION
The following sections explain general features at the GE O&G antisurge, process and
steam turbine governor controllers. The description is generic and not specifically related
to this implementation. It is included here for client and operator knowledge.
11.1 PROCESS CONTROL
11.1.1 INTRODUCTION
Compressor control system is a framework containing different features. Some types of
control can be used separately such as Process Control and Load Sharing but others need to
be implemented to couple the above-mentioned devices to other flow internal control FIC
elements, such as Antisurge and Pressure Override control POC.
Fig. 1-1 shows the compressor control flow chart, where is depicted the framework in
which are inserted the dedicated digital controller, listed below.
 PROCESS CONTROLLER
 LOAD SHARING
 COUPLING CONTROL
 ANTISURGE
 POC
A compressor train consisting of two or more unit working in parallel needs a load sharing
Controller to distribute equally among the compressors, not necessary be identical
machines.

1900533 4 A
11.1.2 CONTROL OVERVIEW
Axial and centrifugal compressors require a control loops to manipulate the speed,inlet
valve, or guide vanes to match compressor performance to process demand. Moreover, the
Process Controller system is designed to drive the compressor out of the surge area in the
start up phase. If surge phenomenon is encountered, the Antisurge controller will override
the Process Controller.
Fig. 2-1 shows a control schematic where the Process Controller is highlighted and the
recycling valve open/close command coming from Process Controller is processed by the
interconnected FIC control.

1900533 4 A
11.1.2.1 Process Controller
Compressor suction and discharge pressure are the main process variables to be controlled.
This purpose is brought by the Process Controller, which input is the either the suction than
the discharge pressure transmitter signals coming from the field.
Process Controller PIC generates demand signal acting on either the compressor anti-surge
valve position than the engine speed in order to modify the compressor load to match the
set point and the measured values. Process Control features are all based on PID,
Proportional-Integrative-Derivative controller, that is a type of feedback controller whose
output, a control variable (CV),
is generally based on the error (e) between some user-defined set point (SP) and some
measured process variable (PV). The PID controller computations are addressed in cutting
the error down and anticipating the system response. The PID implemented grant bumpless
control mode transfer, avoiding unwanted disturbance in the control loop.
The characteristic of PID controller:

o Proportional control; reduces the rise time and reduces, but never eliminate, the steady-
state error.
o Integral control; eliminates the steady-state error, worsening the transient response.
o Derivative control; increases the stability of the system, reducing the overshoot, and
improving the transient response.
The PID controller is provided of tracking Anti-Windup, in order to avoid any limit
cycling or even instability, that integrator windup may cause. The Process Controller is
automatically enabled after a settable delay since the compressor has reached the minimum
operating speed.
Process Control maintains the pressure conditions also when any change of flow is
required by the plant or caused by a disturbance. In Fig. 2-3 the flow change occurs
keeping the speed constant and than the Process Control takes over, reducing the speed in
order to keep the pressure constant.
1900533 4 A
If the flow reduction request continues, the Process Control lowers compressor speed until
the Process Control Line (PCL) is met. From this point the flow control switches from
process to antisurge control. The latter controller increases flow, increasing the compressor
speed, in order to avoid any surge occurrence. Both control are independent one from the
other and the coupling control, see chapter 2.3, avoids any disturbance that may be caused
by the concurrent action of both antisurge and process control. Refer to section 2.3.1:
SELECTION LOGIC of page 9 for the switching logic from antisurge to process control
and the other way round. In case that the compressor train consists of two or more
compressors working in parallel, as shown in Fig. 2-4, the Process Control is unique for all
the process, while an Anti-surge and Load Sharing device control each single compressor.

1900533 4 A
11.1.2.2 Pressure Override Control
Compressor working in series shares the same gas line so that the discharge for a
compressor is the inlet for the next one. It is extremely important to control the pressure in
between two attached stages. In order not to exceed the compressor maximum suction
pressure a Pressure Override Controller POC compare the signalled pressure to a set-point;
whenever happens a pressure surplus the POC acts, through process control and anti-surge,
opening the recycle valve so to decrease the discharge pressure and restore the operating
conditions. This type of control is shown in fig. 2-5.
The POC can be used any time a safety protection on a discharge line is needed with the
compressor provided of an anti-surge valve.
11.1.2.3 Coupling Control

Coupling Control is necessary whenever the examined control is to be integrated to other
controls, like antisurge controller or POC. The control provides automatic sequencing of
compressor start-up and shutdown and a repositioning valve control. The control defines
the Process Control PCL and Control Limit CLL lines and in between the Coupling control
feeds forward antisurge valve opening in order to freeze speed decrease demand. This way
the two main compressor controller, speed and antisurge work unambiguously avoiding the
risk of speed control saturation.
Selection Logic
The Selection Logic block switches the control from antisurge action to flow demand
controller, that can act on the throttling valve or the speed controller or the IGV and vice
versa and compressor operating point contingent conditions determine the control choice.

1900533 4 A
Two curves are added to SLL and SCL, in the operating plane, as shown in Fig. 2-6 and
according to the position of compressor operating point in the Pressure Ratio- Flow plane
is activate the selection logic.
 PCL = Process Control Line, evaluated as a 3% distance in flow to the right of SCL.
 CLL = Compressor Control Line, 5% in flow distance to the right of SCL.
The movement of compressor operating point in the Pressure Ratio- Flow plane, as
detected by the antisurge controller, is notified to the Process Controller by the logic signal
OPCAL, operating point crossing antisurge valves. The signal is processed according to
the following rules also illustrated in Fig. 2-7:
 If compressor operating point crosses the PCL line leftward, the OPCAL signal is
set to TRUE (red).
 If compressor operating point crosses the CCL line from left to right, the OPCAL
signal is reset to FALSE (blue).

1900533 4 A
The Process Controller demand is switched on antisurge valve if, at least, one of the
following conditions is verified:
 Close antisurge valve if the Process Controller increases demand (UP) and
operating point on the CLL right side.
 Open antisurge valve if the Process Controller decreases demand (DOWN) and
operating point on the PCL left side or flow demand controller on minimum
operating position.
The demand is switched to the flow demand controller if at least one of the following
conditions is verified:
 Open flow demand controller if the Process Controller increases demand (UP)
and operating point on the PCL left side or antisurge valve closed.
 Close flow demand controller if the Process Controller decreases demand

(DOWN) and operating point on the CCL right side.
Table 2-1 summarises the selection logic. A final remark on signal to be done is that the
flow demand controller position remains frozen, when the antisurge valve acts to open the
antisurge valve while, acting to open the flow demand controller the antisurge valve is kept
frozen.

1900533 4 A
Start/Stop sequence
The Start/Stop sequence regards the operations applied after reaching the compressors
minimum operative speed MOS. At speed lower than MOS, during the start-up and normal
stop phases, the antisurge controller is disabled so that the recycling valve is completely
opened.
There is no difference between Start and Stop sequence, apart their initial conditions.
Before the Start sequence acts, the compression train is stopped; therefore the antisurge
control valves are forced to be open by de-energising the antisurge solenoid valves. During
the gas compression process start up phase, the antisurge solenoid valves are energised.
This action enables the antisurge controller signal output, but the antisurge controller is
still disabled, forcing the recycling to open until the minimum operating speed is reached.
The Start sequence truly begins
when the antisurge regulator is enabled after MOS is achieved and its output reaches
100%, recycling valve closed position, with a pre-set time. At the same time, the Process
Control regulator output is activated and slowly increase its value with a pre-set ramp. The
antisurge and PIC outputs constitute the control variables for the start sequence.
The Stop sequence begins with the operating point already placed in the design point, with
antisurge control activated and in fact covers backward the path done by the Start sequence
until the MOS is encountered.
The start sequence is illustrated in Fig. 2-8 and begins at point 1, where MOS is reached.
From this point on, the gradual antisurge valve closing action causes the compression ratio
to increase and therefore a decrease in the demand signal.
The operating point moves leftward until reaches the Process Control Line PCL, point 2 of
the figure. From now on, the Process Control regulator freezes the output towards the
valves and starts to increase compressor speed.
The operating point starts moving rightwards following the plant resistant curve,
represented by the antisurge valve characteristic until the CLL is reached, point 3 of Fig. 2-
8. Again, the output signal is diverted towards the antisurge valves and the operating point
moves toward the PCL.

1900533 4 A
The sequence continues as just described until the Process Control set-point is reached;
therefore the compressor gets on line, by reaching the design operating point required by
the plant. From this point on the master controllers take compressors performances under
control. Fig. 2-9 reports the flow chart for Start sequence.
Fig. 2-10 illustrates the Stop sequence flow chart, that basically covers the Start Up
procedure backward. Starting from the operating point placed in the design configuration,
with the antisurge valve completely close, the Stop sequence goes along again towards the
PCL, with the Process Controller reducing speed, point 8of figure 2-8.
Fig. 2-8. The antisurge controller open the valve increasing the flow at speed constant until
the CCL is encountered, point 7. This procedure continues until MOS is reached and only
than the Normal Stop sequence shuts down the compressor.
Valve Repositioning
The repositioning logic is used to set the compressor working at the appropriate operating
point if any disturbance occurs. New steady states can be possible after the any disturbing
event, possibly leaving the compressor under avoidable and even dangerous conditions.
Repositioning valve logic operates with slow actions, in order to avoid instability in the
process and once activated and terminates after the proper conditions are recovered.

1900533 4 A
The unwanted disturbance can dangerously leave the operating point in the surge area,
between SLL and SCL with the recycling valve closed, point A in Fig. 11. In this case the
repositioning logic will slowly open the antisurge valve to obtain the proper safety
conditions. Another undesirable condition leaves the operating point in the safety area,
after the SCL, but with the recycling valve open, see point B. This occurrence lowers
compressor efficiency and is recovered slowly closing the antisurge valve.
If this condition persists longer than a fixed time, typically 60 seconds, and the start
sequence is terminated, the repositioning logic is enabled.
Repositioning valve logic terminates after the antisurge valve has reached the correct
opening position, with the working point placed in the surge zone, otherwise if the recycle
valve closes completely if the operating point is in the safe area.
The actions taken by the repositioning valve logic, while activated, are the following:
 Close Antisurge valve if compressor operative point is far from surge line, to the
CLL right, and Engine speed set-point is not at the minimum. If the speed setpoint
is at its minimum value, the repositioning logic is not active. As a consequence, the
compressor discharge pressure increases and the Process Controller reacts
decreasing the action on speed.
 Open Antisurge valve if compressor operative point is close to surge line, to the
PCL left. This time, the compressor discharge pressure decreases and the Process
Controller reacts increasing the speed set point.

1900533 4 A
11.2 Antisurge Control
11.2.1 INTRODUCTION
Compressor surge is a low-flow phenomenon known to exist in dynamics, i.e. centrifugal

and axial compressors found in petrochemical plants, liquefied natural gas (LNG) facilities
and pipeline compressor stations. A simplified definition would describe surge as a series
of rapidly occurring reversals of the pressurized gas flow. Transient surge vibration will
develop when the steady state fluid velocity is suddenly altered, increasing and forward
flow through the compressor can no longer be maintained. Fig. 1-1 shows how control
surge is done in a 4:1 pressure ratio centrifugal compressor, operating at 80 percent of
design speed.
A simple description of the surge phenomenon can be given, having a look at the flow -
differential pressure plane, as shown in Fig. 1-2 Centrifugal-compressor performance
curve, where is illustrated a compressor curve for a constant speed.
Suppose there is a steady state at point A and there comes a sudden decrease in gas
demand, experienced by the compressor as a differential pressure increase.
Since speed changes of heavy rotating mass as compressors, require a great lag time such
as several minutes. Therefore, on a shorter term, speed may be considered constant.

1900533 4 A
At a constant speed the compressor cannot keep up as much flow against a higher pressure,
so flow goes down toward the SCL to point B, as reflected in the curve and called surge
point. The locus of the surge points for all compressor speeds, above and below the
characteristic curve, is then called surge limit line. The flow here has fallen to the least the
impeller can handle without losing grip on the gas. From the surge line on, any further
decrease in downstream demand no longer result in increased differential pressure. Instead,
the impeller suddenly loses its effectiveness as a motive element and immediately the gas
begins spinning around with the impeller. As the pipeline gas coasts to a stop, the
operating point falls to zero flow at point C.
Gas begins leaking backwards as a flow reversal and is shown in the picture Fig. 1-2 as a
continuation of the jump past point C to point D, lying on a theoretical extension of the
normal characteristic (point B) into negative flow. Then, within a short time the differential
pressure goes down to the minimum the impeller, decoupled by the gas, can maintain with
centrifugal force only, point E. There, the impeller suddenly gains grip on the gas and push
it forward to point F on the normal characteristic curve. If line flow is still restricted below
the surge point for
the given speed, the described cycle B-C-D-E-F repeats at regular intervals, typical on the
order of one second.
The consequences of surge are severe. Surge is a powerful process disturbance that can
disrupt or trip the process. It can also damage the compressor. Damage to seals and
bearings are common. Seal clearances will be increased as a result of surge, lowering
compressor output and efficiency. Even one cycle can have unwanted consequences in
terms of compromise operations, altering internal clearances and overstressing seals. The
costs alone of replacing the compressor seals are in order of €20K to €50K, thus applying a
suitable and effective control strategy must prevent surge. Catastrophic surge incidents can
result in complete destruction of the rotor.
In order to prevent such economic losses an effective antisurge control system is required,
for every turbo-compressor. Fig. 1-3 shows a piping and instruments schematic, where is
depicted the dedicated digital controller which is the heart of an advanced antisurge control
system.
In typical antisurge systems, a quick-acting valve recycles a portion of the compressor

discharge flow, back to the compressor suction. Sufficient gas volume, to ensure forward
flow of the gas, is thus always provided to the compressor.

1900533 4 A
11.2.2 CONTROL OVERVIEW
The preventive antisurge action is provided by a dedicated surge-control system that is

separate from the compressor’s other controls because of response speed requirements.
The other compressor controls attempt to stay reasonably clear of the surge line, but only
on a relatively long time horizon. Surge events tend to be transient disturbances. It would
be both impractical and inefficient to slow and then accelerate a large turbine-driven
compressor as every potential surge comes and goes. If the compressor has variable inlet
vanes, the control system typically manipulates them to optimise fuel efficiency, not to
avoid every threat of a surge.
Instead, the action provided by the surge-control system is to open the recycle valve to an
appropriate degree. The past dominant strategy was to begin opening the recycle valve well
before the operating point reached the surge line. This approach led to long operation times
with a consequent and appreciable waste of compressor fuel as well as capacity.
Nowadays antisurge control philosophy is to avoid opening the recycle valve until
absolutely necessary, move away from surge as quickly as possible and then shut the valve
again.
The piping and instrument diagram shown in, represents a compressor provided of
antisurge valve. The energy produced by a turbine or an engine moves compressors shaft
and process gas sucked up in the inlet. Finally the line users shared out the gas, compressed
to the desired pressure ratio.

1900533 4 A
The outlet gas is also feed-backed to the antisurge valve. If the recycle valve is not closed,
the process gas is allowed to get back to the compressor inlet, reducing the compression
ratio. In a system of this type, the dedicated digital controller, heart of an advanced surge-
control system, receives inputs:
 Inlet pressure
 Temperature
 Flow
 Head across the compressor
 Compressor speed.
If gas composition is subject to appreciable change, an indication of that variable, such as
density, may be included. Characteristic curves for various temperatures and various inlet
pressures and compositions are available to the control algorithm as equations or look-up
tables, see chapter 2.
The advanced controller’s reaction time may be well under 50 milliseconds. The algorithm
attempts to duplicate the action of an experienced human operator having an eye on the
instruments, a hand on the manual valve control and a wish to minimize energy waste
resulting from prolonged recycling. This requires a combination of closed-loop (feedback)
and open-loop (prearranged) control. The system keeps the recycle valve closed as long as
the operating point is well away from the known surge line. As the operating point
approaches the surge line, the
control algorithm becomes more sensitive to its motion. Getting too close or moving too
suddenly toward the line causes the valve to open by an appropriate amount to halt
progress toward surge smoothly without triggering control oscillations. Should extraneous
circumstances continue to force the operating point toward the surge line, the recycle valve
opens all the way. If a load reduction persists, then after a relatively long time (perhaps a
few minutes), speed typically is reduced by the compressor control system.
Consequently, unless the reduced flow is beneath the capability of the compressor, the
operating point and the surge point move away from each other, and the surge controller
gradually shuts the recycle valve. The compressor has kept a firm grip on the gas.
The control features are all based on PID, Proportional-Integrative-Derivative controller,
that is a type of feedback controller whose output, a control variable (CV), is generally
based on the error (e) between some user-defined set point (SP) and some measured
process variable (PV). The PID controller computations are addressed in cutting the error
down and anticipating the system response.
The PID implemented grant bumpless control mode transfer, avoiding unwanted
disturbance in the control loop.
The characteristic of PID controller:
o Proportional control; reduces the rise time and reduces, but never eliminate, the
o steady-state error.
o Integral control; eliminates the steady-state error, worsening the transient
o response.
o Derivative control; increases the stability of the system, reducing the overshoot,
o and improving the transient response.
The PID controller is provided of tracking Anti-Windup, in order to avoid any limit
cycling or even instability, that integrator windup may cause.

1900533 4 A
All compressors operating points are described on the suction flow – differential pressure
plane. There is a different curve for each speed, altogether forming the compressor’s wheel
map (Fig. 2-2). In each line is possible identifying the so-called “surge point”,
corresponding to the maximum differential pressure that limits the stable area of the speed
constant curves. The locus of surge point for all compressor speeds, above and below the
characteristic curve in question, is called surge limit line (SLL). The flow here has fallen to
the minimum impeller can handle,
without losing its grip on the gas and represents the limit after which corresponds to an
unstable behaviour of the compressor.
The antisurge control (ASCV) system main goal is to avoid the compressor operating point
(A) to reach SLL. This purpose is obtained defining a protection line on the right side of
SLL. This safety line is called surge control line (SCL).
The ASCV system will act opening the antisurge valve. This action increases the suction
flow therefore the operating point moves backwards along the speed characteristic curve,
from the critical condition to the stable operating area.

1900533 4 A
11.2.2.1 Antisurge Control Law
Considering a mono-stage centrifugal compressor, it is possible to verify the followings
relations for each surge point, varying the compressor speed N, where Qs is the suction
volumetric flow and Hp the polytropic head:
From Eq. 2-1, Eq. 2-2 we obtain
Where
Since polytropic head Hp is defined as:
From Eq. 2-3, Eq. 2-4 we obtain
If QS is measured through a calibrated orifice mounted we can express it related to the

measured Δp
Eq. 2-6 with the perfect gas equation

1900533 4 A
leads to Eq. 2-7
Introducing this equation into Eq. 2-5, Eq. 2-8 is obtained representing all the surge points
in function of the orifice differential pressure Δp. It is possible demonstrate how the surge
phenomenon is not influenced by the gas condition and composition.
Therefore, for small compression ratios and small n variations, the terms:
The Eq. 2-9 defines the SLL shape, on the plane of compression ratio (ρ) versus flow (Q)
and is represented by a parabola which has the minimum located in ρ = 1 and Q = 0, see
Fig. 2-3.

1900533 4 A
Fig. 2-3 highlights a theoretical wheel map, characteristic for a single stage compressor
(one impeller only), while the Fig. 2-4 shows typical multistage compressor behaviour.
The multistage compressor surge limit line puts in evidence that the surge control line
cannot be realized using a parabola, since this approximation excluding a large part of
compressor operating area.
Fig. 2-5 shows the solution to this lost of operability. The SLL is evaluated by a tenbreak
lines function generator f(Pd-Ps/Ps) and consequently the relevant SCL, moving the SLL
right side of a pre-set percentage margin (K). The following section illustrates the
algorithm used to evaluate the surge control line.
The control algorithm developed from Eq. 2-9 and used inside the controller requires as
process variables, suction, discharge and design pressures and the differential pressure
evaluated at a calibrated orifice positioned at compressor suction

1900533 4 A
The controller set point is K2. It represents the deviation margin between “SLL” and
“SCL”. In the “Antisurge Control Line configuration sheet”, the margin is expressed in
percentage of flow.
The algorithm takes in account the ΔP measured across the flow element (indicated by
“hs”) that is proportional to square suction flow (hs = Q2).
The controller algorithm compensates continuously the hs signal according to the suction
pressure variation, taking in account the suction pressure measured and comparing it with
the design suction pressure.
NOTE: the same algorithm is applied for pipeline compressors where the flange to eye
characteristic instead of a traditional flow element is used.

1900533 4 A
11.3 Steam Turbine Governor
11.3.1 Steam Turbine (Note 1)
ST Governor is an innovative and complete and easy to use product designed exclusively
to control steam turbine, offering all features expected by any type of control required:
 SPEED
 INLET PRESSURE
 EXTRACTION
 LOAD
 CASCADE
The power of this system comes out from its integration capabilities, from dozens of
control loops and sequences in the same panel up to a whole co-generation plant.
The power of the control system is well managed by the ST Governor which can be
completed with HMI system, in order to perform plenty of diagnostic tasks, such as
plotting analog/ digital trends, storing events, logging the alarm history.
ST Governor platform allows a versatile interface to existing or future Distributed Control

System DCS, thanks to the multi standard communication ports. Even with a HMI out of
service the plant can be monitored by the DCS, with an obvious increment of the plant
efficiency.
ST Governor is easy to use, just need to be integrated in the plant control and the
programming is reduced to a simple parameter configuration, according to the plant
specification. The choice between control types is among the parameters to be defined
within the configuration worksheets.
Note 1: this manual refers to the ST Governor steam turbine governor version 2.00. For
any other version please read the relevant documentation.
11.3.1.1 Operation Mode

In automatic mode the speed set point grows according to a ramp with slope equal to the
one set through parameters “Rate to 1st warm up hot” or “Rate to 1st warm up cold”
according to the time elapsed from the latest shutdown. If the time elapsed from the latest
shutdown is longer than the time before which the turbine is to be considered hot and
shorter than the time after which the turbine is to be considered cold, an interpolation
between the two reference values is carried out. The HP valve limiter assumes a higher
limit given by the value set in parameter “1st warm up Limit”.

1900533 4 A
Once the 1st warm up is reached, and the time necessary has elapsed (which can be
obtained from the start-up diagram of the turbine being considered) the speed set point
grows in automatic mode until the target value is reached according to a ramp with slope
equal to the value set in “Rate to target hot” or “Rate to target cold” according as to
whether a “hot” start-up or a “cold” start-up is carried out (even in this case if the time
elapsed from the latest shutdown is longer than the time before which the turbine is to be
considered hot and shorter than the time after which the turbine is to be considered cold, an
interpolation between the two reference values
is carried out). The HP valve limiter assumes a higher limit given by the value set in
parameter “Target Limit”.
Once target speed is reached, the end of the start-up sequence is signalled to the GCPP
(Generator Control Protection Panel) through signal "permissive to synchronize " (only in
case of generator drive).
The speed set point ramp slope assumes the value set in parameter “Synchro slope”, and
this slope is maintained until the generator breaker closure.
Obviously, in the case of a turbo-compressor, speed goes from the 1st warm up to MOS
(and not to target), but the speed set point ramp slope in this range always follows the one
set in “Rate to target”.
In many turbines, it is desirable to avoid certain speeds or speed ranges (or to go through
them as quickly as possible) due to excessive turbine vibrations or other factors. While
programming ST Governor turbine governor, two critical speed ranges can be selected.
These two ranges can be any speed range between 1st warm up speed and minimum
operating speed.
Turbine Start
There are three start-up modes available that can be set directly in section Operating
Parameters: manual, automatic, semi-automatic.
Once the start signal is sent to the turbine, the speed set point (the increase / decrease of its
value) and the HP valve limiter are controlled either manually by the operator or
automatically, according to the start-up mode selected.
Turbine Starts Modes:

A. Manual Start-up Mode
When the manual mode is selected, the start-up sequence is completed in a fully manual
way and goes through the following steps:
1. A reset signal is sent to the turbine controller to reset all alarms and trips.
2. The turbine speed set point is increased gradually by the operator to reach the 1st warm
up speed value. (The rpm per second ramp slope according to which the speed set point
changes is set through the Manual Slope parameter.) At the same time, the HP valve
limiter opening and closing is changed manually by the operator. (The related ramp slope
according to which they change is set in section HP VALVE LIMITER CONTROL,
parameter Slope rates). During start-up the low pressure valve (LP) is kept in fully open
position.

1900533 4 A
3. Once the 1st warm up value is reached, the speed increase stops, to resume only upon a
manual action of the operator through command “raise speed” (provided the necessary
time has elapsed – warm up time).
4. The sequence is continued manually until the target, and the speed set point (the slope of
its ramp) increases, still according to the slope set on the manual slope parameter.
 Semiautomatic Start-up Mode
When the semi-automatic mode is selected, the start-up sequence is completed in

semiautomatic mode and goes through the following steps:
2. The turbine speed set point is increased in an automatic way to reach the 1st warm up
speed value. (The ramp slope according to which the set point changes is set by means of
parameter “Rate to 1st warm up hot/cold” in section Operating Parameters). At the same
time, the operator changes the HP valve limiter opening and closing manually. (The ramp
slope according to
which the HP valve limiter changes is set in parameter “Slope rates” in section Operating
Parameters). During start-up the low pressure valve (LP) is maintained in fully open
position
.
3. Once the 1st warm up value is reached, the speed increase stops, to resume only upon a
manual action of the operator through command CONTINUE (provided the necessary time
has elapsed – warm up time).
4. The HP valve limiter is controlled manually until target speed, and the speed set point
(the slope of its ramp) increases, now according to the slope set on Rate to target hot/cold.
Important: in section Operating Parameters, the “Synchrony slope” rpm/sec slope of the
speed set point ramp is enabled from the moment minimum governor speed is reached (i.e.
when the permissive to synchronize is given) until the generator breaker closes, that is
when maximum governor speed is reached.

1900533 4 A
 Automatic Start-up mode
When the automatic mode is selected, the start-up sequence is completed in automatic
mode and goes through the following steps:
2. The turbine speed set point is increased in an automatic way to reach the 1st warm up
speed value. (The ramp slope according to which the set point changes is set by means of
parameter “Rate to 1st warm up hot/cold” in section Operating Parameters). At the same
time automatically the controller open the HP valve limiter to the corrispective limit. (The
ramp slope according
to which the HP valve limiter changes is set in parameter “Slope rates” in section
Operating Parameters). During start-up the low pressure valve (LP) is maintained in fully
open position.
3. Once the 1st warm up value is reached, the speed increase stops, when the 1st warm up
time elapsed the speed set point start to increase automatically to reach the target set-
point). At the same time automatically the controller open the HP valve limiter to the
corrispective limit.
4. The HP valve limiter is controlled automatically until target speed, and the speed set
point (the slope of its ramp) increases, now according to the slope set on Rate to target
hot/cold.

1900533 4 A
Normal Stop
In addition to the actual shutdown sequence, ST Governor is provided with a NORMAL
STOP command that, when enabled, carries out a controlled trip sequence (controlled
shutdown).
According to the current operating conditions as well as to the system configuration, it is
possible to distinguish different sequences, which are reported below.
A. Normal Stop (Generator drive configuration)

It goes through the following steps:
1. if in inlet steam pressure control, the PID performing the control action on inlet steam
pressure is disabled, and power control (kW) is enabled.
2. if in control of the extraction line by means of the Extraction PID acting on the LP
valve, this control is disabled.
3. once the Power PID is enabled, power (kW) decreases until the Minimum Power value
is reached according to a ramp whose slope is set through parameter Set Point Slope Target
Stop in section kW Control.
4. once the Minimum Power value is reached, the Generator Control panel sends a
command to open the Generator Breaker contact.
5. once the Generator Breaker is open, speed control is enabled, and the speed set point
value is lowered according to a ramp whose slope is set in parameter Normal Stop in
section Start-up Parameters, until the 1st warm up is reached. The speed set point can be
frozen by pressing halt command (the continue command restarts the ramp).
6. it is necessary to wait for the necessary time in order to allow speed to actually reach the
1st warm up value, and only then the actual shutdown is performed.
a. Normal Stop (mechanical drive configuration)

1900533 4 A
• No Syngas Condition
1. the Cascade controller is disabled.
2. after disabling the Cascade controller, speed control is enabled, and the speed set point
value is lowered according to a ramp whose slope is set in parameter Normal Stop in
section Start-up Parameters, until the 1st warm up is reached. The speed set point can be
frozen by pressing halt
command (the continue command restarts the ramp).
1st warm up value, and only then the actual shutdown is performed.
• Syngas Condition
1. if in control of the extraction line by means of the Extraction PID acting on the LP valve,
this control is disabled.
2. the low pressure valve (LP valve) is opened completely by reaching 100 % of the LP
Valve Limiter value.
3. the speed set point value is lowered according to a ramp whose slope is set in parameter
Normal Stop in section Start-up Parameters, until the 1st warm up is reached. The speed
set point can be frozen by pressing halt command (the continue command restarts the
ramp).
1st warm up value, and only then the actual shutdown is performed

1900533 4 A
NOTE: If the normal stop sequence is being executed and is not over yet, by pressing the
Turbine Start command, the normal stop is disabled.
Emergency Shutdown
When a shutdown condition is detected, both output signals to the HP and LP valve
actuators are taken to the value of zero mA. Moreover, shutdown relays are deenergized (in
ST Governor system an external redundant hardware relay logic for the steam turbine trip
valves is always implemented, too) and the shutdown cause is displayed on the supervision
video page.
Within the ST Governor logic control sequences, there is a bit dedicated to the shutdown
condition; this bit can be associated to any input signal, or any internal bit, representing
any trip condition, produced by the system logic.
Obviously, since the entire logic is implemented according to a Fail Safe type of
philosophy, the shutdown condition is detected when the logic state is zero.

1900533 4 A
11.3.1.2 Controllers
Speed Controll
Speed control receives a turbine speed signal from one or two magnetic pickups or
proximity probes. The Speed PID (PID = controller with Proportional, Integral and
Derivative action) amplifies and compares this signal with the speed set point in order to
generate a signal going to the valve decoupling input.
The speed governor, moreover, can receive a droop feedback signal (optional) to increase
the system stability, basing on the turbine-generator system load (expressed in kW).
The speed set point can be controlled either by means of the HMI Raise/Lower commands,
or through remote contacts, or via Modbus.
Turbine speed is “picked up” through one or two MPU’s (magnetic pick-up) or proximity
probes. In our ST Governor a fundamental parameter that is necessary to configure is the
“Number of pulses per round” in section Operating Parameters.
This parameter represents the number of pulses per turbine driving shaft revolution. This
value is needed to obtain the speed measurement in rpm (after performing the due
conversions).
The Speed PID (set with the control parameters relating to integration time, to the
derivative and the proportionality constant as well as to other additional parameters which
shall be dealt with in detail further on) compares this speed signal with a set point.
When programmed for application with a generator, the status of generator breaker (GB)
contacts and tie-breaker (TB) contacts determines the Speed PID operating mode.
More precisely, if the generator breaker is open, the parallel connection with the grid has
not been carried out yet, and therefore the Speed PID operates in full turbine speed control
mode according to the parameters set by the operator in section Speed Control Parameters.
The speed control parameters to be set are reported below:
• PG PROPORTIONAL GAIN (% / %): It represents the PID controller proportional gain.

In case of mere proportional action, the error is calculated as difference between the
process variable measured and the set point. This difference is then normalized to the
speed measurement full scale and is multiplied for the value set on PG PROPORTIONAL
GAIN.
• IT INTEGRAL GAIN (sec): It represents the PID controller integration time.
• DT DERIVATIVE RATIO (sec): It represents the PID controller derivation time (Kd).
This constant refers to the formula representing the PID controller, expressed
as follows:
u(t) = PG e(t) + 1⁄ IT *∫ e(τ)dτ + DT * de(t) / dt

1900533 4 A
• ERROR DEAD BAND (Norm): It represents the dead band error. If the error calculated
as difference between speed and set point, normalized to speed full scale, is lower than the
value set in ERROR DEAD BAND, than it has no effect. All the speed control PID
parameters explained above can also be configured for the ISLAND mode (ISLAND
PARAMETERS): these parameters become effective when the GB is closed and the TB is
open, i.e. when the generator is in island mode.
NOTE:
In case of variable response times due to variations in the system conditions, it is possible
to set a parameter that allows the Speed PID to tune in order to get optimal responses.
In other words, this parameter is a constant called Dynamics Multiplier Const., the value of
which can be entered directly by the operator.
More specifically, in generator drive mode, in case of generator breaker opening, the speed
control PID parameters are temporary multiplied for the value entered in Dynamic
Multiplier Const. to make the controller action more "reactive".
In particular, the proportionality constant and the derivative action are multiplied for this
value, whereas the integral action is divided for this value.
Likewise, in case of a Mechanical Drive turbine, two sets of parameters exist:
Parameters referring to a speed below Minimum Operating Speed (M.O.S);
Parameters referring to a speed above M.O.S.
Critical Speed Avoidance

In many turbines it is desirable to avoid certain speeds or speed ranges (or to go through
them as quickly as possible) due to excessive turbine vibrations or other factors. During the
ST Governor configuration, two critical speed ranges can be selected. These ranges can be
any speed range between warm up speed and minimum operating speed.
Within a critical speed range, ST Governor moves the speed set point according to the
programmed critical speed slope, and does not allow the speed set point to stop inside the
critical range.
In case of critical ranges, the system checks that the steam turbine does not operate within
the critical region longer than a configurable time interval. This check is inhibited if the
actual speed is closer to the relevant set point less than 50 RPM.
The consequence is a trip for maximum time in critical region.

1900533 4 A
Cascade Control
The Cascade control is used inside ST Governor to act on turbine speed so as to control a
physical quantity linked to the steam turbine rotation speed.
A typical application is the configuration as mechanical drive acting on turbine speed so as
to control the discharge pressure of the compressor connected to the turbine.
In Cascade mode, two digital inputs external to the ST Governor (e.g. coming from DCS)
are made available to raise / lower the speed set point.
The set point increase/decrease ramp slope is defined in the section dealing with Cascade
Control at parameter Cascade ramp slope [rpm/sec].
Cascade control can be configured to control any system process, in relation to turbine
speed.
NOTE: It is to be reminded that this control and the related configuration video page can
be viewed only if MECHANICAL DRIVE is selected in section Operating Parameters, in
submenu General Turbine selection. Typically this controller is configured and used as
controller of a compressor discharge pressure.
The Cascade controller performs a comparison between a 4-20 mA process signal and a set
point, and its control variable directly represents the Speed PID speed set point.
When enabled, the Cascade PID can cause the speed set point to change according to a
ramp with slope set through parameter Cascade ramp slope, in section CASCADE
CONTROL.
Furthermore, it is possible to set all the Cascade controller control parameters in real time,
simply by changing their values in the Cascade controller configuration page (Cascade
Control).
However, the Cascade controller enabling occurs only after reaching Minimum Operating
Speed, and is automatically disabled in shutdown condition, to be automatically enabled
again after a subsequent system start-up.
In the ST Governor system the shift to the Cascade controller enabling is bumpless, and if
a Cascade type control permissive is lost, or the Cascade control is disabled, the set point
value ‘active’ in that moment is freezed.
In relation to the type of control action required, the Cascade controller input (the process
variable of this PID) can be inverted.
For example, if internal Cascade is selected and a decrease in the HP valve opening
percentage is requested in order to raise suction steam pressure (inlet steam pressure), the
Cascade controller process variable is to be inverted. The cascade control parameters to be
set are reported below:
• Cascade ramp slope [rpm/sec]: Regardless of the External Cascade Control mode
selection - through the corresponding check box on page Operating Parameters in menu
General Turbine selection - the SIC (the ST Governor speed governor) shall receive a set
point that is always pursued according to a ramp with a slope configurable in Cascade
ramp slope (in rpm per second).
• Cascade set point slope rate [rpm/sec]: It represents the ramp slope according to which
the Cascade PID controller pursues the set point, expressed in rpm per second.

1900533 4 A
External Cascade Control
If the corresponding check box is selected, the external CASCADE mode is enabled (valid
in the case of mechanical drive).
The Cascade is external in case the speed set point to ST Governor is supplied by an
external PID controller (a typical case is a PIC controller outside ST Governor located on
the compressor discharge, whose control variable is the speed governor set point).
It’s important to stress that this mode use must be selected even for any other controller
implemented in the same PLC such as an anti surge or performance controller whose
output drives the steam turbine speed: all those controllers must be classified as External
Cascade Control regardless their implementation. The value shall be converted from 4÷20
mA to normalized (0-1).
The external Cascade – unlike the internal one – is base on a PID controller that is
completely external; from governor control system acquires only its control variable (as a
0-100% input which can be acquired either via serial link – e.g. through Modbus protocol -
via hardwired line – or internal by performance controller); this control variable represents
the speed governor set point.
This set point grows according to a slope the ramp of which is the cascade ramp slope
already dealt with on the previous pages, and is then added to Minimum Operating Speed.
Span Selection
If the corresponding check box is selected, ST Governor speed governor performs its
control actions interpreting the signal coming from the external PID in the following way:
4 mA = 0 RPM; 20 mA = Maximum Continuous Speed. In any case, the governor does not
activate any set point lower than Minimum Operating Speed.
If the corresponding check box is not selected, ST Governor speed governor performs its
control action within the range comprised between Minimum Operating Speed (4 mA) and
Maximum Continuous Speed (20 mA).

1900533 4 A
g GE Oil & Gas UNIT CONTROLSYSTEM I/O LIST . SOS9972092 7
1102313 3 A
THIS DOCUMENT IS AND CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L WHICH SHALL NOT BE USED OR DISCLOSED TO SHEET
. OTHERS, EXCEPT WITH THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF Nuovo Pignone S.r.L . UNPUBLISHED WORK ©2012 Nuovo Pignone S.r.L. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 2 of 32
1102313 3 A
1102313 3 A
1102313 3 A
1102313 3 A
1102313 3 A
1102313 3 A
1102313 3 A
1102313 3 A
1102313 3 A
1102313 3 A
1102313 3 A
1102313 3 A
1102313 3 A
1102313 3 A
1102313 3 A
1102313 3 A
1102313 3 A
1102313 3 A
1102313 3 A
1102313 3 A
1102313 3 A
1102313 3 A
1102313 3 A
1102313 3 A
1102313 3 A
1102313 3 A
1102313 3 A
1102313 3 A
1102313 3 A
1102313 3 A
© Nuovo Pignone S.r.l.
TRIP TRESHOLD
600
500
PDI XXX (Psig)
400
300
200
100
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
PI 3432 (Psig)

Bernardi A.
Zipoli M.
Electronically approved draw. GE NuovoPignone Internal DT-'N'

5
FINAL REVISION
Zipoli
Elett.stored
Elett.stored
12/03/2013
E
GE NuovoPignone - Electronically Approved Drawing - Checked: Bernardi A.; Approved: Zipoli M. - Internal DT-'N'
5 SPARE
5 SPARE
5 XHS-3044
5
5 SPARE
5
SPARE <5>
5 FINAL REVISION SPARE

5 FINAL REVISION
SPARE
5 FINAL REVISION
XHS-3044
SPARE <5>
5 FINAL REVISION
SPARE
Bernardi A.
Zipoli M.

UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
SERIAL LIST

CUSTOMER NAME: COLT FOR SUNCOR ENERGY
PLANT LOCATION: FORT MC MURRAY, ALBERTA (CANADA)
PLANT: VOYAGEUR HYDROTREATER GOHT #3
N.P. JOB: 1102313 / 1900553
ITEM: 207K-300 / 207KT-300
Nuovo Pignone
COMM - JOB
FIRENZE 1102313 / 1900533
ITEM
TITOLO - TITLE 207K-300 / 207KT-300
DWG NUMBER
3 GENERAL REVISION SSE
Bernardi A. Visintin F.
09/06/2009 UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
2 GENERAL REVISION, SSE 27/01/2009 SERIAL LIST SOS 9971995/3
1 GENERAL REVISION, ADDED SH.20-37 SSE 18/11/2008 LINGUA - LANG. PAGINA - SHEET
0 ISSUE SSE 12/09/2008 A 1 / 2

NOTE REV. DESCRIZIONE ESEG. CONTR. APPR. DATA Il presente disegno e' di proprieta' NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto e' riservato SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV. DESCRIPTION PREP'D CHK'D APPR'D DATE This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE . All rights are reserved according to law SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
NOTE
Type
: ETHERNET TCP/IP
Protocol
: Modbus
DEVICE IP:
:192.168.1.1
Analog variable type
REAL <2>
<2>
MODBUS FUNCTION CODE
FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
1 Read Output Status
2 Read Input Status
3 Read Output Register
4 Read Input Register
5 Force Single Coil
6 Preset Single Register
7 Read Status
15 Force Multiple Coils
16 Preset Multiple Registers
Nuovo Pignone
COMM
FIRENZE
ESSA -
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
3 REV. SERIAL LIST N° SOS9971995/3
2 Rev. Where shown <2> LINGUA - LANG.
1 REV. A 2/3
NOTE REV, DESCRIZIONE Il presente disegno è di proprietà NUOVO PIGNONE. A termini di legge ogni diritto è riservato. SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
NOTES REV, DESCRIPTION This document is the property of NUOVO PIGNONE. All rights are reserved according to law. SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Range Ethernet Modbus
Dataset Data
Reference Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Type Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> <2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Max Value Bit Within Register
Array Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
1 F READ TT 3746 rTI 3746 LUBE OIL HEADER TEMPERATURE

SOS8628431/1 32 200 °F 43001 <2>
1 F READ PT 3424 rPI 3424 HP STEAM TURBINE CHAMBER
SOS8628450/1 0 800 PSI 43003 <2>
1 F READ PT 3471 rPI 3471A CONTROL OIL HEADER PRESSURE
SOS8628437/1 0 232 PSIG 43005 <2>
1 F READ
SOS8628450/1 43007 <2>
1 F READ PT 3425 rPI 3425 HP STEAM TURBINE CHAMBER
SOS8628450/1 0 800 PSI 43009 <2>
1 F READ TE 3732 rTI 3732 COMPR.THRUST BRG.ACTIVE SIDE
SOS8628431/1 -50 300 <2> °F 43011 <2>
1 F READ PDT 3454 rPDT 3454 <2> SUCTION END PRIMARY VENT DIFF. PRESSURE
SOS8628460/1 0 36.5 PSI 43013 <2>
1 F READ FT 3290 rFI 3290A COMPRESSOR SUCTION FLOW
SOS8628462/1 0 5 PSI 43015 <2>
SOS8628431/1 -50 300 <2> °F 43017 <2>
1 F READ LT 3490 A rLI 3490A <2> LEVEL TRANSMITTER SEAL GAS LIQUID SEP.
SOS8628460/1 0 15 <2> inH2O 43019 <2>
1 F READ LT 3401 rLI 3401 RUN-DOWN TANK LEVEL
SOS8628431/1 0 100 % 43021 <2>
1 F READ LT 3404 rLI 3404 LUBE OIL RESERVOIR LEVEL TRANSMITTER
SOS8628432/1 0 100 % 43023 <2>
1 F READ
43025 <2>
1 F READ PDT 3408 rPDI 3408 L.O. FILTERS DIFF. PRESSURE
SOS8628432/1 0 36.25 PSI 43027 <2>
1 F READ PDT 3461 rPDI 3461A SG INLET BALANCING LINE DIFF. PRESS.
SOS8628460/1 0 145 PSI 43029 <2>
1 F READ PDT 3447 rPDI 3447 NITROGEN FILTER DIFF. PRESSURE
SOS8628460/1 0 36.25 PSI 43031 <2>
1 F READ PDT 3465 rPDI 3465 SEAL GAS FILTER DIFF. PRESSURE
SOS8628460/1 0 36.25 PSI 43033 <2>
1 F READ PDT 3094 rPDI 3094 COMPRESSOR SUCTION DIFF. PRESSURE
SOS8628462/1 0 0.035 PSI 43035 <2>
1 F READ VT 3102 X rVT 3102X STEAM TURBINE JOURNAL BRG DRIVE END X RAD.
SOS8628431/1 0 7.9 MIL 43037 <2>
1 F READ PT 3432 rPI 3432 EXHAUST STEAM PRESSURE
SOS8628450/1 0 145 <2> PSIG 43039 <2>
1 F READ PT 3422 rPI 3422 HP STEAM HEADER PRESSURE
SOS8628450/1 0 1000 PSIG 43041 <2>
1 F READ PI 3411 rPI 3411 L.O. HEADER PRESS. UP-STREAM COOLERS
SOS8628432/1 0 205 PSIG 43043 <2>
1 F READ SE 3049 A rSE 3049_A STEAM TURBINE SPEED SHAFT
SOS8628437/1 0 15000 RPM 43045 <2>
1 F READ PDT 3442 rPDI 3442 SEAL GAS LIQUID SEPARATOR DIFF. PRESSURE
SOS8628460/1 0 36 <2> PSI 43047 <2>
1 F READ SI 3049A <2> rSI 3049A <2> Steam turbine actual speed
SOS8628437/1 0 15000 RPM 43049 <2>
1 F READ TT 3296A rTI 3296A BCL456/A DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE
SOS8628462/1 32 400 °F 43051 <2>
1 F READ TT 3296B rTI 3296B BCL456/A DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE
SOS8628462/1 32 400 °F 43053 <2>
1 F READ TT 3296C rTI 3296C BCL456/A DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE
SOS8628462/1 32 400 °F 43055 <2>
1 F READ PT 3444 rPI 3444 GAS AMPLIFIED
SOS8628460/1 0 15 <2> PSIG 43057 <2>
1 F READ PT 3449 rPI 3449 NITROGEN TO TERTIARY SEALS
SOS8628460/1 0 120 <2> PSIG 43059 <2>
1 F READ PT 3451 rPI 3451 NITROGEN TO TERTIARY SEALS
SOS8628460/1 0 120 <2> PSIG 43061 <2>
SOS8628462/1 1 F READ PT 3095 rPI 3095A COMPRESSOR SUCTION PRESSURE

0 2000 PSIG 43063 <2>
Nuovo Pignone
COMM
FIRENZE ESSA -
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
1 REV. A 3/4
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Dataset Data
Drawing No. Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> <2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Max Value Bit Within Register
Array Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
1 F READ PT 3096 rPI 3096A COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE PRESSURE

SOS8628462/1 0 2700 <2> PSIG 43065 <2>
1 F READ PT 3476 rPI 3476 CONTROL OIL TRIP HEADER PRESSURE
SOS8628437/1 0 232 PSIG 43067 <2>
1 F READ TT 3296D rTI 3296 BCL456/A DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE
SOS8628462/1 32 400 °F 43069 <2>
1 F READ VT 3103 X rVT 3103X STEAM TURBINE JOURNAL BRG NON DRIVE END X RAD.
SOS8628431/1 0 7.9 MIL 43071 <2>
1 F READ TT 3744 rTI 3744 LUBE OIL RESERVOIR TEMPERATURE
SOS8628432/1 32 320 °F 43073 <2>
1 F READ ZT 3002 A rZT 3002A COMPRESSOR SHAFT AXIAL
SOS8628431/1 -0.039 0.039 INC. 43075 <2>
1 F READ TIT 3763 rTI 3763 SEAL GAS ELECTRIC HEATER - CUT OUT
SOS8628460/1 32 1200 °F 43077 <2>
1 F READ VT 3102 Y rVT 3102Y STEAM TURBINE JOURNAL BRG DRIVE END Y RAD
SOS8628431/1 0 7.9 MIL 43079 <2>
1 F READ TT 3295 rTI 3295 COMPRESSOR SUCTION TEMPERATURE
SOS8628462/1 32 400 °F 43081 <2>
1 F READ VT 3103 Y rVT 3103Y STEAM TURBINE JOURNAL BRG NON DRIVE END Y RAD
SOS8628431/1 0 7.9 MIL 43083 <2>
1 F READ VT 3104 X rVT 3104X COMPRESSOR SHAFT X RADIAL
SOS8628431/1 0 7.9 MIL 43085 <2>
1 F READ UZAH 3293 rXT 3293 ANTISURGE VALVE POSITION
SOS8628462/1 0 100 % 43087 <2>
1 F READ
43089 <2>
1 F READ TE 3716 rTI 3716 STEAM TURBINE THRUST BEARING ACTIVE
SOS8628431/1 -50 300 <2> °F 43091 <2>
1 F READ PDT3453 rPDT 3453 <2> DISC. END PRIMARY VENT DIFF.PRESSURE
SOS8628460/1 0 36.5 PSI 43093 <2>
SOS8628431/1 -50 300 <2> °F 43095 <2>
1 F READ TE 3718 rTI 3718 STEAM TURB. THRUST BRG NON ACTIVE SIDE
SOS8628431/1 -50 300 <2> °F 43097 <2>
1 F READ TE 3531 rLCP_TEMP LOCAL CONTROL PANEL INTERNAL TEMPERATURE
-148 140 <2> °F 43099 <2>
2 F READ TE 3719 rTI 3719 STEAM TURB. THRUST BRG NON ACTIVE SIDE
SOS8628431/1 -50 300 <2> °F 43101 <2>
2 F READ TE 3720 rTI 3720 STEAM TURBINE JOURNAL BEARING
SOS8628431/1 -50 300 <2> °F 43103 <2>
2 F READ VT 3105 X rVT 3105X COMPRESSOR SHAFT X RADIAL
SOS8628431/1 0 7.9 MIL 43105 <2>
SOS8628431/1 -50 300 <2> °F 43107 <2>
SOS8628431/1 -50 300 <2> °F 43109 <2>
SOS8628431/1 2 F READ PT 3401 rPI 3401 CONTROL OIL HEADER PRESSURE
0 250 PSIG 43111 <2>
SOS8628431/1 -50 300 <2> °F 43113 <2>
SOS8628431/1 -50 300 <2> °F 43115 <2>
2 F READ PT 3463 rPI 3463 SEAL GAS INLET BALANCING LINE
SOS8628460/1 0 2000 PSIA 43117 <2>
2 F READ TE 3725 rTI 3725 COMPRESSOR JOURNAL BRG
SOS8628431/1 -50 300 <2> °F 43119 <2>
SOS8628431/1 -50 300 <2> °F 43121 <2>
2 F READ PDT 3472 rPDI 3472 <2> SG INLET BALANCING LINE DIFF. PRESS.
SOS8628460/1 0 200 PSIG 43123 <2>
SOS8628431/1 -50 300 <2> °F 43125 <2>
SOS8628431/1 2 F READ TE 3728 rTI 3728 COMPRESSOR JOURNAL BRG

-50 300 <2> °F 43127 <2>
Nuovo Pignone
COMM
FIRENZE ESSA -
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
1 REV. A 4/5
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Dataset Data
Drawing No. Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Max Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> <2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Bit Within Register
Array Value Register (16-bit
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
2 F READ PT 3477 rPI 3477 CONTROL OIL TRIP HEADER PRESSURE

SOS8628437/1 0 232 PSIG 43129 <2>
2 F READ TE 3729 rTI 3729 COMPR. THRUST BRG. NON-ACTIVE SIDE
SOS8628431/1 -50 300 <2> °F 43131 <2>
2 F READ TE 3730 rTI 3730 COMPR.THRUST BRG.NON-ACT. SIDE
SOS8628431/1 -50 300 <2> °F 43133 <2>
2 F READ SE 3049 B rSE 3049_B STEAM TURBINE SPEED SHAFT
SOS8628437/1 0 15000 RPM 43135 <2>
SOS8628431/1 -50 300 <2> °F 43137 <2>
2 F READ VT 3101 rVTI 3101 KEY PHASOR
SOS8628431/1 - 43139 <2>
2 F READ SE 3049 C rSE 3049_C STEAM TURBINE SPEED SHAFT
SOS8628437/1 0 15000 RPM 43141 <2>
2 F READ
43143 <2>
2 F READ LT 3490 B rLI 3490B <2> LEVEL TRANSMITTER SEAL GAS LIQUID SEP. <2>
SOS8628460/1 0 15 inH2O 43145 <2>
2 F READ
43147 <2>
2 F READ VT 3104 Y rVT 3104Y COMPRESSOR SHAFT Y RADIAL
SOS8628431/1 0 7.9 MIL 43149 <2>
2 F READ
43151 <2>
2 F READ TT 3760 rTI 3760 HP STEAM HEADER TEMPERATURE
SOS8628450/1 32 800 °F 43153 <2>
2 F READ
43155 <2>
2 F READ TIT 3764 rTI 3764 SEAL GAS ELECTRIC HEATER - TEMP. LIMITER
SOS8628460/1 32 1200 °F 43157 <2>
2 F READ
43159 <2>
2 F READ TIT 3765 rTI 3765 SEAL GAS TEMPERATURE
SOS8628460/1 32 300 °F 43161 <2>
2 F READ
43163 <2>
2 F READ PT 3455D rPI 3455 COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE
SOS8628460/1 0 145 PSIG 43165 <2>
2 F READ
43167 <2>
2 F READ PT 3403D rPI 3403 LUBE OIL HEADER PRESSURE
SOS8628431/1 0 100 PSIG 43169 <2>
2 F READ ZT 3001 A rZAH 3001A STEAM TURBINE SHAFT AXIAL
SOS8628431/1 -0.039 0.039 INC 43171 <2>
2 F READ ZT 3001 B rZAH 3001B STEAM TURBINE SHAFT AXIAL
SOS8628431/1 -0.039 0.039 INC 43173 <2>
2 F READ VT 3105 Y rVT 3105Y COMPRESSOR SHAFT Y RADIAL
SOS8628431/1 0 7.9 MIL 43175 <2>
2 F READ ZT 3002 B rZT 3002B COMPRESSOR SHAFT AXIAL
SOS8628431/1 -0.039 0.039 INC 43177 <2>
2 F READ PI 3460D rPI 3460 COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE
SOS8628460/1 0 145 PSIG 43179 <2>
2 F READ TT 3740 rTI 3740 LUBE OIL HEADER TEMPERATURE CONTROL
SOS8628431/1 32 212 °F 43181 <2>
2 F READ
43183 <2>
2 F READ PT 3403 A rPI 3403A LUBE OIL HEADER PRESSURE
SOS8628431/1 0 100 PSIG 43185 <2>
2 F READ PT 3403 B rPI 3403B LUBE OIL HEADER PRESSURE
SOS8628431/1 0 100 PSIG 43187 <2>
2 F READ PT 3403 C rPI 3403C LUBE OIL HEADER PRESSURE
SOS8628431/1 0 100 PSIG 43189 <2>
SOS8628450/1 2 F READ PT 3423 rPI 3423 HP STEAM HEADER PRESSURE

0 1000 PSIG 43191 <2>
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
1 REV. A 5/6
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Dataset Data
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
2 F READ PT 3430 rPI 3430 EXHAUST STEAM PRESSURE

SOS8628450/1 0 145 PSIG 43193 <2>
2 F READ
43195 <2>
2 F READ TT 3761 rTI 3761 HP STEAM HEADER TEMPERATURE
SOS8628450/1 32 800 °F 43197 <2>
2 F READ
43199 <2>
3 F READ
43201 <2>
3 F READ
43203 <2>
3 F READ
43205 <2>
3 F READ PT 3460 A rPI 3460A COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE
SOS8628460/1 0 145 PSIG 43207 <2>
3 F READ PT 3460 B rPI 3460B COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE
SOS8628460/1 0 145 PSIG 43209 <2>
3 F READ PT 3460 C rPI 3460C COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE
SOS8628460/1 0 145 PSIG 43211 <2>
3 F READ PT 3455 C rPI 3455C COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE
SOS8628460/1 0 145 PSIG 43213 <2>
3 F READ PT 3455 B rPI 3455B COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE
SOS8628460/1 0 145 PSIG 43215 <2>
3 F READ PT 3455 A rPI 3455A COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE
SOS8628460/1 0 145 PSIG 43217 <2>
3 F READ
43219 <2>
3 F READ FT 3296 rFT 3296 <2> COMPRESSOR SUCTION FLOW
0 22 PSI 43221 <2>
3 F READ PT 3215 rPT 3215 <2> COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE PRESSURE
0 2700 PSIG 43223 <2>
3 F READ PT 3216 rPT 3216 <2> COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE PRESSURE
0 2700 PSIG 43225 <2>
3 F READ
43227 <2>
3 F READ
43229 <2>
3 F READ
43231 <2>
3 F READ
43233 <2>
3 F READ
43235 <2>
3 F READ
43237 <2>
3 F READ
43239 <2>
3 F READ
43241 <2>
3 F READ
43243 <2>
3 F READ
43245 <2>
3 F READ
43247 <2>
3 F READ
43249 <2>
3 F READ
43251 <2>
3 F READ
43253 <2>
3 F READ
43255 <2>
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
1 REV. A 6/7
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Dataset Data
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
3 F READ
43257 <2>
3 F READ
43259 <2>
3 F READ
43261 <2>
3 F READ
43263 <2>
3 F READ
43265 <2>
3 F READ
43267 <2>
3 F READ TT 3747 rTI 3747 RUNDOWN TANK TEMPERATURE
SOS8628431/1 32 200 °F 43269 <2>
3 F READ
43271 <2>
3 F READ
43273 <2>
3 F READ
43275 <2>
3 F READ
43277 <2>
3 F READ - rTC_SP <2> TC - setpoint <2>
0 100 % 43279 <2>
3 F READ - rPDIK_SP PDI - setpoint
0 100 % 43281 <2>
3 F READ
3 F READ
3 F READ
3 F READ
3 F READ
3 F READ
3 F READ
3 F READ
3 F READ
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
1 REV. A 7/8
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Dataset
Reference Data Read / READ (DCS No. of Engineering FAT
No. Data Descriptor Service Comments
Drawing No. Type Perspective) Tag Within Mapped Max Decimals Units Modbus Complete
<2> Actual Instr Tag Min Value Bit Within Register
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ NSR 3745 eNSR 3745 LUBE OIL HEATER ON

SOS8628432/1 40500 1
4 I READ NSR 3201 eNSR 3201 LUBE OIL PUMP MOTOR RUNNING
SOS8628432/1 40500 2
4 I READ UZSO 3293 eUZSO 3293 ANTISURGE VALVE POSITION FULLY OPEN
SOS8628462/1 40500 3
4 I READ XZSO 3052 eXZSO_ 3052 TRIP VALVE ACTUATOR
SOS8628437/1 40500 4
4 I READ XZSO 3306 eZSH 3306 TRIP VALVE XY-3306 OPEN LIMIT SWITCH
SOS8628437/1 40500 5
4 I READ NCR 3741 eNCR 3741 ELECTRIC HEATER ON/OFF COMMAND
SOS8628432/1 40500 6
4 I READ XS 3049 eXS 3049 <2> PERMISSIVE TO START FROM SIS
SOS8628431/1 40500 7
4 I READ XHS 3318 eXHS 3318 UCP EMERGENCY PUSH BUTTON(NON ESISTE SU I/O)
40500 8
4 I READ SSHH 3052A1 eSSHH 3052A STEAM TURBINE OVERSPEED TRIP
SOS8628437/1 40500 9
4 I READ XZSO 3305 eXZSO_ 3305 TRIP VALVE ACTUATOR
SOS8628437/1 40500 10
4 I READ NS 3201 eNA 3201 PLC CONTROL AVAILABLE
SOS8628432/1 40500 11
4 I READ VSHH 3107 eVSHH 3107 COMMON RADIAL VIBR. TRIP (PLC.WIRED)
SOS8628431/1 40500 12
4 I READ - eESDR_ACT ESD FROM RELAY
40500 13
4 I READ SSHH 3052B1 eSSHH 3052B STEAM TURBINE OVERSPEED TRIP
SOS8628437/1 40500 14
4 I READ US 3111 eXSF_FAN FAN FAULT
40500 15
4 I READ TSH 3750 eTSH -3750 BEARINGS TEMPERATURE COMMON ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40500 16
4 I READ XZSC 3030 eXZSC_ 3030 VALVE XV 3030 CLOSE LIMIT SWITCH
SOS8628462/1 40501 1
4 I READ XZSC 3031 eXZSC_ 3031 VALVE XV3031 CLOSE LIMIT SWITCH
SOS8628462/1 40501 2
4 I READ XZSO 3030 eXZSO_ 3030 VALVE XV 3030 OPEN LIMIT SWITCH
SOS8628462/1 40501 3
4 I READ XZSO 3031 eXZSO_ 3031 VALVE XV 3031 OPEN LIMIT SWITCH
SOS8628462/1 40501 4
4 I READ SSLL 3101 eSSLL 3101 STEAM TURBINE ZERO SPEED
40501 5
4 I READ SSHH 3052C1 eSSHH 3052C STEAM TURBINE OVERSPEED TRIP
SOS8628437/1 40501 6
4 I READ XHSC 3030 eXHSC 3030 CLOSE SUCTION ISOLATING VALVE
SOS8628462/1 40501 7
4 I READ XHSC 3031 eXHSC 3031 CLOSE DISCHARGE ISOLATING VALVE
SOS8628462/1 40501 8
4 I READ XHSO 3030 eXHSO 3030 OPEN SUCTION ISOLATING VALVE
SOS8628462/1 40501 9
4 I READ XHSO 3031 eXHSO 3031 OPEN DISHARGE ISOLATING VALVE
SOS8628462/1 40501 10
4 I READ XHS 3120 eXHS 3120 EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN
SOS8628437/1 40501 11
4 I READ SHS 3111 eSHS 3111 RAISE SPEED SET POINT
SOS8628437/1 40501 12
4 I READ SHS 3112 eSHS1112 LOWER SPEED SET POINT
SOS8628437/2 40501 13
4 I READ HS 3113 eHS 3113 HALT AUTO START SEQUENCE
SOS8628437/1 40501 14
4 I READ HS 3114 eHS 3114 CONTINUE AUTO START SEQUENCE
SOS8628437/1 40501 15
4 I READ XHSO 3315 eXHSO 3315 TRIP VALVE OPEN
40501 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
1 REV. A 8/9
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Dataset
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ ZSHH 3004 eZSHH 3004 BEARINGS AXIAL DISPLAC. COMMON TRIP
SOS8628431/1 40502 1
4 I READ XHS 3316 eXHS 3316 MAINT. BYPASS ENABLE
SOS8628437/1 40502 2
4 I READ XS 3210 eXS 3210 SEAL GAS HEATER RUNNING
40502 3
4 I READ XS 3234 eXS 3234 SEAL GAS HEATER CUMULATIVE ALARM
40502 4
4 I READ UZSO 3294 eUZSO 3294 EMERGENCY A/S VALVE OPEN LIMIT SWITCH
SOS8628462/1 40502 5
4 I READ UZSC 3294 eUZSC 3294 EMERGENCY A/S VALVE CLOSE LIMIT SWITCH
SOS8628462/1 40502 6
4 I READ XZSO 3027 eXZSO_ 3027 BLOWDOWN VALVE OPEN LIMIT SWITCH
SOS8628462/1 40502 7
4 I READ XZSC 3027 eXZSC_ 3027 BLOWDOWN VALVE CLOSE LIMIT SWITCH
SOS8628462/1 40502 8
4 I READ HS 3115 eHS 3115 MIN. GOVERNOR SPEED/LOAD
SOS8628437/1 40502 9
4 I READ HS 3117 eHS 3117_A STARTING SEQUENCE AUTO/SEMI
SOS8628437/1 40502 10
4 I READ
SOS8628437/1 40502 11
4 I READ HS 3116_L eHS 3116_L SPEED CONTROL LOCAL/REMOTE
SOS8628437/1 40502 12
4 I READ HS 3116_R eHS 3116_R Speed Controller Remote Mode Selector LCP
SOS8628437/1 40502 13
4 I READ XS 3047A eXS 3047A PLANT ESD
SOS8628437/1 40502 14
4 I READ XZSC 3052 eXZSC 3052 TRIP VALVE CLOSE LIMIT SWITCH
40502 15
4 I READ XZSC 3305 eXZSC 3305 TRIP VALVE CLOSE LIMIT SWITCH
40502 16
4 I READ SS 3049 eSS 3049 I/H Converter fault
40503 1
4 I READ VSH 3106 eVSH 3106 BEARINGS RADIAL VIBRATION COMMON ALARM
40503 2
4 I READ XHS 3085 eXHS 3085 eXHS 3085
40503 3
4 I READ XS 3046 eXS 3046 EXTERNAL SHUTDOWN RESET FROM SIS
40503 4
4 I READ XS 3048 eXS 3048 EXTERNAL TRIP TO COMPRESSOR
40503 5
4 I READ XS 3703 eXS 3703 Triconex power suply fault
40503 6
4 I READ XS 3704 eXS 3704 POWER FAULT
40503 7
4 I READ XS 3705 eXS 3705 BN RACK1 fault
40503 8
4 I READ XS 3706 eXS 3706 BN RACK 2 fault
40503 9
4 I READ XS 3707 eXS 3707 ETG RUNNING
40503 10
4 I READ XS 3708 eXS 3708 ETG FAULT
40503 11
4 I READ XS 3709 eXS 3709 ETG Enable/Disable
40503 12
4 I READ XS 3850 eXS 3850 Seal Gas Heater Ground Fault Detected
40503 13
4 I READ XZSO 3307 eXZSO 3307 TRIP VALVE 3307 OPEN LIMIT SWITCH
40503 14
40503 15
40503 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
1 REV. A 9 / 10
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Dataset
Array Value Register (16-
(Bit 1 is LSB)
bit Registers)
4 I READ
ZSH 3003 eZSH 3003 BEARINGS AXIAL DISPLACEMENT COMMON ALARM 40504 1
4 I READ
HS 3118 eHS 3118 Start turbine command (LCP) 40504 2
4 I READ
HS 3084 eHS 3084 Shutdown command (LCP 40504 3
4 I READ
HS 3311_LampTST eHS 3311_LampTST Lamp Test (LCP) 40504 4
4 I READ
40504 5
4 I READ
40504 6
4 I READ
40504 7
4 I READ
40504 8
4 I READ
40504 9
4 I READ
40504 10
4 I READ
40504 11
4 I READ
40504 12
4 I READ
40504 13
4 I READ
40504 14
4 I READ
40504 15
4 I READ
40504 16
4 I READ
40505 1
4 I READ
40505 2
4 I READ
40505 3
4 I READ
40505 4
4 I READ
40505 5
4 I READ
40505 6
4 I READ
40505 7
4 I READ
40505 8
4 I READ
40505 9
4 I READ
40505 10
4 I READ
40505 11
4 I READ
40505 12
4 I READ
40505 13
4 I READ
40505 14
4 I READ
40505 15
4 I READ
40505 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
1 REV. A 10 / 11
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Dataset
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ
40506 1
4 I READ
40506 2
4 I READ
40506 3
4 I READ
40506 4
4 I READ
40506 5
4 I READ
40506 6
4 I READ
40506 7
4 I READ
40506 8
4 I READ
40506 9
4 I READ
40506 10
4 I READ
40506 11
4 I READ
40506 12
4 I READ
40506 13
4 I READ
40506 14
4 I READ
40506 15
4 I READ
40506 16
4 I READ
40507 1
4 I READ
40507 2
4 I READ
40507 3
4 I READ
40507 4
4 I READ
40507 5
4 I READ
40507 6
4 I READ
40507 7
4 I READ
40507 8
4 I READ
40507 9
4 I READ
40507 10
4 I READ
40507 11
4 I READ
40507 12
4 I READ
40507 13
4 I READ
40507 14
4 I READ
40507 15
4 I READ
40507 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
1 REV. A 11 / 12
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Dataset
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ
40508 1
4 I READ
40508 2
4 I READ
40508 3
4 I READ
40508 4
4 I READ
40508 5
4 I READ
40508 6
4 I READ
40508 7
4 I READ
40508 8
4 I READ
40508 9
4 I READ
40508 10
4 I READ
40508 11
4 I READ
40508 12
4 I READ
40508 13
4 I READ
40508 14
4 I READ
40508 15
4 I READ
40508 16
4 I READ
40509 1
4 I READ
40509 2
4 I READ
40509 3
4 I READ
40509 4
4 I READ
40509 5
4 I READ
40509 6
4 I READ
40509 7
4 I READ
40509 8
4 I READ
40509 9
4 I READ
40509 10
4 I READ
40509 11
4 I READ
40509 12
4 I READ
40509 13
4 I READ
40509 14
4 I READ
40509 15
4 I READ
40509 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
1 REV. A 12 / 13
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Dataset
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ XS 3179 qXS 3179 RESET COMMAND

40510 1
4 I READ NCS 3201 qNCS 3201 AUXILIARY OIL PUMP STOP COMMAND
40510 2
4 I READ XL 3313 qXL 3313 PERMISSIVES OK
40510 3
SOS8628437/1 4 I READ XY 3052 qXY 3052 STEAM TURBINE PRELOADING
40510 4
4 I READ XY 3030 qXY 3030 VALVE XV3030 SOLENOID VALVE
SOS8628462/1 40510 5
4 I READ XY 3302 qXY 3302 RUN DOWN FILLING VALVE
SOS8628431/1 40510 6
4 I READ XY 3312 qXY 3312 CONTROL OIL TRIP HEADER
SOS8628437/1 40510 7
4 I READ XY 3030 qXY 3313 VALVE XY 3030 SOLENOID VALVE
SOS8628437/1 40510 8
4 I READ XY 3303 qXY 3303 SOLENOID GAS AMPLIFIER
SOS8628460/1 40510 9
4 I READ XY 3031 qXY 3031 VALVE XY 3031 SOLENOID VALVE
SOS8628462/1 40510 10
SOS8628437/1 40510 11
SOS8628437/1 40510 12
4 I READ XL 3314 qXL 3314 COMPRESSOR RUNNING
40510 13
4 I READ XL 3312 qXL 3312 COMMON ALARM
40510 14
4 I READ XL 3311 qXL 3311 COMMON TRIP
40510 15
4 I READ UY 3293 qUY 3293 A/S SOLENOID VALVE
40510 16
4 I READ XY 3027 qXV 3027 BLOWDOWN VALVE COMMAND
SOS8628462/1 40511 1
4 I READ
40511 2
4 I READ
40511 3
4 I READ
40511 4
4 I READ
40511 5
4 I READ
40511 6
4 I READ
40511 7
4 I READ
40511 8
4 I READ
40511 9
4 I READ
40511 10
4 I READ
40511 11
4 I READ
40511 12
4 I READ
40511 13
4 I READ
40511 14
4 I READ
40511 15
4 I READ
40511 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
1 REV. A 13 / 14
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Dataset
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ
40512 1
4 I READ
40512 2
4 I READ
40512 3
4 I READ
40512 4
4 I READ
40512 5
4 I READ
40512 6
4 I READ
40512 7
4 I READ
40512 8
4 I READ
40512 9
4 I READ
40512 10
4 I READ
40512 11
4 I READ
40512 12
4 I READ
40512 13
4 I READ
40512 14
4 I READ
40512 15
4 I READ
40512 16
4 I READ
40513 1
4 I READ
40513 2
4 I READ
40513 3
4 I READ
40513 4
4 I READ
40513 5
4 I READ
40513 6
4 I READ
40513 7
4 I READ
40513 8
4 I READ
40513 9
4 I READ
40513 10
4 I READ
40513 11
4 I READ
40513 12
4 I READ
40513 13
4 I READ
40513 14
4 I READ
40513 15
4 I READ
40513 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
1 REV. A 14 / 15
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Dataset
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ
40514 1
4 I READ
40514 2
4 I READ
40514 3
4 I READ
40514 4
4 I READ
40514 5
4 I READ
40514 6
4 I READ
40514 7
4 I READ
40514 8
4 I READ
40514 9
4 I READ
40514 10
4 I READ
40514 11
4 I READ
40514 12
4 I READ
40514 13
4 I READ
40514 14
4 I READ
40514 15
4 I READ
40514 16
4 I READ PT 3455A_Fail mPI 3455A_Fail Transmitter Failure
40515 1
4 I READ PT 3455B_Fail mPI 3455B_Fail Transmitter Failure
40515 2
4 I READ PT 3455C_Fail mPI 3455C_Fail Transmitter Failure
40515 3
40515 4
40515 5
40515 6
4 I READ PT 3097_Fail mPI 3097_Fail Transmitter Failure
40515 7
40515 8
40515 9
40515 10
40515 11
4 I READ TT 3296A_Fail mTI 3296A_Fail Transmitter Failure
40515 12
4 I READ TT 3296B_Fail mTI 3296B_Fail Transmitter Failure
40515 13
4 I READ TT 3296C_Fail mTI 3296C_Fail Transmitter Failure
40515 14
40515 15
40515 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
1 REV. A 15 / 16
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Dataset
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ PDT 3408_Fail mPDI 3408_Fail Transmitter Failure

40516 1
40516 2
40516 3
40516 4
40516 5
4 I READ LT 3401_Fail mLI 3401_Fail Transmitter Failure
40516 6
4 I READ LT 3404_Fail mLI 3404_Fail Transmitter Failure
40516 7
40516 8
40516 9
40516 10
40516 11
40516 12
40516 13
40516 14
40516 15
40516 16
40517 1
4 I READ TT 3295_Fail mTI 3295_Fail Transmitter Failure
40517 2
40517 3
40517 4
4 I READ XT 3293_Fail mXT 3293_Fail Transmitter Failure
40517 5
4 I READ FT 3290_Fail mFI 3290_Fail Transmitter Failure
40517 6
4 I READ TE 3531_Fail mLCP_TEMP_Fail Transmitter Failure
40517 7
40517 8
40517 9
40517 10
40517 11
40517 12
40517 13
40517 14
40517 15
40517 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
1 REV. A 16 / 17
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Dataset
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)

40518 1
40518 2
40518 3
40518 4
4 I READ FT 3296_Fail mFI 3296_Fail Transmitter Failure
40518 5
40518 6
40518 7
4 I READ
40518 8
4 I READ
40518 9
4 I READ
40518 10
4 I READ
40518 11
4 I READ
40518 12
4 I READ
40518 13
4 I READ
40518 14
4 I READ
40518 15
4 I READ
40518 16
4 I READ OVPALL 3403 mOVPALL 3403 OVERRIDE ACTIVE - Alarm
40519 1
4 I READ OVPAHH 3455 mOVPAHH 3455 OVERRIDE ACTIVE - Alarm
40519 2
40519 3
4 I READ OVTAHH 3296 mOVTAHH 3296 OVERRIDE ACTIVE - Alarm
40519 4
40519 5
4 I READ OVPALL 3451 mOVPALL 3451 OVERRIDE ACTIVE - Alarm
40519 6
40519 7
4 I READ OVPAH 3215 mOVPAH 3215 OVERRIDE ACTIVE - Alarm
40519 8
4 I READ
40519 9
4 I READ
40519 10
4 I READ
40519 11
4 I READ
40519 12
4 I READ
40519 13
4 I READ
40519 14
4 I READ
40519 15
4 I READ
40519 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
1 REV. A 17 / 18
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Dataset
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ LAL 3401 mLAL 3401 RUN-DOWN TANK LEVEL LOW ALARM
SOS8628432/1 40520 1
4 I READ XA 3232 mXA 3232 L.O. AUX.PUMP NOT START.ALARM
SOS8628432/1 40520 2
4 I READ XA 3233 mXA 3233 L.O. AUX.PUMP NOT STOP.ALARM
SOS8628432/1 40520 3
4 I READ LAL 3404 mLAL 3404 LUBE OIL RESERVOIR LEVEL LOW ALARM
SOS8628432/1 40520 4
4 I READ PDAH 3094 mPDAH 3094 COMPRESSOR SUCTION DIFF. PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628462/1 40520 5
4 I READ PDAH 3408 mPDAH 3408 L.O. FILTERS DIFF. PRESSURE LOW ALARM
SOS8628432/1 40520 6
4 I READ PDAH 3447 mPDAH 3447 NITROGEN FILTER DIFF. PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40520 7
4 I READ PDAH 3442 mPDAH 3442 SEAL GAS LIQUID SEP. DIFF. PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40520 8
4 I READ PDAH 3465 mPDAH 3465 SEAL GAS FILTER DIFF. PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40520 9
4 I READ PAL 3401 mPAL 3401 CONTROL OIL HEADER PRESSURE LOW ALARM
SOS8628432/1 40520 10
4 I READ PAL 3411 mPAL 3411 L.O. HEADER PRESS. UP-STREAM COOLERS LOW ALARM
SOS8628432/1 40520 11
4 I READ PAL 3449 mPAL 3449 NITROGEN TO TERTIARY SEALS LOW ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40520 12
4 I READ PAH 3449 mPAH 3449 NITROGEN TO TERTIARY SEALS HIGH ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40520 13
4 I READ PAH 3455A mPAH 3455A COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40520 14
4 I READ PAH 3455B mPAH 3455B COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40520 15
4 I READ PAH 3455C mPAH 3455C COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40520 16
4 I READ PSH 3460A mPAH 3460A COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40521 1
4 I READ PAH 3460B mPAH 3460B COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40521 2
4 I READ PAH 3460C mPAH 3460C COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40521 3
4 I READ TSH 3740 mTAH 3740 LUBE OIL HEADER TEMPERATURE CONTROL
SOS8628432/1 40521 4
4 I READ TAL 3744 mTAL 3744 LUBE OIL RESERVOIR TEMPERATURE LOW ALARM
SOS8628432/1 40521 5
4 I READ TAH 3744 mTAH 3744 LUBE OIL RESERVOIR TEMPERATURE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628432/1 40521 6
4 I READ TAH 3763 mTAH 3763 SEAL GAS ELECTRIC HEATER - CUT OUT-HIGH ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40521 7
4 I READ PAH 3455 mPAH 3455 COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40521 8
4 I READ PAH 3460 mPAH 3460 COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40521 9
4 I READ TALL 3744 mTALL 3744 LUBE OIL RESERVOIR TEMPERATURE LOW LOW ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40521 10
4 I READ - mESDR_ACT ESD SAFETY RELAY ACTIVE
40521 11
4 I READ XA 3705 <2> mXA 3705 <2> BN Rack1 Fault
40521 12
4 I READ XA 3706 <2> mXA 3706 <2> BN Rack2 Fault
40521 13
4 I READ XA 3704 <2> mXA 3704 <2> Power Fault
40521 14
4 I READ XAF_3FAN mXAF_3FAN Fan Fault
40521 15
4 I READ XA 3192 mXA 3192 ETG FAULT
40521 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
1 REV. A 18 / 19
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Dataset
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ PT 3455A_Disc mPI 3455A_Disc BCL 456/A COMPR DISCH END PRIM. VENT PRESS
SOS8628460/1 40522 1
4 I READ PT 3455B_Disc mPI 3455B_Disc BCL 456/B COMPR DISCH END PRIM. VENT PRESS
SOS8628460/1 40522 2
4 I READ PT 3455C_Disc mPI 3455C_Disc BCL 456/C COMPR DISCH END PRIM. VENT PRESS
SOS8628460/1 40522 3
4 I READ PT 3460A_Disc mPI 3460A_Disc BCL 456/A COMPR DISCH END PRIM. VENT PRESS
SOS8628460/1 40522 4
4 I READ PT 3460B_Disc mPI 3460B_Disc BCL 456/B COMPR DISCH END PRIM. VENT PRESS
SOS8628460/1 40522 5
4 I READ PT 3460C_Disc mPI 3460C_Disc BCL 456/C COMPR DISCH END PRIM. VENT PRESS
SOS8628460/1 40522 6
4 I READ PT 3403A_Disc mPI 3403A_Disc LUBE OIL HEADER PRESSURE TRANSMITTER - Di
SOS8628431/1 40522 7
4 I READ PT 3403B_Disc mPI 3403B_Disc LUBE OIL HEADER PRESSURE TRANSMITTER - Di
SOS8628431/1 40522 8
4 I READ PT 3403C_Disc mPI 3403C_Disc LUBE OIL HEADER PRESSURE TRANSMITTER - Di
SOS8628431/1 40522 9
4 I READ TT 3296A_Disc mTI 3296A_Disc COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE TRANSMITT
SOS8628462/1 40522 10
4 I READ TT 3296B_Disc mTI 3296B_Disc COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE TRANSMITT
SOS8628462/1 40522 11
4 I READ TT 3296C_Disc mTI 3296C_Disc COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE TRANSMITT
SOS8628462/1 40522 12
4 I READ PAL 3403 mPAL 3403 LUBE OIL HEADER PRESSURE LOW ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40522 13
4 I READ PAH 3432 mPAH 3432 EXHAUST STEAM PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628450/1 40522 14
4 I READ XA 3230 mXA 3230 L.O. Heater Not Started Alarm
SOS8628432/1 40522 15
4 I READ XA 3235 mXS 3235 VALVE XY 3030 SOLENOID VALVE DISCREPANCY ALARM
40522 16
4 I READ XA 3236 mXS 3236 VALVE XY 3031 SOLENOID VALVE DISCREPANCY ALARM
40523 1
4 I READ BRANCHB_FAIL mBRANCHB_FAIL Trip valve online test branch B failed
40523 2
4 I READ BRANCHA_FAIL mBRANCHA_FAIL Fail from trip valve start-up test
40523 3
4 I READ XA 3208 mXS 3208 Both branches failure special procedure
40523 4
4 I READ UAL 3101 mUSL 3101_P LOW STEAM QUALITY ALARM
40523 5
4 I READ PAL 3430 mPAL 3430 EXHAUST STEAM PRESSURE LOW ALARM
SOS8628450/1 40523 6
4 I READ PAH 3423 mPAH 3423 HP STEAM HEADER PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628450/1 40523 7
4 I READ PAH 3444 mPAH 3444 GAS AMPLIFIED HIGH ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40523 8
4 I READ TAH 3760 mTAH 3760 HP STEAM HEADER TEMPERATURE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628450/1 40523 9
4 I READ PDSH 3472 <2> mPDSH 3472 <2> BALANCING LINE PRESSURE TRANSMITTER High
SOS8628460/1 40523 10
4 I READ PAH 3463 mPAH 3463 SEAL GAS BALANCING LINE PRESSURE TRANSMITT
SOS8628460/1 40523 11
4 I READ XS 3235 mXA 3235 VALVE XY1030 SOLENOID VALVE DISCREPANCY AL
40523 12
4 I READ XS 3236 mXA 3236 VALVE XY1031 SOLENOID VALVE DISCREPANCY AL
40523 13
4 I READ PSL 3471 mPAL 3471 CONTROL OIL HEADER PRESSURE TRANSMITTER L
SOS8628437/1 40523 14
4 I READ XA 3231 mXA 3231 L.O. Heater Not Stoped Alarm
40523 15
SOS8628450/1 4 I READ TSL 3101 mTAL 3101 HP Steam low temperature

40523 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
1 REV. A 19 / 20
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Dataset
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ TAH 3765 mTAH 3765 SEAL GAS TEMPERATURE - HIGH ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40524 1
4 I READ TAL 3765 mTAL 3765 SEAL GAS TEMPERATURE - LOW ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40524 2
4 I READ - mALARM COMMON ALARMS
40524 3
4 I READ PDAH 3461 mPDAH 3461 COMPR. PRIM. VENT/BAL. LINE DIFF. PRESS. -
SOS8628460/1 40524 4
4 I READ TAH 3296 mTAH 3296 BCL456/A DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE-HIGH ALARM
SOS8628462/1 40524 5
4 I READ TAH 3764 mTAH 3764 SEAL GAS ELECTRIC HEATER - TEMP. LIMITER-HIGH ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40524 6
4 I READ TAHH 3763 mTAHH 3763 SEAL GAS ELECTRIC HEATER - CUT OUT-HIGH HIGH ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40524 7
4 I READ XS 3306_Disc mXS 3306_Disc TRIP VALVE XY-3306 DISCREPANCY ALARM (0=Alm)
40524 8
40524 9
40524 10
40524 11
4 I READ UAL 3101 mUAL 3101 HP STEAM TEMPERATURE LOW ALARM
SOS8628450/1 40524 12
4 I READ PDAH 3426 mPDAH 3426 DIF.PRESS.WHEEL CHAMBER TO EXHAUST HIGH ALARM
SOS8628450/1 40524 13
4 I READ XA 3745 mXA 3745 L.O. Heater Not Started after command Alarm
SOS8628432/1 40524 14
4 I READ TAHH 3764 mTAHH 3764 SEAL GAS ELECTRIC HEATER - TEMP. LIMIT.-HIGH HIGH ALARM
SOS8628460/1 40524 15
4 I READ TAH 3746 mTAH 3746 LUBE OIL HEADER TEMPERATURE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40524 16
4 I READ TAH 3747 mTAH 3747 RUNDOWN TANK TEMPERATURE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40525 1
4 I READ TAL 3746 mTAL 3746 LUBE OIL HEADER TEMPERATURE LOW ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40525 2
4 I READ TAL 3747 mTAL 3747 RUNDOWN TANK TEMPERATURE LOW ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40525 3
4 I READ PAH 3215 mPAH 3215 COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE PRESSURE HIGH ALARM
40525 4
4 I READ - mPA 3403 Transmitter discrepancy 1oo3
40525 5
40525 6
40525 7
4 I READ - mTA 3296 Transmitter discrepancy 1oo3
40525 8
4 I READ - mPA 3449 Transmitter Discrepancy 1oo2
40525 9
4 I READ
40525 10
4 I READ
40525 11
4 I READ
40525 12
4 I READ
40525 13
4 I READ
40525 14
4 I READ
40525 15
4 I READ
40525 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
1 ADD. A 20 / 21
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Dataset
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ TAH 3716 mTI 3716H STEAM TURBINE THRUST BEARING ACTIVE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40526 1
SOS8628431/1 40526 2
4 I READ TAH 3718 mTI 3718H STEAM TURB. THRUST BRG NON ACTIVE SIDE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40526 3
4 I READ TAH 3719 mTI 3719H STEAM TURB. THRUST BRG NON ACTIVE SIDE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40526 4
4 I READ TAH 3720 mTI 3720H STEAM TURBINE JOURNAL BEARING HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40526 5
4 I READ TAH 3721 mTI 3721H STEAM TURBINE JOURNAL BEARING TEMP.HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40526 6
SOS8628431/1 40526 7
SOS8628431/1 40526 8
SOS8628431/1 40526 9
4 I READ TAH 3727 mTI 3727H COMPRESSOR JOURNAL BRG HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40526 10
SOS8628431/1 40526 11
4 I READ TAH 3729 mTI 3729H COMPR.THRUST BRG.NON-ACT. SIDE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40526 12
4 I READ TAH 3730 mTI 3730H COMPR.THRUST BRG.NON-ACT. SIDE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40526 13
4 I READ TAH 3731 mTI 3731H COMPR.THRUST BRG.ACTIVE SIDE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40526 14
SOS8628431/1 40526 15
SOS8628431/1 40526 16
SOS8628431/1 40527 1
SOS8628431/1 40527 2
4 I READ VAH 3103Y mVT 3103Y STEAM TURB. JOURNAL BRG NON DRIVE END Y RAD. HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40527 3
4 I READ ZAH 3001B mZAH 3001BH STEAM TURBINE SHAFT AXIAL HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40527 4
4 I READ ZAH 3001A mZAH 3001AH STEAM TURBINE SHAFT AXIAL HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40527 5
4 I READ VAH 3102Y mVT 3102YH STEAM TURBINE JOURNAL BRG DRIVE END Y RAD. HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40527 6
4 I READ VAH 3105Y mVT 3105YH COMPRESSOR VIBRATION Y PROBE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40527 7
4 I READ VAH 3102X mVT 3102XH STEAM TURBINE JOURNAL BRG DRIVE END X RAD. HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40527 8
4 I READ ZAH 3002B mZAH 3002BH COMPRESSOR DISPLACEMENT PROBE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40527 9
4 I READ VAH 3103X mVT 3103XH STEAM TURB. JOURNAL BRG NON DRIVE END X RAD. HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40527 10
4 I READ ZAH 3002A mZAH 3002AH COMPRESSOR DISPLACEMENT PROBE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40527 11
4 I READ VAH 3105X mVT 3105XH COMPRESSOR VIBRATION X PROBE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40527 12
4 I READ VAH 3104X mVT 3104XH COMPRESSOR VIBRATION X PROBE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40527 13
4 I READ VAH 3104Y mVT 3104YH COMPRESSOR VIBRATION Y PROBE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40527 14
4 I READ
40527 15
4 I READ
40527 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
1 ADD. A 21 / 22
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Dataset
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ - mCPU_Fail
Cpu Card Failure 40528 1
4 I READ - mIOCard_Fail
I/O Card Failure 40528 2
4 I READ
40528 3
4 I READ
40528 4
4 I READ
40528 5
4 I READ
40528 6
4 I READ
40528 7
4 I READ
40528 8
4 I READ
40528 9
4 I READ
40528 10
4 I READ
40528 11
4 I READ
40528 12
4 I READ
40528 13
4 I READ
40528 14
4 I READ
40528 15
4 I READ
40528 16
4 I READ
40529 1
4 I READ
40529 2
4 I READ
40529 3
4 I READ
40529 4
4 I READ
40529 5
4 I READ
40529 6
4 I READ
40529 7
4 I READ
40529 8
4 I READ
40529 9
4 I READ
40529 10
4 I READ
40529 11
4 I READ
40529 12
4 I READ
40529 13
4 I READ
40529 14
4 I READ
40529 15
4 I READ
40529 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
1 ADD. A 22 / 23
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Dataset
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ
40530 1
4 I READ
40530 2
4 I READ
40530 3
4 I READ
40530 4
4 I READ
40530 5
4 I READ
40530 6
4 I READ
40530 7
4 I READ
40530 8
4 I READ
40530 9
4 I READ
40530 10
4 I READ
40530 11
4 I READ
40530 12
4 I READ
40530 13
4 I READ
40530 14
4 I READ
40530 15
4 I READ
40530 16
4 I READ
40531 1
4 I READ
40531 2
4 I READ
40531 3
4 I READ
40531 4
4 I READ
40531 5
4 I READ
40531 6
4 I READ
40531 7
4 I READ
40531 8
4 I READ
40531 9
4 I READ
40531 10
4 I READ
40531 11
4 I READ
40531 12
4 I READ
40531 13
4 I READ
40531 14
4 I READ
40531 15
4 I READ
40531 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
1 ADD. A 23 / 24
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Dataset
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ
40532 1
4 I READ
40532 2
4 I READ
40532 3
4 I READ
40532 4
4 I READ
40532 5
4 I READ
40532 6
4 I READ
40532 7
4 I READ
40532 8
4 I READ
40532 9
4 I READ
40532 10
4 I READ
40532 11
4 I READ
40532 12
4 I READ
40532 13
4 I READ
40532 14
4 I READ
40532 15
4 I READ
40532 16
4 I READ
40533 1
4 I READ
40533 2
4 I READ
40533 3
4 I READ
40533 4
4 I READ
40533 5
4 I READ
40533 6
4 I READ
40533 7
4 I READ
40533 8
4 I READ
40533 9
4 I READ
40533 10
4 I READ
40533 11
4 I READ
40533 12
4 I READ
40533 13
4 I READ
40533 14
4 I READ
40533 15
4 I READ
40533 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
1 ADD. A 24 / 25
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Dataset
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ
40534 1
4 I READ
40534 2
4 I READ
40534 3
4 I READ
40534 4
4 I READ
40534 5
4 I READ
40534 6
4 I READ
40534 7
4 I READ
40534 8
4 I READ
40534 9
4 I READ
40534 10
4 I READ
40534 11
4 I READ
40534 12
4 I READ
40534 13
4 I READ
40534 14
4 I READ
40534 15
4 I READ
40534 16
4 I READ PAHH 3215 mPSHH 3215_trip COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE PRESSURE HIGH HIGH TRIP
40535 1
SOS8628462/1 4 I READ TAHH 3296 mTSHH 3296_trip BCL456/A DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE HIGH HIGH TRIP
40535 2
SOS8628431/1 4 I READ VAHH 3107 mVSHH 3107_trip COMMON RADIAL VIBR. HIGH HIGH TRIP
40535 3
4 I READ PAHH 3455 mPSHH 3455_trip COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628460/1 40535 4
4 I READ SAHH 3052 mSSHH 3052_trip STEAM TURBINE OVERSPEED TRIP
SOS8628437/1 40535 5
4 I READ XA 3048 <2> mXS 3048_trip <2> EXTERNAL TRIP TO COMPRESSOR
40535 6
4 I READ XHA 3318 mXHS 3318_trip UCP EMERGENCY PUSH BUTTON TRIP
40535 7
4 I READ PALL 3403 mPSLL 3403_trip LUBE OIL HEADER PRESSURE LOW LOW TRIP
SOS8628431/1 40535 8
4 I READ PAHH 3460 mPSHH 3460_trip COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628460/1 40535 9
4 I READ PALL 3471 mPSLL 3471_trip CONTROL OIL HEADER PRESSURE LOW LOW TRIP
SOS8628437/1 40535 10
4 I READ ZAHH 3004 <2> mZSHH 3004_trip <2> BEARINGS AXIAL DISPLAC. COMMON TRIP
SOS8628431/1 40535 11
4 I READ XHA 3120 mXHS 3120_trip EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN TRIP
SOS8628437/1 40535 12
4 I READ PAHH 3422 mPSHH 3422_trip HP STEAM HEADER PRESSURE HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628450/1 40535 13
4 I READ XA 3047A mXS 3047A_trip PLANT ESD
SOS8628437/1 40535 14
4 I READ XA 3214_trip mXS 3214_trip TRIP VALVE START.UP TEST ABORT INTERNO S.W.
40535 15
SOS8628450/1 4 I READ UALL 3101 mUSLL 3101_trip LOW STEAM QUALITY INTERNO S.W.
40535 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
2 General revision LINGUA - LANG.
1 ADD. A 25 / 26
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Dataset
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ PDAHH 3426 mPDSHH 3426_trip DIF.PRESS.WHEEL CHAMBER TO EXHAUST HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628450/1 40536 1
SOS8628460/1 4 I READ PALL 3451 mPSLL 3451_trip NITROGEN TO TERTIARY SEALS LOW LOW TRIP
40536 2
SOS8628462/1 4 I READ XZSO 3030_trip mXZSO_ 3030_trip VALVE OPEN LIM SWITCH TRIP
40536 3
SOS8628462/1 4 I READ XZSO 3031_trip mXZSO_ 3031_trip VALVE OPEN LIM SWITCH TRIP
40536 4
4 I READ HS 3044 mXHS 3044_trip EMERGENCY SHUT DOWN FROM DCS/VCCR
40536 5
4 I READ GOV_FAILURE_trip mGOV_FAILURE_trip Max. time excededin critical band
40536 6
4 I READ UNDERSPEED_trip mUNDERSPEED_trip Max. time excededin critical band
40536 7
4 I READ TRP_MAXTIME_CRTBAND_trip
mTRP_MAXTIME_CRTBAND_trip
Max. time excededin critical band
40536 8
4 I READ ST_TRP_PICKUP_DISCR mST_TRP_PICKUP_DISCR
Speed pick up descrepancy trip
40536 9
4 I READ ST_TRP_PICKUP_FLT mST_TRP_PICKUP_FLT Speed pick up descrepancy trip
40536 10
4 I READ ST_TRP_STD_CTRL mST_TRP_STD_CTRL Overspeed trip
40536 11
4 I READ ST_TRP_TURB_OVERSPEED
mST_TRP_TURB_OVERSPEED
Overspeed trip
40536 12
4 I READ COM_TRIP_DEL mCOM_TRIP_DEL Common trip signal Delayed
40536 13
4 I READ TRIP_SEQ mTRIP_SEQ Steam Turbine Common Trip
40536 14
4 I READ
40536 15
4 I READ
40536 16
4 I READ
40537 1
4 I READ
40537 2
4 I READ
40537 3
4 I READ
40537 4
4 I READ
40537 5
4 I READ
40537 6
4 I READ
40537 7
4 I READ
40537 8
4 I READ
40537 9
4 I READ
40537 10
4 I READ
40537 11
4 I READ
40537 12
4 I READ
40537 13
4 I READ
40537 14
4 I READ
40537 15
4 I READ
40537 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
1 ADD. A 26 / 27
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Dataset
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 1 READ
40538 1
4 I READ
40538 2
4 I READ
40538 3
4 I READ
40538 4
4 I READ
40538 5
4 I READ
40538 6
4 I READ
40538 7
4 I READ
40538 8
4 I READ
40538 9
4 I READ
40538 10
5 I READ
40538 11
6 I READ
40538 12
7 I READ
40538 13
8 I READ
40538 14
9 I READ
40538 15
10 I READ
40538 16
11 I READ
40539 1
12 I READ
40539 2
13 I READ
40539 3
14 I READ
40539 4
4 I READ
40539 5
4 I READ
40539 6
4 I READ
40539 7
4 I READ
40539 8
4 I READ
40539 9
4 I READ
40539 10
4 I READ
40539 11
4 I READ
40539 12
4 I READ
40539 13
4 I READ
40539 14
4 I READ
40539 15
4 I READ
40539 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
1 ADD. A 27 / 28
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Dataset
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ PSHH 3215_trip_FO mPSHH 3215_trip_FO COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE PRESSURE HIGH HIGH TRIP
40540 1
4 I READ PSLL 3451_trip_FO mPSLL 3451_trip_FO NITROGEN TO TERTIARY SEALS LOW LOW TRIP
SOS8628460/1 40540 2
4 I READ PDSHH 3426_trip_FO mPDSHH 3426_trip_FO DIF.PRESS.WHEEL CHAMBER TO EXHAUST HIGH HIGH TRIP
40540 2
SOS8628450/1 4 I READ PSHH 3422_trip_FO mPSHH 3422_trip_FO HP STEAM HEADER PRESSURE HIGH HIGH TRIP
40540 4
SOS8628460/1 4 I READ PSHH 3455_trip_FO mPSHH 3455_trip_FO COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE HIGH HIGH TRIP
40540 5
SOS8628460/1 4 I READ PSHH 3460_trip_FO mPSHH 3460_trip_FO COMPRESSOR PRIMARY VENT PRESSURE HIGH HIGH TRIP
40540 6
SOS8628431/1 4 I READ PSLL 3403_trip_FO mPSLL 3403_trip_FO LUBE OIL HEADER PRESSURE LOW LOW TRIP
40540 7
SOS8628437/1 4 I READ PSLL 3471_trip_FO mPSLL 3471_trip_FO CONTROL OIL HEADER PRESSURE LOW LOW TRIP
40540 8
SOS8628437/1 4 I READ SSHH 3052_trip_FO mSSHH 3052_trip_FO STEAM TURBINE OVERSPEED TRIP
40540 9
4 I READ TSHH 3296_trip_FO <2> mTSHH 3296_trip_FO <2>BCL456/A DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE HIGH HIGH TRIP
40540 10
4 I READ UNDERSPEED_trip_FO mUNDERSPEED_trip_FO Max. time excededin critical band
40540 11
SOS8628450/1 4 I READ USLL 3102_trip_FO mUSLL 3102_trip_FO LOW STEAM QUALITY
40540 12
SOS8628431/1 4 I READ VSHH 3107_trip_FO mVSHH 3107_trip_FO COMMON RADIAL VIBR. HIGH HIGH TRIP
40540 13
SOS8628437/1 4 I READ XHS 3120_trip_FO mXHS 3120_trip_FO EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN TRIP
40540 14
4 I READ XHS 3318_trip_FO mXHS 3318_trip_FO UCP EMERGENCY PUSH BUTTON TRIP
40540 15
SOS8628437/1 4 I READ XS 3047A_trip_FO mXS 3047A_trip_FO PLANT ESD
40540 16
4 I READ mXHS1044_trip_FO
EMERGENCY SHUT DOWN FROM DCS/VCCR 40541 1
4 I READ XS 3048_trip_FO <2> mXS 3048_trip_FO <2> EXTERNAL TRIP TO COMPRESSOR
40541 2
4 I READ XS 3214_trip_FO mXS 3214_trip_FO Trip valve start-up test abort
40541 3
SOS8628462/1 4 I READ XZSO_ 3030_trip_FO mXZSO_ 3030_trip_FO VALVE OPEN LIM SWITCH TRIP
40541 4
SOS8628462/1 4 I READ XZSO_ 3031_trip_FO mXZSO_ 3031_trip_FO VALVE OPEN LIM SWITCH TRIP
40541 5
SOS8628431/1 4 I READ ZSHH 3004_trip_FO mZSHH 3004_trip_FO BEARINGS AXIAL DISPLAC. COMMON TRIP
40541 6
4 I READ ST_TRP_PICKUP_DISCR_FO
mST_TRP_PICKUP_DISCR_FO
Cumultive Trip valve congruency
40541 7
4 I READ ST_TRP_PICKUP_FLT_FO mST_TRP_PICKUP_FLT_FO
40541 8
4 I READ ST_TRP_TURB_OVERSPEED_FO
mST_TRP_TURB_OVERSPEED_FO
40541 9
4 I READ ST_TRP_STD_CTRL_FO mST_TRP_STD_CTRL_FOCumultive Trip valve congruency
40541 10
4 I READ TRP_MAXTIME_CRTBAND_FO
mTRP_MAXTIME_CRTBAND_trip_FO
Max. time excededin critical band
40541 11
4 I READ GOV_FAILURE_trip_FO mGOV_FAILURE_trip_FO Max. time excededin critical band
40541 12
4 I READ
40541 13
4 I READ
40541 14
4 I READ
40541 15
4 I READ
40541 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
1 ADD. A 28 / 29
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Dataset
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ
40542 1
4 I READ
40542 2
4 I READ
40542 3
4 I READ
40542 4
4 I READ
40542 5
4 I READ
40542 6
4 I READ
40542 7
4 I READ
40542 8
4 I READ
40542 9
4 I READ
40542 10
4 I READ
40542 11
4 I READ
40542 12
4 I READ
40542 13
4 I READ
40542 14
4 I READ
40542 15
4 I READ
40542 16
4 I READ
40543 1
4 I READ
40543 2
4 I READ
40543 3
4 I READ
40543 4
4 I READ
40543 5
4 I READ
40543 6
4 I READ
40543 7
4 I READ
40543 8
4 I READ
40543 9
4 I READ
40543 10
4 I READ
40543 11
4 I READ
40543 12
4 I READ
40543 13
4 I READ
40543 14
4 I READ
40543 15
4 I READ
40543 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
1 ADD. A 29 / 30
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Dataset
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ
40544 1
4 I READ
40544 2
4 I READ
40544 3
4 I READ
40544 4
4 I READ
40544 5
4 I READ
40544 6
4 I READ
40544 7
4 I READ
40544 8
4 I READ
40544 9
4 I READ
40544 10
4 I READ
40544 11
4 I READ
40544 12
4 I READ
40544 13
4 I READ
40544 14
4 I READ
40544 15
4 I READ
40544 16
4 I READ - fVT 3101_ok KEY PHASOR PROBE PROXIMITOR
SOS8628431/1 40545 1
4 I READ - fVT 3102X_ok STEAM TURBINE VIBRATION X PROBE CHANNEL OK
SOS8628431/1 40545 2
4 I READ - fVT 3102X_alm STEAM TURBINE VIBRATION X PROBE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40545 3
4 I READ VAHH 3102X fVT 3102X_trp STEAM TURBINE VIBRATION X PROBE HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628431/1 40545 4
4 I READ - fVT 3103X_ok STEAM TURBINE VIBRATION X PROBE CHANNEL OK
SOS8628431/1 40545 5
4 I READ - fVT 3103X_alm STEAM TURBINE VIBRATION X PROBE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40545 6
4 I READ VAHH 3103X fVT 3103X_trp STEAM TURBINE VIBRATION X PROBE HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628431/1 40545 7
4 I READ - fZAH 3001A_ok STEAM TURBINE DISPLAC. PROBE CHANNEL OK.
SOS8628431/1 40545 8
4 I READ - fZAH 3001A_alm STEAM TURBINE DISPLAC. PROBE HIGH ALM.
SOS8628431/1 40545 9
4 I READ ZAHH 3001A fZAH 3001A_trp STEAM TURBINE DISPLAC. PROBE HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628431/1 40545 10
4 I READ - fVT 3102Y_ok STEAM TURBINE VIBRATION Y PROBE CHANNEL OK
SOS8628431/1 40545 11
4 I READ - fVT 3102Y_alm STEAM TURBINE VIBRATION Y PROBE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40545 12
4 I READ VAHH 3002Y fVT 3102Y_trp STEAM TURBINE VIBRATION Y PROBE HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628431/1 40545 13
4 I READ - fVT 3103Y_ok STEAM TURBINE VIBRATION Y PROBE CHANNEL OK
SOS8628431/1 40545 14
4 I READ - fVT 3103Y_alm STEAM TURBINE VIBRATION Y PROBE HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40545 15
SOS8628431/1 4 I READ VAHH 3103Y fVT 3103Y_trp STEAM TURBINE VIBRATION Y PROBE HIGH HIGH TRIP
40545 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
1 ADD. A 30 / 31
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Dataset
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ - fZAH 3001B_ok STEAM TURBINE DISPLAC. PROBE CHANNEL OK.

SOS8628431/1 40546 1
4 I READ - fZAH 3001B_alm STEAM TURBINE DISPLAC. PROBE HIGH ALM.
SOS8628431/1 40546 2
4 I READ ZAHH 3001B fZAH 3001B_trp STEAM TURBINE DISPLAC. PROBE HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628431/1 40546 3
4 I READ - fVT 3104X_ok COMPRESSOR VIBRATION X PROBE CHANNEL OK
SOS8628431/1 40546 4
4 I READ - fVT 3104X_alm COMPRESSOR VIBRATION X PROBE HIGH ALM.
SOS8628431/1 40546 5
4 I READ VAHH 3104X fVT 3104X_trp COMPRESSOR VIBRATION X PROBE HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628431/1 40546 6
4 I READ - fVT 3105X_ok COMPRESSOR VIBRATION X PROBE CHANNEL OK
SOS8628431/1 40546 7
4 I READ - fVT 3105X_alm COMPRESSOR VIBRATION X PROBE HIGH HIGH ALM.
SOS8628431/1 40546 8
4 I READ VAHH 3105X fVT 3105X_trp COMPRESSOR VIBRATION X PROBE HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628431/1 40546 9
4 I READ - fZAH 3002A_ok COMPRESSOR DISPLACEMENT PROBE CHANNEL OK
SOS8628431/1 40546 10
4 I READ - fZAH 3002A_alm COMPRESSOR DISPLACEMENT PROBE HIGH ALM.
SOS8628431/1 40546 11
4 I READ ZAHH 3002A fZAH 3002A_trp COMPRESSOR DISPLACEMENT PROBE HIGH HIGH ALM.
SOS8628431/1 40546 12
4 I READ - fVT 3104Y_ok COMPRESSOR VIBRATION Y PROBE CHANNEL OK
SOS8628431/1 40546 13
4 I READ - fVT 3104Y_alm COMPRESSOR VIBRATION Y PROBE HIGH ALM.
SOS8628431/1 40546 14
4 I READ VAHH 3104Y fVT 3104Y_trp COMPRESSOR VIBRATION Y PROBE HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628431/1 40546 15
4 I READ - fVT 3105Y_ok COMPRESSOR VIBRATION Y PROBE CHANNEL OK
SOS8628431/1 40546 16
4 I READ - fVT 3105Y_alm COMPRESSOR VIBRATION Y PROBE HIGH ALM.
SOS8628431/1 40547 1
4 I READ VAHH 3105Y fVT 3105Y_trp COMPRESSOR VIBRATION Y PROBE HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628431/1 40547 2
4 I READ - fZAH 3002B_ok COMPRESSOR DISPLACEMENT PROBE CHANNEL OK
SOS8628431/1 40547 3
4 I READ - fZAH 3002B_alm COMPRESSOR DISPLACEMENT PROBE HIGH ALM.
SOS8628431/1 40547 4
4 I READ ZAHH 3002B fZAH 3002B_trp COMPRESSOR DISPLACEMENT PROBE HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628431/1 40547 5
4 I READ - fTI 3716_ok STEAMTURBINE RTD CHANNEL OK.
SOS8628431/1 40547 6
4 I READ - fTI 3716_alm STEAMTURBINE RTD HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40547 7
4 I READ TAHH 3716 fTI 3716_trp STEAMTURBINE RTD HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628431/1 40547 8
SOS8628431/1 40547 9
SOS8628431/1 40547 10
SOS8628431/1 40547 11
SOS8628431/1 40547 12
SOS8628431/1 40547 13
SOS8628431/1 40547 14
SOS8628431/1 40547 15
SOS8628431/1 4 I READ - fTI 3719_alm STEAMTURBINE RTD HIGH ALARM

40547 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
1 ADD. A 31 / 32
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Dataset
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
SOS8628431/1 40548 1
SOS8628431/1 40548 2
SOS8628431/1 40548 3
SOS8628431/1 40548 4
SOS8628431/1 40548 5
SOS8628431/1 40548 6
SOS8628431/1 40548 7
SOS8628431/1 40548 8
SOS8628431/1 40548 9
SOS8628431/1 40548 10
SOS8628431/1 40548 11
SOS8628431/1 40548 12
SOS8628431/1 40548 13
SOS8628431/1 40548 14
SOS8628431/1 40548 15
SOS8628431/1 40548 16
4 I READ - fTI 3727_ok COMPRESSOR RTD CHANNEL OK
SOS8628431/1 40549 1
4 I READ - fTI 3727_alm COMPRESSOR RTD HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40549 2
4 I READ TAHH 3727 fTI 3727_trp COMPRESSOR RTD HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628431/1 40549 3
SOS8628431/1 40549 4
SOS8628431/1 40549 5
SOS8628431/1 40549 6
SOS8628431/1 40549 7
SOS8628431/1 40549 8
SOS8628431/1 40549 9
4 I READ - fTI 3730_ok COMPRESSOR THRUST RTD CHANNEL OK
SOS8628431/1 40549 10
4 I READ - fTI 3730_alm COMPRESSOR THRUST RTD HIGH ALARM
SOS8628431/1 40549 11
4 I READ TAHH 3730 fTI 3730_trp COMPRESSOR THRUST RTD HIGH HIGH TRIP
SOS8628431/1 40549 12
SOS8628431/1 40549 13
SOS8628431/1 40549 14
SOS8628431/1 40549 15
SOS8628431/1 4 I READ - fTI 3732_ok COMPRESSOR THRUST RTD CHANNEL OK

40549 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
1 ADD. A 32 / 33
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Dataset
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)

SOS8628431/1 40550 1
SOS8628431/1 40550 2
SOS8628431/1 40550 3
SOS8628431/1 40550 4
SOS8628431/1 40550 5
SOS8628431/1 40550 6
SOS8628431/1 40550 7
SOS8628431/1 40550 8
SOS8628431/1 40550 9
SOS8628431/1 40550 10
SOS8628431/1 40550 11
4 I READ <2> <2> <2>
<2> 40550 12
4 I READ
40550 13
4 I READ
40550 14
4 I READ
40550 15
4 I READ
40550 16
4 I READ
40551 1
4 I READ
40551 2
4 I READ
40551 3
4 I READ
40551 4
4 I READ
40551 5
4 I READ
40551 6
4 I READ
40551 7
4 I READ
40551 8
4 I READ
40551 9
4 I READ
40551 10
4 I READ
40551 11
4 I READ
40551 12
4 I READ
40551 13
4 I READ
40551 14
4 I READ
40551 15
4 I READ
40551 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
1 ADD. A 33 / 34
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Dataset
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ
40552 1
4 I READ
40552 2
4 I READ
40552 3
4 I READ
40552 4
4 I READ
40552 5
4 I READ
40552 6
4 I READ
40552 7
4 I READ
40552 8
4 I READ
40552 9
4 I READ
40552 10
4 I READ
40552 11
4 I READ
40552 12
4 I READ
40552 13
4 I READ
40552 14
4 I READ
40552 15
4 I READ
40552 16
4 I READ
40553 1
4 I READ
40553 2
4 I READ
40553 3
4 I READ
40553 4
4 I READ
40553 5
4 I READ
40553 6
4 I READ
40553 7
4 I READ
40553 8
4 I READ
40553 9
4 I READ
40553 10
4 I READ
40553 11
4 I READ
40553 12
4 I READ
40553 13
4 I READ
40553 14
4 I READ
40553 15
4 I READ
40553 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
1 ADD. A 34 / 35
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Dataset
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I READ Special_Proc_DCS mSpecial_Proc_DCS Special procedure indication to DCS (SP=1) <2>

40554 1
4 I READ
40554 2
4 I READ
40554 3
4 I READ
40554 4
4 I READ
40554 5
4 I READ
40554 6
4 I READ
40554 7
4 I READ
40554 8
4 I READ
40554 9
4 I READ
40554 10
4 I READ
40554 11
4 I READ
40554 12
4 I READ
40554 13
4 I READ
40554 14
4 I READ
40554 15
4 I READ
40554 16
4 I WRITE NSR 3207 dNSR 3207 LO pump stop command from DCS
40555 1
4 I WRITE HS 3239 dHS 3239 Raise speed setpoint (DCS)
40555 2
4 I WRITE HS 3240 dHS 3240 Lower speed setpoint (DCS)
40555 3
4 I WRITE HS 3227 dHS 3227 Halt speed starting sequencing (DCS)
40555 4
4 I WRITE HS 3224 dHS 3224 Continue speed starting sequencing (DCS)
40555 5
4 I WRITE HS 3230 dHS 3230 Controlled S/D (DCS)
40555 6
4 I WRITE <2>
40555 7
4 I WRITE XHS -PT 3403A dXHS 3403a Override Command <2>
40555 8
4 I WRITE XHS -PT 3403B dXHS 3403b Override Command <2>
40555 9
4 I WRITE XHS -PT 3403C dXHS 3403c Override Command <2>
40555 10
40555 11
40555 12
40555 13
40555 14
40555 15
40555 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
1 ADD. A 35 / 36
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Dataset
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I WRITE XHS -TI 3296A dXHS 3296a Override Command <2>

40556 1
4 I WRITE XHS -TI 3296B dXHS 3296b Override Command <2>
40556 2
4 I WRITE XHS -TI 3296C dXHS 3296c Override Command <2>
40556 3
4 I WRITE HS -PT 3426 dHSPT 3426 Override Command <2>
40556 4
40556 5
40556 6
40556 7
4 I WRITE <2> <2> <2>
40556 8
4 I WRITE
40556 9
4 I WRITE XSO 3030 dXSO 3030 open suction isol. valve DCS
40556 10
4 I WRITE XSC 3030 dXSC 3030 close suction isol. valve DCS
40556 11
4 I WRITE XSO 3031 dXSO 3031 open discharge isol. valve DCS
40556 12
4 I WRITE XSC 3031 dXSC 3031 close discharge isol. valve DCS
40556 13
4 I WRITE
40556 14
4 I WRITE
40556 15
4 I WRITE
40556 16
4 I WRITE
40557 1
4 I WRITE
40557 2
4 I WRITE
40557 3
4 I WRITE
40557 4
4 I WRITE
40557 5
4 I WRITE
40557 6
4 I WRITE
40557 7
4 I WRITE
40557 8
4 I WRITE
40557 9
4 I WRITE
40557 10
4 I WRITE
40557 11
4 I WRITE
40557 12
4 I WRITE
40557 13
4 I WRITE
40557 14
4 I WRITE
40557 15
4 I WRITE
40557 16
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
1 ADD. A 36 / 37
Engineering Data
Data Tag
Dataset
(Bit 1 is LSB)
Registers)
4 I WRITE <2>
40558 1
4 I WRITE <2>
40558 2
4 I WRITE <2>
40558 3
4 I WRITE
40558 4
4 I WRITE
40558 5
4 I WRITE
40558 6
4 I WRITE
40558 7
4 I WRITE
40558 8
4 I WRITE
40558 9
4 I WRITE
40558 10
4 I WRITE
40558 11
4 I WRITE
40558 12
4 I WRITE
40558 13
4 I WRITE
40558 14
4 I WRITE
40558 15
4 I WRITE
40558 16
4 I WRITE WATCH DOG <2>
40559 1
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
<2>
Nuovo Pignone
COMMESSA - JOB
FIRENZE
1102313 / 1900533
ITEM 207K-300 / 207KT-300
UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM
1 ADD. A 37 / 37
Bernardi A.
Zipoli M.

CLIENTE - CUSTOMER
Nuovo Pignone Colt Engineering for Suncor Energy
LOCALITA' - PLANT LOCATION
FIRENZE
North of Fort McMurray – Alberta – CANADA
COMMESSA - JOB IMPIANTO - PLAN
1900533-4-5 Voyageur Hydrotreater GOHT#3, DHT#2, NHT#4
TITOLO - TITLE
STEAM TURBINE

GOVERNOR
CONFIGURATION WORKSHEET
ITEM 207K-300-200-100
1 GENERAL REVISION Bernardi A. Signorini A. Lotti C. 23-03-09 N. SOL45717 /4

0 EMESSO - ISSUED Bernardi A. Ortiz Neri M. Girezzi D. 12-08-08 LINGUA-LANG. PAGINA-SHEET
REV. DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION PREP'D CONT-CHK'D APP-APPR'D DATA-DATE A 1 / 2
SOSTITUISCE IL - REPLACES
© 2005 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Nuovo Pignone
FIRENZE
Summary
1. START-UP PARAMETERS ................................................................................................................... 3
2. OPERATING PARAMETERS................................................................................................................ 7
3. SPEED CONTROL PARAMETERS .................................................................................................... 13
4. KWATT CONTROL.............................................................................................................................. 15
5. INLET PRESSURE CONTROL ........................................................................................................... 17
6. EXTRACTION CONTROL ................................................................................................................... 18
7. CASCADE CONTROL......................................................................................................................... 19
9. PRIORITY LOGIC ................................................................................................................................ 22
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4
1 REVISED WHERE <1> LINGUA-LANG. PAGINA-SHEET
REV. DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION A 2 / 3

© 2005 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved SOSTITUITO DA - REPLACED BY
Nuovo Pignone
FIRENZE
1. START-UP PARAMETERS
1.1 GENERAL PARAMETERS
1.1.a) Minimum Governor speed (rpm) (Minimum Operating Speed) 7100
11550
1.1.b) Maximum Governor speed (rpm) (Maximum Continuous Speed)
They represent respectively the lower and the upper limit within which the turbine speed can vary, once
the start-up is over and the target speed is reached.
1.1.c) Synchronous speed (rpm) (no for mechanical drive) N/A
In the case of a generator drive it is the speed related to the mains frequency expressed in rpm.
1.1.d) 1st warm-up set point (rpm)

1500
It is the speed set point for the 1st warm-up. It can be obtained directly from the start-up diagram.
1.1.e) Start up target set point (rpm) 7100

It is the speed value at which the start-up sequence ends. In case of generator drive turbine it is often
set at 100.3% of synchronous speed. In case of mechanical drive turbine this value is usually set at the
Minimum Operating Speed, but any value in the range (Minimum Operating Speed - Maximum
Continuous Speed) is valid.
1.1.f) 2nd warm-up set point (Kwatt) (no for mechanical drive)
N/A
It is the power set point for the 2nd warm up (only in the case of a generator drive).
1.1.g) Minimum Power (Kwatt) (no for mechanical drive) N/A
It is valid only in the case of a generator drive.

It represents the min. power set point of the KWatt controller. It is used during normal stop to request the
generator breaker opening. Once synchronization is accomplished, the system shifts from speed control
to power control. The controller reaches the set point reported above in order to enable the generator to
output the "minimum power after synchronization" and prevent the “reverse power” trip.
1.1.h) First critical start (rpm) 5800

st
1.1.i) 1 Critical enable (GOHT, DHT) <1>
1.1.j) First critical stop (rpm) 6200
1.1.h) First critical start (rpm) 5600

st
1 Critical enable (NHT) <1>
1.1.j) First critical stop (rpm) 6000
The first critical start is the parameter that identifies the rpm value at the beginning of the first critical
band during the start-up phase, and can be obtained directly from the start-up diagram. The first critical
stop represents the rpm value at which the first critical band ends. The critical band presence or absence
is to be signaled through the check box.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4

Nuovo Pignone
FIRENZE
1.1.l) Second critical start (rpm) 6650

nd
1.1.m) 2 Critical enable <1>
1.1.n) second critical stop (rpm) 7050
The second critical start is the parameter that identifies the rpm value at the beginning of the second
critical band during the start-up phase, and can be obtained directly from the start-up diagram. The
second critical stop represents the rpm value at which the second critical band ends. The critical band
presence or absence is to be signaled through the check box.
Function of critical bands:

The governor shall allow the machine speed to be within speed critical bands only for the time necessary
to cross them. Moreover, it is possible to differentiate the acceleration ramp within these ranges in
relation to the normal value.
1.1.o) Hot start (sec) 18000
It represents the time in seconds below which the turbine is to be considered "hot".
See note 1.
1.1.p) Cold start (sec) 18000

It represents the time in seconds above which the turbine is to be considered "cold".
See note 1.
1.1.q) Manual slope (rpm/sec)

5
It represents the slope, in rpm per second, of the ramp with which it is possible to manually change the
speed set point.
1.1.r) Synchronous slope (rpm/sec) (no for mechanical drive) N/A
It is valid in the case of a generator drive.

It represents the slope, in rpm per second, of the ramp with which the speed set point is changed during
the synchronization phase.
Once UNICOS has sent the "permissive to synchronize" signal to the generator control panel (GCPP),
the synchronization is managed by this panel, which sends three different signals to UNICOS
(“Synchronizer enabled” followed by “Governor speed raise”, and “Governor speed lower”).
1.1.s) Normal stop slope (rpm/sec) 5
It represents the slope, in rpm per second, of the speed set point ramp during the Normal Stop phase
until the 1st warm up speed is reached.
1.1.t) 1st warm up Time Set (sec) 900
It represents the 1st warm up time maximum value (with cold turbine) in seconds.
NOTE 1: If Hot start < time elapsed from last shutdown < Cold start, then the governor carries out an
interpolation between the two reference values.
1.1.u) 2nd warm up Time Set (sec) (no for mechanical drive) N/A
It represents the 2nd warm up maximum value (with cold turbine) in seconds.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4

Nuovo Pignone
FIRENZE
nd
1.1.v) Min power for 2 warm-up (%) (no for mechanical drive) N/A
It represents the power minimum value, expressed in % of deviation from the SECOND WARM-UP
SETPOINT, in order to guarantee the achievement of the 2nd warm-up. If during the 2nd warm-up
phase, the power produced by the generator is different from this value, the 2nd warm-up time count is
stopped and an alarm is generated
1.2 SLOPE RATES
1.2.a) Rate to 1st warm up hot (rpm/sec) 5
It represents the slope, in rpm per second, of the speed set point ramp from zero to 1st warm up in case
of Hot Start conditions (see definition of Hot Start).
1.2.b) Rate to 1st warm up cold (rpm/sec) 5
It represents the slope, in rpm per second, of the speed set point ramp from zero to 1st warm up in case
of Cold Start conditions (see definition of Cold Start).
1.2.c) Rate to target hot (rpm/sec) 18.66
It represents the slope, in rpm per second, of the speed set point ramp from zero to target speed in case
of Hot Start conditions (see definition of Hot Start).
1.2.d) Rate to target cold (rpm/sec) 18.66
It represents the slope, in rpm per second, of the speed set point ramp from zero to target speed in case
of Cold Start conditions (see definition of Cold Start).
1.2.e) First critical hot (rpm/sec) 35
It represents the slope, in rpm per second, of the speed set point ramp within the range corresponding to
the first critical band, if the first critical band is enabled.
Reference is made to the hot start condition (see definition of hot start).
1.2.f) First critical cold (rpm/sec) 35
the first critical band, if the first critical band is enabled. Reference is made to the cold start condition
(see definition of cold start).
1.2.g) Second critical hot (rpm/sec) 35 <1>
the second critical band, if the second critical band is enabled. Reference is made to the hot start
condition (see definition of hot start).
1.2.h) Second critical cold (rpm/sec) 35 <1>
the second critical band, if the second critical band is enabled. Reference is made to the cold start
condition (see definition of cold start).
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4

Nuovo Pignone
FIRENZE
The figure below shows a diagram explaining the steam turbine start-up phase in the three conditions of
hot start, warm start, and cold start, as well as a diagram representing the phase of turbine normal stop.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4

Nuovo Pignone
FIRENZE
2. OPERATING PARAMETERS
30
2.1 NUMBER OF PULSES PER REVOLUTION
It represents the number of pulses per turbine driving shaft revolution. This value is used to obtain the
speed measurement in rpm.
2.2 START UP SELECTION
2.2.a) Manual: in this mode the speed set point increase and decrease as well as the HP valve
limiter opening and closing are carried out in manual way. The speed set point can be increased up to
the 1st warm up and, once the 1st warm up time is over, it can be increased up to target speed.
In this (and only this) mode it is possible to carry out the overspeed test.
2.2.b) Semi auto: in this mode the set point grows in an automatic way, whereas the HP valve limiter
is managed manually. The ramp interrupts at the 1st warm up.
To continue with the start up sequence, it is necessary to act on the CONTINUE command.
2.2.c) Auto: the sequence is fully automatic: the speed set point shall automatically follow the trend
reported in the start-up diagram in accordance with the parameters reported in section “Start-up
parameters”. The HP valve limiter, too, is managed automatically.
2.3 THRESHOLDS
2.3.a) Overspeed trip (rpm) 12650
It represents the threshold beyond which a steam turbine high high speed trip occurs.
Note: this function is not to be used as safety protection; however, an overspeed device separated from
the governor must be featured.
2.3.b) High speed (rpm) 12360
It represents the threshold beyond which a steam turbine high speed alarm is generated.
2.3.c) Turbine running (rpm) 250

It is the speed threshold below which the UNICOS governor considers the turbine at a standstill or
barring. It shall be a speed slightly higher than barring speed.
2.3.d) Time in critical band (sec) 100
It represents the maximum value (in seconds) of stay in the critical band region (1st or 2nd) during the
start-up phase, beyond which the UNICOS governor causes the steam turbine trip.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4

Nuovo Pignone
FIRENZE
2.4 GENERAL TURBINE SELECTION
2.4.a) GENERATOR DRIVE: parameter to be selected if the turbine is a generator drive. This check
box animates the following parameters (2.4.b-2.4.e).
2.4.b) Sliding pressure: parameter to be selected in the case of a turbogenerator. Once the parallel
connection (with the grid) is carried out, the pressure control on the HP valve shall be enabled. The HP
valve is gradually opened until full opening or until the pressure measured at the steam turbine inlet is
lower or equal to the pressure set point.
2.4.c) Droop enable: active only in parallel working with the grid.
If selected, it enables the droop type control.
It contributes to the opening or closing of the HP valve in function of the difference between the speed
measured and synchronous speed (rated frequency). Its contribution takes place if the above-mentioned
difference is higher than a dead band, which can be set and related to a gain, which can be set, too. This
check box animates the following parameters (2.4.d-2.4.e).
2.4.d) Droop DB (DEFAULT = 0.6%)
It represents the dead band of droop control intervention as percentage of synchronous speed.
2.4.e) Droop SAT (DEFAULT = 4%)
This value indicates the revolutions error percentage that takes the valve to 100% of travel range. If
Droop SAT = 1, the error of 1% upon revolutions corresponds to the contribution of 100% upon the
valve.
2.4.f) MECHANICAL DRIVE: parameter to be selected if the turbine is the driver of a compressor.
This check box animates the following parameters (2.4.g-2.4.l).
2.4.g) Syngas
In the Syngas type mechanical drive configuration, during the start-up and normal stop stages, speed
control is carried out acting on the HP valve (the LP valve is kept open and steam inlet pressure control
is disabled). On the other hand, once the start-up is over and under normal working conditions, speed
control is carried out acting on the LP valve (in this case, steam inlet pressure control is carried out
acting on the HP valve).
If this valve reaches its min. or max. limit, speed is controlled acting on the HP valve again.
2.4.h) External Cascade Control
If the corresponding check box is selected, the external CASCADE mode is enabled (valid in the case of
a mechanical drive).
The Cascade is external if the speed set point at the UNICOS governor is supplied by an external PID
controller: a typical case is a PIC controller external to UNICOS located on the compressor discharge
whose control variable represents the UNICOS governor set point. It is important to stress that this
modality must be selected even for any other controller implemented in the same PLC such as an
antisurge or process controller whose output drives the steam turbine speed: all those controllers must
be classified as External Cascade Control regardless their implementation.
The external controller output shall be converted to standardized range (0-1).
This check box animates the following parameter (2.4.i).
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4

Nuovo Pignone
FIRENZE
2.4.i) Span Selection
If the corresponding check box is selected, the UNICOS speed governor carries out its control action
interpreting the signal coming from the external PID in the following way: 0 = 0 RPM; 1 = Maximum
Continuous Speed. Set points lower than the Minimum Operating Speed, however, are not activated by
the governor.
If the corresponding check box is not selected, the UNICOS speed governor carries out its control action
within the Minimum Operating Speed (0) and Maximum Continuous Speed (1) range.
2.4.j) Internal Cascade Control
If the corresponding check box is selected, the internal CASCADE mode is enabled (valid in the case of
a mechanical drive). See explanatory diagram below.
The Cascade is internal if, unlike the external one, the controller supplying the speed set point to the
UNICOS governor is defined inside this latter (i.e. the relevant process variable is acquired by UNICOS).
The value shall be converted from 4 ÷ 20 mA to EU on the basis of MIN-MAX limit values (the limit
values can be modified in the section dealing with Cascade Control). It’s important to stress that Internal
Cascade Control doesn’t mean any other controller implemented in the same PLC such as an antisurge
or process controller: all those controllers must be classified as External Cascade Control regardless
their implementation.
This check box animates the following parameters (2.4.k-2.4.l).
2.4.k) Internal Cascade Control Set Point
If the corresponding check box is selected, in the case of internal CASCADE mode, the speed set point
to the UNICOS governor is a dynamic process variable (for example supplied by the DCS). The value
shall be converted from 4 ÷ 20 mA to EU entering the same cascade process variable limit values.
If the corresponding check box is not selected, then the above-mentioned speed set point is a static
variable defined within a register in the UNICOS governor, modifiable through the VDU.
2.4.l) Internal Cascade Raise-Lower Set Point
If the corresponding check box is selected, in Cascade mode two digital inputs external to the UNICOS
governor (for example coming from the DCS) are made available in order to raise / lower the Cascade
Controller set point.
The slope of the ramp on the basis of which this set point increases/decreases is defined on the
Cascade Control page at parameter Cascade ramp slope [rpm/sec].
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4

Nuovo Pignone
FIRENZE
Below you can find the EXTERNAL CASCADE and INTERNAL CASCADE mode diagrams.
UNICOS
TURBINE
SPEED
CASCADE
EXTERNAL CASCADE RAMP SLOPE PV
SET POINT
SIC
Internal Cascade PID SP
PROCESS VARIABLE +
PV +
MEASUREMENT
PID
HMI STATIC SP Minimum Control Speed
DYNAMIC
SET POINT INTERNAL/EXTERNAL

SELECTION CASCADE SELECTION
2.5 HP VALVE LIMITER CONTROL
2.5.a) Set point (Norm) (DEFAULT = 0) 0
It represents the set point assumed by the HP valve limiter in case of trip. This value is standardized
between 0 and 1 and expresses the valve opening percentage (0= 0%; 1=100%).
2.5.b) Lower Limit (Norm) (DEFAULT = 0) 0
It represents the lower limit assumed by the HP valve limiter. This value is standardized between 0 and 1
and expresses the valve opening percentage (0= 0%; 1=100%).
2.5.c) Upper Limit (Norm) (DEFAULT = 1) 1
It represents the upper limit assumed by the HP valve limiter. This value is standardized between 0 and
1 and expresses the valve opening percentage (0 = 0%; 1=100%).
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4

Nuovo Pignone
FIRENZE
2.5.d) Slope rates (Norm/sec) 0.05
It represents the slope of the ramp with which the UNICOS governor raises/lowers the HP valve limiter. It
is standardized between 0 and 1 in function of time (seconds).
2.5.e) 1st warm up Limit (Norm) 0.4
It represents the upper limit assumed by the HP valve limiter during automatic start-up until the 1st warm
up is over. This value is standardized between 0 and 1, and expresses the valve opening percentage
(0= 0%; 1=100%).
2.5.f) Target Limit (Norm) 0.8
It represents the upper limit assumed by the HP valve limiter during automatic start-up until target speed
is reached. This value is standardized between 0 and 1, and expresses the valve opening percentage
(0= 0%; 1=100%).
2.6 LP VALVE LIMITER CONTROL (only if the extraction valve is featured)
2.6.a) Set point (Norm) (DEFAULT = 0) N/A
It represents the set point assumed by the LP valve limiter in case of trip. This value is standardized
between 0 and 1, and expresses the valve opening percentage (0= 0%; 1=100%).
2.6.b) Lower Limit (Norm) (DEFAULT = 0) N/A
It represents the lower limit assumed by the LP valve limiter. This value is standardized between 0 and
1, and expresses the valve opening percentage (0= 0%; 1=100%).
2.6.c) Upper Limit (Norm) (DEFAULT = 1) N/A
It represents the upper limit assumed by the LP valve limiter. This value is standardized between 0 and
1, and expresses the valve opening percentage (0=0%; 1=100%).
2.6.d) Slope rates (Norm/sec) N/A

It represents the slope of the ramp with which the UNICOS governor raises/lowers the LP valve limiter. It
is standardized between 0 and 1 in function of time (seconds).
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4

Nuovo Pignone
FIRENZE
2.7 LOSS OF PARALLEL STATE CONTROL (visible only in case of generator drive)
SHIFT FROM PARALLEL TO ISLAND
In case of shift from parallel to island, thus in case of main switch opening, the HP valve shall be
managed in one of the following modes:
2.7.a) Manual: The HP valve shall reach the position set in relation to the parameter:
2.7.b) HP POSITION (norm)
It represents a standardized value between 0 and 1 of the HP valve opening percentage.
2.7.c) Disable: The PID inside the Governor deals with the HP valve control.
2.7.d) Continuous: The HP valve shall reach the position calculated in function of the island load
continuous signal.
SHIFT FROM PARALLEL TO ZERO LOAD
In case of shift from parallel to zero load, thus in case of generator breaker opening, the HP valve shall
reach the position set in relation to the parameter:
2.7.e) HP POSITION (norm) (DEFAULT = 0)
INSTANTANEOUS LOAD INCREASE IN ISLAND MODE (LOAD RECOVERY)
In case of instantaneous load increase with turbogenerator running in island mode (for example in case
of trip of a generator operating on the same island), with the “Load Recovery” signal the HP valve shall
be managed in one of the following modes:
2.7.f) Manual: The HP valve shall reach the position set in relation to the parameter:
2.7.g) HP POSITION (norm)
2.7.h) Disable: The PID inside the Governor deals with the HP valve control.
2.7.i) Continuous: The HP valve shall reach the position calculated in function of the island load
continuous signal.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4

Nuovo Pignone
FIRENZE
3. SPEED CONTROL PARAMETERS
3.1 PID PARAMETERS FOR GENERATOR DRIVE NO LOAD OR FOR MECHANICAL DRIVE UNDER
M.O.S.
The PID speed governor is based upon the PID classic diagram, which takes into consideration the three
actions: Proportional, Integral and Derivative. The PID control typically provides a control output u(t) on
the basis of error e(t) according to the formula:
u(t) = PG et + 1 IT * ed + DT * det  dt (1)
The error e(t) is calculated in function of the difference between the process variable measured and the
set point. The PG value is the governor proportional gain, the IT value is the integration time and the DT
parameter is the derivative time.
3.1.a) Dynamic Multiplier Constant (DEFAULT = 3) 3
In generator drive mode, in case of generator breaker opening, the parameters of the PID dealing with
speed control are multiplied for the value entered in Dynamic Multiplier Constant to make the governor
action more "reactive" (for a 10 sec interval).
In particular, the proportionality constant and the derivative action are multiplied for this value, whereas
the integral action is divided for this value.
3.1.b) PG PROPORTIONAL GAIN (% / %) (DEFAULT = 1.5) 1.5
It represents the PID governor proportional gain. The error in case of mere proportional action is
calculated as difference between the process variable measured and the set point.
This difference is then standardized at the speed measure full scale and is multiplied for the value set in
PG PROPORTIONAL GAIN. (For example, a PG equal to 1.5 means that corresponding to an error
variation of 1% – with reference to speed full scale – the PID output varies by 1.5%)
3.1.c) IT INTEGRAL GAIN (sec) (DEFAULT =20) 20
It represents the PID governor integration time.
3.1.d) DT DERIVATIVE RATIO (sec) (DEFAULT = 0) 0
It represents the PID governor derivation time.
3.1.e) ERROR DEAD BAND (Norm) 0.01
It represents the error in a dead band. If the error calculated as difference between speed and set point,
standardized for speed full scale, is lower than the value set in ERROR DEAD BAND, then it has no
effect.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4

Nuovo Pignone
FIRENZE
3.2 PID PARAMETERS FOR GENERATOR DRIVE AT LOAD (ISLAND) OR FOR MECHANICAL
DRIVE ABOVE M.O.S.
The PID speed governor is based on the classic PID diagram taking into consideration the three actions:
Proportional, Integral and Derivative. The PID control typically provides a control output u(t) based on
the error e(t) according to the formula:
u(t) = PG et + 1 IT * ed + DT * det  dt (1)
The error e(t) is calculated in function of the difference between the process variable measured and the
set point. The PG value is the governor proportional gain, the IT value is the integration time and the DT
parameter is the derivative time.
3.2.b) PG PROPORTIONAL GAIN (% / %) (DEFAULT = 2) 2
It represents the PID governor proportional gain. The error in case of mere proportional action is
This difference is then standardized at the speed measurement full scale and is multiplied for the value
set in PG PROPORTIONAL GAIN. (For example, a PG equal to 1.5 means that corresponding to a 1%
error variation – with reference to speed full scale – the PID output varies by 1.5%)
3.2.c) IT INTEGRAL GAIN (sec) (DEFAULT = 15) 15

It represents the PID governor integration time.
3.2.d) DT DERIVATIVE RATIO (sec) (DEFAULT = 0) 0
It represents the PID governor derivation time.
3.2.e) ERROR DEAD BAND (Norm) 0.01

It represents the error in a dead band. If the error calculated as difference between speed and set point,
standardized for speed full scale, is lower than the value set in ERROR DEAD BAND, then it has no
effect.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4

Nuovo Pignone
FIRENZE
4. KWATT CONTROL
4.1 PID PARAMETERS
4.1.a) BYPASS: if the check box is not selected, the power control is carried out in a closed loop
using the feedback of the kW signal. Therefore, the control action is managed by the power control PID,
whose set point shall be managed according to load engagement and disengagement ramps.
If the check-box is selected, there is no control action carried out by the power PID, but the ramp shown
above is ‘rescaled’ in a 0% ÷ 100% range, where 0 = minimum power, or better, HP valve opening in the
moment of parallel connection, and 100% = HP valve completely open (maximum power).
In this case, the KWatt measurement is not used and control is carried out in an open loop.
4.1.b) SP Set Point (KW)
It represents the PID power controller set point expressed in KWatt, in the case of a generator drive. The
following parameters (4.1.c 4.1.d) can be set when the dialog box pops up.
4.1.c) Min SP Set Point (KW)
It represents the minimum value of the KWatt PID controller set point.
4.1.d) Max SP Set Point (KW)
It represents the maximum value of the KWatt PID controller set point.
4.1.e) PG PROPORTIONAL GAIN (% / %) (DEFAULT = 0.5)
It represents the PID power controller proportional gain. The error in case of mere proportional action is
This difference is then standardized at the power measurement full scale and is multiplied for the value
set in PG PROPORTIONAL GAIN. (For example, a PG equal to 1.5 means that corresponding to a 1%
error variation – with reference to power full scale – the PID output varies by 1.5%)
4.1.f) IT INTEGRAL GAIN (sec) (DEFAULT = 15)
It represents the PID power controller integration time.
4.1.g) DT DERIVATIVE RATIO (sec) (DEFAULT = 0)
It represents the PID power controller derivation time.
4.1.h) ERROR DEAD BAND (Norm) (DEFAULT = 0)
It represents the error in a dead band. If the error calculated as difference between power and set point,
standardized for power full scale, is lower than the value set in ERROR DEAD BAND, then it has no
effect.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4

Nuovo Pignone
FIRENZE
4.1.i) Set Point slope Hot (KW/sec) N/A
It represents the slope of the ramp with which the PID power controller pursues the set point expressed
in KWatt per second, under Hot start conditions.
4.1.j) Set Point slope Cold (KW/sec) N/A
It represents the slope of the ramp with which the PID power controller pursues the set point expressed
in KWatt per second, under Cold start conditions.
4.1.k) Set Point slope Stop (KW/sec) N/A
It represents the slope of the ramp with which power expressed in KWatt per second is decreased during
turbine normal stop.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4

Nuovo Pignone
FIRENZE
5. INLET PRESSURE CONTROL
In the UNICOS governor, inlet pressure control at the first turbine stage can be enabled only in the case
of a generator drive and a mechanical drive in Syngas mode.
The PID parameters are reported below.
5.1 PID PARAMETERS
5.1.a) SP Set Point (E.U.) INITIAL VALUE N/A
It represents the inlet pressure PID controller initial set point at the first turbine stage. The following
parameters (5.1.b 5.1.c) can be set when the dialog box pops up.
5.1.b) Min. SP Set Point (E.U.) N/A
It represents the minimum value of the inlet pressure PID controller set point at the first turbine stage.
5.1.c) Max. SP Set Point (E.U.) N/A
It represents the maximum value of the inlet pressure PID controller set point at the first turbine stage.
5.1.d) Set Point slope (E.U. /sec) N/A
It represents the slope of the ramp with which the PID controller pursues the set point.
5.1.e) PG PROPORTIONAL GAIN (% / %) (DEFAULT = 0.2) N/A
It represents the PID pressure controller proportional gain. The error in case of mere proportional action
is calculated as difference between the process variable measured and the set point.
This difference is then standardized at the pressure measurement full scale and is multiplied for the
value set in PG PROPORTIONAL GAIN. (For example a PG equal to 1.5 means that corresponding to a
1% error variation – with reference to pressure full scale – the PID output varies by 1.5%)
5.1.f) IT INTEGRAL GAIN (sec) (DEFAULT = 15) N/A
It represents the PID pressure controller integration time.
5.1.g) DT DERIVATIVE RATIO (sec) (DEFAULT = 0) N/A
It represents the PID pressure controller derivation time.
5.1.h) ERROR DEAD BAND (Norm) (DEFAULT = 0) N/A
effect.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4

Nuovo Pignone
FIRENZE
6. EXTRACTION CONTROL
This section is visible only when the check box 9.2.d is unchecked
6.1 PID PARAMETERS
6.1.a) SP Set Point (E.U.) INITIAL VALUE N/A
It represents the initial set point of the PID controller dealing with extraction flow control between the first
and the second stage of the turbine. The following parameters (6.1.b 6.1.c) can be set when the dialog
box pops up.
6.1.b) Set Point slope (E.U./sec) N/A
It represents the slope of the ramp with which the PID extraction controller pursues the set point.
N/A 6.1.c) Min. SP Set Point (E.U.) N/A
It represents the minimum set point of the PID controller dealing with extraction flow control between the
first and the second stage of the turbine.
6.1.d) Max. SP Set Point (E.U.) N/A
It represents the maximum set point of the PID controller dealing with extraction flow control between the
first and the second stage of the turbine.
6.1.e) PG PROPORTIONAL GAIN (DEFAULT = 0.2) N/A
It represents the PID extraction controller proportional gain. The error in case of mere proportional action
is calculated as difference between the process variable measured and the set point.
This difference is then standardized at the pressure measurement full scale and is multiplied for the
value set on PG PROPORTIONAL GAIN. (For example a PG equal to 1.5 means that corresponding to
a 1% error variation – with reference to pressure full scale – the PID output varies by 1.5%)
6.1.f) IT INTEGRAL GAIN (sec) (DEFAULT = 20) N/A
It represents the PID extraction controller integration time.
6.1.g) DT DERIVATIVE RATIO (sec) (DEFAULT = 0) N/A
It represents the PID extraction controller derivation time.
6.1.h) ERROR DEAD BAND (Norm) (DEFAULT = 0) N/A
effect.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4

Nuovo Pignone
FIRENZE
7. CASCADE CONTROL
This selection is possible only if MECHANICAL DRIVE as been selected in section Operating
Parameters.
7.1 CASCADE PARAMETERS
7.1.a) Cascade ramp slope (rpm/sec)
Regardless as to whether the internal or external cascade control has been selected or not, the SIC
(UNICOS speed governor) shall receive a set point that is always limited by a ramp whose slope can be
configured in Cascade ramp slope (in rpm per second).
7.1.b) SP Set Point (E.U.) INITIAL VALUE
It represents the Cascade controller initial set point. The following parameters (7.1.b 7.1.c) can be set
when the dialog box pops up.
7.1.c) Min. SP Set Point (E.U.)
It represents the Cascade controller set point minimum value.
7.1.d) Max. SP Set Point (E.U.)
It represents the Cascade controller set point maximum value.
7.1.e) Cascade set point slope rate (E.U./sec)
It represents the slope of the ramp with which the PID Cascade controller pursues the set point.
7.1.f) PG PROPORTIONAL GAIN (% / %) (DEFAULT = 0.1)
It represents the proportional gain of the PID controller in Cascade mode.

The error in case of mere proportional action is calculated as difference between the process variable
measured and the set point.
This difference is then standardized at the speed measurement full scale and is multiplied for the value
set in PG PROPORTIONAL GAIN. (For example a PG equal to 1.5 means that corresponding to a 1%
error variation – with reference to speed full scale – the PID output varies by 1.5%)
7.1.g) IT INTEGRAL GAIN (sec) (DEFAULT = 25)
It represents the integration time of the PID controller in Cascade mode.
7.1.h) DT DERIVATIVE RATIO (sec) (DEFAULT = 0)
It represents the derivation time of the PID controller in Cascade mode.
7.1.i) ERROR DEAD BAND (Norm) (DEFAULT = 0)
effect.
7.1.j) Direct inverse If the check box is not selected, the error leading the PID output is equal to SP-
PV the greater is the PV the lower is the PID output. If the check box is selected, the error leading the
PID output is equal to PV-SP the greater is the PV the higher is the PID output.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4

Nuovo Pignone
FIRENZE
8. STEAM MAP
This selection shall be valid only if extraction control is enabled in section PRIORITY LOGIC.
The diagram below represents the ratio between the steam flow on the HP and LP valves, and the
turbine power. This ratio is used in case of coupling between the two valves.
Max HP Flow
Point B
Flow (t/h)
Point A
Point C
Power (Kw) Max Power
FIG. 1
On the steam map page the following parameters are configured:
8.1.a) MAX Power @ Min Ext. (KWatt) - POINT A N/A
It represents the x-coordinate of point A in figure1. It identifies the maximum power in relation to the
minimum extraction, expressed in Watt.
8.1.b) MAX HP Flow @ Min Ext. (T/H) - POINT A N/A
It represents the y-coordinate of point A in figure 1. It identifies the HP valve maximum flow in relation to
the minimum extraction, expressed in tons/h.
8.1.c) MIN Power @ Max Ext. (KWatt) - POINT B N/A

It represents the x-coordinate of point B in figure 1. It identifies the minimum power in relation to the
maximum extraction, expressed in KWatt.
8.1.d) MIN HP Flow @ Max Ext. (T/H) - POINT B N/A
It represents the y-coordinate of point B in figure 1. It identifies the HP valve minimum flow in relation to
the maximum extraction, expressed in tons/h.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4

Nuovo Pignone
FIRENZE
8.1.e) MIN Power @ Min Ext. (KWatt) - POINT C N/A
It represents the x-coordinate of point C in figure 1. It identifies the minimum power in relation to the
minimum extraction, expressed in KWatt. (NEGATIVE VALUES ARE POSSIBLE)
8.1.f) MIN HP Flow @ Min Ext. (T/H) - POINT C N/A
It represents the y-coordinate of point C in figure 1. It identifies the HP valve minimum flow in relation to
the minimum extraction, expressed in tons/h. (NEGATIVE VALUES ARE POSSIBLE)
8.1.g) Max. Power (KWatt) N/A
It represents the maximum permissible power value expressed in KWatt.
8.1.h) Max. HP Flow (T/h) N/A
It represents the maximum permissible flow of the HP valve expressed in tons/h.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4

Nuovo Pignone
FIRENZE
9. PRIORITY LOGIC
9.1.a) LP PRIORITY
Control priority is given to the LP valve.

Therefore, in case of control saturation on the LP valve, the HP valve is used to keep the control.
9.1.b) HP PRIORITY
Control priority is given to the HP valve.

Therefore, in case of control saturation on the HP valve, the LP valve is used to keep the control.
9.1.c) NO PRIORITY
Priority is given neither to control on the HP valve nor to control on the LP valve.
Figure 2 shows the general control diagram of the two steam turbine valves.
HP
PID A11 +
+ HP
Valve
A12
A21
LP - LP
A22 +
Valve
PID
FIG.2
As can be noted, the two PIDs (and consequently their control actions on the HP and LP valves) interact
by means of dynamic coupling factors.
9.2 VALVE COUPLING CONTROL
9.2.a) Decoupling HP & LP
If this checkbox is selected, any interaction between the two PID controllers for HP and LP valves is
eliminated.
With reference to fig. 2, the four parameters assume the following values: A11=1, A22=1, A12=0, A21=0.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4

Nuovo Pignone
FIRENZE
9.2.b) Decouple inlet (HP)
If this checkbox is selected, the interaction of the LP controller with the HP one is eliminated; in practice,
making reference to fig. 2, we have: A11=1, A21=0, whereas A12 and A22 shall be calculated in function
of the steam map.
9.2.c) Decouple extraction (LP)
If this checkbox is selected, the interaction of the HP controller with the LP one is eliminated; in practice,
making reference to fig.2 we have: A22=1, A12=0, whereas A11 and A21 shall be calculated in function
of the steam map.
9.2.d) Exclude Extraction Control
If this checkbox is selected, only the HP valve is featured and therefore the extraction is excluded.
ITEM:
N. SOL45717/4

UNIT CONTROL PANEL
HMI VIDEO PAGES

CLIENTE – CUSTOMER
COLT ENGINEERING FOR SUNCOR ENERGY
LOCALITA' - PLANT LOCATION

NORTH OF FORT MCMURRAY, ALBERTA (CANADA)
IMPIANTO – PLANT
VOYAGEUR HYDROTREATER GOHT #3
2 0 7K -300 / 2 07 K T -300 V P 2 0 7 -K -3 075 -1 1D
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
TITOLO – TITLE ITEM
Zipoli M. 30.09.09
207K-300/207KT-300
3 REVISED SHEET 1,11,12,15 SSE Bernardi A.
2
1
REVISED ALL SHEET
GENERAL REVISION – ADDED SH. 29, 30
SSE
SSE
Bernardi A.
Bernardi A.
Rossi S.
Rossi S.
04.09.09
08.06.09
COVER SHEET N. SOS 9971996 /3
0 ISSUE SSE Bernardi A. Palma L. 05.12.08 LINGUA-RANG. PAGINA-SHEET
REV. DESCRIZIONE - DESCRIPTION PREP'D CONT-CHK'D APP-APPR'D DATA-DATE A 1 / 2
 2002 Nuovo Pignone S.p.A., all rights reserved
1. LUBE OIL MACHINE SYSTEM.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3
2. LUBE OIL CONSOLE SYSYEM................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4
3. CONTROL OIL SYSTEM ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 5
4. SEAL GAS SYSTEM.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
5. SEAL GAS CONDITIONING SYSTEM ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 7
6. PROCESS SYSTEM..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8
7. STEAM SYSTEM.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9
8. PROCESS CONTROLLER ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 10
9. ANTISURGE #1.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11
10. ANTISURGE#2........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 12
11. SPEED CONTROL ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 13
12. TRIP VALVE TEST..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 14
13. PERMISSIVE TO START ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
14. OVERRIDE ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 16
15. SETPOINT.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 17
16. ALARMS / TRIPS ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 18
17. EVENTS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 19
18. TRENDS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 20
19. TRENDS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 21
20. TRENDS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 22
21. TRENDS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 23
22. TRENDS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 24
23. TRENDS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 25
24. TRENDS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 26
25. TRENDS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 27
26. TRENDS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 28
27. TRENDS ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 29
28. KEYBOARD ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 30
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
207K-300/207KT-300
2 REVISED ALL SHEET HMI VIDEO PAGES N. SOS 9971996 /3

1 REV. LINGUA-RANG. PAGINA-SHEET
SOSTITUISCE IL – REPLACES
1. Lube Oil Machine System
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
207K-300/207KT-300

2. Lube Oil Console Sysyem
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
207K-300/207KT-300

3. Control Oil System
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
207K-300/207KT-300

4. Seal Gas System
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
207K-300/207KT-300

5. Seal Gas Conditioning System
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
207K-300/207KT-300

6. Process System
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
207K-300/207KT-300

7. Steam System
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
207K-300/207KT-300

8. Process Controller
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
207K-300/207KT-300

9. Antisurge #1
10.
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
207K-300/207KT-300
3 REVISED ALL SHHET
Antisurge#2
11.
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
207K-300/207KT-300
3 REVISED ALL SHHET
Speed Control
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
207K-300/207KT-300

12.Trip Valve Test
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
207K-300/207KT-300

13.Permissive To Start
14.
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
207K-300/207KT-300
3 REVISED ALL SHHET
Override
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
207K-300/207KT-300

15.Setpoint
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
207K-300/207KT-300

16. Alarms / Trips
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
207K-300/207KT-300

17.Events
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
207K-300/207KT-300

18. Trends
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
207K-300/207KT-300

19. Trends
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
207K-300/207KT-300

20. Trends
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
207K-300/207KT-300

21. Trends
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
207K-300/207KT-300

22. Trends
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
207K-300/207KT-300

23. Trends
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
207K-300/207KT-300

24. Trends
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
207K-300/207KT-300

25. Trends
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
207K-300/207KT-300

26. Trends
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
207K-300/207KT-300

27. Trends
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
207K-300/207KT-300

28. Keyboard
Nuovo Pignone
JOB
FIRENZE 110.2313
207K-300/207KT-300

Volume VII Section B
N.P. Job: 110.2313/190.0533
UNIT CONTROL PANEL
NUOVO PIGNONE CODE RQO 1451504 (SOS 9971973)
MANUFACTURER SIRIO SISTEMI ELETTRONICI
MANUAL No. SIRIO MANUAL
LOCAL CONTROL PANEL
NUOVO PIGNONE CODE RQO 1451505 (SOS 9971973)
MANUFACTURER SIRIO SISTEMI ELETTRONICI
MANUAL No. SIRIO MANUAL
10-08-E .2313/.0533 P. 1-1

SSE
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici SpA
®
UNIT CONTROL PANEL

INSTRUCTION, USER AND MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
Costruttore / Manufacturer SSE

Descrizione / Description Quadro di controllo / Unit Control Panel
Numero di serie SSE / SSE Serial Number 280064 and 280153 and 280155
Commessa SSE / SSE Job 280064 and 280153 and 280155
Cliente SSE / SSE Customer Nuovo Pignone
Ordine Cliente SSE / SSE Customer Order 439519724 Pos.1,3,5
Cliente Finale / End Customer COLT FOR SUNCOR ENERGY
Località / Location FORT MC MURRAY, ALBERTA (CANADA)
Impianto / Plant VOYAGEUR HYDROTREATER
Job NP / Commessa NP 1102313-14-15
NP Specification / Specifica NP SOS9971973 (RQ 1451504 - RQ 1451506 - RQ 1451508)
Sirio Sistemi Elettronici S.p.A. – Capitale Sociale € 400.000 Int. Dep. - Part. IVA 00278460977 - C.F. 02013980483
Via del Lazzeretto, 92 - 59100 PRATO - ITALY - Tel. +39.0574.52941 Fax +39.0574.529451 - www.sse.cc
Sheet 1 di 9
SSE
®
INDEX
1. SCOPE OF SUPPLY _________________________________________________________3

2. REFERENCE DRAWINGS FOR PANEL CONSTRUCTION ________________________3
3. GENERAL TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION _______________________________________3
4. POWER SUPPLY ____________________________________________________________4
5. EARTH CIRCUITS __________________________________________________________6
6. SEGREGATION OF THE WIRING WITH DIFFERENT SIGNAL LEVEL ____________6
7. OPERATING CONDITIONS __________________________________________________7
8. STOCK REQUIREMENT _____________________________________________________7
9. HANDLING ________________________________________________________________7
10. MAINTENANCE ____________________________________________________________7
11. POWER-UP PROCEDURE ____________________________________________________8
12. POWER-DOWN PROCEDURE ________________________________________________9
Sheet 2 di 9
SSE
®
1. SCOPE OF SUPPLY
Description of Unit Control Panel (UCP) for the turbine and compressor control
2. REFERENCE DRAWINGS FOR PANEL CONSTRUCTION
JOB 110.2313 JOB 110.2314 JOB 110.2315

a) UCP LAYOUT SOS9971691 /3 SOS9971693 /3 SOS9971694 /3
b) UCP WIRING DIAGRAM SOS9971994 /3 SOS9971998 /3 SOS9972002 /3
3. GENERAL TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

The UCP has been constructed according to the document “UCP LAYOUT”.
The panel is in carbon steel and is self sustaining type.
The panel general dimensions are 3200 x 800 x 2175 mm (LxDxH) (the height is comprehensive of
the socket of 100 mm and lifting bar of 75 mm ).
The cabinet is composed of 4 module with front/rear access.
Cable entry is from the bottom.
The protection degree is IP 42.
Painting colour is RAL 7035.
The wiring is according to the “UCP Wiring Diagram”.
Sheet 3 di 9
SSE
®
4. POWER SUPPLY
The Unit Control Panel works with the following voltages:
a) Power Supply Distribution 120Vac Line 1 From UPS to be supplied at UPS1-120 terminal board for the
following devices:
PLC TRICONEX Rack #1 power supply 1

Power Supply 24 Vdc #1
Power Outlet Socket for HMI (PC and LCD video)
Power Outlet Socket for printer and switch #1
Power supply for Local Control Panel horn
Power supply for Local Control Panel HMI (panel PC)
b) Power Supply Distribution 120Vac Line 2 From Emergency Power to be supplied at EP-120 terminal
board for the following devices:

Power Supply 24 Vdc #2
Power supply for Local Control Panel heater
Power Outlet Socket for printer and switch #2
c) Power Supply Distribution 120Vac From 120/208 distribution panel to be supplied at MCC-120 terminal
board for the following devices:
Internal Lights
Internal Fans
Internal Heaters
Power Outlet Socket
Power supply for Local Control Panel light
Sheet 4 di 9
SSE
®
d) Internal Power Supply Distribution 24 Vdc from 23PW1 and 23PW2 for the following devices:
Bently Nevada Temperature and Vibration Monitor

Bently Nevada Overspeed monitor
Input /Output PLC TRICONEX
Solenoid valves
Safety relays
I/H converter
Media converters
Local Control Panel signalling lamps
Sheet 5 di 9
SSE
®
5. EARTH CIRCUITS
Inside the panel there are three earthing circuits:
• [PE] PROTECTION EARTH
Earth bar for the connection of the chassis of the instruments and of the armouring of the cables in
input;
• [FE] FUNCTIONAL EARTH

Earth bar for the connection of the PLC chassis and instruments cable screens;
6. SEGREGATION OF THE WIRING WITH DIFFERENT SIGNAL LEVEL

Different and separate routing and cable trays have been provided for the signals of the following
levels :
SIGNAL LEVEL SIGNAL TYPE
Low level 4-20 mA Analog Signals, RTD Analog Signals, Speed and Vibration transmitters
Low level 0-30 Vdc Digital Signals
High level Vdc/Vac Power Supplies over 1500 W
Sheet 6 di 9
SSE
®
7. OPERATING CONDITIONS
The control panel has been designed to be operated in a control room with air-conditioning in a safe
area. Operating temperature +50°F ÷ 95°F
8. STOCK REQUIREMENT
In case the UCP should be stocked before the installation, it must be placed in a controlled humidity
and temperature store with temperature ranging from 0 to 50 °C inside the panel.
9. HANDLING
For the lifting of the UCP, two bars with hole are provided on the roof of the UCP.
10. MAINTENANCE
UCP maintenance consists of the following actions:
• Check of the electrical protection devices: fuses and breakers;
• Check that lamp are properly working;
• Check that air filters are cleaned
Sheet 7 di 9
SSE
®
11. POWER-UP PROCEDURE

Preliminary check before power-up:
• Check that all-fixing bolts and screws are tightly screwed
• Check that all devices are disconnected from their relative power supply
• Check that the earth circuits are correctly connected.
• Check that correct power supply is present at the relative input terminals boards
120Vac Line 1 From UPS:
1) Energize 9QF1 and 9FU1, verify presence of 120Vac

2) Energize 10QF1, verify PLC TRICONEX Rack #1 power supply 1 proper working,
5) Energize 10FU1, verify power supply of the 23PW1 24 Vdc Power Supply #1 proper working
6) Energize 11QF1, verify HMI (PC and LCD video) proper working.
7) Energize 11QF2, verify printer and switch #1 proper working
8) Energize 11FU1, verify presence of 120Vac on LCP-UPS1 terminal board for the horn power supply
when command by PLC TRICONEX
9) Energize 11QF3, verify presence of 120Vac on LCP-UPS1 terminal board for the HMI (panel PC) power
supply
120Vac Line 2 From Emergency Power:

5) Energize 14FU1, verify power supply of the 23PW2 24 Vdc Power Supply #2 proper working
6) Energize 15FU1, verify presence of 120Vac on LCP-EP terminal board for the heater power supply
when command by PLC TRICONEX
7) Energize 15QF2, verify printer and switch #2 proper working
Sheet 8 di 9
SSE
®
120Vac From MCC:

2) Energize 18FU1, verify Internal Lights proper working,
3) Energize 19FU1, verify Internal Fans proper working (adjust the temperature of the dedicate control
thermostat)
4) Energize 21FU1, verify Internal Heaters proper working (adjust the temperature of the dedicate control
thermostat)
5) Energize 21QF1, verify Power Outlet Socket proper working,
6) Energize 22FU1, verify presence of 120Vac on LCP-MCC terminal board for the light power supply of the
LCP
24Vdc internal power supply from 23PW1 and 23PW2

1) Energize 24QF1, verify Bently Nevada Rack #1 power supply A proper working,
2) Energize 24QF2, verify Bently Nevada Rack #1 power supply B proper working,
3) Energize 24QF3, verify Bently Nevada Rack #2 power supply A proper working,
4) Energize 24QF4, verify Bently Nevada Rack #2 power supply B proper working,
5) Energize 25QF1 and the relative fuse 25FU1÷4, verify the presence of 24Vdc on Input / Output
TRICONEX boards
TRICONEX boards
TRICONEX boards
8) Energize 28QF1 and the relative fuse 28FU1÷6, verify the presence of 24Vdc for the solenoid valves
9) Energize 29QF1 and the relative fuse 29FU1÷5, verify the presence of 24Vdc for the solenoid valves
10) Energize 30QF1 and the relative fuse 30FU1÷4, verify the presence of 24Vdc for the safety relays, the I/H
converter, LCP signalling lamps and media converters
12. POWER-DOWN PROCEDURE

Preliminary check before power-down:
• Check that the Unit controller regulator don’t work
De-energize breakers and fuses in the reverse order of power-up sequence and verify that respective
devices are disconnected.
Sheet 9 di 9
EQUIPMENT LIST
Supplier part Assembly Material Manufacturer
Item Description Item on ass.y drw Qt.y
number drawing part number
1 WEIDMULLER RELAY 24VDC 2CS 8A SOS9971994 100KA1-5;103KA1-4;104KA1-7;120KA1-8;121KA1-4 7940006157 36
2 BUSSMANN FUSE HOLDER 2P - 10X38 SOS9971994 9FU1;10FU1;11FU1;11FU2;13FU1;14FU1;15FU1;15FU2;17FU1;18FU1;19FU1;21FU1;22FU1 CHCC2D 13
3 BUSSMANN FUSE SLOW-BLOW 10X38 SOS9971994 10FU1;14FU1 LP-CC-15 4
4 MOELLER PLSM-C10/2 AUTOMATIC CIRCUIT BREAKER SOS9971994 10QF1-3;11QF1-2;14QF1-3;15QF1;25QF1;26QF1;27QF1;28QF1;29QF1;30QF1 242401 15
5 BUSSMANN FUSE SLOW-BLOW 10X38 SOS9971994 11FU1-2;15FU1-2;18FU1;19FU1;21FU1;22FU1 LP-CC-10 16

PHOENIX
6 EM-DUO 120/15 USA DOUBLE SOCKET SOS9971994 11SK1-2;15SK1;21SK1 5600461 4
CONTACT
PHOENIX PSR-SCP-24UC/ESM4/2X1/1X2 SAFETY RELAY
7 SOS9971994 136PS1 2963718 1
CONTACT 24VDC
PHOENIX PSR-SCP-24U/ESAM4/8X1/1X2 SAFETY RELAY
8 SOS9971994 138PS1 2963912 1
CONTACT 24VDC
9 SCHAFFNER LINE FILTER 1 PHASE SOS9971994 9FL1;13FL1;17FL1 FN2070-36-08 3
10 BUSSMANN FUSE SLOW-BLOW 10X38 SOS9971994 9FU1;13FU1 LP-CC-30 4
11 WEIDMULLER OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION SOS9971994 9FU2;13FU2;17FU2 829165000 3
LOCKABLE HANDLE FOR SWITCH DISCONNECTOR

12 ABB SOS9971994 9QF1;13QF1 OHR2 2
FOR SWITCH DISCONNECTOR
13 ABB SWITCH DISCONNECTOR SOS9971994 9QF1;13QF1 OT45E3 2

PLSM-C16/2 AUTOMATIC CIRCUIT BREAKER
14 MOELLER SOS9971994 15QF1;24QF1-4 242405 5
AUTOMATIC CIRCUIT BREAKER
15 BUSSMANN FUSE SLOW-BLOW 10X38 SOS9971994 17FU1 LP-CC-25 2
LOCKABLE HANDLE FOR SWITCH DISCONN.FOR
16 ABB SOS9971994 17QF1 OHB12 1
SWITCH DISCONN.
17 ABB SWITCH DISCONNECTOR SOS9971994 17QF1 OT32E3 1
18 STEGO SLIMLINE FLUORESCENT LIGHT 11W SL025 SOS9971994 18EL1-8 B02527.0.10 8
19 ALFA PLASTIC LIMIT SWITCH SOS9971994 18SQ1-8 AP1T11Z11 8

DOOR FAN (extraction) 115Vac 50Hz 230m3/h -
20 ALFA PLASTIC SOS9971994 19FN1-4 ALFA2510BPUB 4
250x250mm (UL)
21 WEIDMULLER RELAY INTERFACE 115VAC 2CS (8A) SOS9971994 19KA1-4 8810100000 4
22 STEGO THERMOSTAT FOR FAN -10°C .. +50°C SOS9971994 19ST1-4 01143.0-00 4
23 STEGO ANTICONDENSING HEATER SOS9971994 21EH1-3 14008.0-00 3
24 MOELLER PLSM-C6/2 AUTOMATIC CIRCUIT BREAKER SOS9971994 21QF1 242399 1
25 STEGO THERMOSTAT FOR HEATER -10°C .. +50°C SOS9971994 21ST1-3 01142.0-00 3
Pagina 1 di 2
EQUIPMENT LIST
PHOENIX
26 QUINT-DIODE/40 REDUNDANCY MODULE SOS9971994 23D1-2 2938963 2
CONTACT
PHOENIX
27 QUINT-PS-100-240AC/24DC/40 POWER SUPPLY SOS9971994 23PW1-2 2938879 2
CONTACT
PHOENIX
28 UK 5 - HESILED24 FUSED T. BLOCK WITH LED SOS9971994 25FU1-4;26FU1-5;27FU1-3;28FU1-6;29FU1-6;30FU1-4 3004126 44
CONTACT
PHOENIX MINI-MCR-SL-PT100-UI-NC CONFIGURABLE
29 SOS9971994 92AB1 2864273 1
CONTACT TEMPERATURE TRANSDUCER
XHS 3318
30 MOELLER M22-A MOUNTING ADAPTER SOS9971994 216374 1
XHS 3318
31 MOELLER M22-K10 CONTACT NO SOS9971994 216376 3
XHS 3318
32 MOELLER M22-PV EMERGENCY PUSHBUTTON SOS9971994 216876 1
33 ENTRELEC M10/10 FEED THROUGH TERMINAL BLOCK SOS9971994 LCP-MCC;LCP-UPS1;LCP-UPS2;MCC-120;UPS1-120;UPS2-120 11512017 14
34 ENTRELEC M10/10.P EARTH TERMINAL BLOCK SOS9971994 LCP-MCC;LCP-UPS1;LCP-UPS2;MCC-120;UPS1-120;UPS2-120 16511510 7
RS485_HART;TB101;TB102;TB103;TB104;TB105;TB106;TB107;TB108;TB109;TB109A;TB110;TB11
PHOENIX
35 UK 5-MTK-P/P DISCONNECTING TERMINAL BLOCK SOS9971994 1_1;TB111_2;TB112;TB114;TBDCS_A;TBDCS_D;TBLCP_A;TBLCP_B,TBMCC_C;TBMCC_F;TBPR_ 3004032 877
CONTACT
A;TBPR_D;TBPR_S;TBSIS_D;TBSPR_A;TBSPR_D;TBSPP_C;TBSPP_F;TBTYR_TBTYR_D
36 ITALWEBER FUSE 5X20 mm 2A 250V SOS9971994 - 0442002 50
Media Converter Eth / O.F, Class1 Div2,ATEX Class 1,

37 MOXA SOS9972008 68MC1 IMC-101-M-SC-T 1
Zone 2, EEx nC IIC, -40 to 75°C operating range
Pagina 2 di 2
Single-Phase Power Supply Unit,
Primary Switched for Universal Use
QUINT-PS-100-240AC/24DC/40
QUINT POWER provides:
• Preventive function monitoring through
professional signaling
• Global use due to a wide-range input
• A high level of operational safety even in complex
global networks
• Reliable startup of heavy loads due to
POWER BOOST
The reliability of a power supply unit determines the

availability of individual components in a system and
whether complex systems can function safely.
The globalization of markets increases the demands
placed on the power supply unit. A wide-range input
and a high level of availability are required.
These requirements are met by Generation 2
QUINT POWER.
1. Short Description
The QUINT POWER product range offers universal

DC power supplies from 60 - 960 W. Depending on the
type, regulated and adjustable output voltages of
12 V DC, 24 V DC or 48 V DC are available for output
currents of 2.5 A, 5 A, 10 A, 20 A, 30 A, and 40 A.
These devices, which are designed as primary
switched-mode regulators, operate with a high level of
efficiency so that heat loss is kept to a minimum. 2. Area of Application
The high level of operational safety is also ensured in
complex global networks. QUINT POWER also
operates in applications where static voltage dips, QUINT POWER can be used globally due to the
transient power supply failures or phase failure are consistent provision of a wide-range input.
common. In this way, your entire system can be tested at any
Powerful capacitors ensure mains buffering of more production location in the world and can be delivered to
than 20 ms at full load. All 3-phase QUINT POWER any location in the world without faulty switching of the
units provide the complete output power even in the input voltage. This reduces storage costs and logistical
event of a continuous phase failure. effort.
Reliable startup of heavy loads is ensured by a An international approval package including
power reserve of up to 50% – the POWER BOOST. CB Scheme, UL 60950 for IT equipment, and UL 508
Preventive function monitoring diagnoses an for industrial control equipment enables the device to
impermissible operating state and minimizes be used globally.
downtimes in your system. An active transistor output Safe operation in adverse conditions is emphasized
and a floating relay contact are provided for remote by the approval of all QUINT POWER units with 24 V
monitoring of this state. output voltage by Germanischer Lloyd.
This signal not only provides information on the
device function, but also indicates a system overload at
an early stage.
Headquarters: © Phoenix Contact GmbH & Co. KG • Flachsmarktstraße 8 • 32825 Blomberg • Germany
Phone +49 - 52 35 - 30 0 • Fax +49 - 52 35 - 34 12 00 • www.phoenixcontact.com
Local Contact: www.phoenixcontact.com/salesnetwork
Single-Phase Primary-Switched Power Supply Unit for Universal Use – QUINT 24 V DC/40 A
3. Technical Data
125 mm
L ( + )
130 mm
a c t iv e
N ( - ) P F C
P E D C O K
1 3
1 4
240 mm
QUINT 24 V DC/40 A
1 AC Uu
Solid Stranded Torque
[mm2] AWG [Nm] [Ib in.]
1 Input 0.2 - 6 0.2 - 4 25 - 10 0.5 - 0.6 5-7 7 mm

2 Output 0.5 - 16 0.5 - 10 20 - 6 1.2 - 1.5 15 10 mm
3, 4 Signal 0.2 - 6 0.2 - 4 25 - 10 0.5 - 0.6 5-7 8 mm
Pcs.
Description Type Order No. Pkt.
Power supply unit,
primary switched for universal use QUINT-PS-100-240AC/24DC/40 29 38 87 9 1
Technical Data
Input Data 1
Nominal input voltage 110 - 240 V AC (wide-range input)
Input voltage range 85 - 264 V AC 120 - 350 V DC
Frequency 45 - 65 Hz 0 Hz
Current consumption (for nominal values) 11 A (120 V AC)/4.5 A (230 V AC), approximately
Inrush current limiting/I2t (+25°C) 15 A, approximately/3.2 A2s, approximately
Mains buffering for a nominal load (typical) > 20 ms
Switch-on time after applying the mains voltage <1s
Transient surge protection Varistor
Input fuse, internal 20 AF (device protection)
Recommended backup fuse 16 A or 25 A circuit breaker,
characteristic B (EN 60 898)
Discharge current for PE < 3.5 mA
Output Data 2
Nominal output voltage UN/tolerance 24 V DC ±1%
Setting range for the output voltage 22.5 - 29.5 V DC
Output current (continuous) during convection cooling
and nominal values Nominal output current IN 25°C to +60°C 40 A (Uout = 24 V DC)
IBOOST 45 A
Derating From +60°C 2.5% per Kelvin/below 100 V AC: 2.5%/V
Short-circuit current limit IBOOST ≈ 45 A, approximately
Startup of capacitive loads Unlimited
System deviation on: Static load change 10 - 90% < 1%, typical
Dynamic load change 10 - 90% < 5%, typical
Input voltage change ±10% < 0.1%, typical
Maximum power dissipation No load/nominal load 20 W/80 W, approximately
Efficiency > 92% (for 230 V AC and nominal values)
Response time UOUT (10% - 90%) < 2 ms
Residual ripple/switching peaks (20 MHz) < 100 mVpp (for nominal values)
Can be connected in parallel To increase redundancy and power
Internal surge protection Yes, < 32 V DC
Resistance to return supply 35 V DC
Signal Output Data

DC OK (active) 3 +24 V DC signal (with regard to the device weight)
(Uout > 0.9 x UN = high signal) 20 mA, maximum
DC OK (electrically isolated) 4 30 V AC/DC, maximum; 1 A, maximum
(Uout > 0.9 x UN = contact closed)
LED 6 (Uout < 0.9 x UN = LED flashing) Green LED
PHOENIX CONTACT page 2 of 10

General Data
Insulation voltage: Input/output 3 kV AC (type test)/2 kV AC (routine test)
Input/PE 3 kV AC (type test)/1.5 kV AC (routine test)
Output/PE 500 V DC (routine test)
Electrical equipment of machines EN 60 204 (Surge Voltage Category III)
Safety transformers for switched-mode power supply units EN 61 558-2-17
Electrical safety EN 60950/VDE 0805,
(of IT equipment) UL/C-UL Recognized UL 60 950 u
Industrial control equipment UL/C-UL Listed UL 508 U
Equipping high voltage installations LISTED
with electronic equipment EN 50 178 (VDE 0160)
Safety extra-low voltage PELV (EN 60 204)
SELV (EN 60 950)
Safe isolation VDE 0100-410
Protection against electric shock DIN 57100-410
Protection against electric shock,
basic requirements for safe isolation
in electrical equipment DIN VDE 0106-101
Limitation of harmonic line currents According to EN 61000-3-2
Mounting position On horizontal NS 35 DIN rail according to EN 60715

Degree of protection IP20
Class of protection Ι, with PE connection
MTBF > 500,000 h according to IEC 1709 (SN 29 500)
Housing version AluNox (AlMg1), closed
Dimensions (W x H x D) + DIN rail Default upon delivery: Rotated 90°:
(240 x 130 x 125) mm (122 x 130 x 243) mm
Weight 2.5 kg, approximately
Climatic Data
Ambient temperature Operation -25°C to +70°C (> +60°C derating)
Storage -40°C to +85°C
Humidity Up to 95% at +25°C, no condensation
Vibration According to IEC 68-2-6 < 15 Hz, amplitude ±2.5 mm/15 Hz - 150 Hz, 2.3g, 90 minutes
Shock According to IEC 68-2-27 30g in all space directions
Pollution degree 2 (according to EN 50 178)
Climatic category 3K3 (according to EN 60 721)
c
Conformance With EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and
the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC
EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) Requirements
Noise Immunity According to EN 61000-6-2: EN 61 000-6-2 QUINT-PS-100-240AC/24DC/40
Electrostatic discharge EN 61000-4-23) Housing Level 4

(ESD) Contact discharge: 4 kV 8 kV
Air discharge: 8 kV 15 kV
Electromagnetic EN 61000-4-32) Housing Level 3
HF field Frequency: 80 - 1000 MHz 80 - 1000 MHz/1.4 - 2.0 GHz
Field strength: 10 V/m 10 V/m
Fast transients EN 61000-4-43) Input: 2 kV asymmetrical5) 4 kV (Level 4)
(burst) Output: 2 kV asymmetrical5) 2 kV (Level 3)
Signal: 1 kV asymmetrical5) 1 kV (Level 2)
Surge current loads EN 61000-4-53) Input: 2 kV asymmetrical5) 4 kV (Inst. Class 4)
(surge) 1 kV symmetrical4) 2 kV (Inst. Class 4)
Output: 0.5 kV asymmetrical5) 0.5 kV (Level 1)
0.5 kV symmetrical4) 0.5 kV (Level 1)
Signal: 1 kV asymmetrical5) 1 kV (Level 2)
Conducted EN 61000-4-62) I/O/S: asymmetrical5) Level 3
interference Frequency: 0.15 - 80 MHz 0.15 - 80 MHz
U0: 10 V 10 V
Voltage dips EN 61000-4-113) Input: 30% reduction of the input voltage See Input Data:
for 0.5 periods Mains buffering
> 20 ms
Noise Emission According to EN 61000-6-3:
Radio interference EN 55011 Class A6) EN 55011 (EN 55022) Class B7)
6)
Radio interference EN 55011 Class A EN 55011 (EN 55022) Class B7)
EN 55011 corresponds to CISPR11/EN 55022 corresponds to
CISPR22
4)
EN 61000 corresponds to IEC 1000 Symmetrical: Cable to cable
5)
Asymmetrical: Cable to ground
2)
Criterion A: Normal operating characteristics within the specified
6)
limits. Class A: Industrial applications
3) 7)
Criterion B:Temporary adverse effects on the operating Class B: Industrial and domestic applications
characteristics, which the device corrects automatically.

4. Device View, Connections, and Control Elements
6
DC
O
K O
DC 7
13
14
DC
O
K
QUINT POWER
+ O
u
+ tput DC
– 24
V
– 40
A
–
In
pu
5 tA
C
N 100- /40
24
L 0V DC
/24
4 00
40
-2 7 9
-1 8 8
www.interface.phoenixcontact.com
- PS 29 3
T
IN o.:
QU er-N
d
Or
°C
60 F
3 2 DC
-2 …
-1
3
+ 40 °
5…+1
5
O –2
K OK
A DC
22 djus 0-6
-2
.5- t 00
29 S
L 61 81-1
RIA EN 500
.5V AL ST L
OV DU RO NT
IN NT ME
EN
PR COUIP
13 AP EQKA
43 ns
U
14 io s
DC ct
r u a in
D
TE
O LIS st
K in o m
1 + O n t
io
ut
pu ll a t t in g
+ a ec
tD st
C in o n n
– 24 ad c
V R ef o r e
– 40
A be
–
5
Figure 04
1 AC input: QUINT POWER is a built-in device. Installation and

85 - 264 V AC input voltage startup must only be carried out by qualified
Frequency 45 - 65 Hz personnel. The relevant country-specific regulations
(0.2 mm2 to 6 mm2 solid) (e.g., VDE, DIN) must also be observed.
(0.2 mm2 to 4 mm2 stranded) Before startup it is particularly important to ensure
(25 - 10 AWG) that:
Internal fuse 20 AT • The mains has been connected correctly and
Recommended fuse protection is provided against electric shock.
16 A or 25 A LS/characteristic B • The device can be switched off outside the power
2 DC output: supply according to EN 60950 regulations (e.g., by
24 V DC output voltage (default), the mains protection on the primary side).
can be set from 22.5 - 28.5 V DC using
• The protective conductor is connected.
a potentiometer 5 (0.5 mm2 to 16 mm2 solid)
(0.5 mm2 to 10 mm2 stranded) (20 - 6 AWG) • All supply lines have sufficient fuse protection and
The device is idling-proof and short-circuit-proof. are the correct size.
3 DC OK output active • All output cables are the correct size for the maximum
4 DC OK output electrically isolated device output current or have separate fuse
5 Potentiometer (covered) 22.5 - 28.5 V DC protection.
6 DC OK LED • Sufficient convection is ensured.
7 Universal DIN rail adapter UTA 107 The housing temperature can reach high values
depending on the ambient operating temperature
and the load of the device.
5. Safety Notes and Warning The device contains dangerous live components
Instructions and high levels of stored energy.
To ensure that the device can be operated safely

and all functions can be used, please read these
instructions carefully.
Caution: Never carry out work when the

power is turned on, this is highly
dangerous.
6. Installation
6.1. Mounting
The power supply unit can be snapped onto all
DIN rails according to EN 60715 and should be
mounted horizontally (input terminal blocks facing
downwards).
Installation Dimensions
QUINT POWER
To ensure sufficient convection, we
recommend the following minimum
spacing be used between modules: In
5
pu
tA
C
N 100-2
4 C/4
0
L 0V
/2 4D
40 9
-2
00 87
S-1 38
www.interface.phoenixcontact.com
T-P 29
IN o.:
8.0 cm for vertical installation QU er-N

Ord
60
°C
+ 40 °F
0.0 cm for horizontal installation DC

O
K OK
–2
5
5…+1
-2 …
-1
3
A DC
22 djust 0-
6-
2
.5-2 L 00 1
S 61 1-
9.5 RIA
AL ST L EN 5008
V OV INDUTROENT EN
PR N M
COUIP
13 AP EQKA
ns
U
14 43
ti o s
DC D
u c in
s tr m a
TE
O LIS
K in
+ O
utp
n
ti o g
to
ll a c ti n
+ ut DC s ta e
in o n n
– 24 ad c
V R efo re
– 40
A be
–
Figure 05
Flat mounting position: Narrow mounting position:

Installation depth: 125 mm (+ DIN rail) Installation depth: 243 mm (+ DIN rail)
240 mm 122 mm
80 mm
145 mm
QUINT POWER
DC OK
130 mm
290 mm
Input AC 100-240V Adjust Output DC 24V 40A

5
DC
N L 22.5-29.5V 13 14 OK + + – – –
Figure 06

6.2. Flat Mounting Position

The device is supplied ready for installation in a flat
mounting position.
Mounting:
Place the module with the DIN rail guideway on the
Mounting
top edge of the DIN rail and then snap it downwards.
Removal:
Release the snap-on catch using a screwdriver and
then detach the module from the bottom edge of the
DIN rail.
6.3. Narrow Mounting Position

A narrow mounting position can be achieved by
mounting the module onto the DIN rail at a 90° angle. Removal
To do this, mount the DIN rail adapter (UTA 107) 7 as
shown in Figure 08. No additional assembly material is
required. Mounting screws: Torx T10 (torque 0.8 -
0.9 Nm).
Figure 07
Figure 08

6.4. Connection of Various Types of Network: 100 - 240 V AC Networks
TN-S network TN-C network TT network
L L L L1
N PEN N L2
PE L3
L N PE L N PE L N PE
+ – + – + – L N PE
QUINT QUINT QUINT + –
QUINT
Figure 09
Connecting Cable:
To maintain UL approvals, use copper cables, which
Q
are designed for operating temperatures > +75°C.
The following cable cross sections can be connected:
Solid Stranded Torque Stripping Length

[mm2] [mm2] AWG [Nm] [lb in] [mm] In
pu
5 tA
C
1 0.2 - 6 0.2 - 4 25 - 10 0.5 - 0.6 5-7 7 N 100-
24
34 0.2 - 6 0.2 - 4 25 - 10 0.5 - 0.6 5-7 8 L 0V
2 0.5 - 16 0.5 - 10 20 - 6 1.2 - 1.5 15 10
To maintain EN 60950/UL 60950, flexible cables

require appropriate ferrules.
For reliable and safe-to-touch L [mm]

connections: Strip 7 mm from the 1 5
A
22 djus
.5- t
29
input connector ends, 8 mm from the .5V
signal connector ends, and 10 mm from the output

connector ends. Figure 10
6.5. Input (1, Figure 10) Recommended Fuse:

The 100 - 240 V AC connection is made using screw 16 A or 25 A circuit breaker, characteristic B (or
connections L, N, and 5. The device can be connected equivalent). A suitable fuse should be provided for DC
to single-phase AC networks or to two external applications.
conductors for three-phase networks (TN, TT or IT
network according to VDE 0100 T300/IEC364-3) with If the internal fuse is blown, this is most
nominal voltages of 100 - 240 V AC. probably due to a device fault.
In this case, the device should be
Protecting the Primary Side checked in the factory.
The device must be installed according to the
specifications of EN 60 950. It must be possible to
switch off the device using a suitable disconnecting
device outside the power supply.
Note that an all-pole disconnecting device must be
provided for two-phase operation using two external
conductors for a three-phase network. For this, mains
protection on the primary side, for example, is suitable.
Further device protection is not required, as an
internal fuse is present.

6.6. Output (Figure 11)

The 24 V DC connection is made using the "+" and 6
"-" screw connections on the screw connection 2. The
PS
output voltage set upon delivery is 24 V DC. T-
IN o.:
QU er-N
The output voltage can be adjusted from 22.5 - Or
d
28.5 V DC on the potentiometer 5.
Protecting the Secondary Side: DC

O
K OK
The device is electronically short-circuit-proof and A
22 djus
DC
.5- t
idling-proof. In the event of an error, the output voltage 29
.5V AL
S
OV INDUT
PR
is limited to a maximum of 30 V DC.
N
13 AP COUI
EQKA
43
U
14
It should be ensured that all output cables are the DC
O
K LIS
TE
D
correct size for the maximum output current or have + O

u
+ tput D
separate fuse protection. – C 24V ad
R ef o r e
i
The cable cross sections in the secondary circuit 4 – 40A be

–
should be large enough to keep the voltage drops on
the cables as low as possible.
3
2
Figure 11
Signaling
Both DC OK outputs are used for preventive function
monitoring of the power supply. A floating signal
contact 4 and an active DC OK signal 3 are available.
In addition, the DC OK LED 6 can be used to evaluate
the function of the power supply directly at the Output 24 V DC
installation location.
DC OK
Floating Contact (Figure 12)
When opened, the floating signal contact indicates
that the output voltage has fallen more than 10% below
13 14 ++–––
the set value. Signals and ohmic loads up to a
maximum of 30 V and currents up to a maximum of 1 A
can be switched.
With heavy inductive loads, e.g., a relay, a suitable DC OK
protective circuit (e.g., free-wheeling diode) is required.
30 V AC/DC 1 A, maximum
Figure 12
Active Signal Output (Figure 13)

The 24 V DC signal is between the "DC OK" and "-"
connection terminal blocks and can be loaded with
20 mA maximum. This signal output indicates that the
output voltage has fallen more than 10% below the set
value when "active high" changes to "low". Output 24 V DC
The DC OK signal is isolated from the power output.
DC OK
This ensures that a separate supply does not enter

from devices connected in parallel.
The 24 V DC signal can be connected directly to a
logic input for evaluation.
13 14 ++–––
DC OK
24 V DC
20 mA
Figure 13

Signal Loop (Figure 14)

The two signal outputs mentioned above can be
combined easily.
Example: Monitoring two devices

Use the active alarm output of device 1 and loop in Device 1 Device 2
the electrically isolated alarm output of device 2. In the
event of an error, a group error message is generated. Output 24 V DC Output 24 V DC
DC OK
DC OK
Any number of devices can be looped.
This signal combination saves on wiring costs and 13 14 ++––– 13 14 ++–––
logic inputs.
24 V DC
DC OK LED 20 mA DC OK
The green DC OK LED enables local function
evaluation in the control cabinet.
LED ON Normal operation of the power supply

LED The output voltage has fallen by more than 10%.
flashing There is a secondary load short circuit or overload.
Figure 14
LED OFF No mains voltage is present or there is a device fault.
7. Function
UOUT 960 W 1080 W
7.1. Output Characteristic Curve
[V]
With heavy loads, the working point demonstrates
the U/I characteristic curve shown in Figure 13. The UN 24
output current is limited to 45 A.
The secondary voltage is reduced until the short < 60 °C < 40 °C
circuit on the secondary side is removed.
The U/I characteristic curve ensures that both heavy
capacitive loads and devices with DC/DC converters
can be supplied by QUINT POWER in the input circuit
IOUT
without any problems. 40 45
IN IBOOST [A]
Connected fuses are reliably tripped. The selectivity
in your system configuration is ensured at all times.
Figure 15
7.2. Temperature Response

The device can supply a nominal output current of
40 A up to an ambient operating temperature of +60°C.
The output power must be decreased by 2.5% per
Kelvin temperature increase for ambient operating
UOUT = 24 V
temperatures over +60°C.
At ambient operating temperatures above +70°C or
Output current [A]
in the event of a thermal overload, the device switches 40

off. The device switches on again automatically once it
has cooled down.
0
0 20 40 60
Ambient operating temperature [°C]
Figure 16

7.3. Parallel Operation

Devices of the same type can be connected in
parallel to increase both redundancy and power. The
default setting does not have to be adjusted. QUINT QUINT
If the output voltage is adjusted, an even current 40 A + – 40 A + –
distribution can be ensured by precisely setting all
power supply units that are operated in parallel to the
same output voltage.
+
To ensure symmetrical current distribution we –
recommend that all cable connections from the power
supply unit to the DIN rail are the same length and have
the same cross section. + – Σ = 40 A
Depending on the system, for parallel connection of
more than two power supply units a protective circuit
should be installed at each individual device output Figure 17
(e.g., decoupling diode or DC fuse). This prevents high
return currents in the event of a secondary device fault.
7.4. Redundancy Operation (Figure 17)

Redundant connections are designed for supplying
systems, which place particularly high requirements on QUINT QUINT
40 A + – 40 A + –
operational safety. If a fault occurs in the primary circuit
of the first power supply unit, the second device
automatically takes over the complete power supply
without interruption, and vice versa. +
For this purpose, the power supply units to be –
connected in parallel must be large enough that the
total current requirements of all loads can be fully met
by one power supply unit. + – Σ = 80 A
External decoupling diodes are required for 100%
redundancy.
Figure 18
7.5. Power Increase (Figure 18)
The output current can be increased to n x IN where
n is the number of devices connected in parallel.
Parallel connection for increasing power is used
when extending existing systems. A parallel
http://www.phoenixcontact.com
connection is recommended if the power supply unit
does not cover the current consumption of the most
powerful load. Otherwise, the loads should be divided
over independent individual devices.
A maximum of five devices can be connected in
parallel.
TNR:102315-01-gb
03/15/05
 PHOENIX CONTACT

Redundancy Module
QUINT-DIODE/40
QUINT DIODE provides:
• 100% decoupling of power supplies connected in

parallel
• Can be installed in potentially explosive areas
• Load currents up to 60 A supported
• Easy assembly by snapping onto the DIN rail
The redundancy module can be used to 100%

decouple two power supplies of the same type, which
are connected in parallel on the output side to increase
power or provide redundancy.
The reliability of a power supply determines the
availability of individual components in a system and
whether complex systems can function safely.
Redundant connections are designed for supplying
systems, which place particularly high requirements on
operational safety. The redundant configuration of the
power supply ensures continuous system availability.
The power supply of a system can be configured
redundantly through the connection of at least two
power supply units in parallel. Together they then
supply the connected devices. The connected power
supplies must be large enough that the total current
requirements of all devices can be fully met by one
power supply. In the event of an internal fault on one
device or a mains voltage supply failure on the primary
side, the other device automatically takes over the
complete power supply without interruption and vice
versa. In this way the operational reliability of the
system can be increased effectively.
Phoenix Contact GmbH & Co. KG • 32825 Blomberg, Germany

Redundancy Module QUINT-DIODE/40
2. Technical Data
102 mm (4.016 in.)
(3.307 in.)
IN OUT
84 mm
2
62 mm
(2.441 in.)
QUINT-DIODE/40
Redundancy module
10 mm (0.39 in.) solid flexible torque
2]
[mm AWG [Nm] [Ib in.]
0.5 - 16 0.5 - 10 20 - 6 1.2 - 1.5 10.6 -13.3
Pcs.
Redundancy module QUINT-DIODE/40 29 38 96 3 1
Technical Data
Input Data
Input voltage UN/Umax 24 V DC/< 30 V DC
Input current IN 2 x 20 A, 1 x 40 A
(Cable cross section 6 mm2 [10 AWG]) Imax 2 x 19 A, 1 x 39 A (< 40°C [104˚F]), 2 x 16 A, 1 x 32 A (< 60°C [140˚F])
2
(Cable cross section 10 mm [8 AWG]) Imax 2 x 27 A, 1 x 54 A (< 40°C [104˚F]), 2 x 21 A, 1 x 43 A (< 60°C [140˚F])
(Cable cross section 16 mm2 [6 AWG]) Imax 2 x 30 A, 1 x 60 A (< 40°C [104˚F]), 2 x 24 A, 1 x 48 A (< 60°C [140˚F])
Transient surge voltage protection using Transil diode Yes
Protection against polarity reversal with diode Yes, < 60 V
Input/output voltage drop 0.5 V, approximately
Maximum power dissipation with nominal load 20 W, approximately
General Data
Insulation voltage: Input, output/housing 1 kV
Mounting position NS 35 DIN rail according to EN 50 022
Can be mounted with spacing - Vertical 5 cm (1.969 in.)
- Horizontal 2 cm (0.787 in.)
Protection class (without PE connection) II
Efficiency > 97%
Housing version AIMg (enclosure), GD-ZnAICu (heatsink)
Dimensions (W x H x D) + DIN rail (62 x 84 x 102 mm [2.441 x 3.307 x 4.016 in.])
Weight 0.7 kg, approximately
Phoenix Contact page 2 of 6

Climatic Data
Ambient temperature - Operation -25°C to +70°C (-13˚F to +158˚F) -25°C to +60°C (-13°F to +140°F)
- Storage -40°C to +85°C (-40˚F to +185˚F)
Humidity > 95%
Vibration according to IEC 68-2-6 3 - 15 Hz, amplitude ±2.5 mm/15 Hz - 150 Hz, 2.3 g
Shock according to IEC 68-2-27 30 g, 18 ms
Degree of pollution according to EN 50 178 2
Climatic category
Certification/Standards
Electrical safety EN 60 950/VDE 0805, EN 50 178/VDE 0160
(of IT equipment) u UL/C-UL Recognized UL 60 950
Industrial control equipment U UL/C-UL Listed UL 508
LISTED
Conformance mark according to EN 50 021 X II 3G EEx nA IIC T4 KEMA 03 ATEX 1197X

Electrical equipment for potentially explosive areas UL/C-UL Recognized UL 1604 Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D
Electromagnetic compatibility
c Conformance with EMC directive: 89/336/EEC
• Noise immunity EN 61 000-6-2
• Noise emission EN 55 011/EN 55 022 B1)
1
) Class B: Industrial and domestic applications
EN 55 011 = CISPR 11; EN 50 022 = CISPR 22; EN 61 000 = IEC 1000
3. Device View, Connections, and Control Elements

E
D
IO
D
T
IN
U
Q
1 IN
2 OU
T
Figure 04
1 DC input 1:UN = 24 V, IN = 20 A, Imax = 28 A

2 DC input 2:UN = 24 V, IN = 20 A, Imax = 28 A
3 DC output
4 Universal latching foot for NS 35 DIN rails
according to EN 50 022

4. Safety Notes and Warning Instructions
To ensure that the device can be operated safely

and all functions can be used, please read these
instructions carefully.
Installation and startup must only be carried out by

qualified personnel. The relevant country-specific
regulations (e.g., VDE, DIN) must also be observed.
Before startup it is particularly important to ensure
that:
• All supply lines have sufficient fuse protection and
are the correct size.
• All output cables are the correct size for the
maximum device output current or have separate
fuse protection.
• Sufficient convection is ensured.
• To protect the device, the input current of 56 A must
not be exceeded. This is ensured if the supply is
provided from an automatic current limiting source
(e.g., QUINT POWER) or if a suitable fuse is
connected.
To meet directive 94/9/EU (ATEX), the following

safety notes must be observed:
• The QUINT-DIODE/40 redundancy module
corresponds to standard EN 50 021.
• This redundancy module may be installed within a
potentially explosive area, in which Category 3
equipment is required.
• When working on the redundancy module, observe
the national safety rules and regulations for the
prevention of accidents.
• The module must only be installed and operated by
qualified personnel.
• Installation should be carried out following the
instructions given in this data sheet.
• The QUINT-DIODE/40 redundancy module should
be installed in the control cabinet so that IP54
protection according to EN 60 529 or higher is
ensured.
• If dust is present, the device must be installed in
suitable housing. The device must not be subject to
mechanical strain or thermal load, which exceed the
limits described in this data sheet.
• To ensure sufficient convection, the following
minimum spacing should be provided between other
modules: 5 cm (1.969 in.) for vertical installation and
2 cm (0.787 in.) for horizontal installation.
• During operation only devices, which are suitable for
operation in potentially explosive areas of zone 2,
can be connected to the redundancy module.
• The redundancy module does not require
maintenance, is closed ex works, and should not be
opened. Repairs can only be carried out by the
manufacturer.
• The safety data and features provided according to
the valid conformance mark are listed after the
technical data.

5. Installation
5.1. Mounting
The redundancy module can be snapped onto all
DIN rails according to EN 50 022-35. The module can
be mounted horizontally (input terminal blocks facing
Mounting Removal
upwards or downwards) or vertically on the DIN rail.
Installation Dimensions
To ensure sufficient convection, we

recommend the following minimum
spacing be used between modules:
5 cm (1.969 in.) for vertical installation

2 cm (0.787 in.) for horizontal installation
Mounting:
Place the module with the DIN rail guideway on the
top edge of the DIN rail and then snap it downwards.
Figure 05
Removal:
Release the snap-on catch using a screwdriver and
then detach the module from the bottom edge of the
DIN rail.
I
U
Q
Connection Cable:
1 IN
The following cable cross sections can be connected:
2 OU
T
Solid
[mm2]
Flexible
[mm2]
AWG
[Nm]
Torque
[Ib in.]
1
1 2 3 0.2 - 16 0.5 - 10 20 - 6 1.2 - 1.5 10.6 - 13.3
10 mm (0.39 in.)
For reliable and safe-to-touch mm
2
connection: Strip 10 mm (0.39 in.)
from the connector ends.
To maintain UL approvals, use copper cables, which 3

are designed for operating temperatures of at least
75°C (167˚F).
Figure 06

6. Function
6.1 Input
The maximum permissible current depends on the
cross section of the connected cables and the ambient GND 24V DC
temperature (see Table 1). QUINT-DIODE/40
Power Supply + 1
Only one redundancy module is required to decouple Imax = 3 0 A

IN OUT
two power supplies that are connected in parallel (A A – 2
and B) with nominal currents up to 20 A. The individual

modules are wired together as shown in Figure 7.
One redundancy module per power supply is
required to decouple power supplies with nominal
currents from 20 A to 40 A. Both inputs "1" and "2" of
Power Supply +
Imax = 3 0 A
the redundancy module must be connected to the
power supply via two cables as shown in Figure 8. This A
B –
is required as the maximum current carrying capacity
of 30 A per input must not be exceeded. For connecting Figure 07
the redundancy module to the power supply, we
recommend using two cables of the same length and
with identical cross sections. GND 24V DC
QUINT-DIODE/40
Power Supply
+ 1
Imax = 6 0 A IN OUT
6.2 Output + 2
During operation only devices, which are suitable for
operation in potentially explosive areas of Zone 2, can
–
be connected to the output of the redundancy module A –
in Zone 2.
The plus pole of the device is wired to the output of
QUINT-DIODE/40
the redundancy module as shown in Figure 7/8. Power Supply
+ 1
Imax = 6 0 A IN OUT
6.3 Temperature Response + 2
In the horizontal mounting position (input terminal –

blocks facing upwards or downwards), the redundancy B –
module can lead maximum continuous load currents of
2 x 27 A or 1 x 54 A at ambient temperatures of up to Figure 08
40°C (104˚F). The permissible current carrying
capacity reduces according to the ambient
temperature as shown in Figure 9, curve a for a cable
cross section of 10 mm2 (8 AWG).
At an ambient temperature of 60°C (140˚F), the
Output current [A]
module can lead maximum continuous load currents of 2 x 27, 1 x 54

2 x 21 A or 1 x 43 A. 2 x 21, 1 x 43
2 x 19, 1 x 38 a
In the vertical mounting position, the redundancy
module can lead maximum continuous load currents of
2 x 27 A or 1 x 54 A at ambient temperatures of up to 0
30°C (86˚F). The permissible current carrying capacity -25 40 60 70
reduces according to the ambient temperature as Ambient temperature [°C]
shown in Figure 9, curve b for a cable cross section of
10 mm2 (8 AWG).
At an ambient temperature of 60°C (140˚F), the
Output current [A]
module can lead maximum continuous load currents of 2 x 27, 1 x 54

2 x 20 A or 1 x 40 A.
2 x 20, 1 x 40
2 x 17, 1 x 34 b
 Phoenix Contact
Table 1
0
Cable Cross Ambient Temperature -25 30 40 60 70
Section Ambient temperature [°C]
40°C (104˚F) 50°C (122˚F) 60°C (140˚F)
10 mm2/8 AWG Figure 09
6 mm2/10 AWG 2 x 19 A 2 x 18 A 2 x 16 A
1 x 39 A 1 x 36 A 1 x 32 A
10 mm2/8 AWG
04/30/03
2 x 27 A 2 x 25 A 2 x 21 A
1 x 54 A 1 x 50 A 1 x 43 A
2 x 30 A 2 x 27 A 2 x 24 A
16 mm2/6 AWG 1 x 60 A 1 x 55 A 1 x 48 A
TNR: 5156438-00

UL Type CM
AWM 2464
CSA PCC FT4
MULTICONDUCTOR, FOIL SHIELD
RoHS COMPLIANT
300 VOLT
Xtreme Performance In Critical, High Technology Electronic Signal Applications

XTREME PERFORMANCE BENEFITS:
Unique Premium-Grade PVC Insulation And Jacket Provides Easier Routing Of
Cables In Tight Spaces
30
Fast, Easy Stripping Of Insulation And Jacket To Reduce Installation And
Connectorization Time And Cost 18 AWG (0,81mm²), 16/30 (16x0,25mm), Insulation Thickness: 0.017" (0,43mm)
Light-Duty Resistance To Most Oils Per UL Class 43 Alpha No. of Jacket Thickness Nominal Diameter
Resistance To Ambient Temperatures Up To 105°C (221°F) Part No. Cond. Inches mm Inches mm
5382C 2 0.032 0,81 0.230 5,84
5382/1C* 2 0.032 0,81 0.230 5,84
XTRA·GUARD® 1 APPLICATIONS: 5383/1C* 3 0.032 0,81 0.242 6,15
5383C 3 0.032 0,81 0.242 6,15
High Technology Applications in Controlled Environments 5384C 4 0.032 0,81 0.263 6,68
Medical Electronics 5386C 6 0.032 0,81 0.311 7,90
Point-Of-Sale Equipment 5388C 8 0.032 0,81 0.336 8,53
Computer Peripherals 5390C 10 0.032 0,81 0.388 9,86
Industrial Process Controls 5390/15C 15 0.032 0,81 0.437 11,10
5390/20C 20 0.032 0,81 0.488 12,40
5390/25C 25 0.053 1,35 0.588 14,94
CHARACTERISTICS 5390/30C 30 0.053 1,35 0.621 15,77
5390/40C 40 0.053 1,35 0.692 17,58
Operating Temperature:
5390/50C 50 0.053 1,35 0.762 19,35
-20° C to 105° C CM & CMG 5390/60C 60 0.083 2,11 0.885 22,48
-20° C to 85° C CM AWM 2464 16 AWG (1,23mm²), 19/0.0117 (19x0,29mm), Insulation Thickness: 0.017" (0,43mm)
Voltage Rating: Alpha No. of Jacket Thickness Nominal Diameter

Part No. Cond. Inches mm Inches mm
300 Volt
5362C 2 0.032 0,81 0.254 6,45
Color Description: 5362/1C* 2 0.032 0,81 0.254 6,45
Color Code: Chart D Page 375 5363/1C* 3 0.032 0,81 0.268 6,81
5363C 3 0.032 0,81 0.268 6,81
Jacket Colors: Chrome Gray, Industrial Black, Robust Red, High Visibility Yellow,
5364C 4 0.032 0,81 0.292 7,42
Safety Orange, Bold Blue, Environmental Green, Sand Beige, Pure White 5366C 6 0.032 0,81 0.347 8,81
Product Description: 5368C 8 0.032 0,81 0.376 9,55

5370C 10 0.032 0,81 0.436 11,07
Conductor: Stranded
5370/15C 15 0.032 0,81 0.492 12,50
Insulation : Color-Coded Premium PVC 5370/20C 20 0.053 1,35 0.593 15,06
Shield : Aluminum/Polyester Foil Facing in with Stranded Tinned Copper Drain Wire 5370/25C 25 0.053 1,35 0.660 16,76
Equal in Size to Insulated Conductors of Cable 5370/30C 30 0.053 1,35 0.698 17,73
Jacket: Premium PVC 5370/40C 40 0.053 1,35 0.779 19,79
Nylon Rip Cord for Ease of Jacket Stripping
SPECIFICATIONS
UL Type CM, AWM Style 2464 Overall
UL AWM Style 1569 Conductors
CSA CMG FT4
Passes UL VW-1 Flame Test
Passes CSA FT4 Flame Test
RoHS Compliant
AVAILABILITY
Many Items Are Available For Same-Day Shipment From Inventory
Orders Placed By 6:00 EST Will Be Shipped The Same Day
Please Refer To http://www.alphawire.com/pages/stk.cfm For Stocked Items
Minimums May Apply For Non Stocked Items
FIT® TUBING RECOMMENDATION

FIT® - 221 - General Purpose, Irradiated Polyolefin (See Page 114 for Product Specifications)
FIT® - 321 - Medium-Wall, Adhesive-Lined Irradiated Polyolefin (See Page 121 for Product Specifications)
Web Site: www.alphawire.com Toll Free: 1-800-52 ALPHA • Telephone: 908-925-8000 • Fax: 908-925-6923
Email: info@alphawire.com Europe/UK Telephone: +44 (0) 1932 772422 • Europe/UK Fax: +44 (0) 1932 772433
907X]PI4:'WMRKPIGSVI:
8IGLRMGEPHEXE 'EFPIGSRWXVYGXMSR 4VSTIVXMIW

Ɣ 4:'MRWYPEXIHNYQTIV[MVIEWTIV90%;1 Ɣ 7XVERHIHGSTTIVGSRHYGXSVXMRRIHSVTPEMR Ɣ 'SRHMXMSREPP]VIWMWXERXXS
7X]PI18;ERH'7%%;18);EWTIV %;+WMÎWEWTIVXEFPIFIPS[ 3MPW
907X]PIERH'7%8); Ɣ 4:'GSVIMRWYPEXMSREGGSVHMRKXS 7SPZIRXW
Ɣ 8IQTIVEXYVIVERKI 907XERHEVHGPEWWERH'7%' %GMHW
JPI\MFPI'XS' 2S90:;ERH'7%*8LIEXERH 0]IW
JM\IHMRWXEPPEXMSR'XS' HEQTVIWMWXERX Ɣ 4:'WIPJI\XMRKYMWLMRKERHJPEQI
Ɣ 8IQTIVEXYVIEXGSRHYGXSV VIXEVHERXXIWXQIXLSHXS90:;
QE\90ERH'7%' Ɣ 8LIQEXIVMEPWYWIHMRQERYJEGXYVIEVI
Ɣ 2SQMREPZSPXEKI : GEHQMYQJVIIERHGSRXEMRRSWMPMGSRIERH
Ɣ 8IWXZSPXEKI7TEVOXIWX JVIIJVSQWYFWXERGIWLEVQJYPXSXLI
%;+O: [IXXMRKTVSTIVXMIWSJPEGUYIVW
%;+ERHO:
%;+XSO: 2SXI
ุ%;+O: Ɣ 4PIEWIGSQTPIXIXLIEFSZITEVXRYQFIV
Ɣ 90X]TI%;118; ': JSVXLIGSPSYVVIUYMVIHYWMRKXLIJSPPS[MRK
Ɣ '7%X]TI%;18);':
Ɣ &IRHMRKVEHMYW
XEFPI
!KVIIR!FPEGO
*
SRGIGEGEFPI !FPYI!FVS[R
QYPXMTPIGEGEFPI !VIH![LMXI
!KVI]!ZMSPIX
!]IPPS[!SVERKI
!XVERWTEVIRX!TMRO
!FIMKI!KVIIR]IPPS[
!FPYI[LMXI!HEVOFPYI
![LMXIFPYIWYTTP]YTXS%;+
%TTPMGEXMSR
*SVXLIMRXIVREP[MVMRKSJW[MXGLFSVHWIPIGXVMGEPIUYMTQIRXIKLSYWILSPHWVEHMSSVXIPIZMWMSRWERHGSRXVSPHIWOW'SRRIGXMRK[MVIWMR
QEGLMRIWPEMHMRTVIHIGXMZIXYFIWERHJPI\MFPITMTIWERHEPWSJSVQSXSVWERHXVERWJSVQEXSVW
90F^['7%
%;1 !%TTPMERGI;MVMRK1EXIVMEP
*SVMRXIVREP[MVMRKWJSVIPIGXVMGEPIUYMTQIRXERHGSRXVSPETTEVEXYWIKIPIGXVSRMGEWWIQFP]GSQTSRIRXW9018;1EGLMRI8SSP;MVIW
'7%8);)UYMTQIRX0IEH;MVIW
18; !1EGLMRI8SSP;MVI
*SVXLIIPIGXVSRMGEPMRWXEPPEXMSRSJQEGLMRIXSSPWERHXLIVIPEXMZIGSRXVSP
90 !9RHIV[VMXIVW0EFSVEXSVMIW-RG97%
'7% !'EREHMER7XERHEVHW%WWSGMEXMSR/EREHE
!8LITVSHYGXMWGSRJSVQIH[MXLXLI)'0S[:SPXEKI(MVIGXMZI))'ERH))'
4EVX2S 'VSWW %;+RS 3YXIV 'ST ;IMKLX 4EVX2S 'VSWW %;+RS 3YXIV 'ST ;IMKLX
WIGXMSR GEQQ [IMKLX GEOKOQ WIGXMSR GEQQ [IMKLX GEOKOQ
GEQQª OKOQ GEQQª OKOQ
\\ \\
\\ \\
\\ \\
\\ \\
\\ \\
\\ \\
\\ OGQMP
\\ OGQMP
\\ OGQMP
\\ OGQMP
\\ OGQMP
\\
(MQIRWMSRWERHWTIGMJMGEXMSRWQE]FIGLERKIH[MXLSYXTVMSVRSXMGI
*
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI(-SP)(-NC)
Configurable Temperature Transducer

for PT100
Data Sheet 04/2005
Functions Features
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI(-SP)(-NC) is a configurable
3-way isolated temperature measuring transducer. It
is suitable for the connection of PT100 resistance ther-
mometers in acc. with IEC 60751 in 2, 3 and 4-conduc-
tor connection systems.
On the output side, the analog standard signals
0...20 mA, 4...20 mA, 0...10 V, 0...5 V, 1...5 V,
10...0 V, 20...0 mA, 20...4 mA are available,
electrically isolated.
The DIP switches are accessible on the side of the
housing and allow the following parameters to be con-
figured:
– Connection system,
– Temperature span to be measured,
– Output signal, and
– Type of error evaluation.
The voltage supply (19.2...30 V DC) can be provided
via connecting terminal blocks "7"/"8" of the modules, Figure 1 Features
or together, via the DIN rail connector (see Figure 5 on
page 8). Please also observe "Connection Systems" 1 Input: PT100 resistance thermometer
on page 9. 2 Transparent cover
3 Diagnostics LED
4 Groove for ZBF 6 Zack marker strip
5 Output: Standard signals
6 Supply voltage
7 Connection option for DIN rail connector
8 DIP switch S1
9 DIP switch S2
10 DIP switch S3
11 Universal snap-on foot for EN mounting rails
101949_02_en 1
Technical Data
General Data
Supply voltage 19.2...30 V DC
Current consumption at 24 V DC < 25 mA
Power consumption < 500 mW
Transmission error
At max. measuring span < 0.2%
With configured measuring span ∆TEMP ((100 K / ∆TEMP [K]) + 0.1) %
Temperature coefficient 0.02%/K, max.
Step response (0...99%) < 30 ms
Test voltage (input / output / supply) 1.5 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min.
Ambient temperature range
Operation -20°C…+65°C
Storage -40°C…+85°C
Error messages LED red
Dimensions (W x H x D) 6.2 mm x 93.1 mm x 102.5 mm
Conductor cross section 0.2...2.5 mm2 (AWG 24...12)
Stripping length
Screw connection 12 mm
Spring-cage connection 8 mm
Housing design Polybutylenterephthalate PBT, green
Tests / Approvals
cuF
U PROCESS CONTROL EQUIPMENT FOR
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
LISTED 31ZN
Class I Div 2 Groups A, B, C, D T5
A) This equipment is suitable for use in Class I,
Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D or non-hazardous
locations only.
B) Warning - explosion hazard - substitution of
components may impair suitability for Class 1,
Division 2.
C) Warning - explosion hazard - do not disconnect
equipment unless power has been switched off or the
area is known to be non-hazardous.
Statement of conformity in acc. with EN 60079-15 X II 3 G Ex nA II T4 X
2 101949_02_en
Input (see Figure 1, detail 1) IIN

Sensor in acc. with IEC 60751 PT100
Connection system (configurable) 2-, 3-, 4-conductor connection system
Sensor input current 1 mA, constant
Max. permissible conductor resistance 10 Ω per conductor
Measuring range (configurable) -150°C...+850°C
Measuring range span 50K, min.
Output (see Figure 1, detail 5) IOUT UOUT

Output signal range 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA, 0...5 V, 1...5 V,
20...0 mA, 20...4 mA 0...10 V, 10...0 V
Load < 500 Ω (20 mA) ≥ 10 kΩ
Ripple < 20 mVss (500 Ω) < 20 mVss
Max. output signal 23 mA / 12.5 V 12.5 V / 10 mA
Behavior in the case of a sensor fault (configurable) 0...105%
Conformance With EMC Guideline 89/336/EEC And Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC
Immunity to Interference According to EN 61000-6-21
Discharge of static electricity (ESD) EN 61000-4-2 Criterion B2
Electromagnetic HF field EN 61000-4-3 Criterion A3
Fast transients (Burst) EN 61000-4-4 Criterion B4
Surge voltage capacities (Surge) EN 61000-4-5 Criterion B4
Conducted disturbance EN 61000-4-6 Criterion A3
Noise Emission According to EN 61000-6-4
Noise emission of housing EN 550115 Class A6
1
EN 61000 corresponds to IEC 1000
2 Criterion B: Take protective measures against electrostatic discharge.
3
Criterion A: Normal operating behavior within the defined limits.
4
Criterion B: Temporary impairment to operational behavior that is corrected by the device itself.
5 EN 55011 corresponds to CISPR11
6
Class A: Area of application industry.
101949_02_en 3
Ordering Data
Description Order Designation Order No.
Configurable temperature transducer for PT100 MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI 28 64 43 5
Screw terminal block, preconfigured
(see "Ordering Key for MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI and
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI-SP" on page 5)
Configurable temperature transducer for PT100 MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI-NC 28 64 27 3
Screw terminal block, not configured
(see "NC Version" on page 10)
Configurable temperature transducer for PT100 MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI-SP 28 64 73 6
Spring-cage terminal block, preconfigured
(see "Ordering Key for MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI and
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI-SP" on page 5)
Configurable temperature transducer for PT100 MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI-SP-NC 28 64 28 6
Spring-cage terminal block, not configured
(see "NC Version" on page 10)
Accessories
Description Order Designation Order No.
DIN rail connector ME 6,2 TBUS-2 1,5/5-ST-3,81 GN 28 69 72 8
Power terminal block with screw connection MINI MCR-SL-PTB 28 64 13 4
Power terminal block with spring-cage connection MINI MCR-SL-PTB-SP 28 64 14 7
System power supply (not for Zone 2!) MINI-SYS-PS-100-240AC/24DC/1,5 28 66 98 3
4 101949_02_en
Ordering Key for MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI and MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI-SP

If the customer order information is incorrect or missing, the standard configuration is delivered (shown as an
example in the ordering key).
Manufacturer’s
Connection Failure
Order No. Measuring Range [°C]1 Output 2 Calibration
Method Information
Certificate WKZ
Start End /
28 64 43 5 /
3 / 0 / 100 / OUT01 / A NONE
28 64 73 6 /
(see "Ordering Length (see
Range (see page 6)
Data") of step below)
2 = 2-cond. 0 0...100 5K OUT01 A NONE = without WKZ
3 = 3-cond. -10 110...300 10 K OUT02 B YES = with WKZ (a
4 = 4-cond. -20 320...700 20 K OUT03 C charge will be made)
-30 750...850 50 K OUT05 D YESPLUS = WKZ
-40 OUT06 with 5 measuring
-50 OUT07 points (a charge will
-100 OUT08 be made)
-150 OUT09
1
Smallest span 50 K
2 Depending on the output signal range, for further details see "DIP Switch S2" on page 11.
Output:
Output Output signal
OUT01 = 0...20 mA
OUT02 = 4...20 mA
OUT03 = 0...10 V
OUT05 = 0...5 V
OUT06 = 1...5 V
OUT07 = 20...0 mA
OUT08 = 20...4 mA
OUT09 = 10...0 V
101949_02_en 5
Failure Information:
Line break Overrange

0...20 mA 4...20 mA 0...10 V 0...20 mA 4...20 mA 0...10 V
A = 21 mA 21 mA 10.5 V 20.5 mA 20.5 mA 10.25 V
B = 21 mA 21 mA 10.5 V 20.5 mA 20.5 mA 10.25 V
C = 21 mA 21 mA 10.5 V 20 mA 20 mA 10 V
D = 0 mA 4 mA 0V 20 mA 20 mA 10 V
Underrange Short circuit

0...20 mA 4...20 mA 0...10 V 0...20 mA 4...20 mA 0...10 V
A = 0 mA 4 mA 0V 0 mA 4 mA 0V
B = 0 mA 3.5 mA 0V 0 mA 3 mA 0V
C = 0 mA 4 mA 0V 21 mA 21 mA 10.5 V
D = 0 mA 4 mA 0V 0 mA 4 mA 0V
Installation
Screw Connection Spring-Cage Connection
Figure 2 MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI Figure 3 MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI-SP

MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI-NC MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI-SP-NC
6 101949_02_en
The device may only be installed and put into operation by qualified personnel. The corresponding
national regulations (e.g. VDE, DIN) must be observed.
Notes for Ex:

The device is category 3 electrical apparatus. Please observe the instructions given here for instal-
lation. The device must be installed in a housing with IP54 protection in acc. with EN 60529. The
limits for mechanical or thermal loads described for the device must not be exceeded. Only devices
designed for operation in the hazardous areas of Zone 2 may be connected. Under no circumstances
may repairs be carried out by the user.
Only engage or connect conductors in the hazardous area when the device is deenergized!
The assignment of the connecting terminal blocks is shown in Figure 4.
Block Diagram
Figure 4 Block diagram
The MINI Analog module can be snapped onto all

35 mm DIN rails corresponding to EN 60715.
101949_02_en 7
Using DIN rail connector ME 6,2 TBUS-2 1,5/5-ST-3,81 GN (Order No.: 28 69 72 8)
Please also pay particular attention to the

direction of the MINI Analog module and
DIN rail connector when snapping into
position:
Snap-on foot (Figure 5, detail D 11)
below and plug (Figure 5, detail C 12)
left!
• First position the DIN rail connector in the DIN rail
to bridge the voltage supply (see Figure 5).
Figure 5 Mounting/Removing
8 101949_02_en
Power Supply Connection Systems

Never connect the supply voltage directly 2-conductor connection system (Figure 6)
to the DIN rail connector! – For short distances (< 10 m)
It is not permitted to draw power from the – Cable resistances RL1 and RL2 are incorporated
DIN rail connector or from individual MINI in the measurement result directly and falsify the
Analog modules! result accordingly.
Feeding in power via the MINI Analog module

Where the total current consumption of the aligned
MINI Analog modules does not exceed 400 mA, the
power can be fed in directly at the connecting terminal
blocks of a MINI Analog module. We recommend
connecting a 400 mA fuse upstream.
Feeding in power with a power terminal block

Power terminal block MINI MCR-SL-PTB
(Order No.: 28 64 13 4) or MINI MCR-SL-PTB-SP
(Order No.: 28 64 14 7), of the same shape, is used to
Figure 6 2-conductor connection system
feed in the supply voltage to the DIN rail connector.
We recommend connecting a 2 A fuse upstream.
3-conductor connection system (Figure 7)
Feeding in the power with a system power supply – For long distances between PT100 sensor and
unit MINI Analog module
System power supply unit MINI-SYS-PS-... – The value of all cable resistances must be exactly
(Order No.: 28 66 98 3) with 1.5 A output current the same in order to balance out the sensor cable
contacts the DIN rail connector with the supply resistances (RL1 = RL2 = RL3).
voltage, allowing several MINI Analog modules to be
supplied from the network.
Figure 7 3-conductor connection system
101949_02_en 9
4-conductor connection system (Figure 8) Configuration

– For long distances between the PT100 sensor
and the MINI Analog module and different cable Electrostatic Discharge!
resistances (RL1 ≠ RL2 ≠ RL3 ≠ RL4).
The module contains components that
can be damaged or destroyed by electro-
static discharge. When handling the mod-
ule, observe the necessary safety
precautions against electrostatic dis-
charge (ESD), in accordance with
EN 61340-5-1 and EN 61340-5-2, as well
as IEC 61340-5-1 and IEC 61340-5-2.
NC Version
If the device is not configured ("NC version":
MINI MCR-SL-PT100-UI-NC or ...-SP-NC), all DIP
Figure 8 4-conductor connection system switches are at pos. 0. The device does not have a de-
fined function until the DIP switches have been set.
DIP Switch S1
Diagnostics
DIP switch S1 (Figure 1, detail 8) defines the connec-
LED (Figure 1, detail 3) is visible on the front and tion system, output signal range and the start of the
displays the following error statuses: measuring range.
– LED flashes: Measuring range span less than Connection Output Signal Start
50 K System Range Temperature
– LED lit: Line break on the sensor side 1 2 3 4 5 OUT 6 7 8 [°C] [°F]
– LED lit: Short circuit on the sensor side 2-cond. 0...20 mA 0 32
– LED lit: Measuring range exceeded • 2-cond. • 20...0 mA • -10 14
– LED lit: Measuring range fallen below • 3-cond. • 4...20 mA • -20 -4
• • 4-cond. • • 20...4 mA • • -30 -22
• 0...10 V • -40 -40
• • 10...0 V • • -50 -58
• • 0...5 V • • -100 -148
• = ON • • • 1...5 V • • • -150 -238
DIP Switch S3
DIP switch S3 (Figure 1, detail 10) is used to select
the voltage and current output.
1 2 OUT
• 0(4)...20 mA, 20...0(4) mA
• 0...10 V, 10...0 V, 0(1)...5 V
• = ON
10 101949_02_en
DIP Switch S2 End Temperature

DIP switch S2 (Figure 1, detail 9) defines the end 1 2 3 4 5 6 [°C] [°F]
value of the measuring range and error evaluation. • • • • • 210 410
• 220 428
End Temperature • • 230 446
1 2 3 4 5 6 [°C] [°F] • • 240 464
0 32 • • • 250 482
• 5 41 • • 260 500
• 10 50 • • • 270 518
• • 15 59 • • • 280 536
• 20 68 • • • • 290 554
• • 25 77 • • 300 572
• • 30 86 • • • 320 608
• • • 35 95 • • • 340 644
• 40 104 • • • • 360 680
• • 45 113 • • • 380 716
• • 50 122 • • • • 400 752
• • • 55 131 • • • • 420 788
• • 60 140 • • • • • 440 824
• • • 65 149 • • 460 860
• • • 70 158 • • • 480 896
• • • • 75 167 • • • 500 932
• 80 176 • • • • 520 968
• • 85 185 • • • 540 1004
• • 90 194 • • • • 560 1040
• • • 95 203 • • • • 580 1076
• • 100 212 • • • • • 600 1112
• • • 110 230 • • • 620 1148
• • • 120 248 • • • • 640 1184
• • • • 130 266 • • • • 660 1220
• • 140 284 • • • • • 680 1256
• • • 150 302 • • • • 700 1292
• • • 160 320 • • • • • 750 1382
• • • • 170 338 • • • • • 800 1472
• • • 180 356 • • • • • • 850 1562
• • • • 190 374
• • • • 200 392
7 8 Line Break Overrange Underrange Short Circuit

Measuring range end Measuring range end Measuring range
A Measuring range start
+5% +2.5% start
Measuring range
Measuring range end Measuring range end Measuring range start
B • start
+5% +2.5% -25%
-12.5%
Measuring range end Measuring range Measuring range end
C • Measuring range end
+5% start +5%
Measuring range
D • • Measuring range start Measuring range end Measuring range start
start
101949_02_en 11
Make sure you always use the latest documentation.

It can be downloaded at www.download.phoenixcontact.com.
A conversion table is available on the Internet at
www.download.phoenixcontact.com/general/7000_en_00.pdf.
© PHOENIX CONTACT 04/2005 Technical modifications reserved
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG

Flachsmarktstr. 8
32825 Blomberg
Germany
+ 49 - (0) 52 35 - 3-00
+ 49 - (0) 52 35 - 3-4 12 00
www.phoenixcontact.com
Worldwide Locations:
www.phoenixcontact.com/salesnetwork
12 101949_02_en
Multi-stage performance filter FN 2070
• Current ratings from 1 to 36A
• Very high differential and common mode attenuation
• Good high-frequency attenuation
• Optional medical versions (B types)
• Nennströme von 1 bis 36A

• Sehr hohe Gleich- und Gegentaktdämpfung
• Gute Hochfrequenzdämpfung
• Optionale medizinische Versionen (Typ B)
• Courants de service de 1 à 36A

• Très bonne atténuation en modes différentiel et mode commun
• Bonne atténuation à des hautes fréquences
• En option version pour appareils médicaux (type B)
Filter selection table Approvals

Choose the filter FN xxxx-x with the required current rating and features, and add /??
to determine input/output (line/load) connection style. Example: FN 2070-10/06 is a 10A
filter with fast-on connections.
Filter Connections Current ratings Inductance Capacitance Resistance Housing Weight

at 40°C (25°) L Cx Cy R
A mH μF nF MΩ g
FN 2070 -1 /?? /06 /07 1 (1.15) 22 0.33 4.7 1 K1 190

FN 2070 -3 /?? /06 /07 3 (3.45) 9.8 0.47 4.7 0.47 K2 250
FN 2070 -6 /?? /06 /07 6 (6.9) 7.8 1 4.7 0.22 P 450
FN 2070 -10 /?? /06 /07 10 (11.5) 4.5 1 4.7 0.22 Q 730
FN 2070 -12 /?? /06 /07 12 (13.8) 3.25 1 4.7 0.22 Q 730
FN 2070 -16 /?? /06 /07 /08 16 (18.4) 2.8 1 4.7 0.22 L2 1000
FN 2070 -25 /?? /08 25 (28.75) 2 2.2 4.7 0.22 Q 760
FN 2070 -36 /?? /08 36 (41.4) 1.23 2.2 4.7 0.22 Q 790
Additional specifications
Filter type Maximum Operating Hipot test voltage MTBF Maximum

operating voltage frequency PN¤E P¤N Per Mil-HB-217F at 40ºC 230V leakage
VAC Hz Hz VAC VDC hours mA/phase
Standard types 250 50/60 DC to 400 2000 1700 1 550 000 0.4
B medical types (no Y capacitors) 250 50/60 DC to 400 2500 1700 1 600 000 0.002
A safety types (lower capacitance) 250 50/60 DC to 400 2500 1700 1 550 000 0.040
Electrical schematic
FN 2070
Cx L R Cx L
P P'
LOAD
LINE
N N'
E
Cy Cy
See tables for component values.
136
FN 2070 insertion loss
Per CISPR 17; A = 50Ω/50Ω sym, B = 50Ω/50Ω asym, C = 0.1Ω/100Ω sym, D = 100Ω/0.1Ω sym
1A types 3A types 6A types 10A types (12A*)

dB dB dB dB
70 70 70 70
60 60 60 60
50 50 50 50
40 40 40 40
30 30 30 30
20 20 20 20
10 10 10 10
0 0 0 0
-10 -10 -10 -10
-20 -20 -20 -20
10k 100k 1M 10M 10k 100k 1M 10M 10k 100k 1M 10M 10k 100k 1M 10M
16A types 25A types 36A types

dB
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
-10
-20
10k 100k 1M 10M
* attenuation performance of the 12A version is similar to the 10A component.
Mechanical data
Front S
Housing Tol.
style K1 K2 ± mm
A 85 ± 0.5 C
L
K
B 54 ± 0.5
30.3 40.3 J
C ± 0.5 P
D 64.8 ± 0.5 Top M
F 75 ± 0.3
J 27 ± 0.2 N
K 12.3/8.3§ ± 0.5
L 20.8/23.3 29.8 ± 0.5 A F D
M 5.3 ± 0.1
N 6.3 ± 0.1
P 0.7 ± 0.1
S 19.9/34.9§ 11.4/34.9§ ± 0.5 B
§ with /07 connections
wire length of /07: 140 +5 mm Housings K1, K2
Housing Tol.*
Front S
style P Q L2 ± mm
A 113.5 156 119 ± 0.5 ±1 C

C L
B 57.5 85.5 ±1 K
K
C 45.4 ± 1.2 57.6 ±1 J P P J
D 94 130.5 98.5 ±1 Top N
M
F 103 143 109 ± 0.3
J 25 40 ± 0.2
N
K 12.4/8.4§ 15.6/8.6 § ± 0.5 M
L 32.4 ± 0.5
A F D
M 4.4 5.3 4.4 ± 0.1
A F D
N 6 7.4 ± 0.1
P 0.9 1.2 ± 0.1
Q 66 ± 0.3
R 51 ± 0.2 B
S 15.5/38 § ± 0.5 R
§ with /07 connections * Measurements share this common Q
wire length of /07: 140 +5 mm tolerance unless otherwise stated. B
All dimensions in mm; 1 inch = 25.4 mm Housings P, Q Housing L2
137
Presentation, Limit switches 3
terminology 3
Osiswitch®
General
Presentation Electromechanical detection

Limit switches are used in all automated installations and also in a wide variety of applications,
due to the numerous advantages inherent to their technology.
They transmit data to the logic processing system regarding:
v presence/absence,
v passing,
v positioning,
v end of travel.
Simple to install switches, offering many advantages

b From an electrical viewpoint
v galvanic separation of circuits,
v models suitable for low power switching, combined with good electrical durability,
v very good short-circuit withstand in coordination with appropriate fuses,
v total immunity to electromagnetic interference,
v high rated operational voltage.
b From a mechanical viewpoint
v N/C contacts with positive opening operation,
v high resistance to the different ambient conditions encountered in industry (standard tests and
specific tests under laboratory conditions),
v high repeat accuracy, up to 0.01 mm on the tripping points.
Detection movements
b Linear actuation (plunger) b Rotary actuation (lever) b Multi-directional actuation
Unactuated Tripped Unactuated Tripped Unactuated Tripped
Terminology Rated value of a quantity b This replace the term “nominal value”.
b It is the fixed value for a specific function.
Catégories d'emploi b AC-15 replaces AC-11: control of an electromagnet on a.c., test
10 le/le.
b AC-12: control of a resistive load on a.c. or static load isolated
by opto-coupler.
b DC-13 replaces DC-11: control of an electromagnet on d.c., test
le/le.
Positive opening travel b Minimum travel from the initial movement of contact actuator to
the position required to accomplish positive opening operation.
Positive opening force b The force required on the contact actuator to accomplish
positive opening operation.
Switching capacity b Ithe is no longer a rated value but a conventional current used
for heating tests).
Example: for category A300 the corresponding rated current,
le maximum, is 6 A-120 V or 3 A-240 V, the equivalent Ithe being
10 A.
Positive opening b A limit switch complies to this specification when all the closed
operation contact elements of the switch can be changed, with certainty, to
the open position (no flexible link between the moving contacts and
the operator of the switch, to which an actuating force is applied).
b All limit switches incorporating either a slow break contact block
or a snap action N/C + N/O (form Zb), N/C + N/O + N/O, N/C + N/C
+ N/O, N/C + N/C + N/O + N/O contact block are positive opening
operation, in complete conformity with the standard IEC 60947-5-1
Appendix K.
31900-EN_Ver6.3.fm/2 Schneider Electric

Contact blocks 3
Limit switches 3
Osiswitch®
General
Contact blocks Snap action contacts

b Snap action contacts are characterised by different tripping and reset points (differential
travel).
b The displacement speed of the moving contacts is independent to the speed of the operator.
b This feature ensures satisfactory electrical performance in applications involving low speed
actuators.
13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14
21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22
Unactuated state Approach travel Contact change of state Positive opening

Slow break contacts
b Slow break contacts are characterised by identical tripping and resetting points.
b The displacement speed of the moving contacts is equal, or proportional, to the speed of the
operator (which must not be less than 0.001 m/s = 6 m/minute).
The opening distance is also dependent on the distance travelled by the operator.
21 22 21 22
13 14 13 14
Electrical durability for normal loads

V Insulation voltage limit
500 b Normally, for inductive loads, the current value is less than 0.1 A (sealed) i.e. values of 3 to
40 VA sealed and 30 to 1000 VA inrush, depending on the voltage.
For this type of application the electrical durability will exceed 10 million operating cycles.
3 Application example: XCK J161 + LC1 D12pppp (7 VA sealed, 70 VA inrush).
240
200 Electrical durability = 10 million operating cycles.
150
Switching capacity
120
4 1 Normal PLC input type 1
100 2 Normal PLC input type 2
3 Switching capacity conforming to IEC 60947-5-5, utilisation category AC-15, DC-13
60
A300 240 V 3 A B300 240 V 1.5 A
(1) Inductive
48 zone Q300 250 V 0.27 A R300 250 V 0.13 A
4 Switching capacity conforming to IEC 60947-5-1, utilisation category AC-15, DC-13
Heating limit (I the)
24 A300 120 V 6 A B300 120 V 3 A

20
Q300 125 V 0.55 A R300 125 V 0.27 A
1
15
Electrical durability for small loads
2
10 b The use of limit switches with programmable controllers is becoming more common.
8 b With small loads, limit switches offer the following levels of reliability:
6 v failure rate of less than 1 for 100 million operating cycles using snap action contacts (XEpS P
5 contacts and contacts of XCM Dp),
1 mA 2 3 mA 6 mA 10 1A 2 A 3A 6A 10 A v failure rate of less than 1 for 50 million operating cycles using slow break contacts (XEpN P
mA mA contacts).
Range of use
Standard contacts XE2S P2151, P3151
Continuous service XE2N Ppppp
(frequent switching)
Contacts of
XCM D
XE3p Ppppp
Gold flashed Occasional service (1)
contacts infrequent switching,
on resistive load y 1 operating
cycle/day, and/or
corrosive atmosphere
(1) Usable up to 48 V/10 mA.
Schneider Electric 31900-EN_Ver6.3.fm/3

Contact blocks (continued) 3
Limit switches 3
Osiswitch®
General
Contact blocks (continued) Function diagrams of the snap action contacts

b Example: N/C + N/O
A
B P A - Maximum travel of the actuator in mm or degrees.
B - Tripping travel of contact.
21 - 22 Tripping C - Resetting travel of contact.
13 - 14 D - Differential travel = B - C.
21 - 22 Resetting
13 - 14 P - Point from which positive opening is assured.
0
C D
v Linear movement (plunger)

0
D C
1 1 - Resetting point of contact.

B
2 2 - Tripping point of contact.

A
P A - Maximum travel of the actuator in mm.

max. B - Tripping travel of contact.
C - Resetting travel of contact.
D - Differential travel = B - C.
P - Point from which positive opening is assured.
v Rotary movement
B 1 - Resetting point of contact.

2 - Tripping point of contact.
C 1 A - Maximum travel of the actuator in degrees.
A
2 B - Tripping travel of contact.
D
C - Resetting travel of contact.
D - Differential travel = B - C.
P
Function diagrams of the slow break contacts

b Example: N/C + N/O break before make
A
B P A - Maximum travel of the actuator in mm or degrees.

B - Tripping and resetting travel of contact 21-22.
C - Tripping and resetting travel of contact 13-14.
21 - 22 Tripping
13 - 14 and
0 resetting
C
0 v Linear movement (plunger)

B
1
1 - Tripping and resetting points of contact 21-22.
C
2 2 - Tripping and resetting points of contact 13-14.

A
P A - Maximum travel of the actuator in mm.

max. B - Tripping and resetting travel of contact 21-22.
C - Tripping and resetting travel of contact 13-14.
P - Positive opening point.
v Rotary movement
C 1 - Tripping and resetting points of contact 21-22.

2 - Tripping and resetting points of contact 13-14.
A A - Maximum travel of the actuator in degrees.
B 2 B - Tripping and resetting travel of contact 21-22.
1 C - Tripping and resetting travel of contact 13-14.
P - Positive opening point.

Contact blocks (continued), Limit switches 3
mounting 3
Osiswitch®
General
Contact blocks (continued) Contact connections

b Tightening torque:
v minimum tightening torque ensuring the nominal characteristics of the contact: 0.8 N.m,
v maximum tightening torque without damage to the terminals: 1.2 N.m for XE2 pP, 1 N.m for
XE3 pP.
b Connecting cable: cable preparation lengths:
v for XE2p P, L = 22 mm,
v for XE2p P3 ppp, L = 45 mm.
XE2p P screw clamp terminal connections
v for XE3p P, L = 14 mm, L1 = 11 mm
L L1
XE3p P screw clamp terminal connections

Mounting Sweep of connecting cable
1 Recommended
2 To be avoided
1 2
Position of cable gland

1 Recommended
2 To be avoided 1 2
Type of cam
1 Recommended 1 2
2 To be avoided 30 30
Mounting and fixing limit switches by the head

1 Recommended Types XCK D, XCK P and XCK T, XCM D and XCM N
2 To be avoided
1 2 2

Setting-up 3
Limit switches 3
Osiswitch®
General
Setting-up Tightening torque

b The minimum torque is that required to ensure correct operation of the switch.
b The maximum torque is the value which, if exceeded, will damage the switch.
Range Item Torque (N.m)
Min. Max.
Compact design XCK D, XCK P, Cover 0.8 1.2
XCK T Fixing screw for lever on rotary head 1 1.5
Miniature design XCM D, XCM N – – –
Fixing screw for lever on rotary head 1 1.5
Compact design XCK N Cover 0.8 1.2
Classic design XCK J Cover 1 1.5
Classic design XCK S Cover 0.8 1.2
Classic design XCK M, XCK ML, Cover 0.8 1.2
XCK L Fixing screw for lever on rotary head 1 1.5
Types XCK D, XCK P, XCK T, XCM D
b Adjustable in 3 planes:
15˚
15˚
15˚
All the heads can be adjusted in All the levers can be adjusted in 15° steps throughout 360°,
15° steps throughout 360°, in in relation to the horizontal axis of the head.
relation to the body.
Type XCK J
b Adjustable throughout 360° in 5° steps, or in 45° steps by reversing the lever or its mounting.
1 Reversed a = 5°
2 Forward a = 45°
5° steps 45° steps

throughout throughout
360° 360°
1 2

Setting-up (continued) 3
Limit switches 3
Osiswitch®
General
Setting-up (continued) Direction of actuation programming

b XC2 J
Head ZC2 JE05
b XCK J
Head ZCK E05
b XCK S
Head ZCK D05
b XCK D, XCK P, XCK T and XCM D
Head ZCE 05
Specific cams for heads ZCK E09 and ZC2 J09

1 0.5 mm min.
2 2 mm min.
1
B
2
A = length of lever + 11 mm
ZCK E09: 13 < h < 18 mm and B = 12 mm max.
ZCK JE09: 14 < h < 24 mm and B = 6 mm max.

Reminder of the standards Limit switches 3
3
Osiswitch®
General
Reminder of the standards

The majority of Telemecanique products comply to national standards (for example French standard NF C, German standard DIN), European standards
(for example CENELEC) or international standards (for example IEC). These standards rigidly stipulate the characteristic requirements of the
designated products (for example IEC 60947 relating to low voltage switchgear and controlgear).
These products, when correctly used, enable the production of control equipment assemblies, machine control equipment or installations conforming
to their own specific standards (for example IEC 60204 for the electrical equipment of machines).
IEC 60947-5-1
Insulation coordination (and dielectric strength) b The standard IEC 60664 defines 4 categories of prospective transient overvoltages. It is
important for the user to select control circuit components which are able to withstand these
overvoltages. To these ends, the manufacturer states the rated impulse withstand voltage (U imp)
applicable to the product.
Terminal connections b The cabling capacity, mechanical robustness and durability of the terminals as well as the
ability to resist loosening are verified by standardised tests.
b Terminal reference marking conforms to the standard EN 50013.
Switching capacity b With maximum electrical load. A single designation (A300 for example) enables indication of
the contact block characteristics related to the utilisation category.
Positive opening operation (IEC 60947-5-1 Appendix K) b For contacts used in safety applications (end of travel, emergency stop device, etc.) the
assurance of positive opening is required (see IEC 60204, EN 60204) after each test, the
opening of the contact being verified by testing with an impulse voltage (2500 V).
Electrical symbols for contacts b Form Za, b Form Zb,
the 2 contacts are the 2 contacts are electrically separate.
the same polarity.
Symbol for positive opening b Simplified version b Complete symbol
CENELEC EN 50047
The European standards organisation CENELEC, which has 14 member countries, has defined in this standard the first type of limit switch.
It defines 4 variants of devices (forms A, B, C, E). (1) Minimum value A: reference axis
Limit switches XCK P, XCK D and XCK T conform to the (2) Maximum value H: differential travel
standard EN 50047. P: tripping point
E: cable entry
Form A, with roller lever Form B, with end plunger (rounded)
50 (2)
20 (1)
H P
12,5
P
5 (1)
H
55
40
10 (1)
A
15 (1)
21 (1)
55 (2)
E
31 (2)
12,5 (1)
30 (2)
Form C, with end roller plunger Form E, with roller lever for 1 direction of actuation
10 (1) 10 (1)
20 (1)
H
12,5
P
2,5 (1)
35
5 (1)
25
10 2
20 (1)
P H
H
31 (1)
25 (1)
P
28
40
30 (2)

Reminder of the standards Limit switches 3
(continued) 3
Osiswitch®
General
Reminder of the standards (continued)

CENELEC EN 50041
The European standards organisation CENELEC, which has 14 member countries, has defined in this standard the second type of limit switch.
It defines 6 variants of devices (forms A, B, C, D, F, G). (1) Minimum value A: reference axis Za: tripping zone
Limit switches XCK J and XCK S conform to the standard (2) Maximum value B: optional elongated holes Sa: tripping threshold
EN 50041. H: differential travel
P: tripping point
E: cable entry
Form A, with roller lever Form B, with end plunger (rounded)
70 (2)
20 (1)
H P
H
70 (2)
5 (1)
40 (1)
67
5,3
31(1)
10 (1)
A
7,3
80 (2)
E B
15 (1)
30 42,5 (2)
46 (2)
Form C, with end roller plunger Form D, with rod lever

Za
˚ 40
10 (1) 40 ˚
H P
Sa
20 (2) 20 (2)
100 (1)
200
3 (1)
58
20 (1)
P
H
53 (1)
44 (1)
Form F, with side plunger (rounded) Form G, with side roller plunger
56 (1)
20 (1) 58 20 (1) 41
39 (1)
47 (1) 30˚
H
30 (1)
H
3
20
20
H H
H
72 55
H H 3 (1)
20
59 (1) 41 (1)
67 (1) 50 (1)

NEW
Fan & Filter Fan

Air-flow Monitor
LC 013 / LCF 013
Reliable mechanical switch contact
Small size
Easily installs via clip or clamp
Versatile fields of application
The LC 013/LCF 013 air-flow monitor provides a simple but
reliable alternative to indicate positive or negative air flow of fans.
Photo enlarged
When properly installed and connected in series with an optical
(i.e. LED) or audible signaling device, a bi-directional switch will
activate an electrical contact if the air flow of the fan falls below
8.2 ft/s, thus either turning the signaling device on or off.
Technical Data LC 013 / LCF 013
Contact type: Reed / magnet contact Application: The LC 013 air-flow monitor can be used in combination with optical or audible
NC (normally closed) Contact open with air flow signaling devices (such as LED’s or alarms), or remote monitoring devices. It should be
NO (normally open) Contact closed with air flow connected:
Switching threshold A) in series directly with the signaling device itself, if the power of the connected device does
of air flow speed: >8.2 ft/s (2.5 m/s) not exceed the electrical ratings of the LC 013 as listed, or
Hysteresis: 3.3 ft/s (1 m/s) - fixed B) to the pilot switch side of a relay (i.e. our SM 010), if the signaling device to be switched
Contact resistance incl. wire: 370mW exceeds the electrical ratings of the LC 013 and needs to be switched via relay. In this case, a
Service life: > 100,000 cycles properly sized relay should be specified by the customer for the specific application/device.
Max. switching capacity: 10W (resistive load)
Max. switching voltage: NC: AC/DC 240 V / NO: DC 60 V Please refer to the table shown below to ensure the correct contact type (NC-normally
Max. switching current: NC: DC 500mA / NO: DC 170mA closed or NO-normally open) suitable for the application.
Connection: 2 x single strand AWG 26, length 500 mm, tip of
stranded wire stripped/tinned (5 mm) Installation notes:
Mounting: Attachment clamp and/or clip, To avoid possible interference problems, a suitable distance from the following must be
or integrated in protective grill (see below) guaranteed, preferably through prior testing:
Housing: Plastic, UL 94HB, black · magnets (permanent magnets) and ferrous metals (e.g. sheet metal)
Dimensions: 1.3 x 0.7 x 0.3” (34 x 17.5 x 7.5 mm) · electromagnetic fields and inductive loads (e.g. caused by transformers, motors, etc.)
Mounting position: Air-flow monitor opening perpendicular to air flow
Operating/storage temperature: -4 to 122°F (-20 to 50°C) / -4 to 176°F (-20 to 80°C) The air-flow monitor must be positioned directly in the air flow in a dust-free and
Protection type: IP 20 contamination-free environment. Avoid installing in areas where air pockets or turbulence
Agency approvals: UL and VDE can be expected.
Protective Weight Flap Position Contact

Part No. Grill Dimensions (approx.) £ 8.2 ft/s >8.2 ft/s £ 8.2 ft/s >8.2 ft/s Description Recommended use
LC 013 01300.0-00 no 1.3 x 0.7 x 0.3” 0.2 oz. NC - normally closed
Use to turn an alarm or
LCF 013 01301.0-00 ü 3.15 x 3.15 x 0.4” 0.7 oz. Contact opens
signaling device ON to indicate
LCF 013 01302.0-00 ü 3.6 x 3.6 x 0.4” 0.7 oz. when air flow
Closed Open loss of air flow (£ 8.2 ft/s)
LCF 013 01303.0-00 ü 4.7 x 4.7 x 0.4” 1.1 oz. > 8.2 ft/s
LC 013 01300.1-00 no 1.3 x 0.7 x 0.3” 0.2 oz. NO - normally open Use to turn a signaling
LCF 013 01301.1-00 ü 3.15 x 3.15 x 0.4” 0.7 oz. Contact closes device ON to indicate
LCF 013 01302.1-00 ü 3.6 x 3.6 x 0.4” 0.7 oz. when air flow sufficient air flow (> 8.2 ft/s)
LCF 013 01303.1-00 ü 4.7 x 4.7 x 0.4” 1.1 oz. Closed Open > 8.2 ft/s
Wiring example Air-flow monitor integrated in protective grill
e.g. signal device

0.3” (7.5 mm) 1.3” (34 mm)
0.7” (17.5 mm)
LC013/03-07/US
80 x 80mm
+
- 92 x 92 / 120 x 120mm
Specifications are subject to change without notice. Suitability of this product for its intended use and any associated risks must be determined by the end customer/buyer in its final application.
STEGO, Inc. · 1395 South Marietta Parkway · Building 800 · Marietta, GA 30067 · Tel: (770) 984-0858 · Fax: (770) 984-0615
Toll free: 1-888-783-4611 (US & Canada only) · www.stegousa.com
Semiconductor Heater HG 140 Series 15W to 150W
Pressure clamp connectors

Dynamic heating up
Wide voltage range
Temperature limiting
Energy saving
Clip fixing
Heating
Quick installation
These heaters are used in enclosures where damage from condensation must be prevented, or
where the temperature may not fall below a minimum value. The aluminium profile heater body
design has a chimney effect and distributes the heat evenly. The pressure clamp connectors
save time and simplify installation.
|
Technical Data
Operating voltage 120-250V AC/DC*

Specifications are subject to change without notice. Errors and omissions excepted. Suitability of this product for its intended use and any associated risks must be determined by the end customer/
24.04.2006
Heating element PTC resistor, self regulating and temperature limiting

Heater body extruded aluminium profile, anodised
Connection 3 pressure clamps for stranded wire 0.5-1.5mm² (with wire
end ferrule) and rigid wire 0.5-2.5mm²
Connection casing plastic according to UL94 V-0, black
Mounting clip for 35mm DIN rail, EN 50022
Fitting position vertical
Operating/Storage temperature -45 to +70°C (-49 to +158°F)
Protection type / Protection class IP20 / I (earthed)
Approvals VDE, UL File No. E150057
Accessories screw fixing, Art. No. 09024.0-00 (1 packing unit = 2 pieces)
*Operating with voltages below 140V AC/DC reduces heating performance by approx. 10%.
Art. No. Heating capacity* Inrush current max. Length (L) Weight (approx.)
14000.0-00 15W 1.5A 65mm 0.30kg
buyer in its final application.
14001.0-00 30W 3.0A 65mm 0.30kg

14003.0-00 45W 3.5A 65mm 0.30kg
14005.0-00 60W 2.5A 140mm 0.40kg
14006.0-00 75W 4.0A 140mm 0.50kg
14007.0-00 100W 4.5A 140mm 0.50kg
14008.0-00 150W 9.0A 220mm 0.70kg
*at 20°C (68°F) ambient temperature
++ STEGO UK Ltd. + Unit 12, First Quarter Business Park + Blenheim Road + Epsom, Surrey KT19 9QN + England + info@stego.co.uk + www.stego.co.uk ++
Slimline
Light
SL 025
Compact design
Light with Motion Sensor
Integrated receptacle
Energy-saving lamp
On/Off switch or Motion Sensor
The SL025 Light was designed to fit in tight spaces in
enclosures. It features an integrated receptacle so that electrical
devices (e.g. power tools) can be easily plugged in when
needed. The standard light can be screw-mounted in a variety of
positions, or the light can be fitted with an available magnet
mount. The optional motion sensor was designed so it can be
used in enclosures with glass doors and not be activated by
movement outside the enclosure.
Technical Data SL 025
Part No.: Specify according to plug and switch types as shown below
Light bulb: Compact fluorescent light bulb
Power: 11W (~75W incand.), Base: 2G7, electronic ballast
Luminosity: 900 Lm
Service life: 5000h
Light with On/Off Switch Switch: On/off switch (for light only)
Motion sensor: PIR = Passive Infrared (see note below)
Receptacle: max. AC 250 V / 16A (Schuko)
Connection: 3-pole screw terminal for AWG 14 max. (2.5 mm²)
(includes cable strain relief)
Mounting: M5 screws (not included), 11.8” (300 mm) hole distance
or optional attached magnet (see part nos. below)
Dimensions: L x W x D: 13.6 x 3.6 x 1.6” (345 x 91 x 40 mm)
Housing: Plastic, UL94V-O
Weight (approx.): 0.9 lbs. (400 g), 1.3 lbs. (600 g) with magnet
Protection type: IP 20
Agency approvals: VDE, UL
Part Number Part Number

Receptacle with On/Off Switch with Motion Sensor
1.6” (40mm)
Germany (AC 230 V): 02520.0-00 02520.0-03

w/ magnet mounting: 02520.1-00 02520.1-03
Magnet (optional)
France (AC 230 V): 02521.0-00 02521.0-03
13.6” (345 mm)
11.8” (300 mm)
0.8” (20 mm) Switzerland (AC 230 V): 02522.0-00 02522.0-03
3.6” (91mm)

0.5” (12.5 mm)
UK (AC 230 V): 02523.0-00 02523.0-03

USA/Canada (AC 120 V): 02524.0-01 02524.0-04

Note: A Passive Infrared (PIR) motion sensor detects the motion of the enclosure door No receptacle (AC 230 V): 02527.0-00 02527.0-04
being opened and automatically turns on the light. The sensor is factory pre-set to turn the w/ magnet mounting: 02527.1-00 02527.1-04
SL025/03-07/US
light off 5 minutes after all motion ceases. The motion sensor does not detect movement
through glass or fiberglass, thus allowing installation in enclosure with glass doors. No receptacle (AC 120 V): 02527.0-10 02527.0-12
Specifications are subject to change without notice. Suitability of this product for its intended use and any associated risks must be determined by the end customer/buyer in its final application.
STEGO, Inc. · 1395 South Marietta Parkway · Building 800 · Marietta, GA 30067 · Tel: (770) 984-0858 · Fax: (770) 984-0615
Toll free: 1-888-783-4611 (US & Canada only) · www.stegousa.com
SG_Order_MV_E.qxd 17.10.2005 10:39 Seite 145
Protective Devices
Rated current In (A) Type Designation Article No. Units per package
2-p
pole
SG8602
0.16 PLSM-C0,16/2 242386 1 / 60

0.25 PLSM-C0,25/2 242387 1 / 60
0.5 PLSM-C0,5/2 242389 1 / 60
0.75 PLSM-C0,75/2 242388 1 / 60
1 PLSM-C1/2 242390 1 / 60
1.5 PLSM-C1,5/2 242391 1 / 60
1.6 PLSM-C1,6/2 242392 1 / 60
2 PLSM-C2/2 242393 1 / 60
2.5 PLSM-C2,5/2 242394 1 / 60
3 PLSM-C3/2 242395 1 / 60
3.5 PLSM-C3,5/2 242396 1 / 60
4 PLSM-C4/2 242397 1 / 60
5 PLSM-C5/2 242398 1 / 60
6 PLSM-C6/2 242399 1 / 60
8 PLSM-C8/2 242400 1 / 60
10 PLSM-C10/2 242401 1 / 60
12 PLSM-C12/2 242402 1 / 60
13 PLSM-C13/2 242403 1 / 60
15 PLSM-C15/2 242404 1 / 60
16 PLSM-C16/2 242405 1 / 60
20 PLSM-C20/2 242406 1 / 60
25 PLSM-C25/2 242407 1 / 60
32 PLSM-C32/2 242408 1 / 60
40 PLSM-C40/2 242409 1 / 60
50 PLSM-C50/2 242410 1 / 60
63 PLSM-C63/2 242411 1 / 60
3-p
pole
SG14202
0.16 PLSM-C0,16/3 242455 1 / 40

0.25 PLSM-C0,25/3 242456 1 / 40
0.5 PLSM-C0,5/3 242458 1 / 40
0.75 PLSM-C0,75/3 242457 1 / 40
1 PLSM-C1/3 242459 1 / 40
1.5 PLSM-C1,5/3 242460 1 / 40
1.6 PLSM-C1,6/3 242461 1 / 40
2 PLSM-C2/3 242462 1 / 40
2.5 PLSM-C2,5/3 242463 1 / 40
3 PLSM-C3/3 242464 1 / 40
3.5 PLSM-C3,5/3 242465 1 / 40
4 PLSM-C4/3 242466 1 / 40
5 PLSM-C5/3 242467 1 / 40
6 PLSM-C6/3 242468 1 / 40
8 PLSM-C8/3 242469 1 / 40
10 PLSM-C10/3 242470 1 / 40
12 PLSM-C12/3 242471 1 / 40
13 PLSM-C13/3 242472 1 / 40
15 PLSM-C15/3 242473 1 / 40
16 PLSM-C16/3 242474 1 / 40
20 PLSM-C20/3 242475 1 / 40
25 PLSM-C25/3 242476 1 / 40
32 PLSM-C32/3 242477 1 / 40
40 PLSM-C40/3 242478 1 / 40
50 PLSM-C50/3 242479 1 / 40
63 PLSM-C63/3 242480 1 / 40
Explanation PLSM:
145
P = XPole, LS = MCB, M = 10 kA
Moxa Industrial Media Converter
IMC-101 Hardware Installation Guide
Fifth Edition, June 2008
© 2008 Moxa Inc., all rights reserved.

Reproduction without permission is prohibited.
P/N: 18020010104
Overview
Moxa Industrial Media Converter, which is specially designed for reliable and
stable operation in harsh industrial environments, provides industrial grade
media conversion between 10/100BaseT(X) and 100BaseFX. IMC-101’s
reliable industrial design is excellent for keeping your industrial automation
applications running continuously, and comes with a relay output warning
alarm to help prevent damages and losses.
This product has a wide operating temperature range, from -40 to 75°C, and is
designed to withstand a high degree of vibration and shock. The rugged
hardware design makes IMC-101 perfect for ensuring that your Ethernet
equipment can withstand critical industrial applications, such as in hazardous
locations (Class 1 Division 2/Zone 2), and complies with FCC, TÜV, UL, and
CE Standards
NOTE Throughout this Hardware Installation Guide, we often use

IMC as an abbreviation for Moxa Industrial Media
Converter:
IMC = Moxa Industrial Media Converter
Package Checklist
Moxa Industrial Media Converter is shipped with the following items. If any of
these items is missing or damaged, please contact your customer service
representative for assistance.
y Moxa Industrial Media Converter
y Hardware Installation Guide
y Moxa Product Warranty booklet
Features
y Supports 10/100Base-TX auto-negotiation and auto-MDI/MDI-X
y Multi mode, single mode with SC or ST fiber connector available
y Supports Link Fault Pass-Through
y Relay Output alarm when a port breaks or the power fails
y Redundant 12 to 48 VDC power inputs, DIN-Rail or panel mountable
y Operating temperature range from 0 to 60°C, or extended operating
temperature from –40 to 75°C for (-T) models
2
Panel Layout of IMC-101 Series
Top Panel View
1. Grounding screw
1 V2+
PWR2
2. Terminal block for power
V2-
2 V1+
FAULT
PWR1
input PWR1/PWR2 and relay
V1-
V1 V2 INPUTS: 24 VDC
3 output
3. Heat dissipation orifices
PORT ALARM
4 4. Dip switch
ON
1
2
DIP
3
5. Power input PWR1 LED
Front Panel View (IMC-101-M-ST) 6. Power input PWR2 LED
2 7. Fault LED
5 8. 100BaseFX (ST connector)
6
7 Port
9. FX port’s 100 Mbps LED
8 10. FX port’s Full
9
10 FDX /CO L
Duplex/Collision LED
11. TP port’s 100 Mbps LED
12. 10/100BaseT(X)
11
12 13. TP port’s 10 Mbps LED
14 13 14. Model Name
15. 100BaseFX (SC connector)
Front Panel View (IMC-101-M-SC)
Port
2
5 16. Screw hole for wall mounting kit
6 17. DIN-Rail mounting kit
7
15
9
10 FDX /CO L
11
12
14 13
Rear Panel View
16
17
16
3
Mounting Dimensions
(Unit = mm)
15.10
30.00
13.10 25.40
9.50 54.00
135.00 135.00
Side View Front View
13.90 18.20 13.90

3.5 + +
6 + + 6
25.71 3.5 + + 66.80
6 + + 10 57.05
+ + + 10
+
5
7.75 30.50 7.75
39.37 13 18 13
46.77
+ +
+ +
+ + + +
23.15 +
+ +
+
30.50
10.65 10.65
Back View Panel Mount Kit
4
DIN-Rail Mounting
The aluminum DIN-Rail attachment plate should be fixed to the back panel of
IMC when you take it out of the box. If you need to reattach the DIN-Rail
attachment plate to IMC, make sure the stiff metal spring is situated towards
the top, as shown in the figures below.
STEP 1: STEP 2:
Insert the top of the DIN-Rail into the The DIN-Rail attachment unit will
slot just below the stiff metal spring. snap into place as shown below.
metal
metal
spring
spring
DIN-Rail DIN-Rail
To remove Moxa Industrial Media Converter from the DIN-Rail, simply

reverse Steps 1 and 2 above.
Wall Mounting (Optional)

For some applications, you will find it convenient to mount Moxa Industrial
Media Converter on the wall, as illustrated below.
STEP 1:
Remove the aluminum DIN-Rail attachment plate from Moxa Industrial Media
Converter, and then attach the wall mount plates, as shown in the diagrams
below.
Top
plate
Bottom
plate
5
STEP 2:
Mounting Moxa Industrial Media Converter on the wall
requires 4 screws. Use the IMC, with wall mount plates
attached, as a guide to mark the correct locations of the 4
screws. The heads of the screws should be less than 6.0
mm in diameter, and the shafts should be less than 3.5 6.0 mm
mm in diameter, as shown in the figure at the right.
NOTE Test the screw head and shank size by inserting
the screw into one of the keyhole shaped
apertures of the Wall Mounting Plates, before it 3.5 mm
is screwed into the wall.
Do not screw the screws in all the way—leave a space of

about 2 mm to allow room for sliding the wall mount
panel between the wall and the screws.
STEP 3:
Once the screws are fixed in the wall, insert the four screw heads through the
large parts of the keyhole-shaped apertures, and then slide Moxa Industrial
Media Converter downwards, as indicated below. Tighten the four screws for
added stability.
Wiring Requirements
WARNING Do not disconnect modules or wires unless power has been
switched off or the area is known to be non hazardous.
The devices may only be connected to the supply voltage shown
on the type plate.
The devices are designed for operation with a safety extra-low
voltage. Thus, they may only be connected to the supply voltage
connections and to the signal contact with the safety extra-low
voltages (SELV) in compliance with IEC950/ EN60950/
VDE0805.
WARNING Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I,

Division 2 and Zone 2.
These devices must be supplied by a SELV source as defined in
the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and 93/68/EEC.
6
WARNING This equipment has been evaluated as EEx nC IIC T4
equipment under DEMKO Certificate No. 03 ATEX
0324537U. Each module is marked with II 3G and is
suitable for use in Zone 2 Explosive Atmospheres. Devices
must be installed in a minimum IP 54 enclosure as defined in
IEC 60529 and EN 60529.
ATTENTION This unit is a built-in type. During installation into certain

end equipment, it must comply with fire enclosure
stipulations of IEC 60950/EN60950, or similar statements.
ATTENTION Safety First!

Be sure to disconnect the power cord before installing and/or
wiring your Moxa Industrial Media Converter.

Calculate the maximum possible current in each power wire
and common wire. Observe all electrical codes dictating the
maximum current allowable for each wire size.
If the current goes above the maximum ratings, the wiring
could overheat, causing serious damage to your equipment.
You should also pay attention to the following points:

y Use separate paths to route wiring for power and devices. If power wiring
and device wiring paths must cross, make sure the wires are perpendicular
at the intersection point.
NOTE: Do not run signal or communications wiring and power wiring in
the same wire conduit. To avoid interference, wires with different signal
characteristics should be routed separately.
y You can use the type of signal transmitted through a wire to determine
which wires should be kept separate. The rule of thumb is that wiring that
shares similar electrical characteristics can be bundled together.
y Keep input wiring and output wiring separated.
y It is strongly advised that you label wiring to all devices in the system when
necessary.
Grounding Moxa Industrial Media

Converter
Grounding and wire routing help limit the effects of noise due to
electromagnetic interference (EMI). Run the ground connection from the
ground screw to the grounding surface prior to connecting devices.
7
ATTENTION This product is intended to be mounted to a well-grounded
mounting surface such as a metal panel.
Wiring the Alarm Contact

The Alarm Contact is made up of the two middle contacts of the terminal block
on IMC’s top panel. Refer to the next section for detailed instructions on how
to connect the wires to the terminal block connector, and how to attach the
terminal block connector to the terminal block receptor.
In this section, we explain the meaning of the two contacts used to connect the
Alarm Contact.
FAULT: The two middle contacts of the
6-contact terminal block connector are used to
detect both power faults and port faults. The two
FAULT
wires attached to the Fault contacts form an open
Top View circuit when:
1. IMC has lost power from one of the DC

power inputs.
FAULT
OR
Front View
2. One of the ports for which the corresponding

PORT ALARM Dip Switch is set to ON is not
properly connected.
If neither of these two conditions occurs, the

Fault circuit will be closed.
Wiring the Redundant Power Inputs

The top two contacts and the bottom two contacts of the 6-contact terminal
block connector on IMC’s top panel are used for IMC’s two DC inputs. Top
and front views of one of the terminal block connectors are shown here.
STEP 1: Insert the negative/positive DC wires
into the V-/V+ terminals.
Top View
STEP 2: To keep the DC wires from pulling

loose, use a small flat-blade screwdriver to
tighten the wire-clamp screws on the front of the
terminal block connector.
Front View
STEP 3: Insert the plastic terminal block

connector prongs into the terminal block receptor,
which is located on IMC’s top panel.
ATTENTION
Before connecting IMC to the DC power inputs, make sure the DC
power source voltage is stable.
8
Communication Connections
IMC-101 models have one 10/100BaseT(X) Ethernet port, and one 100BaseFX
(SC or ST type connector) fiber port.
10/100BaseT(X) Ethernet Port Connection

The 10/100BaseT(X) ports located on IMC’s front panel are used to connect to
Ethernet-enabled devices.
Below we show pinouts for both MDI (NIC-type) ports and MDI-X
(HUB/Switch-type) ports, and also show cable wiring diagrams for
straight-through and cross-over Ethernet cables.
RJ45 (8-pin, MDI) Port Pinouts RJ45 (8-pin, MDI-X) Port Pinouts
Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 Tx+ 1 8 1 Rx+ 1 8
2 Tx- 2 Rx-
3 Rx+ 3 Tx+
6 Rx- 6 Tx-
RJ45 (8-pin) to RJ45 (8-pin) Straight-Through Cable Wiring
Straight-Through Cable
Switch Port NIC Port
RJ45 Plug Pin 1
RJ45 RJ45
Connector Cable Wiring Connector
Tx+ 3 3 Rx+
Tx- 6 6 Rx-
Rx+ 1 1 Tx+
Rx- 2 2 Tx-
RJ45 (8-pin) to RJ45 (8-pin) Cross-Over Cable Wiring
Switch Port Cross-Over Cable Switch Port

(NIC Port) (NIC Port)
RJ45 Plug Pin 1
RJ45 RJ45
(Rx+) Tx+ 3 1 Rx+ (Tx+)
(Rx-) Tx- 6 2 Rx- (Tx-)
(Tx+) Rx+ 1 3 Tx+ (Rx+)
(Tx-) Rx- 2 6 Tx- (Rx-)
100BaseFX Ethernet Port Connection

The concept behind the SC port and cable is quite straightforward. Suppose
you are connecting devices I and II. Contrary to electrical signals, optical
signals do not require a circuit in order to transmit data. Consequently, one of
the optical lines is used to transmit data from device I to device II, and the
other optical line is used transmit data from device II to device I, for
full-duplex transmission.
All you need to remember is to connect the Tx (transmit) port of device I to the
Rx (receive) port of device II, and the Rx (receive) port of device I to the Tx
(transmit) port of device II. If you are making your own cable, we suggest
labeling the two sides of the same line with the same letter (A-to-A and B-to-B,
as shown below, or A1-to-A2 and B1-to-B2).
9
SC-Port Pinouts SC-Port to SC-Port Cable Wiring
A A
Tx
B B
Cable Wiring
Rx A A
B B
ST-Port Pinouts ST-Port to ST-Port Cable Wiring

A A
Tx
B B
Cable Wiring
A A
Rx
B B
ATTENTION
This is a Class 1 Laser/LED product. Do not stare into the Laser
Beam.
Redundant Power Inputs

Both power inputs can be connected simultaneously to live DC power sources.
If one power source fails, the other live source acts as a backup, and
automatically supplies all of Moxa Industrial Media Converter’s power needs.
Alarm Contact
Moxa Industrial Media Converter has one Alarm Contact located on the top panel.
For detailed instructions on how to connect the Alarm Contact power wires to the
two middle contacts of the 6-contact terminal block connector, see the “Wiring the
Alarm Contact” section above. A typical scenario would be to connect the Fault
circuit to a warning light located in the control room. The light can be set up to
switch on when a fault is detected.
The Alarm Contact has two terminals that form a Fault circuit for connecting to an
alarm system. The two wires attached to the Fault contacts form an open circuit
when (1) IMC has lost power from one of the DC power inputs, or (2) one of the
ports for which the corresponding PORT ALARM Dip Switch is set to ON is not
properly connected.
If neither of these two conditions occurs, the Fault circuit will be closed.
10
Dip Switch Setting
IMC-101 series DIP switch
Dip Switch 1 (Default: Off )
ON: Enables the PORT Alarm. If the port’s link fails, the
relay will form an open circuit and the fault LED will
light up.
ON DIP Off: Disables the corresponding PORT Alarm. The relay will
form a closed circuit and the Fault LED will never light
up.
1 2 3 Dip Switch 2 (Default: ON )
ON: Enables full duplex for 100BaseFX
Off: Disables full duplex for 100BaseFX
Dip Switch 3
Reserved for future use
To activate the updated DIP switch setting, power off and then power on the
IMC.
LED Indicators
The front panel of Moxa Industrial Media Converter contains several LED
indicators. The function of each LED is described in the table below.
LED Color State Description
Power is being supplied to power
On
input PWR1
PWR1 AMBER
Power is not being supplied to
Off power input PWR1

On
input PWR2
PWR2 AMBER
Off
power input PWR2
When the corresponding PORT

On alarm is enabled, and the port’s
link is inactive.
FAULT RED When the corresponding PORT
alarm is enabled and the port’s link
Off is active, or when the
corresponding PORT alarm is
disabled.
On TP port’s 10 Mbps link is active
10M GREEN Data is being transmitted at 10

Blinking Mbps
Off TP Port’s 10 Mbps link is inactive
100M Data is being transmitted at 100

GREEN Blinking
(TP) Mbps
Off 100BaseTX Port’s link is inactive
11
On FX port’s 100 Mbps is active
GREEN Blinking
(FX) Mbps
Off 100BaseFX port is inactive
100BaseFX port is being

On
transmitted at full duplex
FDX/COL GREEN Blinking Collision occurs
Off
transmitted at half duplex
Auto MDI/MDI-X Connection

The Auto MDI/MDI-X function allows users to connect Moxa Industrial Media
Converter’s 10/100BaseTX ports to any kind of Ethernet device, without
paying attention to the type of Ethernet cable being used for the connection.
This means that you can use either a straight-through cable or cross-over cable
to connect IMC to Ethernet devices.
Dual Speed Functionality and

Switching
Moxa Industrial Media Converter’s 10/100 Mbps RJ45 switched port auto
negotiates with the connected device for the fastest data transmission rate
supported by both devices. All models of Moxa Industrial Media Converter are
plug-and-play devices, so that software configuration is not required at
installation, or during maintenance. The half/full duplex mode for the RJ45
switched ports is user dependent and changes (by auto-negotiation) to full or
half duplex, depending on which transmission speed is supported by the
attached device.
Auto-Negotiation and Speed Sensing

All of Moxa Industrial Media Converter’s RJ45 Ethernet ports independently
support auto-negotiation for transmission speed in the 10BaseT and
100BaseTX modes, with operation according to the IEEE 802.3u standard.
This means that some nodes could be operating at 10 Mbps, while at the same
time, other nodes are operating at 100 Mbps.
Auto-negotiation takes place when an RJ45 cable connection is made, and then
each time a LINK is enabled. Moxa Industrial Media Converter advertises its
capability for using either 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps transmission speeds, with the
device at the other end of the cable expected to advertise similarly. Depending
on what type of device is connected, this will result in agreement to operate at a
speed of either 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps.
If a Moxa Industrial Media Converter RJ45 Ethernet port is connected to a
non-negotiating device, it will default to 10 Mbps speed and half-duplex mode,
as required by the IEEE 802.3u standard.
12
Specifications
Technology
Standards IEEE802.3, 802.3u, Link Fault Pass-Through
Interface
RJ45 ports 10/100BaseT(X)
Fiber ports 100BaseFX (SC, ST connectors available)
LED Indicators Power, Fault, 10/100M, Full Duplex/Collision,
Dip Switch Port break alarm mask, 100BaseFx Full/Half duplex
selection
Alarm Contact One relay output with current carrying capacity of
1A @ 24 VDC
Optical Fiber
Multi Single Single Single
mode mode, 15 mode, 40 mode, 80
Distance, km 5 15 40 80
Wavelength, nm 1310 1310 1310 1550
Min. TX Output, dBm -20 -15 -5 -5
Max. TX Output, dBm -14 -6 0 0
Sensitivity, dBm -34 to -30 -36 to -32 -36 to -32 -36 to -32
Recommended Diameter 62.5/125 9/125 9/125 9/125
(Core/Cladding) μm (1 dB/km,
800 MHz × km)
Power
Input Voltage 12 to 48 VDC; Redundant inputs
Input Current (@24V) 0.16 A
Connection Removable Terminal Block
Overload Current Protection 1.1 A
Reverse Polarity Protection Present
Mechanical
Casing IP30 protection, aluminum case
Dimensions (W x H x D) 53.6 x 135 x 105 mm
Weight 0.63 kg
Installation DIN-Rail, Wall Mounting
Environmental
Operating Temperature 0 to 60℃ (32 to 140 oF),
-40 to 75oC (-40 to 167oF) for – T models
Storage Temperature -40 to 85℃ (-40 to 185 oF)
Ambient Relative Humidity 5 to 90% (non-condensing)
Regulatory Approvals
Safety UL60950, UL 508, CSA C22.2 No. 60950, EN60950
Hazardous Location UL/cUL Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D
ATEX Class I, Zone 2, EEx nC IIC
EMI FCC Part 15, CISPR (EN55022) class A
EMS EN61000-4-2 (ESD), level 3
EN61000-4-3 (RS), level 3
EN61000-4-4 (EFT), level 3
EN61000-4-5 (Surge), level 3
EN61000-4-2 (CS), level 3
Shock IEC 60068-2-27
Free Fall IEC 60068-2-32
Vibration IEC 60068-2-6
WARRANTY 5 years
13
Revision History
Document Edition Revision Date Revision Details
2nd June 15, 2004 1. Updated the edition of this
manual on the title page.
2. Changed the Moxa logo on the
title page.
3. Added several “Attention”
messages
4. Added one product feature:
Operating temperature ranges
from 0 to 60°C, or extended
operting temperature from –40 to
75°C for (-T) models.
3rd July 1, 2004 1. Revise 100BaseFX for fiber optic
port of ST connector.
4th Nov. 15, 2004 1. Modify Optical Fiber specs.
2. Improve resolution of figures.
Technical Support Contact Information

www.moxa.com/support
Moxa Americas: Moxa China (Shanghai office):

Toll-free: 1-888-669-2872 Toll-free: 800-820-5036
Tel: +1-714-528-6777 Tel: +86-21-5258-9955
Fax: +1-714-528-6778 Fax: +86-10-6872-3958
Moxa Europe: Moxa Asia-Pacific:

Tel: +49-89-3 70 03 99-0 Tel: +886-2-8919-1230
Fax: +49-89-3 70 03 99-99 Fax: +886-2-8919-1231
14
Extract from the online
catalog

UKKB 3
Order No.: 2771010
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=2771010

Double-level terminal block with a screw connection, cross section: 0.2
mm - 2.5 mm , AWG: 28 - 12, width: 5.2 mm, color: Gray
2 2
Product notes
WEEE/RoHS-compliant since:
Commercial data 01/01/2003
EAN 4017918068165
Pack 50 Pcs.
Customs tariff 85369010
Weight/Piece 0.014051 KG
Catalog page information Page 291 (CL-2007) http://
www.download.phoenixcontact.com
Please note that the data given
here has been taken from the
online catalog. For comprehensive
information and data, please refer
to the user documentation. The
General Terms and Conditions of
Use apply to Internet downloads.
Technical data
General
Number of levels 2
Number of connections 4
Color gray
Insulating material PA
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG Page 1 / 4

http://www.phoenixcontact.com Aug 18, 2008
UKKB 3 Order No.: 2771010
Inflammability class acc. to UL 94 V0
Dimensions
Width 5.2 mm
Length 67 mm
Height NS 35/7,5 62 mm
Height NS 35/15 69.5 mm
Height NS 32 67 mm
Technical data
Rated surge voltage 6 kV
Pollution degree 3
Surge voltage category III
Insulating material group I
Connection in acc. with standard IEC 60947-7-1
Nominal current IN 32 A
Nominal voltage UN 500 V
Connection data
Conductor cross section solid min. 0.2 mm
2
Conductor cross section solid max. 4 mm

2
Conductor cross section stranded min. 0.2 mm

2
Conductor cross section stranded max. 2.5 mm

2
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil min. 24

Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil max 12
Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule 0.25 mm
2
without plastic sleeve min.

2
without plastic sleeve max.

2
with plastic sleeve min.

2
with plastic sleeve max.

2 conductors with same cross section, solid min. 0.2 mm
2
2 conductors with same cross section, solid max. 1 mm

2
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded 0.2 mm

2
min.


2
max.
2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, 0.25 mm
2
ferrules without plastic sleeve, min.

2
ferrules without plastic sleeve, max.

2
TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, min.

2 conductors with same cross section, stranded, 1 mm
2
TWIN ferrules with plastic sleeve, max.

Cross-section with insertion bridge, solid max. 2.5 mm
2
Cross-section with insertion bridge, stranded max. 2.5 mm

2
Type of connection Screw connection

Stripping length 8 mm
Screw thread M3
Tightening torque, min 0.5 Nm
Tightening torque max 0.6 Nm
Certificates / Approvals
Certification BV, CCA, CSA, CUL, DNV, GL, GOST, KEMA, LR, PRS, RS, UL
CSA
AWG/kcmil 28-12
CUL
AWG/kcmil 28-12
UL
AWG/kcmil 28-12

Address

Flachsmarktstr. 8
32825 Blomberg,Germany
Phone +49 5235 3 00
Fax +49 5235 3 41200
© 2008 Phoenix Contact

Technical modifications reserved;

catalog

UKK 5-DIO/U-O
Order No.: 2791032
The illustration shows version UKK 5-DIO/O-U

2-level terminal block with screw connection, diode conducting
direction from bottom to top, cross section: 0.2 - 4 mm², width: 6.2 mm,
color: Gray
Product notes
EAN 4017918072407
Pack 50 Pcs.
Technical data
General
Number of levels 2
Color gray

UKK 5-DIO/U-O Order No.: 2791032
Dimensions
Width 6.2 mm
Length 56 mm
Height NS 32 67 mm
Technical data
Maximum load current 2
32 A (with 4 mm conductor cross section)
Pollution degree 3
Nominal voltage UN 500 V (data is based on the dielectric strength of adjacent
terminal blocks or of the mounting rail.)
Connection data
2

2

2
Conductor cross section stranded max. 4 mm

2

2

Conductor cross section stranded, with ferrule 4 mm
2

2

2

2
2 conductors with same cross section, solid max. 1.5 mm

2


2
min.
2
max.
2

2

2

2

Cross-section with insertion bridge, solid max. 4 mm
2

2

Internal cylindrical gage A4
Screw thread M3
Certification CUL, GOST, UL
CUL
AWG/kcmil 26-10
UL
AWG/kcmil 26-10

Address

Flachsmarktstr. 8
Phone +49 5235 3 00
Fax +49 5235 3 41200


catalog

UKKB 10-PV
Order No.: 3003567
The illustration shows the product version UKKB 10

Double-level terminal block with a screw connection, cross section: 0.5
mm - 10 mm , AWG: 24 - 6, width: 10.2 mm, color: Gray
2 2
Product notes
EAN 4017918100759
Pack 50 Pcs.
Technical data
General
Number of levels 2
Color gray

UKKB 10-PV Order No.: 3003567
Dimensions
Width 10.2 mm
Length 77.5 mm
Height NS 32 78 mm
Technical data
Pollution degree 3
Connection data
2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2
2 conductors with same cross section, solid max. 6 mm

2

2
min.

2 conductors with same cross section, stranded 4 mm

2
max.
2

2

2

2

Internal cylindrical gage B6
Screw thread M4
Certification GOST

Address

Flachsmarktstr. 8
Phone +49 5235 3 00
Fax +49 5235 3 41200


catalog

UK 5-MTK-P/P
Order No.: 3004032

Knife disconnect terminal block with screw connection, with test socket
screws on both sides, cross section: 0.2 - 4 mm², AWG: 22 - 12, width:
6.2 mm, color: Gray
Product notes
EAN 4017918090579
Pack 50 Pcs.
Technical data
General
Number of levels 1
Color gray

UK 5-MTK-P/P Order No.: 3004032
Dimensions
Width 6.2 mm
Length 51 mm
Height NS 35/7,5 58.5 mm
Height NS 35/15 66 mm
Height NS 32 63.5 mm
Technical data
Pollution degree 3
Connection data
2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2
min.


2
max.
2

2

2

2

2
Cross-section with insertion bridge, stranded max. 4 mm

2

Screw thread M3
Certification CSA, CUL, GOST, PRS, UL
CSA
AWG/kcmil 18-10
CUL
AWG/kcmil 22-12
UL

AWG/kcmil 22-12

Address

Flachsmarktstr. 8
Phone +49 5235 3 00
Fax +49 5235 3 41200


catalog

UK 5-HESILED 24
Order No.: 3004126
The illustration shows version UK 5-HESI

Fuse terminal block for cartridge fuse insert, cross section: 0.2 - 4
mm², AWG: 26 - 10, width: 8.2 mm, color: black
Product notes
EAN 4017918090647
Pack 50 Pcs.
Technical data
General
Number of levels 1
Color black

UK 5-HESILED 24 Order No.: 3004126
Dimensions
Width 8.2 mm
Length 72.5 mm
Height NS 35/7,5 56.5 mm
Height NS 35/15 64 mm
Height NS 32 61.5 mm
Technical data
Fuse G / 5 x 20
Fuse type Glass
LED voltage range 12 V AC/DC ... 30 V AC/DC
Pollution degree 3
Nominal current IN 6.3 A
Nominal voltage UN 500 V As a fuse terminal block
LED voltage range 12 V AC/DC ... 30 V AC/DC
LED current range 3.5 mA ... 8.1 mA
Connection data
2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2


2

2
min.
2
max.
2

2

2

2

2
Cross-section with insertion bridge, stranded max. 4 mm

2

Screw thread M3
Certification CSA, GL, GOST, LR, UL
CSA
AWG/kcmil 28-10
UL
AWG/kcmil 26-10

Address

Flachsmarktstr. 8
Phone +49 5235 3 00
Fax +49 5235 3 41200


T01121 001229
Ground terminal blocks M 4/6.4A.P D 4/6.P.T1 M 6/8.P

electrically connected to Spacing 6 mm + 0,05 .238" Spacing 6 mm + 0,05 .238" Spacing 8 mm - 0,05 .315"
the mounting rail

Compression clamp
DIN 1 - 3
2 R
Type Part number Type Part number Type Part number

Green-yellow - UL 94 V0 Green-yellow - UL 94 V0 Green-yellow
M 4/6.4A.P.V0 0195 638.23 D 4/6.P.T1 0199 220.00 M 6/8.P 0165 114.17
DIN 3 only M 6/8.P.V0 0195 114.06
Terminal block for ground wire, same size Terminal block for ground wire, same size Terminal block for ground wire, same size
as M 4/6.4A terminal block. as D 4/6.T... terminal block. as M 6/8 terminal block.
IEC IEC UL CSA IEC
Characteristics NFC-DIN
UL CSA
NFC-DIN NFC-DIN
UL CSA
Wire size Compression Solid wire 0,2-4 mm² 22-10 AWG 12 AWG max. 0,2-4 mm² 24-10 AWG 24-10 AWG 0,5-10 mm² 24-8 AWG 24-8 AWG
clamp Stranded wire 0,22-4 mm² 22-10 AWG 12 AWG max. 0,22-4 mm² 24-10 AWG 24-10 AWG 0,5-6 mm² 24-8 AWG 24-8 AWG
Short circuit current 480A/1s 480A/1s 720A/1s
Rated wire size / Gauge 4 mm²/A4 10 AWG 12 AWG 4 mm²/A4 10 AWG 10 AWG 6 mm²/A5 8 AWG 8 AWG
Wire stripping Recomm. Recomm. Protection Wire stripping Recomm. Recomm. Protection Wire stripping Recomm. Recomm. Protection
Other characteristics length screwdriver torque length screwdriver torque length screwdriver torque
9,5 mm 4 mm 0,5-0,8 Nm 9,5 mm 4 mm 0,5-0,8 Nm IP 20 12 mm 4-5 mm 0,8-1 Nm
.37" .16" 4.4-7 lb.in .37" .16" 4.4-7 lb.in NEMA 1 .47" .16" - .20" 7.1-8.9 lb.in
Approvals
Accessories Type Part number Type Part number Type Part number
1 End sectionyellow FEM4AP V0 green th. 3 mm 0199 879.01 closed block FEM6 th. 2,8 mm 0103 062.21
yellow FEM6 V0 th. 2,8 mm 0199 305.02
2 Separator end section grey SCF6 th. 3 mm 0118 707.03
On rail : Recomm.screwdriver/Recomm.torque 4 mm .16" / 0,8 Nm 7.0 lb.in 4 mm .16" / 0,8 Nm 7.0 lb.in
R See markers marking method 11 12 RC65 5 11 12
Ground terminal blocks M 10/10.P M 16/12.P M 35/16.P

Spacing 10 mm - 0,05 .394" Spacing 12 mm - 0.1 .473" Spacing 16 mm - 0.1 .630"
electrically connected to
the mounting rail
Compression clamp
DIN 1 - 3
2 R
Type Part number Type Part number Type Part number

Green-yellow Green-yellow Green-yellow
M 10/10.P 0165 115.10 M 16/12.P 0165 130.23 M 35/16.P 0165 111.14
M 10/10.P.V0 0195 115.07 M 16/12.P.V0 0195 130.12 M 35/16.P.V0 0195 111.03
Terminal block for ground wire, same size Terminal block for ground wire, same size Terminal block for ground wire, same size
as M 10/10 terminal block. as M 16/12 terminal block. as M 35/16 terminal block
IEC IEC IEC UL CSA
Characteristics NFC-DIN
UL CSA
NFC-DIN
UL CSA
NFC-DIN
Wire size Compression Solid wire 0,5-16 mm² 22-6 AWG 22-6 AWG 4-25 mm² 18-4 AWG 18-4 AWG 4-50 mm² 10-0 AWG 10-0 AWG
clamp Stranded wire 0,5-10 mm² 22-6 AWG 22-6 AWG 4-16 mm² 18-4 AWG 18-4 AWG 4-35 mm² 10-0 AWG 10-0 AWG
Short circuit current 1200A/1s 1920A/1s 4200A/1s
Rated wire size / Gauge 10 mm²/B6 6 AWG 6 AWG 16 mm²/B7 4 AWG 4 AWG 35 mm²/B9 0 AWG 0 AWG
Wire stripping Recomm. Recomm. Protection Wire stripping Recomm. Recomm. Protection Wire stripping Recomm. Recomm. Protection
Other characteristics length screwdriver torque length screwdriver torque length screwdriver torque
12 mm 5,5-6 mm 1,2-1,4 Nm 14 mm 5,5 mm 1,2-1,4 Nm 17 mm 8 mm 2,8-3 Nm

.47" .22" - 24" 10.6-12.3 lb.in .55" .22" 10.6-12.3 lb.in .67" .32" 24.3-26.1 lb.in
Approvals
Accessories Type Part number Type Part number Type Part number
1 End sectionyellow closed block closed block closed block
2 Separator end section grey SCFM6 th. 3 mm 0114 825.05 SCFM6 th. 3 mm 0114 825.05
On rail : Recomm.screwdriver/Recomm.torque 4 mm .16 / 0,8 Nm 7.0 lb.in 5,5 mm .22" / 1,0 Nm 9.0 lb.in 5,5 mm .22" / 1,0 Nm 9.0 lb.in
R See markers marking method 12 17 26 12 17 26 13 17 26
79
T01009 001229
Standard terminal blocks M 10/10... Color Type Part numbers

Standard blocks
Compression clamp Spacing 10 mm - 0,05 (.394")
Grey M 10/10 0115 120.17
DIN 1 - 3 Blue M 10/10.N 0125 120.11
Yellow M 10/10 0105 120.26
Beige V0 M 10/10.V0 0195 120.10
Blue V0 M 10/10.N.V0 0199 004.20
Standard 10 mm block 0115 120.17
Accessories Type Part numbers

1 1 End section grey FEM6 th. 2,8 mm 0118 368.16
blue FEM6 th. 2,8 mm 0128 368.10
2 orange FEM6 th. 2,8 mm 0103 126.16
yellow FEM6 th. 2,8 mm 0103 062.21
green FEM6 th. 2,8 mm 0103 125.15
white FEM6 th. 2,8 mm 0103 312.20
beige FEM6 V0 V0 th. 2,8 mm 0198 368.17
3 blue FEM6 V0 V0 th. 2,8 mm 0199 302.07
4 yellow FEM6 V0 V0 th. 2,8 mm 0199 305.02
2 End section grey FEM61 (3) th. 3,0 mm 0114 776.23
3 End section grey FEM6C (3) th. 3,0 mm 0114 777.24
4 Circuit separator grey SCM6 0113 003.10
11 blue SCM6 0123 003.12
orange SCM6 0103 233.21
5
yellow SCM6 0103 020.23
beige SCM6 V0 V0 0193 003.11
6
5 Separator end section grey SCF6 th. 3,0 mm 0118 707.03
blue SCF6 th. 3,0 mm 0128 707.05
beige SCF6 V0 V0 th. 3,0 mm 0198 707.04
7
6 Separator end section grey SCF61 th. 3,0 mm 0114 202.25
7 Separator end section grey SCFM6 (3) th. 3,0 mm 0114 825.05
Test connector : See Accessories section 8 Separator end section grey SCFEX1 (3) th. 2,4 mm 0103 619.04
9 Separator end section grey SCFEX3 (3) th. 2,4 mm 0103 620.01
10 Separator end section grey SCFCV1-2 th. 3,0 mm 0116 795.11
End stop th. 9 mm BADL V0 0199 408.02 8
(for cover CPV) beige SCFCV1-2 V0 V0 th. 3,0 mm 0196 795.12
End stop th. 9,1 mm BAM 0103 002.26 9 11 Protective cover CPM (for FEM6C, SCF6(V0) and SCFM6) 0187 312.14
Rail 35 x 7,5 x 1 PR30 prepunched 0173 220.05 12 12 Protective cover CPV1-2 (for SCFCV1-2...) 0176 816.12
Rail 35 x 15 x 2,3 PR4 0168 500.12 13 Test socket AL2 (1) DIA. 2 mm 0163 043.21
AL3 (1) DIA. 3 mm 0163 261.00
Rail 35 x 15 x 1,5 PR5 prepunched 0101 598.26
14 AL4 (1) DIA. 4 mm 0163 262.01
Rail 32 x 15 x 1,5 PR1Z2 0163 050.04
14 Test plug FC2 DIA. 2 mm 0007 865.26
Other end stops and rails : See Accessories section
FC4 DIA. 4 mm 0167 860.01
15 Assembled 57 A BJM10 (1) 2 poles 0173 611.21
Characteristics 10
jumper bar 57 A BJM10 (1) 3 poles 0173 612.22
Wire size 13 (without IP20 protection) 57 A BJM10 (1) 4 poles 0173 613.23
IEC UL CSA 15 57 A BJM10 (1) 5 poles 0173 614.24
NFC DIN 57 A BJM10 (1) 10 poles 0173 615.25
Compression Solid wire 0,5-16 mm² 22-6 AWG 22-6 AWG 16 Assembled 57 A BJMI10 (1) 2 poles 0176 675.04
17 jumper bar 57 A BJMI10 (1) 3 poles 0176 676.05
clamp Stranded 0,5-10 mm² 22-6 AWG 22-6 AWG 16
wire (with IP20 protection) 57 A BJMI10 (1) 4 poles 0176 677.06
57 A BJMI10 (1) 5 poles 0176 678.17
Voltage 57 A BJMI10 (1) 10 poles 0176 679.10
17 Jumper bar not assembled 57 A BJS10 (1) 20 poles 0177 654.00
Rated 800 V 600 V 600 V
18
Post + screw + washer EV6 0168 604.16
Pulse 8 kV
18 Pivoting jumper bar 70 A BJP10 0174 451.22
Pollution degree 3
19 Universal jumper bar 50 A BJDP1 (1)(2) spacing 10 <-> spacing 16 0179 623.03
Current 70 A BJDP3 (1)(2) spacing 10 <-> spacing 12 0179 625.05
Rated 57 A 65 A 70 A 20 Comb type jumper bar 70 A PC10 10 poles 0163 315.26
Wire size 19 21 Protection label EP8 3 blocks 0163 428.20
Rated / Gauge 10 mm² / B6 6 AWG 6 AWG EP10 4 blocks 0163 429.21
20 Screw for protection label VSP6 0163 433.15
Wire stripping Recomm. Recomm. Protection
21 22 Protection label EPU6 0107 038.25
length Screwdriver torque
23 IDC jumper 24 A AD2,5 0114 205.20
12 mm 5,5-6 mm 1,2-1,4 Nm IP 20
.47" .217" - .238" 10.6-12.3 lb.in. NEMA 1 22
Notes
The use of some accessories may decrease the block's 23
voltage rating. For more information, consult us.
R See section on markers

marking method 11 12 17 26
R Note : (1) A circuit separator SC may be required with the use of these accessories.
(2) See column : "Various applications".
(3) End sections and circuit separators snapped on rails.
40
Modular Fuseholders Bussmann®
10 ≈ 38, 14 ≈ 51, 22 ≈ 58 CH Series

Standards:
North American 10 ≈ 38 Class CC
Listed U.L. 512, Guide IZLT, File E14853
Certified CSA Std. C22.2 No. 39, Class 6225-01,
File LR47235
North American 10 ≈ 38 Midget
U.L. Recognized 512, Guide IZLT2, File E14853
CSA Certified, Std. C22.2 No. 39, Class 6225-01,
File LR47235
Features: European 10 ≈ 38 IEC 269-2-1
• 10 ≈ 38 Dovetail design provides maximum flexibility in 14 ≈ 51 IEC 269-2***
assembling multiple poles U.L. Recognized, CSA Certified
• Touchsafe design - No exposed contacts 22 ≈ 58 IEC 269-2***
• DIN rail mount (35mm) U.L. Recognized, CSA Certified
• Optional open fuse indication lights Recommended Buss® Fuse Types:
• Excellent for switchboard panel, control consoles, small 10 ≈ 38 North American Class CC Fuses - LP-CC, FNQ-R,
motors, transformers, and similar applications KTK-R
• Handle/fusepuller to install and remove fuses easily 10 ≈ 38 North American Midget Fuses - FNQ, KTK, AGU,
• Available in single and multi-pole configurations KLM, BAF, BAN, FNM, FWA, FWC, & FNQ
• Circuit marking system (P/N CH10CL and CH10CM) 14 ≈ 51 Fuses - FWX, FWH, FWP & NON
• Wire ready: Saves time as terminals are ready to accept 22 ≈ 58 Fuses - FWP
wires.
• CE marking
Specifications
Fuse Size (mm) 10 ≈ 38 14 ≈ 51 22 ≈ 56
Voltage U.L./CSA*** 600V 750V*** 750V***
IEC 690V 660V 660V
Amperage U.L./CSA*** 30A 30A*** 50A***
IEC 32A 50A(See Watts Loss) 125A(See Watts Loss)
Wire Size #8 - #18 Cu only #6 - #14 Cu only #1 - #14 Cu only
Wire Type (& Temp.) Solid/Stranded (75°) Solid/Stranded (75°) Solid/Stranded (75°)
Torque (in-lbs) 12 in-lbs 17.7 in-lbs 22.1 in-lbs
IP Rating IP 20 IP 20 IP 20
Contact Material (fuseclip) Tin-plated copper Tin-plated copper Tin-plated copper
Connector Material Steel Steel Steel
Maximum Watts Loss of Fuse 3W‡ 5W‡ 9.5W‡
Dual Wire Rating Please consult factory
10 ≈ 38 30A, 600V 30A, 600V 32A, 690V 14 ≈ 51 22 ≈ 58

North American North American European Description Part No. Ctn. Qty. Part No. Ctn. Qty.
Class CC Midget 10 ≈ 38 1 Pole CH141G 6 CH221G 6
Description Fuseholder Fuseholder Fuseholder
1 Pole w/U.L. markings CH141GUL 6 CH221GUL 6
1 Pole CHCC1 CHM1 CH101 1 Pole w/microswitch CH141MSG 6 CH221MSG 6
1 Pole w/Indication CHCC1I CHM1I CH101I 2 Pole CH142G 3 CH222G 3
2 Pole CHCC2 CHM2 CH102 3 Pole CH143G 2 CH223G 2
2 Pole w/Indication CHCC2I CHM2I CH102I 3 Pole w/U.L. markings CH143GUL 2 CH223GUL 2
3 Pole CHCC3 CHM3 CH103 3 Pole w/microswitch CH143MSG 2 CH223MSG 2
3 Pole w/Indication CHCC3I CHM3I CH103I Handle Profile - 2 Poles CH142HCG 10 CH222HCG 10
*Assembly Pins - 2 Poles CH102AP CH102AP CH102AP Handle Profile - 3 Poles CH143HCG 10 CH223HCG 10
*Assembly Pins - 3 Poles CH103AP CH103AP CH103AP
**Circuit markers CH10CM CH10CM CH10CM
**Circuit marker labels CH10CL CH10CL CH10CL
Spare Fuseholder 5TPH 5TPH 5TPH
‡Refer to BIF documents 720003, 720008, 720025 and 720028 for watts loss of
applicable fuses.
*CH102AP and CH103AP are packaged in quantities of ten pins. One pin is required to
gang units together, and rating multiple poles.
**CH10CM are packaged in quantities of ten. CH10CL are packaged in quantities of ten
sheets of labels. CE logo denotes compliance with European Union Low Voltage Directive
***U.L./CSA part numbers include U.L. suffix. (50-1000 Vac, 75-1500 Vdc). Refer to BIF document #8002 or contact
Bussmann Application Engineering at 314-527-1270 for more information.
Form No. CH Series

12-17-98 Page 1 of 2
SB98107 Rev. A BIF Doc #1151
Modular Fuseholders Bussmann®
10 ≈ 38, 14 ≈ 51, 22 ≈ 58 CH Series

Size: 10 ≈ 38 Fuseholder
G
in (mm) in (mm)
H
A E
A 2.26 (57.5) G 2.07 (52.5)
B F I J
B 1.73 (44.0) H 0.75 (19.0)
C 1.78 (45.2) I 0.69 (17.5)
D 1.97 (49.9) J 1.38 (35.0)
C K
E 3.24 (82.2) K 3.18 (80.7)
F 0.24 (6.0) L 0.30 (7.6)
D L
L in (mm) in (mm)
E C
F A B A 0.98 (26.0) I 3.50 (89.0)
J J
B 2.05 (52.0) J 0.20 (5.0)
C 3.07 (78.0) K 1.28 (32.5)

K K
M M E 3.19 (81.0) L 3.86 (98.0)
G
F 2.11 (53.5) M 4.17 (106.0)
O O
G 1.75 (44.5) N 0.83 (21.0)
H 2.07 (52.6) O 1.72 (43.8)
G N
H
L
E C
F A B
J J in (mm) in (mm)
A 1.38 (35.0) I 4.06 (103.0)
K K B 2.76 (70.0) J 0.18 (4.5)

M M C 4.13 (105.0) K 1.77 (45.0)
G
E 3.46 (88.0) L 4.41 (112.0)
O O F 2.09 (53.0) M 5.51 (140.0)
G 1.77 (45.0) N 1.04 (26.5)
H 2.28 (58.0) O 2.48 (63.0)

G N N
H
I
The only controlled copy of this BIF document is the electronic read-only version located on the Bussmann Network Drive. All other copies of this document are by definition uncontrolled. This
bulletin is intended to clearly present comprehensive product data and provide technical information that will help the end user with design applications. Bussmann reserves the right, without
notice, to change design or construction of any products and to discontinue or limit distribution of any products. Bussmann also reserves the right to change or update, without notice, any tech-
nical information contained in this bulletin. Once a product has been selected, it should be tested by the user in all possible applications.
Form No. CH Series

12-17-98 Page 2 of 2
SB98107 Rev. A BIF Doc #1151
Bussmann®
LOW-PEAK® LP-CC
Time-Delay Fuses
Class CC – 600 Volt, ⁄Ω™ to 30 Amps
Dimensional Data General Information:
LP-CC LOW-PEAK Yellow™ Fuse
• A superior all-purpose, space-saving branch circuit fuse
that meets most protection requirements up to 30A.
• Very compact; physical size is only ⁄‹Ω£™∑ ≈ 1⁄Ω™∑ (10.3mm ≈
1.5" (±0.031) 38.1mm) with rejection tip.
(38.1mm)
• The unique yellow color makes it easy to tell that the correct
fuse type is installed.
• Faster response to damaging short-circuit currents and
higher interrupting rating than mechanical overcurrent
protective devices.
.41" (±0.005)
(10.3mm) 200,000A Interrupting Rating
• Maximum interrupting rating for available fault current in
today's large capacity systems.
• Helps ensure that future growth will not obsolete the system.
Catalog Symbol: LP-CC Dual Characteristics
• Time-delay to avoid unwanted fuse openings from surge
Time-Delay, Current-Limiting
currents.
Ampere Rating: ⁄Ω™ to 30A
• Fast speed of response under short-circuit conditions for a
AC Voltage Rating: 600V (or less) high degree of current-limitation.
Interrupting Rating: 200,000A RMS Sym. • ADVANTAGE: The LOW-PEAK ® fuse can be sized close
Agency Information: to full load ratings for maximum overload and short-circuit
UL Listed, Std. 248-4, Class CC, Guide JDDZ, File E4273 protection.
CSA Certified, C22.2 No. 248.4, Class 1422-02, File 53787 • ADVANTAGE: Can be used where either a time-delay or
DC Voltage Rating: 300Vdc (or less) a fast-acting fuse is needed, making selection easier and
⁄Ω™-2 °/⁄‚A and 20-30A, 20,000 AIR, UL 198L reducing spare fuse inventories for substantial cost reduction.
150Vdc or less 3-15A, 20,000 AIR, UL 198L
Superior Motor Protection
Catalog Numbers • For protection of small horsepower motor circuits.
LP-CC-⁄Ω™ LP-CC-1⁄Ω™ LP-CC-3 LP-CC-6 LP-CC-12
• Proper sizing can provide Type “2” coordinated protection
LP-CC-flΩ¡º LP-CC-1flΩ¡º LP-CC-3¤Ω¡º LP-CC-6⁄Ω¢ LP-CC-15
for NEMA and IEC motor controllers.
LP-CC-°Ω¡º LP-CC-1°Ω¡º LP-CC-3⁄Ω™ LP-CC-7 LP-CC-20
• Motors receive maximum protection against burnout from
LP-CC-1 LP-CC-2 LP-CC-4 LP-CC-7⁄Ω™ LP-CC-25
overloads and single phasing.
LP-CC-1⁄Ω• LP-CC-2⁄Ω¢ LP-CC-4⁄Ω™ LP-CC-8 LP-CC-30 Current-Limiting Effects
LP-CC-1⁄Ω¢ LP-CC-2⁄Ω™ LP-CC-5 LP-CC-9 — Prospective Short- *Let-Through Current (Apparent RMS Symmetrical)
LP-CC-1›Ω¡º LP-CC-2°Ω¡º LP-CC-5flΩ¡º LP-CC-10 — Circuit Current 1⁄Ω¢A 2°Ω¡ºA 15A 20A 25A 30A
1,000 100 135 240 305 380 435
3,000 140 210 350 440 575 580
Carton Quantity and Weight
5,000 165 255 420 570 690 710
Ampere Carton Weight*
10,000 210 340 540 700 870 1,000
Ratings Qty. Lbs. Kg.
20,000 260 435 680 870 1,090 1,305
0-30 10 .193 .088
30,000 290 525 800 1,030 1,300 1,520
*Weight per carton.
40,000 315 610 870 1,150 1,390 1,700
50,000 340 650 915 1,215 1,520 1,820
60,000 350 735 1,050 1,300 1,650 1,980
Recommended fuseblocks/fuseholders for 80,000 390 785 1,130 1,500 1,780 2,180
Class CC 600V fuses 100,000 420 830 1,210 1,600 2,000 2,400
See Data Sheets listed below 200,000 525 1,100 1,600 2,000 2,520 3,050
• Open fuseblocks - 1105 *RMS Symmetrical Amperes Short-Circuit
• Finger-safe fuseholders - 1109, 1102, 1103, 1151 NOTE: To calculate Ip (Ipeak) multiply IRMS value ≈ 2.3.
• Panel-mount fuseholders - 2114, 2113
• In-line fuseholders - 2126
CE logo denotes compliance with European Union Low Voltage Directive

(50-1000Vac, 75-1500Vdc). Refer to Data Sheet: 8002 or contact
Bussmann Application Engineering at 314-527-1270 for more information.
Form No. LP-CC

Page 1 of 2
10-2-02 SB02295 Data Sheet: 1023
Bussmann®
LOW-PEAK® LP-CC
Time-Delay Fuses
Class CC – 600 Volt, ⁄Ω™ to 30 Amps
3⁄Ω™
4⁄Ω™
1⁄Ω¢ AMPERE
flΩ¡º
°Ω¡º
10
12
15
20
25
30
RATING
⁄Ω™
4,000
1
3
4
6
8
AMPERE
RATING
200 3,000
INSTANTANEOUS PEAK LET-THROUGH CURRENT IN AMPS

100 2,000
30
1,000
25
20
800
15
600
500
400 2-8/10
300 1-1/4
10
200
TIME IN SECONDS
100
80
60
50
40
1
30
20
10
1,000
2,000
10
20
30
40
50
60
80
100
200
300
400
500
600
800
.1 PROSPECTIVE SHORT-CIRCUIT CURRENT–SYMMETRICAL RMS AMPS
.01
.4
10
100
1,000
CURRENT IN AMPERES
The only controlled copy of this Data Sheet is the electronic read-only version located on the Bussmann Network Drive. All other copies of this document are by definition uncontrolled. This bulletin is
intended to clearly present comprehensive product data and provide technical information that will help the end user with design applications. Bussmann reserves the right, without notice, to change
design or construction of any products and to discontinue or limit distribution of any products. Bussmann also reserves the right to change or update, without notice, any technical information con-
tained in this bulletin. Once a product has been selected, it should be tested by the user in all possible applications.
Form No. LP-CC

Page 2 of 2
10-2-02 SB02295 Data Sheet: 1023
Fixing Adapters, Contact Elements 2/25
Moeller HPL0211-2004/2005
Connection Contacts Circuit Contact travel Configuration1) Type Std. pack

types M = Make, B = Break symbol diagram, stroke in Article no.
f = Positive opening safety connection with Price
function to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 front element See Price
Control Circuit Devices

List
Fixing adapters
Fixing adapter (front fixing) for 3 contact-/LED elements
For M22-(C)K... contact elements and M22-(C)LED... LED elements
RMQ-Titan
Sequence numbers on fixing adapter
– – – – – 1 3 2 M22-A 50 off
4 6 5 216374
– – – – – 1 3 2 M22-A-GVP 500 off
4 6 5 216375
Fixing adapter (front fixing) for 4 contact elements
For M22-(C)K contact elements
– – – – – M22-A4 50 off
4 3 2 1 279437
Contact elements
Front fixing Screw 1M – .3
1 3 2 M22-K10 20 off
terminals 4 6 5 216376
0 2.8 5.5
1M – .4
M22-K10-GVP 500 off
216377
– 1Bf .1
1 3 2
M22-K01 20 off
4 6 5 216378
0 1.2 5.5
– 1Bf .2
M22-K01-GVP 500 off
216379
– 1Bf .5
1 3 2
M22-K01D 20 off
4 6 5 262165
0 2.8 5.5
.6
Base fixing 1M – .3 M22-KC10 20 off

2 3 1 216380
0 2.8 5.5
1M – .4
M22-KC10-GVP 200 off
216381
– 1Bf .1 M22-KC01 20 off
2 3 1 216382
0 1.2 5.5
– 1Bf .2
M22-KC01-GVP 200 off
216383
Contact elements
Front fixing Cage 1M – .3
1 3 2 M22-CK10 20 off
Clamp2) 4 6 5 216384
0 2.8 5.5
.4
– 1Bf .1
1 3 2
M22-CK01 20 off
4 6 5 216385
0 1.2 5.5
.2
– 1Bf .5
1 3 2
M22-CK01D 20 off
4 6 5 262510
0 2.8 5.5
.6
Base fixing 1M – .3 M22-CKC10 20 off

2 3 1 216386
0 2.8 5.5
.4
– 1Bf .1 M22-CKC01 20 off

2 3 1 216387
0 1.2 5.5
.2
Complete modules
Assembly of contact element with screw terminals and fixing adapter,
Front fixing
– 1M 1Bf 13 21
1 3 2
M22-AK11 5 off
4 6 5 216505
14 22 0 1.2 2.8 5.5
– 1M – 13
1 3 2 M22-AK10 5 off
4 6 5 216504
0 2.8 5.5
14
– 1Bf 21
1 3 2
M22-AK01 5 off
4 6 5 216503
0 1.2 5.5
22
Notes 1) Assignment: Assignment of the fixing adapter with sequence numbers according to EN 50013
xy x = Sequence number on fixing adapter
y = Function number on contact element
xy
2) Cage Clamp is a registered trademark of Wago Kontakttechnik GmbH/Minden, Germany
Type: M22−A
Article No.: 216374
Ordering information
Description 3 contact blocks
Configuration
Notes concerning the table header
Assignment: Assignment of the fixing adapter with sequence numbers according to EN 50013
x = Sequence number on fixing adapter
y = Function number on contact element
General
IEC/EN 60947
Standards
VDE 0660
Lifespan, mechanical Operations × 106 >5
Operating frequency Operations/h 3600
Operating force n 5
Operating torque (screw
Nm 0,8
terminals)
Degree of protection, IEC/EN
IP 20
60529
1
2/10 Emergency-Stop Actuators
RMQ-Titan
Contacts Circuit Colour of Type Price Std. pack

M = Make, B = Break symbol mushroom head Article no. See Price
f = Positive opening safety (yellow base) List
function to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
Complete units for front fitting1)

RMQ-Titan
Emergency-Stop actuators Tamper-proof according – 1Bf 21 RAL 3000 M22-PV/K01 5 off

to ISO 13850/EN 418 216515
Pull to release 22
Max. contacts to be
fitted together:
4 x M22-(C)K...
IP66, IP69K
– 1M 1Bf 13 21 RAL 3000 M22-PV/K11

216516
14 22
Emergency-Stop key-release Tamper-proof according – 1Bf 21 RAL 3000 M22-PVS/K01

mushroom button to ISO 13850/EN 418 216514
With one key, MS1 22
individual lock
mechanisms, not
suitable for master key
systems
Release by using the key
IP67, IP69K
Emergency-Stop actuators1)
Non-illuminated, pull to release, – RAL 3000 M22-PV 5 off
IP66, IP69K 216876
– M22-PV-GVP 50 off
216877
Illuminated, pull to release, – M22-PVL 5 off

IP66, IP69K 216878
Non-illuminated, turn to release, – M22-PVT
IP66, IP69K 263467
Illuminated, turn to release, – M22-PVLT
IP66, IP69K 263469
Emergency-Stop/Emergency-Halt actuators
Non-illuminated, pull to release, – RAL 9005 M22S-PV 5 off
IP66, IP69K 225528
Non-illuminated, turn to release, – M22S-PVT
IP66, IP69K 271499
Illuminated, pull to release, – M22S-PVL
IP66, IP69K 230962
Illuminated, turn to release, – M22S-PVLT
IP66, IP69K 271540
Notes 1)
Emergency-Stop Actuators 2/11
RMQ-Titan
Contacts Circuit Colour of Type Price Std. pack

M = Make, B = Break symbol mushroom head Article no. See Price
f = Positive opening safety (yellow base) List
function to IEC/EN 60947-5-1

Emergency-Stop key-release mushroom actuators, IP67, IP69K1)
RMQ-Titan
With 1 key, not suitable for master key systems
Release by using the key
MS1 individual lock mechanisms – RAL 3000 M22-PVS 5 off
216879
Individual lock mechanisms MS2 – MS20 – RAL 3000 M22-PVS-MS* 1 off
216880
Guard ring for Emergency-Stop buttons, IP65

– – – – RAL 1004 M22-XGPV 1 off
231273
– – – – RAL 7032 M22G-XGPV 1 off

271610
Notes 1)
Product catalog | Functional Electronics | Relay connector | RIDERSERIES | Complete modul | 2 CO | RCL
General ordering data

Order No. 7940006157
Part designation RCLKIT 24VDC 2CO LED GN
Version Relays, 2 CO contact, 24 V DC , 8 A, Screw
connection
EAN 4032248474776
Qty 10 pc(s).
Contact data
Number of contacts 2
Contact base material AgNi 90/10
Mechanical endurance 30*10
Input
Rated voltage 24 V DC
DC Response/dropout Volt 16.8 V / 2.4 V
Rated current DC 16.7 mA
Power rating 500 mW
Status indicator Green LED = DC coil; red LED = AC coil
Output
Continuous current 8A
Response time / Drop-out time 7 ms / 3 ms
max. switching power 4000 VA
max. switching voltage AC 250 V
min. switching current 10 mA
Rated data
Connection system Screw connection
DIN Rail compatibility TS 35
UL 94 flammability rating V-0
Ambient temperature (operational) -40 °C...+70 °C
-1-
Insulation coordination (EN 50178)

Clearance and creepage distances for control side 10 mm
- load side
Dielectric strength, Input/Output 5 kV
Insulation group C
Pollution severity 3
Protection class IP 20
Protective separation to VDE 0106 part 101 Yes
Rated voltage 250 V
Surge category III
Dimensions
Clamping range, max. 2.5 mm²
Clamping range, min. 0.5 mm²
Clamping range, nom. 2.5 mm²
Length 78.5 mm
Height 62 mm
Width 15.5 mm
Approvals
Approval body CEy
Classifications
ETIM 2.0 EC001437
ETIM 3.0 EC001437
eClass 4.1 40-02-06-14
eClass 5.0 27-37-16-01
eClass 5.1 27-37-16-01
Similar products
Order No. Part designation Version

8810120000 RCLKITZ 115VAC 2CO LDRT Relays, 2 CO contact, 115 V AC , 8 A, Tension clamp connection
8798630000 RCLKITZ 24VDC 2CO LED Relays, 2 CO contact, 24 V DC , 8 A, Tension clamp connection
7940006157 RCLKIT 24VDC 2CO LED GN Relays, 2 CO contact, 24 V DC , 8 A, Screw connection
7940006159 RCLKIT 230VAC 2CO LED RT Relays, 2 CO contact, 230 V AC , 8 A, Screw connection
8798650000 RCLKITZ 24VAC 2CO LED Relays, 2 CO contact, 24 V AC , 8 A, Tension clamp connection
8810100000 RCLKIT 115VAC 2CO LD RT Relays, 2 CO contact, 115 V AC , 8 A, Screw connection
-2-
General ordering data

Order No. 8810100000
Part designation RCLKIT 115VAC 2CO LD RT
Version Relays, 2 CO contact, 115 V AC , 8 A, Screw
connection
EAN 4032248509621
Qty 10 pc(s).
Contact data
Number of contacts 2
Contact base material AgNi 90/10
Input
Rated voltage 115 V AC
AC Response/dropout Volt 86,3 V / 17,3 V
Rated current AC 6,6 mA
Power rating 0,75 VA
Status indicator Green LED = DC coil; red LED = AC coil
Output
Continuous current 8A
max. switching power 4000 VA
max. switching voltage AC 250 V
Rated data
Connection system Screw connection
DIN Rail compatibility TS 35
UL 94 flammability rating V-0
Ambient temperature (operational) -40 °C...+70 °C
Insulation coordination (EN 50178)

Pollution severity 3
Protection class IP 20
Protective separation to VDE 0106 part 101 Yes
-1-
Dimensions
Clamping range, max. 2.5 mm²
Clamping range, min. 0.5 mm²
Clamping range, nom. 2.5 mm²
Length 78.5 mm
Height 62 mm
Width 15.5 mm
Approvals
Approval body CEy
Classifications
ETIM 2.0 EC001437
ETIM 3.0 EC001437
eClass 4.1 40-02-06-14
eClass 5.0 27-37-16-01
eClass 5.1 27-37-16-01
Similar products
Order No. Part designation Version

8810120000 RCLKITZ 115VAC 2CO LDRT Relays, 2 CO contact, 115 V AC , 8 A, Tension clamp connection
8798630000 RCLKITZ 24VDC 2CO LED Relays, 2 CO contact, 24 V DC , 8 A, Tension clamp connection
7940006157 RCLKIT 24VDC 2CO LED GN Relays, 2 CO contact, 24 V DC , 8 A, Screw connection
8810100000 RCLKIT 115VAC 2CO LD RT Relays, 2 CO contact, 115 V AC , 8 A, Screw connection
-2-
PSR – Phoenix Safety Relay
PSR-ESAM4
– Emergency stop/safety door monitoring
– Safety Category 4, EN 954-1
– Plug-in screw-cage or spring-cage

terminal blocks
– One or two-channel circuit
– Cross-circuit detection
– Safe isolation/basic insulation
– Housing width 45 mm (1.772 in.)
– Eight enable contacts
– One signaling contact
– Approvals: U(applied for)
The PSR-...-24UC/ESAM4/8x1/1x2 safety relay can
be used in emergency stop devices according to
EN 418 and in safety circuits according to DIN EN
60204-1/VDE 0113 Part 1. Depending on the external
circuit, up to Safety Category 4 according to EN 954-1
can be achieved.
One or two-channel control is available with manual
or automatic activation. The connected start button is
monitored.
The relay has eight enable current paths and one
signaling current path. The contacts drop without delay
according to Stop Category 0 (DIN EN 60204-1/
VDE 0113 Part 1).
PSR – Phoenix Safety Relay – PSR-ESAM4
2. Technical Data
A1 S35 S10 S11 S12 13 23 33 43 53 63 73 83 91
(4.508 in.)
114.5 mm
Logic K1
≈
= K2
A2 S33 S34 S21 S22 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84 92
99 mm
(3.898 in.)
PSR-ESAM4
7/10
M3 Housing width 45 mm (1.772 in.)
solid flexible
[mm2] AWG
Connection data: 0.2 - 2.5 0.2 - 2.5 25 - 14

Stripping length: Screw-cage version 7 mm (0.28 in.)
Spring-cage version 10 mm (0.39 in.)
Pcs.
Safety relay, Category 4, with or Screw-cage PSR-SCP-24UC/ESAM4/8X1/1X2 29 63 91 2 1
without start button monitoring terminal block PSR-SPP-24UC/ESAM4/8X1/1X2 29 63 99 6 1
Technical Data
Input Data
Nominal input voltage UN 24 V AC/DC
Permissible range 0.85 - 1.1 x UN
Typical current consumption at UN 210 mA AC, 120 mA DC
Voltage at input, start, and feedback circuit 24 V DC, approximately
Maximum voltage drop for S11/S12 and S21/S22 2 V DC, approximately (corresponds to 11 Ω)
(e.g., two Form B contacts of an emergency stop button) (at UN = 24 V DC and Tamb = 25°C [77°F])
Typical response time at UN
- Monitored/manual start 60 ms
- Automatic start 250 ms
Typical release time (K1, K2) at UN 20 ms
Simultaneity input S11/S12 and S21/S22 ∞
Recovery time 1 s, approximately
Output Data
Contact version 8 enable current paths
1 signaling current path
Contact material Silver stannic oxide, gold-flashed (AgSnO2 0.2 µm Au)
Maximum switching voltage 250 V AC/DC
Minimum switching voltage 15 V AC/DC
Limiting continuous current 6 A (Form A contact/Form B contact)
ITH=I12+I22+I32 On request
Maximum inrush current 6A
Minimum switching current 25 mA
Maximum shutdown power Ohmic load Inductive load
τ = 0 ms τ = 40 ms
24 V DC 144 W 42 W
48 V DC 288 W 42 W
110 V DC 110 W 42 W
220 V DC 88 W 42 W
250 V AC 1500 VA
Minimum switching power 0.4 W
Mechanical life 107 cycles, approximately
Breaking capacity according to Cycles: 360/h 24 V (DC13) 4 A; 230 V (AC15) 4 A
DIN EN 60947-5-1/VDE 0660 Part 200 3600/h 24 V (DC13) 2.5 A; 230 V (AC15) 3 A
Short-circuit protection of the output circuits, 6 A fast-blow
external

General Data
Permissible ambient operating temperature -20°C to +55°C (-4°F to +131°F)

Nominal operating mode 100% ED
Degree of protection According to VDE 0470 Part 1
- Housing IP 40
- Connection terminal blocks IP 20
- Mounting location IP 54, minimum
Mounting position Any
Mounting Can be mounted without spacing
Air and creepance distances between circuits According to DIN EN 50 178:1998-04,
Basic insulation1)
Impulse voltage withstand level 4 kV1)
Degree of pollution 2
Surge Voltage Category III
Dimensions (W x H x D) 45 mm x 99 mm (112 mm SPP) x 114.5 mm (1.772 x 3.898
(4.409 SPP) x 4.508 in.)
Cable cross section 0.2 - 2.5 mm2 (25 - 14 AWG)
Housing material Polyamide PA, not reinforced
1)
Note: When operating relay modules the operator must meet the Safe isolation, reinforced insulation, and 6 kV between the input
requirements for emitted interference for electrical and electronic circuit and the output contact paths (63/64, 73/74, 83/84) and
equipment (EN 50081-2) on the contact side and, if required, take between the various output contact paths (63/64, 73/74, 83/84).
appropriate measures.
3. Connection Notes and Safety Connection diagram

Instructions
S33, S34, S35 S10, S11, S12
Start circuit Input circuits
3.1. Safety Instructions
S
12
S
S
34
10
A1, A2 Connection
S
S
33
11
S
S
O
35
11
rd
.-
S
12
N
91
o
.:
– Please observe the safety regulations of electrical
2
P
33
92
for operating
6
w
3
9
er
34
43
K
2
1
91-92
13
53
44
23
2
33
54
43
voltage
14
53
engineering and industrial safety and liability
A
24
63
1
Signaling
34
73
S
13
21
83
44
S
14
22
54
91
A
64
23
74
24
84
83
associations. S21, S22 A1

current path
84
92
S2
63
1S 64
73
22
74
A2
– Disregarding these safety regulations may result in Input circuit 83

63
64
/
UC 2
-24 X2 1
CPX1/13 9
R-S4/8 9 6
A1 S35 S10 S11 S12 13

13 PSAMo.: 2
death or serious damage to persons or property. ES .N

14
23 Ord
24
33-34, 43-44,
≈
84
Logic
=
– Before working on the device, disconnect the 73

A2 S33 S34 S21 S22 14 24 34 44
74
53-54
K1
23
K2
33 43 53
power. Enable
63 73 83
13-14, 23-24, current paths

– Startup, mounting, modifications, and upgrades 63-64, 73-74,
91
54 64 74
should only be carried out by a skilled electrical 83-84

84
u
92
engineer. Enable current

paths
– Protective covers must not be removed when
operating electrical switching devices.
– During operation, parts of electrical switching
devices carry hazardous voltages.
– Keep the instruction sheet in a safe place.
– In the event of an error, replace the device Figure 05
immediately.
3.2. Connection Notes

To maintain the UL, use copper cables, which are
2
3
74
24
84
83
7 mm A1
84
92
S2
63
1S
designed for operating temperatures of 75°C (167°F).

64
73
22
74
A2
83
For reliable and safe contacts, strip the connector 13

14
63
64
ends accordingly. 23
24
84
73
A2 S33 S34 S21 S22
74
PSR-SCP-24UC/ESAM4/8X1/1X2
24
84
83
84
92
10 mm
63
64
73
A1
S2
74
1
S2
2A
2
83
63
64
13
14
23
24
84
73
74
PSR-SPP-24UC/ESAM4/8X1/1X2

4. Mounting and Startup
For reliable operation, the emergency stop safety

relay must be installed in a housing protected against
dust and humidity with IP 54 protection.
Ensure the wiring is appropriate to the field of
application. Follow the application examples (page 5).
In general, the safety relay is wired according to the
following specifications:
4.1. Closing the Activation Circuit and Feedback 4.2. Closing the Input Circuit (Emergency
Circuit Shutdown)
Automatic activation: Two-channel with cross-circuit protection:

Connect a jumper between S33 and S35. Connect the Form B contacts of the tripping device to
S11/S12 and S21/S22, and jumper S10/S11.
Emergency stop
S10 S11 S12 S21 S22 S33 S34 S35 S10 S11 S12 S21 S22 S33 S34 S35
Figure 06 Figure 10
Monitored reset: One-channel:

Connect the reset between terminal blocks S33 and S34. Connect the Form B contact of the tripping device to S11/S12.
Jumper S21/S22 and S10/S12.
Safety Category 4 can only be achieved if automatic disconnecting
switches are used and the cables are installed in separate cable
sheaths.
Reset Emergency stop
Figure 07 Figure 11
Monitored reset with monitored contact expansion: Two-channel without cross-circuit protection:
Connect the reset button and the Form B contacts of the expansion Connect the Form B contact of the tripping device to
contactors in series to terminal blocks S33 and S34. S10/S11 and S11/S12, and jumper S21/S22.
exp.
Reset K5 Emergency stop
K6
Figure 08 Figure 12
Automatic activation with monitored contact expansion:

Connect the Form B contacts of the expansion contactors to
terminal blocks S33 and S35.
exp.
K5
K6
S10 S11 S12 S21 S22 S33 S34 S35
Figure 09

5. Connection Examples
5.1. Two-Channel Emergency Stop Circuit with

Cross-Circuit Detection and Monitored
Reset
Emergency
stop
Reset Button
Suitable for up to Safety Category 4.
S10 S11 S12 S21 S22 S33 S34 S35 13 23 91
PSR-...-24UC/ ESAM 4/ 8x 1/ 1x 2
A1 A2 14 24 92
24V AC/DC
GND
Figure 13
5.2. One-Channel Emergency Stop Circuit with
Reset
Emergency
stop
Monitored Reset Button (Jumper S33/
S35: Automatic Activation)
Suitable for up to Safety Category 4**.
S10 S11 S12 S21 S22 S33 S34 S35 13 23 91
PSR-...-24UC/ ESAM 4/ 8x 1/ 1x 2
A1 A2 14 24 92
24V AC/DC
GND
Figure 14
5.3. Two-Channel Limit Switch Monitoring with

Solid-State Output and Monitored Reset
Reset
Solid-state output
Button (Jumper S33/S35: Automatic GND +24 V DC

Activation) OUT1 OUT2
Depending on the limit switch, suitable for up to

S10 S11 S12 S21 S22 S33 S34 S35 13 23 91
Safety Category 4.
PSR-...-24UC/ ESAM 4/ 8x 1/ 1x 2
A1 A2 14 24 92
24V AC/DC
GND
Figure 15
5.4. Two-Channel Safety Door Circuit with

Reset
Cross-Circuit Detection and Monitored

Reset Button (Jumper S33/S35:
Automatic Activation)
Suitable for up to Safety Category 4. S10 S11 S12 S21 S22 S33 S34 S35 13 23 91
PSR-...-24UC/ ESAM 4/ 8x 1/ 1x 2
TNR: 5107089-02
A1 A2 14 24 92
24V AC/DC
GND
Figure 16
02/15/05
5.5. One-Channel Safety Door Circuit with

Reset
Monitored Reset Button (Jumper

S33/S35: Automatic Activation)
Suitable for up to Safety Category 4**.
 PHOENIX CONTACT
S10 S11 S12 S21 S22 S33 S34 S35 13 23 91
PSR-...-24UC/ ESAM 4/ 8x 1/ 1x 2
A1 A2 14 24 92
** Safety Category 4 can only be achieved if automatic disconnecting 24V AC/DC

GND
switches are used and the cables are installed in separate cable
sheaths. Figure 17

PSR – Phoenix Safety Relay
PSR-ESA4
PSR-ESM4
– Emergency stop/safety door monitoring
– Safety Category 4, EN 954-1
– Plug-in screw-cage or spring-cage

terminal blocks
– One or two-channel circuit
– Safe isolation
– Cross-circuit detection
– Housing width 22.5 mm (0.886 in.)
– Two enable contacts
– One signaling contact
– Approvals: U Listed
The PSR-...-24UC/ES...4/2X1/1X2 safety relays can
be used in emergency stop devices according to
EN 418 and in safety circuits according to DIN EN
60204-1/VDE 0113 Part 1. Depending on the external
circuit, up to Safety Category 4 according to EN 954-1
can be achieved.
The connected start button is monitored for the
PSR-...-24UC/ESM4/2X1/1X2. This relay can only be
activated manually. Depending on the circuit, the
PSR-...-24UC/ESA4/2X1/1X2 can be activated both
manually and automatically. However, the connected
start button is not monitored.
One or two-channel control is available for both
modules.
The relay has two enable current paths and one
signaling current path. The contacts drop without delay
according to Stop Category 0 (DIN EN 60204-1/
VDE 0113 Part 1).
PSR – Phoenix Safety Relay – PSR-ESA4; PSR-ESM4
2. Technical Data
A 1 S 2 1 S 3 3 S 3 4 S 2 2 1 3 2 3 3 1
(4.508 in.)
»
114.5 mm
K 1
=
Logic
K 2
A 2 S 1 1 S 1 2 1 4 2 4 3 2
99 mm
(3.898 in.)
PSR-ESA4
PSR-ESM4
7/10
M3 Housing width 22.5 mm (0.886 in.)
solid flexible
[mm2] AWG
Connection data: 0.2 - 2.5 0.2 - 2.5 25 - 14

Stripping length: Screw-cage version 7 mm (0.28 in.)
Spring-cage version 10 mm (0.39 in.)
Pcs.
Safety relay, Category 4, Screw-cage PSR-SCP-24UC/ESM4/2X1/1X2 29 63 71 8 1
with start button monitoring Spring-cage PSR-SPP-24UC/ESM4/2X1/1X2 29 63 70 5 1
Safety relay, Category 4 Screw-cage PSR-SCP-24UC/ESA4/2X1/1X2 29 63 75 0 1
Spring-cage PSR-SPP-24UC/ESA4/2X1/1X2 29 63 93 8 1
Technical Data
Input Data
Nominal input voltage UN 24 V AC/DC
Permissible range 0.85 - 1.1 x UN
Typical current consumption at UN 140 mA AC, 65 mA DC
Voltage at input, start, and feedback circuit 24 V DC, approximately
Maximum voltage drop for S11/S12 and S21/S22 2 V DC, approximately (corresponds to 22.8 Ω)
(e.g., two Form B contacts)
Typical response time (K1, K2) at UN 45 ms
Typical release time (K1, K2) at UN 45 ms (one-channel)
20 ms (two-channel)
Recovery time 1 s, approximately
Output Data
Contact version 2 enable current paths,
1 signaling current path
Contact material Silver stannic oxide, gold-flashed (AgSnO2 0.2 µm Au)
Maximum switching voltage 250 V AC/DC
Minimum switching voltage 15 V AC/DC
Limiting continuous current 6 A (Form A contact/Form B contact)
Maximum inrush current 6A
Minimum switching current 25 mA
Maximum shutdown power Ohmic load Inductive load
τ = 0 ms τ = 40 ms
24 V DC 144 W 42 W
48 V DC 288 W 42 W
110 V DC 110 W 42 W
220 V DC 88 W 42 W
250 V AC 1500 V A
Minimum switching power 0.4 W
Mechanical life 107 cycles, approximately
Breaking capacity according to Cycles: 360/h 24 V (DC13) 4 A; 230 V (AC15) 4A
DIN EN 60947-5-1/VDE 0660 Part 200 3600/h 24 V (DC13) 2.5 A; 230 V (AC15) 3A
Short-circuit protection of the output circuits, 6 A fast-blow
external

PSR – Phoenix Safety Relay – PSR-ESA4; PSR-ESM4
General Data
Permissible ambient operating temperature -20°C to +55°C (-4°F to +131°F)

Nominal operating mode 100% ED
Degree of protection According to VDE 0470 Part 1
- Housing IP 40
- Connection terminal blocks IP 20
- Mounting location IP 54, minimum
Mounting position Any
Mounting Can be mounted without spacing
Air and creepance distances between circuits According to DIN EN 50 178:1998-04,
safe isolation, reinforced insulation
Impulse voltage withstand level 6 kV
Degree of pollution 2
Surge Voltage Category III
Dimensions (W x H x D) 22.5 mm x 99 mm x 114.5 mm (0.886 x 3.898 x 4.508 in.)
Cable cross section 0.2 - 2.5 mm2 (25 - 14 AWG)
Housing material Polyamide PA, not reinforced
Note: When operating relay modules the operator must meet the
requirements for emitted interference for electrical and electronic
equipment (EN 50081-2) on the contact side and, if required, take
appropriate measures.
3. Connection Notes and Safety Connection diagram A1, A2 Connection

for operating
Instructions Plug-in COMBICON voltage
spring-cage/screw- S11, S12,
cage terminal blocks S21, S22
A
1
S
S
12
33
3.1. Safety Instructions
S
21
34
Input circuit
S
rd
S
22
11
.-
N
o
A
2
.:
P
o
2
w
9
6
er
3
– Please observe the safety regulations of electrical
7
1
K
8
1
13
K
2
23
31
14
engineering and industrial safety and liability

31
24
S33, S34
32
32
C
N
13
C
23
associations.
14
Start circuit
24
31
nc /
– Disregarding these safety regulations may result in 13

14
UC
-24 2 1 8
CP /1X3 7
R-S X19 6
PSM4/2.: 2
death or serious damage to persons or property. ES .No

Ord
A1
31-32 32 S21
– Before working on the device, disconnect the nc

≈
S33
Signaling 23
=
A2
24
S34
power. current
S22
Logic
S11
– Startup, mounting, modifications, and upgrades paths

K1
13
K2
23
should only be carried out by a skilled electrical

S12
31
14
13-14, 23-24
engineer.
24
Enable
32
– Protective covers must not be removed when current paths u

operating electrical switching devices. ET
00
22
0
– During operation, parts of electrical switching Metal lock for

fastening onto
devices carry hazardous voltages. the DIN rail
– Keep the instruction sheet in a safe place.
– In the event of an error, replace the device Figure 05
immediately.
3.2. Connection Notes

To maintain the UL, use copper cables, which are
32
32
7 mm
13
designed for operating temperatures of 75°C (167°F).

23
14
24
31
For reliable and safe contacts, strip the connector 13
ends accordingly. 14
32
PSR-SCP-24UC/ES...4/2X1/1X2
3
23
14
10 mm
24
31
13
14
23
2
PSR-SPP-24UC/ES...4/2X1/1X2

PSR – Phoenix Safety Relay – PSR-PSR-ESA4; PSR-ESM4
4. Connection Examples
One-channel emergency stop circuit with manual activation1), One-channel safety door monitoring with automatic activation,
suitable for up to Safety Category 2. suitable for up to Safety Category 2.
Reset
S33 S34 S21 S22 S11 S12 13 23 31 S33 S34 S21 S22 S11 S12 13 23 31
PSR-...- PSR-...-24UC/ ESA4/ 2x 1/ 1x 2

24UC/ ESM 4/ 2x 1/ 1x 2
A1 A2 14 24 32 A1 A2 14 24 32
Emergency
stop
24V UC 24V AC/DC
GND GND
Two-channel emergency stop circuit with cross-circuit Two-channel safety door monitoring with cross-circuit
monitoring and manual activation1), suitable for up to Safety monitoring and automatic activation, suitable for up to Safety
Category 4. Category 4.
Emergency
stop
Reset
S33 S34 S21 S22 S11 S12 13 23 31
S33 S34 S21 S22 S11 S12 13 23 31

PSR-...-24UC/ ESA4/ 2x 1/ 1x 2
TNR: 5106695-02-gb http://www.phoenixcontact.com

PSR-...-
24UC/ ESM 4/ 2x 1/ 1x 2
A1 A2 14 24 32
A1 A2 14 24 32
24V AC/DC
24V UC
GND
GND
Two-channel emergency stop circuit with cross-circuit Two-channel safety door monitoring with cross-circuit
monitoring, manual activation1), and monitored contact monitoring, automatic activation, and monitored contact
expansion, suitable for up to Safety Category 4. expansion, suitable for up to Safety Category 4.
Emergency
K4
stop L L
K2 ext.
K3
Reset
06/01/02
L
K1ext.
S33 S34 S21 S22 S11 S12 13 23 31

S33 S34 S21 S22 S11 S12 13 23 31
PSR-...-
24UC/ ESA4/ 2x 1/ 1x 2
PSR-...-
24UC/ ESM 4/ 2x 1/ 1x 2
A1 A2 14 24 32
 PHOENIX CONTACT
A1 A2 14 24 32
K3
K2 ext. 24V AC/DC
24V UC
GND GND K4
K1 ext.
N N
1)
PSR-...-24UC/ESM4/2X1/1X2 with reset button monitoring
PSR-...-24UC/ESA4/2X1/1X2 without reset button monitoring
catalog

EM-DUO 120/15
Order No.: 5600461

Rail-mountable double socket, for mounting on 35 mm mounting rail in
acc. with EN EN 60715, housing color: white, with screw connection,
national version: USA
http://
Commercial data Please note that the data given
EAN 4017918929930 online catalog. For comprehensive
Pack 1 Pcs. information and data, please refer
Customs tariff 85366990 General Terms and Conditions of
Catalog page information Page 513 (IF-2007)
Technical data
General data
Nominal voltage UN 120 V AC
For country-specific use in USA
Color white
Insulating material PVC 94 V0
Ambient temperature (operation) -40 °C ... 70 °C
Ambient temperature (storage/transport) -40 °C ... 70 °C
Standards/regulations UL 508
Length 134 mm

EM-DUO 120/15 Order No.: 5600461
Width 83 mm
Height 49 mm
Connection data
2

2

2

2

Screw thread M3
Certification CUL Listed, UL Listed

EM-DUO 120/15 Order No.: 5600461
Address

Flachsmarktstr. 8
Phone +49 5235 3 00
Fax +49 5235 3 41200


Overvoltage Protection PU Series
0WFSWPMUBHF1SPUFDUJPO'PS&OFSHZ
%JTUSJCVUJPO4ZTUFNT 77
B/C/D arrestors Warning signal over distance
Detachable modules, installation facilities Codification of the voltage modules
Easy visual inspection of modules service ability Mounts on all TS 35
PU overvoltage protection - Class I (B arrestors)
Order No. Type Qty. Rated Monit. Lightening Rated Leakage Width
Voltage Contact Test Current Current Max.
8381890000 PU 3B 1 230 Vac no (10/350µs) 20 kA (8/20µs) 100 kA 54
8381900000 PU 3BR 1 230 Vac yes (10/350µs) 20 kA (8/20µs) 100 kA 72
8147020000 PU 4B 1 230 Vac no (10/350µs) 20 kA (8/20µs) 100 kA 72

C
A
8291640000 PU 4BR 1 230 Vac yes (10/350µs) 20 kA (8/20µs) 100 kA 90
Accessories
Pluggable spare arrester PU 0B Order No. : 8381880000
PU overvoltage protection - Class II (C arrestors)
Order No. Type Qty. Rated Rated Leakage Current Monit. Width. Pluggable Spare Arrester
Voltage Nom. Max. Contact Type Order No.
8102610000 PU 1C 1 230 Vac 20 kA (8/20µs) 40 kA no * PU 0 B 8339510000
8215820000 PU 1C 1 115 Vac 20 kA (8/20µs) 40 kA no * PU 0 C 8432430000
8021510000 PU 3CR 1 230 Vac 20 kA (8/20µs) 100 kA yes * PU 0 B 8339510000
8291680000 PU 3CR 1 115 Vac 20 kA (8/20µs) 100 kA yes * PU 0 C 8432430000
8021500000 PU 4 C 1 230 Vac 20 kA (8/20µs) 100 kA no * PU 0 B 8339510000
8291670000 PU 4 C 1 115 Vac 20 kA (8/20µs) 100 kA no * PU 0 C 8432430000
8291720000 PU 4 C 1 470 Vac 20 kA (8/20µs) 100 kA no * PU 0 C 8451080000
8021520000 PU 4CR 1 230 Vac 20 kA (8/20µs) 100 kA yes * PU 0 B 8339510000
8416370000 PU 3+1 C 1 230 Vac 20 kA (8/20µs) 100 kA no * PU 0 C 8339510000

Control unit PU 1... 4 PU 0/S-E Order No.: 8021530000 *1 block: 17.7 mm
2 blocks: 35.5 mm
3 blocks: 53.4 mm
4 blocks: 71.2 mm
C.17
Small, compact Thermostat KTO 011 / KTS 011
Large setting range

Regulating and Monitoring
Small size
Simple to mount
High switching performance
KTO 011: Thermostat (normally closed); contact breaker for regulating heaters.
KTS 011: Thermostat (normally open); contact maker for regulating of filter fans and heat
exchangers or for switching signal devised when temperature limit has been exceeded.
|
Technical Data
Specifications are subject to change without notice. Errors and omissions excepted. Suitability of this product for its intended use and any associated risks must be determined by the end customer/
24.04.2006
Switch temperature difference 7K (± 4K tolerance)

Sensor element thermostatic bimetal
Contact type snap-action contact
Contact resistance < 10mOhm
Service life > 100,000 cycles
Max. Switching capacity 250VAC, 10 (2) A
120VAC, 15 (2) A
DC 30W
EMC acc. to EN 55014-1-2, EN 61000-3-2, EN 61000-3-3
Connection 2-pole terminal for 2.5mm², clamping torque 0.8Nm
Mounting clip for 35mm DIN rail, EN50022
(or for exit filter EF 118 Series)
Casing plastic according to UL94 V-0, light grey
Dimensions 60 x 33 x 43mm
Weight approx. 40g
Fitting position variable
Operating/Storage temperature -20 to +80 °C (-4 to +176 °F) / -45 to +80 °C (-49 to +176 °F)
Protection type IP20
Thermostat Thermostat
KTO 011 (NC) KTS 011 (NO)
e.g. Signal
Thermostat Heater Thermostat e.g. Fan Thermostat
device
KTO 011 (NC) KTS 011 (NO) KTS 011 (NO)
Example of connection Example of connection
Setting range Art. No. Contact Breaker (NC) Art. No. Contact Maker (NO) Approvals
buyer in its final application.
0 to +60°C 01140.0-00 01141.0-00 VDE

-10 to +50°C 01142.0-00 01143.0-00 VDE
+20 to +80°C 01159.0-00 01158.0-00 VDE
+32 to +140°F 01140.9-00 01141.9-00 UL File No. E164102
+14 to +122°F 01142.9-00 01143.9-00 UL File No. E164102
0 to +60°C 01146.9-00 01147.9-00 UL File No. E164102
++ STEGO UK Ltd. + Unit 12, First Quarter Business Park + Blenheim Road + Epsom, Surrey KT19 9QN + England + info@stego.co.uk + www.stego.co.uk ++
LOW-THICKNESS FILTER FANS: 2000-2300-2310-2324-2348-2400-2410
GRUPPI DI VENTILAZIONE A BASSO PROFILO: 2000-2300-2310-2324-2348-2400-2410
234 250
∆Pf (Pa)
225
100
90
234
225
80 250
70
60
Al
Al
50
fa
fa
O
24
23
00
40
00
30
20 121*
2000
10 Alfa
20 40 60 80 100 120 * mm. 128

per Alfa
m3/h 105 5,5
2400/10 Bp
Modello Descrizione Dimensioni Alimentazione Portata aria Potenza Corrente Rumorosità Portata aria
assorbita con filtro
mm' V$Hz m/h W A dB (A) in uscita * m/h
Model Description Dimensions Feeding Flow rate Power Absorbed Noise level Flow rate
current with exit
mm' V$Hz m/h W A dB (A) filter ** m/h
Alfa Griglia con filtro xx $$$$ $$$$ $$$$ $$$$ $$$$ $$$$
Bp
Filter
Ventilatore con
Alfa griglia
xx $/& / )/ '/' &/ /)
Bp
Filter fan
Alfa Griglia con filtro xx $/& / )/ '/') &/ /)
Bp
Filter
Ventilatore con
Alfa griglia
xx V DC ' (
Bp
Filter fan
Ventilatore con
Alfa griglia
xx V DC ' (
Bp
Filter fan
Ventilatore con
Alfa griglia
xx $/& / / '&/' (/ )/
Bp
Filter fan
Ventilatore con
Alfa griglia
xx $/& / / '&/' (/ )/
Bp
Filter fan
** Abbinato a un filtro in uscita di pari dimensione

** Jointed an exit filter of equal dimension
LOW-THICKNESS FILTER FANS: 2000-2500-2510-2524-2548-2600-2610-2640
GRUPPI DI VENTILAZIONE A BASSO PROFILO: 2000-2500-2510-2524-2548-2600-2610-2640
234 250
∆Pf (Pa)
225
200
180
234
225
160 250
140
120 Alfa
260
0B
O
100 Al p
fa
25
80 00
Bp
60
* mm. 218
40
Bp
172* ** mm. 104
2000 per Alfa
20 Alfa
2600/10/40 Bp
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 340 360 380
m3/h 113** 5,5
Modello Descrizione Dimensioni Alimentazione Portata aria Potenza Corrente Rumorosità Portata aria
assorbita con filtro
mm' V%Hz m(/h W A dB (A) in uscita * m(/h
Model Description Dimensions Feeding Flow rate Power Absorbed Noise level Flow rate
current with exit
mm' V%Hz m(/h W A dB (A) filter ** m(/h
Ventilatore con
Alfa griglia xx $ (%/ (/ /( '(/') / /
Bp
Filter fan
Ventilatore con
Alfa griglia
xx $ %/ (/ /( '/' / /
Bp
Filter fan
Alfa Griglia con filtro xx $ V DC ( '

Bp
Filter
Ventilatore con
Alfa griglia
xx $ V DC ( '(
Bp
Filter fan
Ventilatore con
Alfa griglia
xx (%/ ()/ )/$ '/'( / /)
Bp
Filter fan
Ventilatore con
Alfa griglia
xx %/ ()/ )/$ '/') / /)
Bp
Filter fan
Ventilatore con
Alfa griglia
xx %/ ()/ )/$ ' /' / /)
Bp
Filter fan
** Abbinato a un filtro in uscita di pari dimensione

** Jointed an exit filter of equal dimension
SSE
®
LOCAL CONTROL PANEL

INSTRUCTION, USER AND MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
Costruttore / Manufacturer SSE

Descrizione / Description Quadro di controllo locale / Local Control Panel
Numero di serie SSE / SSE Serial Number 280152 and 280154 and 280156
Commessa SSE / SSE Job 280152 and 280154 and 280156
Cliente SSE / SSE Customer Nuovo Pignone
Ordine Cliente SSE / SSE Customer Order 439519724 Pos.2,4,6
Cliente Finale / End Customer COLT FOR SUNCOR ENERGY
Località / Location FORT MC MURRAY, ALBERTA (CANADA)
Impianto / Plant VOYAGEUR HYDROTREATER
Job NP / Commessa NP 1102313-14-15
NP Specification / Specifica NP SOS9971973 (RQ 1451505 - RQ 1451507 - RQ 1451509)
Via del Lazzeretto, 92 - 59100 PRATO - ITALY - Tel. +39.0574.52941 Fax +39.0574.529451 - www.siriosys.it
Sheet 1 di 7
SSE
®
INDEX
1. SCOPE OF SUPPLY _________________________________________________________3

2. REFERENCE DRAWINGS FOR PANEL CONSTRUCTION ________________________3
3. GENERAL TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION _______________________________________3
4. POWER SUPPLY ____________________________________________________________4
5. EARTH CIRCUITS __________________________________________________________5
6. SEGREGATION OF THE WIRING WITH DIFFERENT SIGNAL LEVEL ____________5
7. OPERATING CONDITIONS __________________________________________________6
8. STOCK REQUIREMENT _____________________________________________________6
9. HANDLING ________________________________________________________________6
10. MAINTENANCE __________________________________________________________6
11. INTERCONNETCTION ____________________________________________________6
12. POWER-UP PROCEDURE __________________________________________________7
13. POWER-DOWN PROCEDURE ______________________________________________7
Sheet 2 di 7
SSE
®
1. SCOPE OF SUPPLY
Description of Local Control Panel (LCP) for the local control and monitoring of the turbo
compression unit.
2. REFERENCE DRAWINGS FOR PANEL CONSTRUCTION
JOB 110.2313 JOB 110.2314 JOB 110.2315

a) LCP LAYOUT SOS9971701/3 SOS9971703/3 SOS9971704/3
b) LCP WIRING DIAGRAM SOS9972008 /3 SOS9972009 /3 SOS9972010 /3
3. GENERAL TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

The LCP has been constructed according to the document “LCP LAYOUT”.
The panel is in stainless steel and is self sustaining type.
The panel general dimensions are 800 x 800 x 2100 mm.
The panel consist of a box with lamps, selectors and push button and a panel PC.
Cable entry is from the top.
The protection degree is NEMA 4X.
The panel is unpainted.
The wiring is according to the “LCP Wiring Diagram”.
Sheet 3 di 7
SSE
®
4. POWER SUPPLY
The Local Control Panel is powered by Unit Control Panel:
a) Power Supply Distribution 120Vac from UCP (LCP-UPS1 terminal board) to be supplied at the following
device:
External horn (6HA1)
b) Power Supply Distribution 120Vac from UCP (LCP-EP terminal board) to be supplied at LCP-HRT
terminal board for the following devices:
Internal Heater (8EH1)
c) Power Supply Distribution 120Vac from UCP (LCP-UPS1 terminal board) to be supplied at the following
device:
Panel PC
d) Power Supply Distribution 120Vac from UCP (LCP-MCC terminal board) to be supplied at the following
device:
External lamp (9EL1)
Sheet 4 di 7
SSE
®
5. EARTH CIRCUITS
Inside the panel there are two earthing circuits:
• [PE] PROTECTION EARTH
Earth bar for the connection of the chassis of the instruments and of the armouring of the cables in
input;
• [FE] FUNCTIONAL EARTH

Earth bar for the connection of the PLC chassis and instruments cable screens;
6. SEGREGATION OF THE WIRING WITH DIFFERENT SIGNAL LEVEL

Different and separate routing and cable trays have been provided for the signals of the following
levels :
SIGNAL LEVEL SIGNAL TYPE
Low level 4-20 mA Analog Signals, RTD Analog Signals, Speed and Vibration transmitters
Low level 0-30 Vdc Digital Signals
High level Vdc/Vac Power Supplies over 1500 W
Sheet 5 di 7
SSE
®
7. OPERATING CONDITIONS
The local control panel has been designed to be operated in out-door under shelter in a hazardous
area, Class 1 Zone 2 Group IIC Temp.T3 (acc. to IEC).
Operative temperature range -58 °F and +104 °F
8. STOCK REQUIREMENT
The LCP can be stocked at temperature between -58 °F and +104 °F and relative humidity between
5% and 95%.
9. HANDLING
For the lifting of the LCP, use the two provided holes on the top of LCP.
10. MAINTENANCE
LCP maintenance consists of the following actions:
• Check that lamp is properly working;
11. INTERCONNETCTION
For entry of the cables in the box use cable gland Eex-e certified.
For the Panel PC connection refer to installation manual of the panel PC DRAWING MDRW00245
For the connection of the horn refer to installation instructions for vibratone
Sheet 6 di 7
SSE
®
12. POWER-UP PROCEDURE

Preliminary check before power-up:
• Check that all-fixing bolts and screws are tightly screwed
• Check that the earth circuits are correctly connected
120Vac from the relative UCP :
1) Energize 11FU1 in the Unit Control Panel, verify that external horn proper working;
2) Energize 11QF3 in the Unit Control Panel, verify that Panel PC proper working;
3) Energize 15FU1 in the Unit Control Panel, verify presence of 120Vac at LCP-HTR terminal board and
verify that internal heater proper working;
4) Energize 22FU1 in the Unit Control Panel, verify that external light proper working;
13. POWER-DOWN PROCEDURE
De-energize breakers and fuses in the unit control panel in the reverse order of power-up sequence
and verify that respective devices are disconnected.
Sheet 7 di 7
EQUIPMENT LIST
FEDERAL
1 350WB HORN 120VAC SOS9972008 6HA1 350WBX-120 1
SIGNAL
2 INTERTEC ANTICONDENSING HEATER SOS9972008 8EH1 CPA-300-T3-80-1 1
AC-Exacta INCANDESCENT LAMP FOR CEILING
3 NRL SOS9972008 9EL1 ACEH15I1GCGC2 1
MOUNTING
4 NRL LAMP 120VAC 100W SOS9972008 9EL1 INX3543 1
CROUSE
5 SWITCH 2P SOS9972008 9SA1 EDSC218 1
HINDS
PRECISION
6 PANELMETER (FOR HAZARDOUS AREA) SOS9972008 FI 3290B;PDI 3461B;PI 3095B;PI 3096B;PI 3403B;PI 3471B;SI 3049B;UZI 3293B PD688-0K0 8
DIGITAL
HS 3084;HS 3113;HS 3114;HS 3118;HS 3111;SHS 3111;SHS 3112;XHS 3085;XHSC 3030;XHSC
7 BARTEC PUSH BUTTON SOS9972008 05-0003-000700BN 13
3031;XHSO 3030;XHSO 3031;XHSO 3315
HS 3084;HS 3113;HS 3114;HS 3115;HS 3117;HS 3118;HS 3126;HS 3111;NCR 3741;SHS 3111;SHS
8 BARTEC SWITCH MODULE 2NO SOS9972008 3112;SHS 3116;XHS 3085;XHS 3120;XHS 3316;XHSC 3030;XHSC 3031;XHSO 3030;XHSO 07-3323-1200 20
3031;XHSO 3315
9 BARTEC POSITION SELECTOR SWITCH 2 POSITION SOS9972008 HS 3115;HS 3117;HS 3126;NCR 3741;SHS 3116 05-0003-000900BN 5
PHOENIX
10 USLKG5 EARTH TERMINAL BLOCK SOS9972008 LCP-HTR 441504 1
CONTACT
PHOENIX
11 UK 3N FEED THROUGH TERMINAL BLOCK SOS9972008 LCP-HTR;TBLCP_A;TBLCP_B;TBLCP_L;TBSPR_D 3001501 200
CONTACT
ENDRESS
12 RTD TH15 PT100 SOS9972008 RTD PT100 TH15-F2A5AA2KA1 1
HAUSER
13 BARTEC EMERGENCY PUSH BUTTON SOS9972008 XHS 3120 05-0003-000800BN 1
14 BARTEC KEY SELCTOR 2 POSITION SOS9972008 XHS 3316 05-0003-001200BN 1
15 BARTEC INDICATOR RED LIGHT SOS9972008 XL 3311;XZLC 3030;XZLC 3031 05-0003-001300BN 3
16 BARTEC RED LAMP MODULE SOS9972008 XL 3311;XZLC 3030;XZLC 3031 07-3353-1110 3
17 BARTEC INDICATOR YELLOW LIGHT SOS9972008 XL 3312 05-0003-001500BN 1
18 BARTEC YELLOW LAMP MODULE SOS9972008 XL 3312 07-3353-1130 1
19 BARTEC INDICATOR GREEN LIGHT SOS9972008 XL 3313;XL 3314;XZLO 3030;XZLO 3031 05-0003-001400BN 4
20 BARTEC GREEN LAMP MODULE SOS9972008 XL 3313;XL 3314;XZLO 3030;XZLO 3031 07-3353-1120 4
Media Converter Eth / O.F, Class1 Div2,ATEX Class 1,

21 MOXA SOS9972008 7MC1 IMC-101-M-SC-T 1
Zone 2, EEx nC IIC, -40 to 75°C operating range
Pagina 1 di 1
MIL-W-16878E TYPE B: 105°C, 600 VOLT
UL 1429, CSA: 80°C, 150 VOLT
MIL-W-16878E TYPE C: 105°C, 1000 VOLT
HOOK-UP WIRE
UL 1430, CSA: 105°C, 300 VOLT IRRADIATED PVC INSULATION
RoHS COMPLIANT
SOLDER IRON RESISTANT

Irradiated PVC Insulated Hook-Up Wire is exposed
to controlled electron beam radiation which results in
an insulation far superior to ordinary PVC.
Irradiated PVC withstands higher temperatures than
ordinary PVC. Because of its ability to resist solder MIL-W-16878E TYPE B: 105°C, 600 VOLT
iron heat, it is the ideal material to use where high
CSA AWM I A/B FT1: 105°C, 150 VOLT
reliability is essential and particularly valuable in the
wiring of tight, high-density systems. UL 1429: 80°C, 150 VOLT
Irradiated PVC insulation is tougher than ordinary
PVC resulting in greatly improved abrasion and
cut-through resistance.
Alpha
Part No.
7053
7054
Conductor
AWG Strand
26
24
7/34
7/32
Insul. Thickness
Inches
0.010
0.010
mm
0,25
0,25
Diameter
Inches
0.040
0.045
mm
1,02
1,14
Stock
Colors*
1–10
1–10
171
7054/19 24 19/36 0.010 0,25 0.045 1,14 1–10
CHARACTERISTICS 7055
7055/19
22
22
7/30
19/34
0.010
0.010
0,25
0,25
0.051
0.052
1,30
1,32
1–10
1–10
7056 20 7/28 0.010 0,25 0.059 1,50 1–10
OPERATING TEMPERATURE: 7056/19 20 19/32 0.010 0,25 0.060 1,52 1–10
■ –55°C to 105°C – UL AWM 1430
7057 18 7/26 0.010 0,25 0.070 1,78 1–10
■ –55°C to 105°C – UL AWM 3317 7057/19 18 19/30 0.010 0,25 0.070 1,78 1–10
■ –55°C to 105°C – CSA AWM I A/B FT1 7058/19 16 19/29 0.010 0,25 0.078 1,98 1–10
■ –55°C to 105°C – MIL-W-16878E *See color chart below
■ –55°C to 80°C – UL AWM 1429
VOLTAGE RATING:
■ 600 Volt (MIL), 150 Volt (UL, CSA)
■ 1000 Volt (MIL), 300 Volt (UL, CSA)
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION:
■ Conductor: Stranded Tinned Copper
■ Insulation: Color-Coded, Irradiated PVC (XLPVC)

MIL-W-16878E TYPE C: 105°C, 1000 VOLT
UL 1430, CSA REW XLPVC: 105°C, 300 VOLT
SPECIFICATIONS
■ UL AWM Style 1429 Alpha Conductor Insul. Thickness Diameter Stock
Part No. AWG Strand Inches mm Inches mm Colors*
■ UL AWM Style 1430
■ UL AWM Style 3317 7130 24 7/32 0.016 0,41 0.056 1,42 1–10,29
7131 22 7/30 0.016 0,41 0.062 1,58 1–10,29
■ CSA AWM I A/B FT1 7132 20 7/28 0.016 0,41 0.070 1,78 1–10,29
■ CSA REW XLPVC FT1 7133 18 7/26 0.016 0,41 0.082 2,08 1–10,29
■ MIL-W-16878E, Type B 7134 16 19/29 0.016 0,41 0.092 2,34 1–10,29
7035† 14 19/27 0.016 0,41 0.107 2,72 1–10,29
■ MIL-W-16878E, Type C 7036† 12 19/25 0.016 0,41 0.124 3,15 1–10,29
■ RoHS Compliant
† UL 3317
*See color chart below
®
AVAILABILITY
■ 100 ft (30,5m), 1000 ft (305m) put-ups
*STOCK COLOR CHART

1–White 3–Red 5–Yellow 7–Brown 9–Gray 29–Yellow/Green
2–Black 4–Green 6–Blue 8–Orange 10–Violet (purple)
Web Site: www.alphawire.com Toll Free: 1-800-52 ALPHA • Telephone: 908-925-8000 • Fax: 908-925-6923
Email: info@alphawire.com Europe/UK Telephone: +44 (0) 1932 772422 • Europe/UK Fax: +44 (0) 1932 772433
Detailed Specifications & Technical Data
ENGLISH MEASUREMENT VERSION
7931A Multi-Conductor - Category 6 DataTwist® Twisted Pair Cable
For more Information

please call
1-800-Belden1
Description:
23 AWG Bonded-Pairs solid bare copper conductors, FEP insulation, sunlight- oil- and gas-resistant FEP
jacket. Sequential marking at two foot intervals.
Usage (Overall)
Suitable Applications: Industrial Ethernet Cable, Harsh Environments, 350MHz Enhanced Category 6,
Gigabit Ethernet, 100BaseTX, 100BaseVG ANYLAN, 155ATM, 622ATM,
NTSC/PAL Component or Composite Video, AES/EBU Digital Audio, AES51,
RS-422, RJ-45 Compatible, High and Low Temperature, Oil and Gasoline
Exposure, Limited Combustible FHC 25/50
Physical Characteristics (Overall)

Conductor
AWG:
# Pairs AWG Stranding Conductor Material
4 23 Solid BC - Bare Copper
Insulation
Insulation Material:
Insulation Material
FEP - Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene
Outer Shield
Outer Shield Material:
Outer Shield Material
Unshielded
Outer Jacket
Outer Jacket Material:
Outer Jacket Material
FEP - Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene
Overall Cabling
Overall Cabling Fillers: Rod Center Member
Overall Nominal Diameter: 0.214 in.
Pair
Pair Color Code Chart:
Number Color
1 White/Blue Stripe & Blue
2 White/Orange Stripe & Orange
3 White/Green Stripe & Green
4 White/Brown Stripe & Brown
Mechanical Characteristics (Overall)

Installation Temperature Range: -55°C To +150°C
Operating Temperature Range: -70°C To +150°C
Bulk Cable Weight: 28 lbs/1000 ft.
Max. Recommended Pulling Tension: 40 lbs.
Page 1 of 4 03-16-2009
Min. Bend Radius (Install)/Minor Axis: 0.500 in.
Applicable Specifications and Agency Compliance (Overall)

Applicable Standards & Environmental Programs
NEC/(UL) Specification: FHC 25/50, CMP, UL444
NEC Articles: NFPA 259
CEC/C(UL) Specification: CMP
EU Directive 2000/53/EC (ELV): Yes
EU Directive 2002/95/EC (RoHS): Yes
EU RoHS Compliance Date (mm/dd/yyyy): 04/01/2005
EU Directive 2002/96/EC (WEEE): Yes
EU Directive 2003/11/EC (BFR): Yes
CA Prop 65 (CJ for Wire & Cable): Yes
MII Order #39 (China RoHS): Yes
Telecommunications Standards: 568-B.2-1 Category 6
Other Specification: UL verified to Category 6
Flame Test
UL Flame Test: UL723 (NFPA 255), NFPA 262
CSA Flame Test: FT6
Suitability
Oil Resistance: Yes
Plenum/Non-Plenum
Plenum (Y/N): Yes
Electrical Characteristics (Overall)

Nom. Mutual Capacitance:
Capacitance (pF/ft)
15
Nominal Velocity of Propagation:

VP (%)
72
Maximum Capacitance Unbalance (pF/100 m): 330

Maximum Delay:
Delay (ns/100 m)
537 @ 100MHz
Max. Delay Skew:

Delay Skew (ns/100 m)
45
Maximum Conductor DC Resistance:

DCR @ 20°C (Ohm/100 m)
9.38
Max. Operating Voltage - UL:

Voltage
300 V RMS
Maximum DCR Unbalanced:

DCR Unbalance @ 20°C (%)
5
Page 2 of 4 03-16-2009
Electrical Characteristics-Premise (Overall)

Premise Cable Electrical Table 1:
Freq. (MHz) Max. Attenuation (dB/100 m) Min. NEXT (dB) Min. PSNEXT (dB) Min. ACR (dB) Min. PSACR (dB) Min RL (dB) Min. SRL (dB)
1 2.0 74.3 72.3 72.3 70.3 20.0 na
4 3.8 65.3 63.3 61.5 59.5 23.0 na
8 5.3 60.8 58.8 55.4 53.4 24.5 na
10 6.0 59.3 57.3 53.3 51.3 25.0 na
16 7.6 56.2 54.3 48.7 46.7 25.0 na
20 8.5 54.8 52.8 46.3 44.3 25.0 na
25 9.5 53.3 51.3 43.8 41.8 24.3 na
31.25 10.7 51.9 49.9 41.2 39.2 23.6 na
62.5 15.4 47.4 45.4 32.0 30.0 21.5 na
100 19.8 44.3 42.3 24.5 22.5 20.1 na
155 25.2 41.5 39.5 16.3 14.3 18.8 na
200 29.0 39.8 37.8 10.8 8.8 18.0 na
250 32.8 38.3 36.3 5.5 3.5 17.3 na
Premise Cable Electrical Table 2:

Freq. (MHz) Input (Unfitted) Imp. (Ohms) Fitted Impedance Min. ELFEXT (dB) Min. PSELFEXT (dB)
1 100 ± 15 100 ± 15 67.8 64.8
4 100 ± 15 100 ± 15 55.8 52.7
8 100 ± 15 100 ± 15 49.7 46.7
10 100 ± 15 100 ± 15 47.8 44.8
16 100 ± 15 100 ± 15 43.7 40.7
20 100 ± 15 100 ± 15 41.8 38.7
25 100 ± 15 100 ± 15 39.8 36.8
31.25 100 ± 15 100 ± 15 37.9 34.9
62.5 100 ± 15 100 ± 15 31.9 28.8
100 100 ± 15 100 ± 15 27.8 24.8
155 100 ± 22 100 ± 15 23.9 20.9
200 100 ± 22 100 ± 15 21.8 18.7
250 100 ± 32 100 ± 15 19.8 16.8
Notes (Overall)
Notes: US Patents 5, 606, 151& 5, 573, 126. Operating temperatures subject to length de-rating.
Notes (Cont'd.): Cable passes -70C Cold Bend per UL 1581.
Put Ups and Colors:

Item # Putup Ship Weight Color Notes Item Desc
7931A 0101000 1,000 FT 35.000 LB BLACK 4 PR #23 FEP FEP
Revision Number: 7 Revision Date: 05-14-2007
© 2008 Belden, Inc

All Rights Reserved.
Although Belden makes every reasonable effort to ensure their accuracy at the time of this publication, information and specifications
described herein are subject to error or omission and to change without notice, and the listing of such information and specifications does not
ensure product availability.
Belden provides the information and specifications herein on an "AS IS" basis, with no representations or warranties, whether express,
statutory or implied. In no event will Belden be liable for any damages (including consequential, indirect, incidental, special, punitive, or
exemplary damages) whatsoever, even if Belden has been advised of the possibility of such damages, whether in an action under contract,
negligence or any other theory, arising out of or in connection with the use, or inability to use, the information or specifications described herein.
All sales of Belden products are subject to Belden's standard terms and conditions of sale.
Belden believes this product to be in compliance with EU RoHS (Directive 2002/95/EC, 27-Jan-2003). Material manufactured prior to the
compliance date may be in stock at Belden facilities and in our Distributor’s inventory. The information provided in this Product Disclosure, and
the identification of materials listed as reportable or restricted within the Product Disclosure, is correct to the best of Belden’s knowledge,
information, and belief at the date of its publication. The information provided in this Product Disclosure is designed only as a general guide
for the safe handling, storage, and any other operation of the product itself or the one that it becomes a part of. This Product Disclosure is not
to be considered a warranty or quality specification. Regulatory information is for guidance purposes only. Product users are responsible for
determining the applicability of legislation and regulations based on their individual usage of the product.
Page 3 of 4 03-16-2009
Page 4 of 4 03-16-2009
5 digit Loop-powered Panel meters
with Loop-powered Backlight
Model PD683 General Purpose

+
Loop Leader TM
Model PD688 Hazardous Area
- Series
Model PD688 Only
• 4-20 mA Input
• 5 Digit LCD, 0.6” (15.2 mm) High
• FM Type 4X, IP65 Front
• Shallow Depth Case 3.2” Behind Panel
• 2 V Drop (5.7 V with Backlight)
• Loop-Powered Backlight Standard
• Custom Engineering Units & Bargraph
• Linear, Square Root, or Programmable Exponent
• Maximum & Minimum Display
• Operating Temperature Range -30 to 65°C
• Intrinsically Safe & Non-Incendive
• HART Protocol Transparent
Precision Digital Corporation www.predig.com

Model PD683 & PD688 loop-powered panel meters
• Trend Arrow
• 5 Digits, 0.6” High
• Bargraph
• Engineering Notation
• Custom Engineering Units
• Backlight is Standard
KEY FEATURES Square Root Function

Through significant innovation in technology and design, we The square root extraction feature displays flow rate by extracting
developed the Loop Leader™ Series of loop-powered indicators, the square root from a differential pressure transmitter signal.
which are loaded with standard features and built for tough The user selectable low-flow cutoff feature gives a reading of
industrial environments. zero when the flow rate drops below a user selectable value.
Full Featured • Displays Flow Rate

There’s nothing stripped down or bare bones about these indicators; • User Selectable Low-Flow Cutoff
they’re designed for demanding process control applications. Standard • Only 2 Calibration Points Required
features include a full 5 digit backlit display with bargraph, on-screen
custom engineering units, and max/min display capabilities
Install Just About Anywhere
Indoors, outdoors, bright sunlight, dimly lit plant, wet, dirty, hot
or cold- these indicators go just about anywhere. Their shallow-
depth case, FM Type 4X front, loop-powered backlighting, and
wide operating temperature range are all standard features. And FLOW
the PD688 with its FM Approval and CSA Certification can be
installed in just about any hazardous location.
Programmable Exponent
4-20 mA Input Connections The programmable exponent function is used to linearize the level
Wiring with Backlight signal in open channel flow applications using weirs and flumes
S+ S- B+ B-
and display flow rate in engineering units.
4-20 mA
Power Transmitter
Supply
4-20 mA output
Wiring without Backlight
S+ S- B+ B-
4-20 mA
Power Transmitter
Supply
2
Setup & Programming PD688 Intrinsically Safe Wiring

I nstallation must be performed in accordance with Control
Easy Setup Drawing LIM688-2.
Even with all the features packed into these meters, they’re still easy
to setup and get running. Everything is programmed from the front Loop Input with Backlight
panel buttons with no pots or jumpers to deal with. In fact, these
meters can be scaled without a signal source for even quicker setup. HAZARDOUS AREA NON-HAZARDOUS AREA
Main Menu S+ S- B+ B-
Loop
Run Input
Mode I.S. Barrier
9.2 846 GPS s et up pr oG pas s

+
I.S. GROUND
-
<1 ohm to Ground
Transmitter
Advanced Features Menu

To simplify the setup process, functions not needed for most applications Loop Input without Backlight
are located in the Advanced Features menu. Press and hold the Menu
button for five seconds to access the advanced features of the meter.
HAZARDOUS AREA NON-HAZARDOUS AREA
Run Mode S+ S- B+ B-
Loop
9.2 846 GPS
Input
Press and hold for five seconds
I.S. Barrier
f unc t +
I.S. GROUND
Press Enter/Ack to Access -
contr Menu or to Accept Setting
<1 ohm to Ground
Transmitter
Press Up to Scroll Menu and
to Increment Digit Value
f l t er
Press Right to Select Next Digit
Optional enclosures
bypas Press Menu to Exit at any Time
t r end I Cal i nf o PDA2801 low-cost

NEMA 4X enclosure
for one PD683 meter
Installation
There is no need to remove the meter from its case to complete the
installation, wiring, and setup of the meter.
Mounting Dimensions Units: Inch (mm)

1.76"
NEMA 4X enclosures
(45mm)
are available in plastic,

2.50"
(64mm) steel, & stainless steel
for one to six PD683
2.45"
(62mm)
3.61"
(92mm)
meters
0.59"
(15mm)
3.2"
(81mm)
4.68"
(119mm)
Go to
www.predig.com
Notes: for complete details
1. Panel cutout required: 3.622 x 1.772 (92 x 45)
2 Panel thickness: 0.040 – 0.250 (1.0 – 6.4)
3. Mounting brackets lock in place for easy mounting
3
SPECIFICATIONS Input
Except where noted all specifications apply to operation at +25°C. Input Range: 4-20 mA
Accuracy: ±0.03% of span ±1 count, square root and
General programmable exponent: 10-100% FS.
Display: 5 digit LCD (-99999 to 99999), 0.60" (15.2 mm) high, Calibration: Scale without signal or calibrate with signal source
7-segment, automatic lead zero blanking. Calibration Range: User programmable over entire range of meter
Engineering Units: 0.25" (6.4 mm) high, 14-segment Minimum Span: 0.40 mA between input 1 and input 2
Bargraph: 20-segment, 0-100% indication Note: An Error message will appear if input 1 and input 2 signals are too close together.
Trend Arrows: Up and down trend indication Input Overload: Over current protection to 2 A maximum
Backlight: Bright orange LED (intensity varies with signal) Decimal Point: Up to 4 places (d.dddd, dd.ddd, ddd.dd, dddd.d, or ddddd)
Front Panel: FM Type 4X, IP65; panel gasket provided Function: Linear, square root, or programmable exponent
Display Update Rate: 2.5/second Low-Flow Cutoff: -99999 to 99999 (-99999 disables cutoff function)
Overrange: Display flashes 99999 Temperature Drift: 50 PPM/°C from -40 to 65°C ambient
Underrange: Display flashes -99999
Programming Method: Four front panel buttons PD688 Approvals for Hazardous Locations
Noise Filter: Programmable from 1 to 199 FM Approved & CSA Certified as intrinsically safe with entity for
Recalibration: Recommended at least every 12 months use in Class I, Div 1, Groups ABCD; Class II, Div 1, Groups EFG;
Max/Min Display: Max/min readings reached by the process are Class III, Div 1; Class I, Zone 0, Group IIC; T-code = T4.
stored until reset by the user or until power to the meter is turned off. Non-incendive: Suitable for use in Class I, Div 2, Groups ABCD;
Password: Programmable password restricts modification of Class II, Div 2, Groups FG; Class III, Div 2.
programmed settings. Entity Parameters: Ui: 30 V; Ii: 175 mA; Ci: 0; Li: 0; Pi: 1.0 W
Non-Volatile Memory: All programmed settings are stored in non-
Note: Installation must be performed in accordance with Control Drawing LIM688-2
volatile memory for a minimum of ten years if power is lost.
Voltage Drop: 2.0 V max w/o backlight, 5.7 V max with backlight
Equivalent Resistance: 125 Ω @ 20 mA without backlight, +
315 Ω @ 20 mA with backlight. Loop Leader TM
Normal Mode Rejection: 64 dB at 50/60 Hz - Series

Operating Temperature Range: -30 to 65°C
Allowable Temperature Range: -40 to 65°C* (see note below) ordering information
Storage Temperature Range: -40 to 85°C
Model Description
Relative Humidity: 0 to 90% non-condensing
Connections: Screw terminals accept 12 to 22 AWG wire PD683-0K0 Loop Leader™ PLI Panel Meter for Safe Area
Enclosure: 1/8 DIN, high impact plastic, UL 94V-0, color: gray PD688-0K0 Loop Leader™ PIH Panel Meter FM & CSA
Mounting: 1/8 DIN panel cutout required. Two panel mounting
bracket assemblies provided. Enclosures
Tightening Torque: 4.5 lb-in (0.5 Nm) Screw terminal connectors
Model Meters Description Mounting
Overall Dimensions: 4.68" x 2.45" x 3.79" (119 x 62 x 96 mm)
PDA24XX 1 - 4 * Plastic NEMA 4X Inside Cover
Weight: 5.7 oz (162 g)
PDA26XX 1 - 6 * Stainless Steel NEMA 4X Through Door
Warranty: 3 years parts and labor
Extended Warranty: 1 or 2 years, refer to Price List for details PDA27XX 1 - 6 * Steel NEMA 4X Through Door
PDA2801 1 Low-cost NEMA 4X Through Cover
* Below -30°C the LCD becomes less readable. See application note AN-1005. Note: XX = the last two digits of the model number.
* Go to www.predig.com to find individual model numbers
Disclaimer
The Information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. Precision Services
Digital Corporation makes no representations or warranties with respect to the contents Model Description
hereof, and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for
PDN-CAL 2-Point Calibration
a particular purpose. ©2006 Precision Digital Corporation. all rights reserved
PDN-CERTCAL Certificate of Calibration
YOUR LOCAL DISTRIBUTOR IS: PDN-CERTCAL2 Certificate of Calibration with Data
PDN-LTCAL Lifetime Annual Recertification (shipped back same day)
PDN-LTCAL2 Lifetime Annual Recertification (shipped back next day)
PDN-LTCAL5 Lifetime Annual Recertification (shipped back within 5 days)
PDN-CERTCON Certificate of Conformance
PDN-CSETUP Custom Setup
PDN-ONEDAYRTN One-Day Turnaround Service
PDN-EXTWRNTY1-0 Extended Warranty 1 Year
PDN-EXTWRNTY2-0 Extended Warranty 2 Years
LDS688_D 11/06
Precision Digital Corporation

19 Strathmore Road • Natick MA • 01760 • USA • Tel: (800) 343-1001 • Fax: (508) 655-8990 www.predig.com
PD688 & PD689 FM Approved & CSA Certified
Intrinsic Loop-powered Meter safety barrier connections
Section Agency Description With Backlight
1.0 General Notes HAZARDOUS AREA NON-HAZARDOUS AREA
2.0 FM Single or Dual Channel Positive Polarity Intrinsic Class I, Div 1, 2, Groups ABCD FM Entity Approved positive
Safety Barrier Class II, Div 1, Groups EFG polarity single or dual-channel
Class II, Div 2, Groups FG intrinsic safety barrier used in an
3.0 CSA Single or Dual Channel Intrinsic Safety Barrier approved configuration.
Class III, Div 1, 2
Entity Installation Class I, Zone 0, Group IIC
Note: This is an AGENCY CONTROLLED DOCUMENT. S+ S- B+ B-
NO CHANGES CAN BE MADE WITHOUT PRIOR APPROVAL. Loop
Input
1.0 GENERAL NOTES
1.1 Control room equipment must not use or generate more than 250
VRMS or VDC. +
I.S. GROUND
-
1.2 US installations must be in accordance with ANSI/ISA RP12.06.01 <1 ohm to Ground
"Installation of Intrinsically Safe Systems for Hazardous (Classified) FM Entity Approved transmitter installed per transmitter
Locations” and the National Electrical Code (ANSI/NFPA 70). manufacturer's Hazardous Location Installation Drawing.
Canadian installations must be in accordance with the Canadian PD688 & PD689 Entity Parameters:
Electrical Code, Part 1. Ui : 30 V; Ii : 175 mA; Ci : 0; Li : 0; Pi : 1.0 W
1.3 Dust-tight conduit seals must be used when installed in Class II and
Class III environments. Without Backlight
1.4 Hazardous location installation instructions for associated apparatus HAZARDOUS AREA NON-HAZARDOUS AREA
(barrier) must also be followed when installing this equipment.
Class I, Div 1, 2, Groups ABCD FM Entity Approved positive
1.5 For safe installation of an FM Approved/CSA Certified transmitter Class II, Div 1, Groups EFG polarity single or dual-channel
in series with PD688/PD689 loop indicator, the hazardous location Class II, Div 2, Groups FG intrinsic safety barrier used in an
approved configuration.
installation instructions for the transmitter, PD688/PD689 loop indicator, Class III, Div 1, 2
and associated apparatus (barrier) must be compatible. Class I, Zone 0, Group IIC
1.6 PD688/PD689 indicator does not add capacitance or inductance to loop S+ S- B+ B-
under normal or fault conditions. Loop
Input
1.7 Substitution of components may impair hazardous location safety.
1.8 Mounting screw torque shall not exceed 8 lb-in (0.9 Nm)
+
I.S. GROUND
Panel Mounting Gasket Removable -
Panel Connector <1 ohm to Ground
A FM Entity Approved transmitter installed per transmitter
3.622" (92mm) manufacturer's Hazardous Location Installation Drawing
Square Corners to 0.060" PD688 & PD689 Entity Parameters:
(1.5mm) Max Radius
1.772" U : 30 V; Ii : 175 mA; Ci : 0; L i : 0; Pi : 1.0 W
B Panel Cutout
(45mm)
to DIN 43700 Open Collector Output
Tolerances: HAZARDOUS AREA NON-HAZARDOUS AREA
A: +0.032 (+0.8mm)
-0.000 (-0.0mm)
Class I, Div 1, 2, Groups ABCD FM Entity Approved positive
B: +0.024 (+0.6mm) Mounting Mounting
Class II, Div 1, Groups EFG polarity single or dual-channel
-0.000 (-0.0mm) Bracket Screw
Class III, Div 1, 2
2.0 FM Installation Wiring Diagram Using single
Class I, Zone 0, Group IIC
or dual channel intrinsic safety barrier
Application Notes: O+ O-
Output
2.1 Ui > Uo of single channel barrier or Vt of dual channel barrier
2.2 Ii > Io of single channel barrier or It of dual channel barrier
2.3 Pi > Po of single channel barrier or Pt of dual channel barrier
2.4 Li plus interconnecting wiring < Lo of single or dual channel barrier
+
I.S. GROUND
-
2.5 Ci plus interconnecting wiring < Co of single or dual channel barrier <1 ohm to Ground
2.6 It is not necessary to use intrinsic safety barriers when installing FM Entity Approved device installed per
the PD688/PD689 in Class I, II, III, Division 2, Groups manufacturer's Hazardous Location Installation Drawing.
ABCDFG, maximum input voltage = 30 VDC. Division 2 wiring PD688 & PD689 Entity Parameters:
Ui : 30 V; Ii : 175 mA; Ci : 0; Li : 0; Pi : 1.0 W
methods must be used when not powering from a barrier.
Precision Digital Corporation www.predig.com

PD688 & PD689 FM Approved & CSA Certified
Intrinsic Loop-powered Meter safety barrier connections
3.0 CSA Installation Wiring Diagram Using single
or dual channel intrinsic safety barrier-Entity
installation
Application Notes:
3.1 Barrier parameters must meet the following requirements:
Voc or Uo ≤ Vmax or Ui
Isc or Io ≤ Imax or Ii; Ca or Co ≥ C + Ccable
i
La or Lo ≥ Li + Lcable; Po < Pi
3.2 For CSA Certification, barrier and transmitter must be CSA Certified with
Entity Parameters and must be connected per manufacturer’s instructions.
3.3 Class II & III environments require the installation of the meter
into one of the following Precision Digital enclosures: PDA2407,
PDA2408, PDA2409, or PDA2410.
3.4 It is not necessary to use intrinsic safety barriers when installing the
PD688/PD689 in Class I, II, III, Division 2, Groups ABCDFG, maximum
input voltage = 30 VDC. Division 2 wiring methods must be used when
not powering from a barrier.
With Backlight
Class I, Div 1, 2, Groups ABCD CSA Entity Certified positive
Class III, Div 1, 2
S+ S- B+ B-
Loop
Input
+
I.S. GROUND
-
<1 ohm to Ground
CSA Entity Certified transmitter installed per transmitter

manufacturer's Hazardous Location Installation Drawing.
PD688 & PD689 Entity Parameters:
V max : 30 V; Imax : 175 mA; Ci : 0; Li : 0; Pi : 1.0 W
Without Backlight
Class III, Div 1, 2
S+ S- B+ B-
Loop
Input
+
I.S. GROUND
-
<1 ohm to Ground
CSA Entity Certified transmitter installed per transmitter

manufacturer's Hazardous Location Installation Drawing
Open Collector Output

Class III, Div 1, 2
O+ O-
Output
+
I.S. GROUND
-
<1 ohm to Ground
CSA Entity Certified device installed per LIM688-2 _A 07/06

manufacturer's Hazardous Location Installation Drawing.
Precision Digital Corporation

19 Strathmore Road • Natick MA • 01760 • USA • Tel: (800) 343-1001 • Fax: (508) 655-8990 www.predig.com
SX Range
1
BPG Range
2
SX
BPGA Range
Stainless Steel and Mild Steel Enclosures
3
ZAG Range
4
High Voltage
5
Fire Rated
6
ZP Range
7
Others
Further details on this range of

Technical
enclosures can be found at;

9
www.ab-tech.co.uk/sx.htm
SX
The SX range comprises 14 sizes of enclosure Earthing is accomplished by means of an

manufactured in either mild steel or stainless Internal / external earth stud fitted as standard
SX Range
steel. 11 sizes are available in depths of 140 or which can be connected to the terminal
1 200mm and 8 sizes are available in depths of
140, 200 or 300mm. The majority of the range
mounting rail or component mounting plate.
Optionally, earth studs can be fitted to
can be fitted with removable gland plates on the door and gland plates. Rail mounted
any or all of the four sides. The mild steel earth terminals or proprietary earth bars can
version (MSX) is available with a number of be fitted inside the enclosure and ABTECH
paint options (most RAL colours are available) Sales staff will be happy to advise on this.
and anti-corrosion finishes. Further advice on When fitted with a standard neoprene
surface finishes can be sought from the gasket, the enclosure is suitable for ambient
ABTECH sales office. temperatures of - 40°C to + 80°C (-40°F to
+176°F). Alternatively, when fitted with an
optional silicone gasket the temperature range
is increased to - 70°C to + 130°C (-94°F to
+266°F).
The SX range of enclosures are suitable for

use in hazardous areas and can be supplied
with a number of certificates. ATEX EEx‘e’ to
BS EN 50019 (Zone 1 & 2) EEx‘nA’ to BS
EN50021 (Zone 2) and NEMA 4X (CSA, UL &
FM class 1, div 2) and GOST.
The stainless steel range (SSX) is

manufactured in 316 grade stainless steel to
give the maximum environmental protection.
The main body is manufactured from 2mm
thick sheet and the mounting straps and
gland plates from 3mm thick plate. Cable
entries can be drilled in the enclosure door or
sides or through the gland plates, if fitted.
Entries may also be drilled through the rear
face of the enclosure (EEx’e’ versions also.)
Another important feature of the SX range is

the hinged, lift-off door, which is held to the
enclosure by at least 4 captive stainless steel
screws, which also maintain the correct
compression on the gasket. The hinges are
solid block, machined oversize to enable the
screws to control the closing of the door, not The SX range can be supplied fitted with any
the hinge, its only function being to support the component approved terminal to apparatus
door when opened. The hinges allow easy level or can be supplied empty as component
removal of the door with only minimal opening approved for the clients own certification
required before removal (less than 10°). requirements.
8
SX
The SX range was specifically designed to

meet the rigours of the North Sea environment
SX Range
and is capable of achieving IP66 and IP67. It
has also undergone and passed the Shell/ERA
deluge test which was devised to adequately 1
test enclosures and electrical equipment which
is routinely subjected to ships deck conditions
or fire deluge systems.
BPG Range
IP68 enclosures are also available for depths
up to 120 ft to special order. Further 2
information on submersible enclosures is
available in Section 8 of this catalogue.
BPGA Range
Other applications include junction boxes, both
3
industrial and hazardous area, OEM
applications, fire protection systems, tunnel
wiring, IP68 applications, etc.
ZAG Range
A video demonstrating the main features of the
SX range is available on our website, please
4
visit www.ab-tech.co.uk/sx.htm
High Voltage
SX Range Features
5
• Wide Operating Temperature
(- 70°C to + 175°C) (-94°F to +347°F)
Fire Rated
• Ingress Protection up to IP68 6
• Fire Resistant to IEC331
The SX range has many features which lend • Impact Resistant > 10 Nm
ZP Range
itself to a wide variety applications, not least of

which is the ability to be constructed to almost • Corrosion Resistant 7
any dimension due to its fabricated nature. This
can also be applied to EEx‘e’ enclosures • Gland plates can be fitted to any or all
where the certification allows oversize four sides (size SX66 and above)
enclosures to be manufactured whilst retaining
the next smallest sized enclosure’s power • Certification for use in Zone 1 and 2
Others
rating. 8
• UL, CSA, IECEx, ATEX, FM, InMetro
The SX range is also suitable for fire resistance and GOST Approvals
applications and when fitted with ceramic
terminals meets the requirements of IEC 331 • Ideal for Petrochemical and Marine
Technical
(750°C (1382°F) for 3 hours) and also applications

BS6387/1983 (950°C (1742°F) for 3 hours).
Further details are available in Section 6 of this
9
catalogue.
9
SX
Accessories and Options

SX Range
The following table is a list of the available accessories suitable for particular standard sizes of SX
1 enclosures. Care should be taken when ordering accessories for use with enclosures intended for
hazardous areas to ensure that compliance with certification is retained.
EP – Electro-polished external
LB - Label Bracket Welded to
ES - Earth Stud fitted to Door
TP - Tamper Proof Lid Fixing
Plate (Steel /Stainless Steel)

MP - Component Mounting
EB - Internal Earthing Bar
Part Number (see note 1)
Height (mm) (see note 2)
surfaces (SX range only)

Depth (mm) (see note 2)
Width (mm) (see note 2)
(on any or all four sides)
SIL - Silicone Gasket
RF – RFI Protection
BD - Breather Drain
and Gland Plates
140mm Depth
200mm Depth
300mm Depth
Gland Plates
(see note 3)
(see note 4)
(see note 5)
Screws
Door
SX45 114 114 51
SX64 102 152 63
SX66 152 152 102
SX0 152 229 -
SX0.5 184 274 -
SX1 234 324 -
SX1.5 306 306 -
SX2 372 324 -
SX3 372 448 -
SX4 372 510 -
SX5 510 510 -
SX6 510 780 -
SX7 650 950 -
SX8 800 1250 -
Ordering Example;
SX1.5 300 4GP LB EB
(Stainless Steel SX1.5 300mm deep, 4 gland plates, label bracket on door and internal earthing bar)
1. The range is available either in stainless steel 316 (SX variants) or mild steel (MSX variants).
2. Manufacturing tolerances are +/- 3mm on overall dimensions and +/-0.5mm on fixing hole centres.
3. Silicone gasket increases temperature rating (-70º to +175º C) (-94°F to +347°F) and may increase working life in some applications.
4. Breather drain available in IP66 stainless steel or plastic.
5. Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) gasket may reduce IP rating.
10
SX
SX Range
1
BPG Range
2
BPGA Range
Full width, full height Gland Plates
(can be fitted to any or all sides)
Earth Stud fitted to door and gland plates 3
ZAG Range
4
High Voltage
5
Fire Rated
Label Bracket
(welded to door)
Electro-polished
(external surfaces on SX range only) 6
ZP Range
7
Others
8
Technical
Internal Earthing bar

(can be fitted with clamps)
Component Mounting Plate
(steel or stainless steel 316) 9
We also supply cable glands, stopping plugs, breather drains and continuity plates.
Please contact us for further details.
11
1
SX
12
SX Range
MSX 45 / SSX 45 Drawing
All blue dimensions in mm, all green dimensions in decimal inches (drawing not to scale)
MSX 45 / SSX 45 Specifications Terminal Populations Cable Gland Entry Matrix
Width 114mm Maximum Number of Rows 1 Entry Size Side A-C Side B-D
Weidmuller Wago M16 4 4
Length 114mm
SAK 2.5 7 280-992 8 M20 2 2
Depth 51mm
M25 2 2
SAK 4 7 280-999 0
Mild steel M32 0 0
Material SAK 6 5 281-691 7
Stainless steel 316 (1.4404) M40 0 0
SAK 10 * 4 281-992 7
Weight 1200g SAK 16 * 3 281-993 0 Drilling Envelope
Side A-C 114 x 51mm
IP Rating 66 or 67 SAK 35 0 282-691 0
Side B-D 114 x 51mm
SAK 70 0 284-691 0
-40º to 80º C (-40°F to +176°F)
(standard neoprene gasket) WDU 2.5 0 283-691 0
Temperature
-70º to 130º C (-94°F to +266°F) WDU 4 0 285-691 0
(silicone gasket)
WDU 6 0 280-998 8

ATEX EEx e (Zone 1 & Zone 2)
BS EN 60079-7 WDU 10 0 281-998 0
ATEX EEx nA (Zone 2)
WDU 16 0 264-120 7
BS EN 60079-15
ATEX EEx nR (Zone 2) Phoenix 264-220 4 Example
BS EN 60079-15
UK 2.5 N 9 264-132 (2) 1
CSA - Ex e (Class 1 Zone 1 & Zone2)
Certification UK 3 N 9 264-134 (4) 1
FM - AEx e (Class 1 Zone 1 & Zone2) UK 5 N 7 262-132 (2) 1
GOST-R Ex e (Zone 1 & Zone 2)

UK 10 N * 4 262-134 (4) 1
UK 16 N * 3
NEMA 4X (CSA, UL & FM)
(class 1 division 2) UK 35 N 0
Power Rating 8.0W * Care must be taken to ensure that the size of this
enclosure can accommodate the cable bending radius.
Technical Others ZP Range Fire Rated High Voltage ZAG Range BPGA Range BPG Range SX Range
SX
13
1
1
SX
14
SX Range
Maximum Number of Rows 1 Entry Size Side A-C Side B-D
Width 102mm
Length 152mm
SAK 2.5 15 280-992 18 M20 3 4
Depth 63mm
M25 2 3
SAK 4 15 280-999 0
Mild steel M32 1 2
Material SAK 6 11 281-691 15
SAK 10 * 9 281-992 15
Side A-C 102 x 63mm
IP Rating 66 or 67 SAK 35 0 282-691 0
Side B-D 152 x 63mm
SAK 70 0 284-691 0
-40º to 80º C (-40°F to +176°F)
Temperature
-70º to 130º C (-94°F to +266°F) WDU 4 0 285-691 0
(silicone gasket)
WDU 6 0 280-998 18

BS EN 60079-7 WDU 10 0 281-998 15
WDU 16 0 264-120 15
BS EN 60079-15
BS EN 60079-15
UK 2.5 N 17 264-132 (2) 3
Certification CSA - Ex e (Class 1 Zone 1 & Zone2)
UK 3 N 17 264-134 (4) 2

UK 10 N * 9 262-134 (4) 2
UK 16 N * 7
(class 1 division 2) UK 35 N 0
SX
15
1
1
SX
16
SX Range
Maximum Number of Rows 1 Entry Size Side A-C Side B-D
Width 152mm
Length 152mm
SAK 2.5 15 280-992 18 M20 8 8
Depth 102mm
M25 6 6
SAK 4 15 280-999 18
Mild steel M32 3 3
Material SAK 6 11 281-691 15
SAK 10 * 9 281-992 15
Side A-C 152 x 102mm
IP Rating 66 or 67 SAK 35 * 6 282-691 11
Side B-D 152 x 102mm
SAK 70 0 284-691 10
-40º to 80º C (-40°F to +176°F)
Temperature
-70º to 130º C (-94°F to +266°F) WDU 4 15 285-691 0
(silicone gasket) .
WDU 6 11 280-998 18

BS EN 60079-7 WDU 10 * 9 281-998 15
WDU 16 * 7 264-120 16
BS EN 60079-15
BS EN 60079-15
UK 2.5 N 17 264-132 (2) 3
Certification CSA - Ex e (Class 1 Zone 1 & Zone 2)
UK 3 N 17 264-134 (4) 2

UK 10 N * 9 262-134 (4) 2
UK 16 N * 7
(class 1 division 2) UK 35 N * 6
SX
17
1
1
SX
18
SX Range
(using standard gland clearances)
Width 152mm Maximum Number of Rows 1
Side A-C Side B-D
Weidmuller Wago Size
140 200 140 200
Length 229mm
SAK 2.5 21 280-992 24 M16 4 9 8 16
Depth 140mm or 200mm M20 2 6 6 9
SAK 4 19 280-999 24 M25 1 4 3 6
Mild steel M32 1 2 2 4
Material SAK 6 16 281-691 20
Stainless steel 316 (1.4404) M40 1 1 2 2
SAK 10 * 12 281-992 20
140mm deep 200mm deep Drilling Envelope Size
Weight 3200g 4000g SAK 16 * 10 281-993 20 (with glandplate fitted)
Side A-C Side B-D
IP Rating 66 or 67 SAK 35 * 7 282-691 * 15
140 200 140 200
SAK 70 * 5 284-691 * 12 Width 87 87 144 144
-40º to 80º C (-40°F to +176°F)
(standard neoprene gasket) Height 75 135 75 135
WDU 2.5 25 283-691 0
Temperature
-70º to 130º C (-94°F to +266°F) WDU 4 21 285-691 0
(silicone gasket)
WDU 6 16 280-998 24

BS EN 60079-7 WDU 10 * 12 281-998 20
WDU 16 * 10 264-120 21
BS EN 60079-15
BS EN 60079-15
UK 2.5 N 25 264-132 (2) 4
UK 3 N 25 264-134 (4) 3

UK 10 N * 12 262-134 (4) 3
UK 16 N * 10
SX
19
1
1
SX
20
SX Range
MSX 0.5 / SSX 0.5 Drawing
MSX 0.5 / SSX 0.5 Specifications Terminal Populations Cable Gland Entry Matrix
Side A-C Side B-D
140 200 140 200
Length 274mm
SAK 2.5 56 280-992 31 M16 6 12 10 20
Depth 140mm or 200mm M20 4 9 8 12
SAK 4 52 280-999 31 M25 2 6 4 9
Material SAK 6 42 281-691 27
SAK 10 * 34 281-992 27
Side A-C Side B-D
IP Rating 66 or 67 SAK 35 * 10 282-691 * 21
140 200 140 200
SAK 70 * 7 284-691 * 16 Width 119 119 189 189
-40º to 80º C (-40°F to +176°F)
WDU 2.5 67 283-691 28
Temperature
-70º to 130º C (-94°F to +266°F) WDU 4 56 285-691 0
(silicone gasket)
WDU 6 42 280-998 31

BS EN 60079-7 WDU 10 * 34 281-998 27
WDU 16 * 14 264-120 56
BS EN 60079-15
BS EN 60079-15
UK 2.5 N 68 264-132 (2) 12
UK 3 N 68 264-134 (4) 8

UK 10 N * 34 262-134 (4) 8
UK 16 N * 14
SX
21
1
1
SX
22
SX Range
Side A-C Side B-D
140 200 140 200
Length 324mm
SAK 2.5 72 280-992 41 M16 10 20 14 28
Depth 140mm or 200mm M20 6 12 10 18
SAK 4 66 280-999 41 M25 3 9 5 12
Material SAK 6 54 281-691 34
SAK 10 * 44 281-992 34
Side A-C Side B-D
IP Rating 66 or 67 SAK 35 * 14 282-691 27
140 200 140 200
SAK 70 * 10 284-691 * 21 Width 169 169 239 239
-40º to 80º C (-40°F to +176°F)
WDU 2.5 86 283-691 * 18
Temperature
-70º to 130º C (-94°F to +266°F) WDU 4 72 285-691 * 12
(silicone gasket)
WDU 6 54 280-998 41

BS EN 60079-7 WDU 10 * 44 281-998 34
WDU 16 * 18 264-120 72
BS EN 60079-15
BS EN 60079-15
UK 2.5 N 86 264-132 (2) 14
UK 3 N 86 264-134 (4) 10

UK 10 N * 44 262-134 (4) 10
UK 16 N * 18
SX
23
1
1
SX
24
SX Range
MSX 1.5 / SSX 1.5 Drawing
MSX 1.5 / SSX 1.5 Specifications Terminal Populations Cable Gland Entry Matrix
Side A-C Side B-D
140 200 140 200
Length 306mm
SAK 2.5 99 280-992 74 M16 14 28 12 25
Depth 140mm or 200mm M20 10 18 10 16
SAK 4 93 280-999 74 M25 5 12 4 12
Material SAK 6 75 281-691 64
SAK 10 * 60 281-992 64
140mm 200mm 300mm Drilling Envelope Size
Weight 7.3Kg 8.8Kg 11.3Kg SAK 16 * 34 281-993 64 (with glandplate fitted)
Side A-C Side B-D
IP Rating 66 or 67 SAK 35 * 24 282-691 48
140 200 140 200
SAK 70 * 20 284-691 * 38 Width 241 241 221 221
-40º to 80º C (-40°F to +176°F)
WDU 2.5 118 283-691 * 32
Temperature
-70º to 130º C (-94°F to +266°F) WDU 4 99 285-691 * 11
(silicone gasket)
WDU 6 75 280-998 74

BS EN 60079-7 WDU 10 * 60 281-998 64
WDU 16 * 34 264-120 99
BS EN 60079-15
BS EN 60079-15
UK 2.5 N 120 264-132 (2) 21
Certification CSA - Ex e (Class 1 Zone 1 & Zone
2) UK 3 N 120 264-134 (4) 15
FM - AEx e (Class 1 Zone 1 & UK 5 N 99 262-132 (2) 21
Zone2)
UK 10 N * 60 262-134 (4) 15
UK 16 N * 34
SX
25
1
1
SX
26
SX Range
Width 372mm Maximum Number of Rows 3 Side A-C Side B-D
Size
Weidmuller Wago 140 200 140 200
Length 324mm
M16 18 36 14 28
SAK 2.5 132 280-992 150
Depth 140mm or 200mm M20 14 24 10 18
SAK 4 123 280-999 150 M25 6 18 6 12
Material SAK 6 99 281-691 126
SAK 10 78 281-992 126 Drilling Envelope Size
140mm 200mm 300mm
Weight 9.5Kg 11.3Kg 14.3Kg (with glandplate fitted)
SAK 16 66 281-993 84
Side A-C Side B-D
IP Rating 66 or 67 SAK 35 42 282-691 99 140 200 140 200
SAK 70 24 284-691 * 78 Width 307 307 239 239
-40º to 80º C (-40°F to +176°F)
WDU 2.5 158 283-691 * 44
Temperature
-70º to 130º C (-94°F to +266°F) WDU 4 132 285-691 * 30
(silicone gasket)
WDU 6 99 280-998 150

BS EN 60079-7 WDU 10 * 78 281-998 126
BS EN 60079-15 WDU 16 * 66 264-120 132
ATEX EEx nR (Zone 2)
Example
Phoenix 264-220 78
BS EN 60079-15
UK 2.5 N 156 264-132 (2) 27
UK 3 N 156 264-134 (4) 18
FM - AEx e (Class 1 Zone 1 & Zone2)
UK 5 N 132 262-132 (2) 27
GOST-R Ex e (Zone 1 & Zone 2) UK 10 N 78 262-134 (4) 18
NEMA 4X (CSA, UL & FM) UK 16 N 66

(class 1 division 2)
UK 35 N 54
SX
27
1
1
SX
28
SX Range
Size
Length 448mm
M16 16 36 20 45
SAK 2.5 168 280-992 189
Depth 140mm or 200mm M20 12 24 16 28
SAK 4 156 280-999 189 M25 7 15 8 21
Material SAK 6 126 281-691 162
SAK 10 * 102 281-992 162 Drilling Envelope Size
140mm 200mm 300mm
SAK 16 * 84 281-993 108
Side A-C Side B-D
IP Rating 66 or 67 SAK 35 * 63 282-691 126 140 200 140 200
SAK 70 * 45 284-691 * 99 Width 307 307 363 363
-40º to 80º C (-40°F to +176°F)
Temperature WDU 2.5 201 283-691 * 56
-70º to 130º C (-94°F to +266°F) WDU 4 168 285-691 * 38
(silicone gasket)
WDU 6 126 280-998 189

BS EN 60079-7 WDU 10 * 102 281-998 162
BS EN 60079-15 WDU 16 * 84 264-120 168
Example
Phoenix 264-220 99
BS EN 60079-15
UK 2.5 N 201 264-132 (2) 36
UK 3 N 201 264-134 (4) 24
UK 5 N 168 262-132 (2) 36
GOST-R Ex e (Zone 1 & Zone 2) UK 10 N * 102 262-134 (4) 24
NEMA 4X (CSA, UL & FM) UK 16 N * 84

UK 35 N * 69
SX
29
1
1
SX
30
SX Range
Size
Length 510mm
M16 18 36 26 52
SAK 2.5 198 280-992 222
Depth 140mm or 200mm M20 14 24 20 36
SAK 4 183 280-999 222 M25 6 18 10 24
Material SAK 6 150 281-691 189
140mm 200mm 300mm
SAK 16 99 281-993 126
Side A-C Side B-D
IP Rating 66 or 67 SAK 35 75 282-691 147 140 200 140 200
SAK 70 54 284-691 117 Width 307 307 425 425
-40º to 80º C (-40°F to +176°F)
WDU 2.5 237 283-691 66
Temperature
-70º to 130º C (-94°F to +266°F) WDU 4 198 285-691 44
(silicone gasket)
WDU 6 150 280-998 222

BS EN 60079-7 WDU 10 * 120 281-998 189
BS EN 60079-15 WDU 16 * 99 264-120 198
Example
Phoenix 264-220 117
BS EN 60079-15
UK 2.5 N 237 264-132 (2) 42
UK 3 N 237 264-134 (4) 30
UK 5 N 198 262-132 (2) 42

UK 35 N 81
SX
31
1
1
SX
32
SX Range
Size
Length 510mm
M16 26 55 26 52
SAK 2.5 264 280-992 296
Depth 140mm or 200mm M20 20 36 20 36
SAK 4 244 280-999 296 M25 10 27 10 24
Material SAK 6 200 281-691 252
140mm 200mm 300mm
SAK 16 132 281-993 189
Side A-C Side B-D
IP Rating 66 or 67 SAK 35 100 282-691 196 140 200 140 200
SAK 70 72 284-691 156 Width 445 445 425 425
-40º to 80º C (-40°F to +176°F)
WDU 2.5 316 283-691 99
Temperature
-70º to 130º C (-94°F to +266°F) WDU 4 264 285-691 66
(silicone gasket)
WDU 6 200 280-998 296

BS EN 60079-7 WDU 10 160 281-998 252
BS EN 60079-15 WDU 16 132 264-120 264
Example
Phoenix 264-220 156
BS EN 60079-15
UK 2.5 N 316 264-132 (2) 56
UK 3 N 316 264-134 (4) 40
UK 5 N 264 262-132 (2) 56

UK 35 N 108
SX
33
1
1
SX
34
SX Range
Size
Length 780mm
M16 26 55 42 85
SAK 2.5 440 280-992 496
Depth 140mm or 200mm or 300mm M20 20 36 34 60
SAK 4 404 280-999 496 M25 10 27 18 42
Material SAK 6 332 281-691 424
140mm 200mm 300mm
SAK 16 220 281-993 318
Side A-C Side B-D
IP Rating 66 or 67 SAK 35 168 282-691 328 140 200 140 200
SAK 70 120 284-691 264 Width 445 445 695 695
-40º to 80º C (-40°F to +176°F)
WDU 2.5 528 283-691 165
Temperature
-70º to 130º C (-94°F to +266°F) WDU 4 440 285-691 114
(silicone gasket)
WDU 6 332 280-998 496

BS EN 60079-7 WDU 10 264 281-998 424
BS EN 60079-15 WDU 16 220 264-120 440
Example
Phoenix 264-220 264
BS EN 60079-15
UK 2.5 N 524 264-132 (2) 92
UK 3 N 524 264-134 (4) 64
UK 5 N 440 262-132 (2) 92

UK 35 N 176
SX
35
1
1
SX
36
SX Range
Size
Length 950mm
M16 36 72 54 110
SAK 2.5 685 280-992 775
SAK 4 635 280-999 775 M25 14 36 22 54
Mild steel M32 10 20 14 28
Material SAK 6 520 281-691 660
140mm 200mm 300mm
SAK 16 345 281-993 528
Side A-C Side B-D
IP Rating 66 or 67 SAK 35 260 282-691 510 140 200 140 200
SAK 70 150 284-691 410 Width 585 585 865 865
-40º to 80º C (-40°F to +176°F)
WDU 2.5 822 283-691 272
Temperature
-70º to 130º C (-94°F to +266°F) WDU 4 685 285-691 188
(silicone gasket)
WDU 6 520 280-998 775

BS EN 60079-7 WDU 10 415 281-998 660
BS EN 60079-15 WDU 16 345 264-120 685
Example
Phoenix 264-220 410
BS EN 60079-15
UK 2.5 N 820 264-132 (2) 145
Certification CSA - Ex e (Class 1 Zone 1 & Zone
2) UK 3 N 820 264-134 (4) 100
UK 5 N 685 262-132 (2) 145

UK 35 N 280
SX
37
1
1
SX
38
SX Range
Size
Length 1250mm
M16 45 90 72 150
SAK 2.5 1295 280-992 775
SAK 4 635 280-999 775 M25 18 45 30 72
Mild steel M32 12 24 20 40
Material SAK 6 520 281-691 660
140mm 200mm 300mm
SAK 16 345 281-993 528
Side A-C Side B-D
IP Rating 66 or 67 SAK 35 260 282-691 510 140 200 140 200
SAK 70 150 284-691 410 Width 735 735 1165 1165
-40º to 80º C (-40°F to +176°F)
WDU 2.5 1554 283-691 272
Temperature
-70º to 130º C (-94°F to +266°F) WDU 4 1295 285-691 188
(silicone gasket)
WDU 6 520 280-998 775

BS EN 60079-7 WDU 10 415 281-998 660
BS EN 60079-15 WDU 16 345 264-120 685
Example
Phoenix 264-220 410
BS EN 60079-15
UK 2.5 N 820 264-132 (2) 145
Certification CSA - Ex e (Class 1 Zone 1 & Zone2)
UK 3 N 820 264-134 (4) 100
UK 5 N 685 262-132 (2) 145

UK 35 N 280
SX
39
1
SX
SX Range
40
www.intertec.info
CP VARITHERM CPA … Electric heater

1 Application
Heating of instrument enclosures in hazardous areas,
designed for
• freeze protection
• condensation protection
• preferably horizontal installation.
2 Special Features & Advantages

• Horizontal design allows for optimum installation of the
heater underneath the instruments in the enclosure
• Vertical installation is also possible with reduced output of
25%
• Freeze-protection thermostat (option TSxx) with junction
box can be provided
• High heat transfer capabilities due to large surface area 4 Technical data
of black anodized aluminium fins CSA Certificate File # 1655545 (LR43674)
• Heater fins can be removed and modified by INTERTEC, CSAType of Protecti on Cl. 1, Div. 1, Gp ABCD T3/ T4
if necessary for installation purposes
Ingress Protection NEMA 4X, IP 68
3 Description Nominal voltage 120V AC
The very versatile VARITHERM line consists of electric Connection cable EWKF 3 x 1,5mm² 8,1mm Ø
heaters designed to heat the air in the enclosure by Conduit connection ½“ NPT
convection. The data sheet shows the heaters that are
Length of cable 39” / 1 m
available from normal stock. Many more variations and
options are possible. Length, width 8.7”/ 220 mm, 8.4”/ 213 mm
A temperature fuse is integrated in the core block, cutting off Material seawater-proof aluminium, black
the power in case of a failure or excessive heating resulting anodized
from an external heat source. It should be noted that this
temperature limiter must only be repaired in our factory. For 5 Types (Other types upon request)
reasons of operational safety the heater must only be CP 200 200 300 400 500 600/
operated under conditions that ensure that the trip VARITHERM T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 120
temperature of the limiter will not be exceeded: CPA 60 100 80 100 100 C4DA
• Controllers such as TSxx or TC switch off the heater in Nominal power
case of high temperatures inside the enclosure. 200 200 300 400 500 600
[W]
• Ensure effective convection by observing the necessary Temperature
clearances as per section 7 on the next page. Take care T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3
class
not to cover the fins.
Fin Height 2.4”/ 3.9”/ 3.1”/ 3.9”/ 3.9”/ 4.7”/
For any specific applications requiring high temperature [in/mm] 60 100 80 100 100 120
maintenance we will be pleased to select the suitable
combination of heater and controller. 6 Options
A temperature indicator shows potential problems and failures TSxx JC Thermostat kit with 3 port junction box
at an early stage (e.g. incorrect installation). Please check the
application if more than 3 fields have irreversibly changed to 3M Connection cable 10’ / 3 m long
black. 230V Nominal voltage 230V AC
240-265V Nominal voltage 240-265V AC
277V Nominal voltage 277V AC
ATEX European ATEX version also available
T4 Temperature Class T4 available on request
MB Stainless steel mounting bracket
Ordering example: CP VARITHERM CPA 300 T3 80, 120V or
CP VARITHERM CPA 400 T3 100 TS10 JC 230 MB, 120V
HD652-0c CP VARITHERM CPA… page 1/ 2
I N T E RT E C I n s t r u m e n t a t i o n - S a r n i a , O n t a r i o - H o u s t o n , Te x a s - P h o n e : 1 - 8 8 8 - 8 7 5 - 8 7 5 6
www.intertec.info
CP VARITHERM CPA … Electric heater

7 Installation 9 Installation of the VARITHERM heater
7.1 horizontal (recommended) When installing the heater, please make sure that the label
remains clearly legible.
Trouble-free installation, e.g. on a mounting plate or the
INTERTEC mounting system (C-rails) in the instrument
enclosures or protective cabinets, is possible.
min. 2”/
50 mm TS
9.1 With two mounting brackets in plated steel
min. 1”/
30 mm
7.2 vertical
The brackets and mounting bolts illustrated above are
included with the heater.
TS
9.2 With one stainless steel mounting bracket (MB)

min.
2”/50 mm
min.1”/
30 mm
Note: The convection is about 20% less at vertical installation.

Due to earlier switching of the thermostat the effective heating 9.3 With two stainless steel mounting brackets
power may be lower. (MW)
8 Electric Wiring
L1
N
PE
Ex
Junction
Box
bu bu bn bu ye/gn
TS ϑ> PA
ϑ>
The MB or MW mounting brackets can be ordered
VARITHERM as options.
bu=blue bn=brown ye/gn=yellow/green bk=black gy=grey
HD652-0c CP VARITHERM CPA… page 2/ 2
I N T E RT E C I n s t r u m e n t a t i o n - S a r n i a , O n t a r i o - H o u s t o n , Te x a s - P h o n e : 1 - 8 8 8 - 8 7 5 - 8 7 5 6
FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION
Vibratone ® Horns
Model 350WB
The Model 350WB (AC current) Vibratone® horn produces sound

by the electro-mechanical vibration of a stainless steel diaphragm.
The horn mechanism with diaphragm is attached to the grille.
DESIGNED FOR ROUTINE Indoor or outdoor use is made possible by the water- and
SIGNALING USES dust-tight backbox.
The 350WB is available in 120 or 240VAC for 50/60Hz. The sound
output level is 100dB nominal at ten feet (110dB @ 1m).
• Effective range 200 feet (61m)
Model 350WB features a die-cast aluminum rear housing sealed
• Coded or sustained tones with a gray enamel finish. The rugged outer housing resists
vandalism without reducing sound output. Model 350WB is
• Wall mount fused and utilizes a terminal block connection. The horn and
• 120 and 240VAC backbox combination is UL and cUL Listed, CSA Certified
and FM Approved.
• Produces 100dB @ 10’
Capable of reproducing coded blasts or sustained tones, Federal
(110dB @ 1m) Signal’s Vibratone horns are excellent for general alarm, start/dis-
• UL and cUL Listed, CSA Certified, missal, coded paging and process control signaling in areas
where their sound output exceeds ambient noise levels.
FM Approved
Compact size and various installation options make them ideal for
• Type 4X, IP65 enclosure institutional use.
Operating Decibels @
Model Voltage Current 10' 1m
350WB 120VAC 50/60Hz 0.18 amps 100 110
350WB 240VAC 50/60Hz 0.09 amps 100 110
Gross Automation, 1725 South Johnson Rd., New Berlin, WI 53146, 262-446-0000, www.federalsignalsales.com
VIBRATONE ® HORN (350WB)
3
/4” Conduit Entrance
1
3
S P E C I F I C AT I O N S HOW TO ORDER
Operating Temperature: -65°F to 150°F -54°C to 66°C • Specify model and voltage
Net Weight: 2.7 lbs. 1.2 kg • Please refer to Model Number Index
Shipping Weight: 2.8 lbs. 1.2 kg 350WB beginning on page 378
Height: 5.3" 115 mm
Width: 5.3" 115 mm
Depth: 3.66" 92.9 mm
R E P L A C E M E N T PA RT S
Description Part Number
Coil (120VAC only) KFC1516C
Volume Control Kit K8435663B
2645 Federal Signal Dr., University Park, IL 60466 Tel: 708.534.4756 Fax: 708.534.4852 www.federalsignal-indust.com 117
Gross Automation, 1725 South Johnson Rd., New Berlin, WI 53146, 262-446-0000, www.federalsignalsales.com
n CSA - Class I Div. 2 - Groups A, B, C, & D
n CSA - Class I Zone 2 - Groups IIA, IIB & IIC
n CSA - Class II Div. 2 - Groups F & G
n CSA - Class III
n CSA - Type 4
n Enclosed & Gasketed
AC-Exacta
Incandescent, HPS & Compact Fluorescent
Fixtures
Features:
n Heavy duty cast aluminum, polyester powder coated housing.
n Two models to choose from, enclosed & gasketed or hazardous area watertight.
n Three light sources - incandescent (150 watt max.), compact fluorescent (32 watt max.) or
high pressure sodium (35 or 50 watt).
n Standard models with glass or polycarbonate globe (prismatic and colored globes available).
n Three mounting styles: pendant, ceiling and wall (½” npt. hubs standard).
n Optional cast aluminum guard or polymeric guard for use with glass globes.
n Optional stainless steel wire guard for use with polycarbonate globes.
n Optional polycarbonate prismatic reflector for architectural applications.
n Silicone gasket for high temperature and corrosive areas.
Applications:
n Chemical plants n Oil drilling rigs
n Mining applications n Walk-in coolers
n Marine facilities n Security lighting
n Tunnels & walkways n Architectural lighting applications
Page 91
AC-Exacta
Catalog Number Logic
ACE H - 15I - 1 GC G CI - X
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
(1) Series - Aluminum Cast Exacta “ACE” (5) Globe Type

Compact designed cast aluminum fixture CG - Coated (plastic) glass
complete with impact resistant glass or (for food handling areas) (min 100 pieces)
polycarbonate globe, available in GC* - Standard glass, clear
incandescent, high pressure sodium or PC* - Polycarbonate, clear
compact fluorescent models. PP - Polycarbonate, prismatic
TG - Tempered glass
(2) Model * For colored globes replace “C” with first letter of color required.
H - Hazardous area (ie,: “GR” for red glass globe.) Colors available: amber, blue,
V - Vapor proof green, red and white
Globe use - mounting warning:

(3) Lamp Wattage & Type Glass globes 150 watt maximum, any mounting position
15I - 150 watt max. incandescent Polycarbonate globe 100 watt maximum, base up only
09F - 9 watt fluorescent Polycarbonate globe 60 watt maximum, any mounting position
13F - 13 watt fluorescent
18F - 18 watt fluorescent (6) Guard
26F - 26 watt fluorescent G - Guard, cast (for use with glass globes only)
32F - 32 watt fluorescent GP - Guard, polymeric (for use with glass globes only)
35S - 35 watt high pressure sodium GW - Guard, stainless steel wire
50S - 50 watt high pressure sodium
(7) Mounting Options
(4) Voltage / Frequency C1 - Ceiling mount, feed-thru ½” npt.
1 - 120 Volt 60 Hz. C2 - Ceiling mount, feed-thru ¾” npt.
2 - 240 Volt 50/60 Hz. (incandescent only) P1 - Pendant mount, ½” npt.
3 - 277 Volt 60 Hz. (18w, 26w, and 32w fluorescent P2 - Pendant mount, ¾” npt.
models only) W1 - Wall mount & outlet box, ½” npt.
W2 - Wall mount & outlet box, ¾” npt.
(8) Special Options

L - Lamp installed.
RP - Reflector, prismatic (not available for wall mount
models, if guard is required only type “GP” is available)
Consult factory for any catalog number or options not

listed above for price and availability.
Page 92
AC-Exacta
Ordering Guide
Lamp Lamp Hazardous Vapor Shipping Shipping
Mounting
Type Watts Location * Proof * Weight Volume
3
Incandescent 150 ACE H-15I-1GC G P1 ACE V-15I-1GC G P1 3.7 lbs.(1.65kg.) 0.5ft
9 ACE H-09F-1GC G P1 ACE V-09F-1GC G P1

5.2 lbs.(2.35kg.)
Compact
Fluorescent
3
26 ACE H-26F-1GC G P1 ACE V-26F-1GC G P1 5.1 lbs.(2.3kg.) 0.8ft
High 35 ACE H-35S-1GC G P1 ACE V-35S-1GC G P1 5.8 lbs.(2.6kg.)

Pressure
Sodium 50 ACE H-50S-1GC G P1 ACE V-50S-1GC G P1 6.2 lbs.(2.8kg.)
3
Incandescent 150 ACE H-15I-1GC G C1 ACE V-15I-1GC G C1 4.1 lbs.(1.85kg.) 0.5ft
9 ACE H-09F-1GC G C1 ACE V-09F-1GC G C1

5.6 lbs.(2.55kg.)
Compact
Fluorescent
3
26 ACE H-26F-1GC G C1 ACE V-26F-1GC G C1 5.5 lbs.(2.5kg.) 0.8ft
High 35 ACE H-35S-1GC G C1 ACE V-35S-1GC G C1 6.2 lbs.(2.8kg.)

Pressure
Sodium 50 ACE H-50S-1GC G C1 ACE V-50S-1GC G C1 6.6 lbs.(3.0kg.)
3
Incandescent 150 ACE H-15I-1GC G W1 ACE V-15I-1GC G W1 5.4 lbs.(2.45kg.) 0.5ft
9 ACE H-09F-1GC G W1 ACE V-09F-1GC G W1

6.9 lbs.(3.15kg.)
Compact
Fluorescent
3
26 ACE H-26F-1GC G W1 ACE V-26F-1GC G W1 6.8 lbs.(3.1kg.) 0.8ft
High 35 ACE H-35S-1GC G W1 ACE V-35S-1GC G W1 7.5 lbs.(3.4kg.)

Pressure
Sodium 50 ACE H-50S-1GC G W1 ACE V-50S-1GC G W1 7.9 lbs.(3.6kg.)
Notes: * All fixtures shown are with ½” npt. hubs. If ¾” npt. hubs are required, change suffix “1” to “2”.
1. All fixtures shown are 120 Volt, 60 Hz. For other voltages see Catalog Number Logic.
2. All fixtures shown have standard glass globes. If polycarbonate globe is required, replace “GC” with “PC”.
See Catalog Number Logic for standard or colored globes.
3. Wall mounted fixtures are shown with outlet box. If outlet box is not required, replace the suffix “W1” with “WB”.
4. If stainless steel wire guard is required, change “G” to “GW” and add .5 lbs. (0.23 kg.) to shipping weight.
5. If polymeric guard is required, change “G” to “GP” and deduct .78 lbs. (0.36 kg.) from shipping weight.
Page 93
AC-Exacta
Dimensions
PENDANT MOUNT CEILING MOUNT WALL MOUNT
C C C
C C D
C D
D
B
A
AB
MOUNT BA
B A B
BA A
HPS & HPS & HPS &

TYPE INCANDESCENT
FLUORESCENT
INCANDESCENT
FLUORESCENT
INCANDESCENT
FLUORESCENT
A* 9.75 (24.8) 12.13 (30.8) 9.25 (23.5) 11.13 (28.3) 10.13 (25.7) 12.5 (31.8)
B 9.25 (23.5) 11.63 (29.5) 8.75 (22.2) 10.63 (27.0) 9.63 (24.5) 12.0 (30.5)
C 4.34 (11) 4.34 (11) 4.63 (11.7) 4.63 (11.7) 7.25 (18.4) 7.25 (18.4)
D -- -- 4.00 (10.2) 4.00 (10.2) 5.13 (13) 5.13 (13)
Notes:
* Add 1/2” (1.3 cm.) if steel wire guard is required.
All dimensions are in inches (cm.).
Components & Accessories

Catalog Weight Prismatic Globe Catalog Weight Catalog Weight
Globes No. lbs. (kg.) and Reflectors No. lbs. (kg.) Guards No. lbs. (kg.)
Clear* Glass Prismatic Polymeric Guard
polycarbonate Globe
1.1 lbs. .22 lbs. 0.22 lbs

G150C PP100 GP150
(.5 kg.) (.1 kg.) (.1 kg.)
Tempered Glass Prismatic Polycarbonate Cast Guard

Reflector
1.1 lbs. 2.8 lbs 1.0 lbs

GT150 RPPE** GC150
(.5 kg.) (1.3 kg.) (.45 kg.)
Clear*Polycarbonate Prismatic Polycarbonate Steel Wire Guard

Reflector c/w Guard
.22 lbs. 3.1 lbs. 0.5 lbs.

P100C RPPG ** GW150
(.1 kg.) (1.4 kg.) (.22 kg.)
* For colored globes change the suffix “C” to the color required; ie “R” for red.
** Reflectors cannot be used with wall mount models.
Page 94
Moxa Industrial Media Converter
IMC-101 Hardware Installation Guide
Fifth Edition, June 2008
© 2008 Moxa Inc., all rights reserved.

Reproduction without permission is prohibited.
P/N: 18020010104
Overview
Moxa Industrial Media Converter, which is specially designed for reliable and
stable operation in harsh industrial environments, provides industrial grade
media conversion between 10/100BaseT(X) and 100BaseFX. IMC-101’s
reliable industrial design is excellent for keeping your industrial automation
applications running continuously, and comes with a relay output warning
alarm to help prevent damages and losses.
This product has a wide operating temperature range, from -40 to 75°C, and is
designed to withstand a high degree of vibration and shock. The rugged
hardware design makes IMC-101 perfect for ensuring that your Ethernet
equipment can withstand critical industrial applications, such as in hazardous
locations (Class 1 Division 2/Zone 2), and complies with FCC, TÜV, UL, and
CE Standards
NOTE Throughout this Hardware Installation Guide, we often use

IMC as an abbreviation for Moxa Industrial Media
Converter:
IMC = Moxa Industrial Media Converter
Package Checklist
Moxa Industrial Media Converter is shipped with the following items. If any of
these items is missing or damaged, please contact your customer service
representative for assistance.
y Moxa Industrial Media Converter
y Hardware Installation Guide
y Moxa Product Warranty booklet
Features
y Supports 10/100Base-TX auto-negotiation and auto-MDI/MDI-X
y Multi mode, single mode with SC or ST fiber connector available
y Supports Link Fault Pass-Through
y Relay Output alarm when a port breaks or the power fails
y Redundant 12 to 48 VDC power inputs, DIN-Rail or panel mountable
y Operating temperature range from 0 to 60°C, or extended operating
temperature from –40 to 75°C for (-T) models
2
Panel Layout of IMC-101 Series
Top Panel View
1. Grounding screw
1 V2+
PWR2
2. Terminal block for power
V2-
2 V1+
FAULT
PWR1
input PWR1/PWR2 and relay
V1-
V1 V2 INPUTS: 24 VDC
3 output
3. Heat dissipation orifices
PORT ALARM
4 4. Dip switch
ON
1
2
DIP
3
5. Power input PWR1 LED
Front Panel View (IMC-101-M-ST) 6. Power input PWR2 LED
2 7. Fault LED
5 8. 100BaseFX (ST connector)
6
7 Port
9. FX port’s 100 Mbps LED
8 10. FX port’s Full
9
10 FDX /CO L
Duplex/Collision LED
11. TP port’s 100 Mbps LED
12. 10/100BaseT(X)
11
12 13. TP port’s 10 Mbps LED
14 13 14. Model Name
15. 100BaseFX (SC connector)
Front Panel View (IMC-101-M-SC)
Port
2
5 16. Screw hole for wall mounting kit
6 17. DIN-Rail mounting kit
7
15
9
10 FDX /CO L
11
12
14 13
Rear Panel View
16
17
16
3
Mounting Dimensions
(Unit = mm)
15.10
30.00
13.10 25.40
9.50 54.00
135.00 135.00
Side View Front View
13.90 18.20 13.90

3.5 + +
6 + + 6
25.71 3.5 + + 66.80
6 + + 10 57.05
+ + + 10
+
5
7.75 30.50 7.75
39.37 13 18 13
46.77
+ +
+ +
+ + + +
23.15 +
+ +
+
30.50
10.65 10.65
Back View Panel Mount Kit
4
DIN-Rail Mounting
The aluminum DIN-Rail attachment plate should be fixed to the back panel of
IMC when you take it out of the box. If you need to reattach the DIN-Rail
attachment plate to IMC, make sure the stiff metal spring is situated towards
the top, as shown in the figures below.
STEP 1: STEP 2:
Insert the top of the DIN-Rail into the The DIN-Rail attachment unit will
slot just below the stiff metal spring. snap into place as shown below.
metal
metal
spring
spring
DIN-Rail DIN-Rail
To remove Moxa Industrial Media Converter from the DIN-Rail, simply

reverse Steps 1 and 2 above.
Wall Mounting (Optional)

For some applications, you will find it convenient to mount Moxa Industrial
Media Converter on the wall, as illustrated below.
STEP 1:
Remove the aluminum DIN-Rail attachment plate from Moxa Industrial Media
Converter, and then attach the wall mount plates, as shown in the diagrams
below.
Top
plate
Bottom
plate
5
STEP 2:
Mounting Moxa Industrial Media Converter on the wall
requires 4 screws. Use the IMC, with wall mount plates
attached, as a guide to mark the correct locations of the 4
screws. The heads of the screws should be less than 6.0
mm in diameter, and the shafts should be less than 3.5 6.0 mm
mm in diameter, as shown in the figure at the right.
NOTE Test the screw head and shank size by inserting
the screw into one of the keyhole shaped
apertures of the Wall Mounting Plates, before it 3.5 mm
is screwed into the wall.
Do not screw the screws in all the way—leave a space of

about 2 mm to allow room for sliding the wall mount
panel between the wall and the screws.
STEP 3:
Once the screws are fixed in the wall, insert the four screw heads through the
large parts of the keyhole-shaped apertures, and then slide Moxa Industrial
Media Converter downwards, as indicated below. Tighten the four screws for
added stability.
Wiring Requirements
WARNING Do not disconnect modules or wires unless power has been
switched off or the area is known to be non hazardous.
The devices may only be connected to the supply voltage shown
on the type plate.
The devices are designed for operation with a safety extra-low
voltage. Thus, they may only be connected to the supply voltage
connections and to the signal contact with the safety extra-low
voltages (SELV) in compliance with IEC950/ EN60950/
VDE0805.
WARNING Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I,

Division 2 and Zone 2.
These devices must be supplied by a SELV source as defined in
the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and 93/68/EEC.
6
WARNING This equipment has been evaluated as EEx nC IIC T4
equipment under DEMKO Certificate No. 03 ATEX
0324537U. Each module is marked with II 3G and is
suitable for use in Zone 2 Explosive Atmospheres. Devices
must be installed in a minimum IP 54 enclosure as defined in
IEC 60529 and EN 60529.
ATTENTION This unit is a built-in type. During installation into certain

end equipment, it must comply with fire enclosure
stipulations of IEC 60950/EN60950, or similar statements.

Be sure to disconnect the power cord before installing and/or
wiring your Moxa Industrial Media Converter.

Calculate the maximum possible current in each power wire
and common wire. Observe all electrical codes dictating the
maximum current allowable for each wire size.
If the current goes above the maximum ratings, the wiring
could overheat, causing serious damage to your equipment.
You should also pay attention to the following points:

y Use separate paths to route wiring for power and devices. If power wiring
and device wiring paths must cross, make sure the wires are perpendicular
at the intersection point.
NOTE: Do not run signal or communications wiring and power wiring in
the same wire conduit. To avoid interference, wires with different signal
characteristics should be routed separately.
y You can use the type of signal transmitted through a wire to determine
which wires should be kept separate. The rule of thumb is that wiring that
shares similar electrical characteristics can be bundled together.
y Keep input wiring and output wiring separated.
y It is strongly advised that you label wiring to all devices in the system when
necessary.
Grounding Moxa Industrial Media

Converter
Grounding and wire routing help limit the effects of noise due to
electromagnetic interference (EMI). Run the ground connection from the
ground screw to the grounding surface prior to connecting devices.
7
ATTENTION This product is intended to be mounted to a well-grounded
mounting surface such as a metal panel.
Wiring the Alarm Contact

The Alarm Contact is made up of the two middle contacts of the terminal block
on IMC’s top panel. Refer to the next section for detailed instructions on how
to connect the wires to the terminal block connector, and how to attach the
terminal block connector to the terminal block receptor.
In this section, we explain the meaning of the two contacts used to connect the
Alarm Contact.
FAULT: The two middle contacts of the
6-contact terminal block connector are used to
detect both power faults and port faults. The two
FAULT
wires attached to the Fault contacts form an open
Top View circuit when:
1. IMC has lost power from one of the DC

power inputs.
FAULT
OR
Front View
2. One of the ports for which the corresponding

PORT ALARM Dip Switch is set to ON is not
properly connected.
If neither of these two conditions occurs, the

Fault circuit will be closed.
Wiring the Redundant Power Inputs

The top two contacts and the bottom two contacts of the 6-contact terminal
block connector on IMC’s top panel are used for IMC’s two DC inputs. Top
and front views of one of the terminal block connectors are shown here.
STEP 1: Insert the negative/positive DC wires
into the V-/V+ terminals.
Top View
STEP 2: To keep the DC wires from pulling

loose, use a small flat-blade screwdriver to
tighten the wire-clamp screws on the front of the
terminal block connector.
Front View
STEP 3: Insert the plastic terminal block

connector prongs into the terminal block receptor,
which is located on IMC’s top panel.
ATTENTION
Before connecting IMC to the DC power inputs, make sure the DC
power source voltage is stable.
8
Communication Connections
IMC-101 models have one 10/100BaseT(X) Ethernet port, and one 100BaseFX
(SC or ST type connector) fiber port.
10/100BaseT(X) Ethernet Port Connection

The 10/100BaseT(X) ports located on IMC’s front panel are used to connect to
Ethernet-enabled devices.
Below we show pinouts for both MDI (NIC-type) ports and MDI-X
(HUB/Switch-type) ports, and also show cable wiring diagrams for
straight-through and cross-over Ethernet cables.
RJ45 (8-pin, MDI) Port Pinouts RJ45 (8-pin, MDI-X) Port Pinouts
Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 Tx+ 1 8 1 Rx+ 1 8
2 Tx- 2 Rx-
3 Rx+ 3 Tx+
6 Rx- 6 Tx-
RJ45 (8-pin) to RJ45 (8-pin) Straight-Through Cable Wiring
Straight-Through Cable
Switch Port NIC Port
RJ45 Plug Pin 1
RJ45 RJ45
Tx+ 3 3 Rx+
Tx- 6 6 Rx-
Rx+ 1 1 Tx+
Rx- 2 2 Tx-
RJ45 (8-pin) to RJ45 (8-pin) Cross-Over Cable Wiring
Switch Port Cross-Over Cable Switch Port

(NIC Port) (NIC Port)
RJ45 Plug Pin 1
RJ45 RJ45
(Rx+) Tx+ 3 1 Rx+ (Tx+)
(Rx-) Tx- 6 2 Rx- (Tx-)
(Tx+) Rx+ 1 3 Tx+ (Rx+)
(Tx-) Rx- 2 6 Tx- (Rx-)
100BaseFX Ethernet Port Connection

The concept behind the SC port and cable is quite straightforward. Suppose
you are connecting devices I and II. Contrary to electrical signals, optical
signals do not require a circuit in order to transmit data. Consequently, one of
the optical lines is used to transmit data from device I to device II, and the
other optical line is used transmit data from device II to device I, for
full-duplex transmission.
All you need to remember is to connect the Tx (transmit) port of device I to the
Rx (receive) port of device II, and the Rx (receive) port of device I to the Tx
(transmit) port of device II. If you are making your own cable, we suggest
labeling the two sides of the same line with the same letter (A-to-A and B-to-B,
as shown below, or A1-to-A2 and B1-to-B2).
9
SC-Port Pinouts SC-Port to SC-Port Cable Wiring
A A
Tx
B B
Cable Wiring
Rx A A
B B
ST-Port Pinouts ST-Port to ST-Port Cable Wiring

A A
Tx
B B
Cable Wiring
A A
Rx
B B
ATTENTION
This is a Class 1 Laser/LED product. Do not stare into the Laser
Beam.
Redundant Power Inputs

Both power inputs can be connected simultaneously to live DC power sources.
If one power source fails, the other live source acts as a backup, and
automatically supplies all of Moxa Industrial Media Converter’s power needs.
Alarm Contact
Moxa Industrial Media Converter has one Alarm Contact located on the top panel.
For detailed instructions on how to connect the Alarm Contact power wires to the
two middle contacts of the 6-contact terminal block connector, see the “Wiring the
Alarm Contact” section above. A typical scenario would be to connect the Fault
circuit to a warning light located in the control room. The light can be set up to
switch on when a fault is detected.
The Alarm Contact has two terminals that form a Fault circuit for connecting to an
alarm system. The two wires attached to the Fault contacts form an open circuit
when (1) IMC has lost power from one of the DC power inputs, or (2) one of the
ports for which the corresponding PORT ALARM Dip Switch is set to ON is not
properly connected.
If neither of these two conditions occurs, the Fault circuit will be closed.
10
Dip Switch Setting
IMC-101 series DIP switch
Dip Switch 1 (Default: Off )
ON: Enables the PORT Alarm. If the port’s link fails, the
relay will form an open circuit and the fault LED will
light up.
ON DIP Off: Disables the corresponding PORT Alarm. The relay will
form a closed circuit and the Fault LED will never light
up.
1 2 3 Dip Switch 2 (Default: ON )
ON: Enables full duplex for 100BaseFX
Off: Disables full duplex for 100BaseFX
Dip Switch 3
Reserved for future use
To activate the updated DIP switch setting, power off and then power on the
IMC.
LED Indicators
The front panel of Moxa Industrial Media Converter contains several LED
indicators. The function of each LED is described in the table below.
LED Color State Description
On
input PWR1
PWR1 AMBER
Off power input PWR1

On
input PWR2
PWR2 AMBER
Off
power input PWR2
When the corresponding PORT

On alarm is enabled, and the port’s
link is inactive.
FAULT RED When the corresponding PORT
alarm is enabled and the port’s link
Off is active, or when the
corresponding PORT alarm is
disabled.
10M GREEN Data is being transmitted at 10

Blinking Mbps
Off TP Port’s 10 Mbps link is inactive

GREEN Blinking
(TP) Mbps
Off 100BaseTX Port’s link is inactive
11
On FX port’s 100 Mbps is active
GREEN Blinking
(FX) Mbps
Off 100BaseFX port is inactive

On
transmitted at full duplex
FDX/COL GREEN Blinking Collision occurs
Off
transmitted at half duplex
Auto MDI/MDI-X Connection

The Auto MDI/MDI-X function allows users to connect Moxa Industrial Media
Converter’s 10/100BaseTX ports to any kind of Ethernet device, without
paying attention to the type of Ethernet cable being used for the connection.
This means that you can use either a straight-through cable or cross-over cable
to connect IMC to Ethernet devices.
Dual Speed Functionality and

Switching
Moxa Industrial Media Converter’s 10/100 Mbps RJ45 switched port auto
negotiates with the connected device for the fastest data transmission rate
supported by both devices. All models of Moxa Industrial Media Converter are
plug-and-play devices, so that software configuration is not required at
installation, or during maintenance. The half/full duplex mode for the RJ45
switched ports is user dependent and changes (by auto-negotiation) to full or
half duplex, depending on which transmission speed is supported by the
attached device.
Auto-Negotiation and Speed Sensing

All of Moxa Industrial Media Converter’s RJ45 Ethernet ports independently
support auto-negotiation for transmission speed in the 10BaseT and
100BaseTX modes, with operation according to the IEEE 802.3u standard.
This means that some nodes could be operating at 10 Mbps, while at the same
time, other nodes are operating at 100 Mbps.
Auto-negotiation takes place when an RJ45 cable connection is made, and then
each time a LINK is enabled. Moxa Industrial Media Converter advertises its
capability for using either 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps transmission speeds, with the
device at the other end of the cable expected to advertise similarly. Depending
on what type of device is connected, this will result in agreement to operate at a
speed of either 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps.
If a Moxa Industrial Media Converter RJ45 Ethernet port is connected to a
non-negotiating device, it will default to 10 Mbps speed and half-duplex mode,
as required by the IEEE 802.3u standard.
12
Specifications
Technology
Standards IEEE802.3, 802.3u, Link Fault Pass-Through
Interface
RJ45 ports 10/100BaseT(X)
Fiber ports 100BaseFX (SC, ST connectors available)
LED Indicators Power, Fault, 10/100M, Full Duplex/Collision,
Dip Switch Port break alarm mask, 100BaseFx Full/Half duplex
selection
Alarm Contact One relay output with current carrying capacity of
1A @ 24 VDC
Optical Fiber
Multi Single Single Single
mode mode, 15 mode, 40 mode, 80
Distance, km 5 15 40 80
Wavelength, nm 1310 1310 1310 1550
Min. TX Output, dBm -20 -15 -5 -5
Max. TX Output, dBm -14 -6 0 0
Sensitivity, dBm -34 to -30 -36 to -32 -36 to -32 -36 to -32
Recommended Diameter 62.5/125 9/125 9/125 9/125
(Core/Cladding) μm (1 dB/km,
800 MHz × km)
Power
Input Voltage 12 to 48 VDC; Redundant inputs
Input Current (@24V) 0.16 A
Connection Removable Terminal Block
Overload Current Protection 1.1 A
Reverse Polarity Protection Present
Mechanical
Casing IP30 protection, aluminum case
Dimensions (W x H x D) 53.6 x 135 x 105 mm
Weight 0.63 kg
Installation DIN-Rail, Wall Mounting
Environmental
Operating Temperature 0 to 60℃ (32 to 140 oF),
-40 to 75oC (-40 to 167oF) for – T models
Storage Temperature -40 to 85℃ (-40 to 185 oF)
Ambient Relative Humidity 5 to 90% (non-condensing)
Regulatory Approvals
Safety UL60950, UL 508, CSA C22.2 No. 60950, EN60950
Hazardous Location UL/cUL Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D
ATEX Class I, Zone 2, EEx nC IIC
EMI FCC Part 15, CISPR (EN55022) class A
EMS EN61000-4-2 (ESD), level 3
EN61000-4-3 (RS), level 3
EN61000-4-4 (EFT), level 3
EN61000-4-5 (Surge), level 3
EN61000-4-2 (CS), level 3
Shock IEC 60068-2-27
Free Fall IEC 60068-2-32
Vibration IEC 60068-2-6
WARRANTY 5 years
13
Revision History
Document Edition Revision Date Revision Details
2nd June 15, 2004 1. Updated the edition of this
manual on the title page.
2. Changed the Moxa logo on the
title page.
3. Added several “Attention”
messages
4. Added one product feature:
Operating temperature ranges
from 0 to 60°C, or extended
operting temperature from –40 to
75°C for (-T) models.
3rd July 1, 2004 1. Revise 100BaseFX for fiber optic
port of ST connector.
4th Nov. 15, 2004 1. Modify Optical Fiber specs.
2. Improve resolution of figures.
Technical Support Contact Information

www.moxa.com/support
Moxa Americas: Moxa China (Shanghai office):

Toll-free: 1-888-669-2872 Toll-free: 800-820-5036
Tel: +1-714-528-6777 Tel: +86-21-5258-9955
Fax: +1-714-528-6778 Fax: +86-10-6872-3958
Moxa Europe: Moxa Asia-Pacific:

Tel: +49-89-3 70 03 99-0 Tel: +886-2-8919-1230
Fax: +49-89-3 70 03 99-99 Fax: +886-2-8919-1231
14
catalog

USLKG 5
Order No.: 0441504

Ground terminal block with screw connection, cross section: 0.2 - 4
mm², AWG: 24 - 10, width: 6.2 mm, color: Green-yellow
Product notes
EAN 4017918002190
Pack 50 Pcs.
Technical data
General
Note When aligning with a feed-through terminal block with the same
shape, an end cover must be interposed with insulation voltages
of > 690 V
Number of levels 1

USLKG 5 Order No.: 0441504
Color green-yellow
Dimensions
Width 6.2 mm
Length 42.5 mm
Height NS 32 52 mm
Technical data
Pollution degree 3
Open side panel nein
Connection data
2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2
min.


2
max.
2

2

2

2

Screw thread M3
Certification ABS, BV, CCA, CSA, CUL, DNV, GOST, KEMA, KR, LR, PRS,
RS, UL
Certification Ex: IECEx, KEMA-EX
CSA
AWG/kcmil 28-10
CUL
AWG/kcmil 26-10
UL
AWG/kcmil 26-10

Address

Flachsmarktstr. 8
Phone +49 5235 3 00
Fax +49 5235 3 41200


catalog

UK 3 N
Order No.: 3001501

Universal terminal block with screw connection, cross section: 0,2- 2.5
mm², AWG: 24- 12, width: 5.2 mm, color: Gray
Product notes
EAN 4017918089955
Pack 50 Pcs.
Technical data
General
Number of levels 1
Color gray

UK 3 N Order No.: 3001501
Dimensions
Width 5.2 mm
Length 42.5 mm
Height NS 32 52 mm
Technical data
Pollution degree 3
Open side panel ja
Connection data
2

2

2
Conductor cross section stranded max. 2.5 mm

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2
min.


2
max.
2

2

2

2

2

2

Screw thread M3
Certification ABS, BV, CCA, CSA, CUL, DNV, GL, GOST, KEMA, KR, LR, NK,
PRS, RS, UL
Certification Ex: CUL-EX, FM, GL-EX, IECEx, KEMA-EX, UL-EX
CSA
AWG/kcmil 28-12
CUL
AWG/kcmil 28-12
UL

AWG/kcmil 28-12

Address

Flachsmarktstr. 8
Phone +49 5235 3 00
Fax +49 5235 3 41200


DEN-LAB/Krö/Schü
22.09.1998
Page 1(5)
DATA SHEET
Article: Universal ground terminal block
Type: USLKG 3
Part-No.: 0441083
Test specification: IEC 60947-7-2:1995
Please note the "General usage regulations for technical data sheets".
DS-No.: 0468 Revision-No.: 06

Data sheet DEN-LAB/Krö/Schü
22.09.1998
USLKG 3 Page 2(5)
Description
Ground terminal block with screw connection. Foot part for contact on rail (busbar) NS 32 acc. to
EN 50035:1978 or NS 35 acc. to EN 50022:1977 (except NS 35/15-2,3).
Rated data
Rated insulation voltage: 800 V*
Rated cross-section: 2,5 mm2
Technical data
Rated connecting capacity

- rigid (solid or stranded): 0,2 mm2 up to 4 mm2
- flexible: 0,2 mm2 up to 2,5 mm2
- flexible with ferrule: 0,25 mm2 up to 2,5 mm2
(without plastic sleeve)
(with plastic sleeve)
- flexible with TWIN-ferrule: 0,5 mm2 up to 1,5 mm2
- AWG: 24 up to 12
Multi-wire connection
(2 conductors of the same cross-section)
- rigid (solid or stranded): 0,2 mm2 up to 1,5 mm2
Gauge (IEC 60947-1:1988): A3
Stripping length: 8 mm
* When mounting next to an opened housing of a feed through modular terminal block of the same type and size it must
be closed with an end cover, if the insulation voltage is expected to exceed >690 V.
DS-No.: 0468 Rev.-No.: 06

22.09.1998
USLKG 3 Page 3(5)
Technical data
(with UK 3)
Clearances and creepage distances
Basic requirements
- rated impulse withstand voltage: 8 kV
- pollution degree: 3
- installation category: III
- insulating material group: I/CTI 600
- supply system: unearthed
Minimum clearance: 8 mm
(case A, inhomogeneous field)
Shortest clearance
- versus neighboured terminal block: 10,3 mm with end cover
8,5 mm without end cover
Minimum creepage distance: 10 mm

Shortest creepage distance
- versus neighboured terminal block: 10,3 mm with end cover
8,5 mm without end cover
Voltage resistance: passed

1 min. power-frequency withstand voltage(³3,5 kV)
- versus neighboured terminal block: 6 kV
Technical data
Test of mechanical properties: passed
Test of mechanical strength of terminals: passed

- screw thread
clamping screw: M3
fixing screw: M 2,5
- tightening torque
clamping screw: 0,6 - 0,8 Nm
fixing screw: 0,5 - 0,6 Nm
Testing for damage to and accidental

loosening of conductors of a terminal block: passed
(flexion test)
- conductor cross-section/mass: 0,2 mm2/0,3 kg
2,5 mm2/0,7 kg
4 mm2/0,9 kg
- speed of rotation: 10 rpm
- revolutions: 135
DS-No.: 0468 Rev.-No.: 06

22.09.1998
USLKG 3 Page 4(5)
Technical data
Pull-out test: passed

- conductor cross-section/pull-out force:
(0,2 mm2/³10 N) 20 N
(2,5 mm2/³50 N) 100 N
(4 mm2/³60 N) 120 N
Attachment of the terminal block

on its support: passed
- rails: NS 32/NS 35
- force (³1 N): 5 N
Voltage drop
(I = 2,4 A/A = 2,5 mm2)
- terminal/terminal (£3,2 mV): 1,2 mV
- terminal block/mounting surface (£6,4 mV): 2 mV
Short-time withstand current: passed

(Ik = 0,48 kA/A = 4 mm2)
Additional tests
(with UK 3)
Insulation resistance (DIN IEC 60512-2:1994-05)

- versus neighboured terminal block: 1012 W
Material specifications
Metal parts
- live parts: copper alloy
- surface plating: nickel plated
DS-No.: 0468 Rev.-No.: 06

22.09.1998
USLKG 3 Page 5(5)
Insulating material
Type of insulating material: polyamide 6.6
Colour: green/yellow
Quality features of insulating material
- Rel. temperature index (Elec., UL 746 B): 130 °C
- Temperature at operation (IEC 60216-1)

in heat: 120 °C
in cold: -40 °C
- Resistance to tracking (IEC 60112/DIN VDE 0303-1): CTI 600
- Burning behaviour
UL 94: V0
Enclosure: Portrait
- Technical modifications reserved -
PHOENIX CONTACT
DEN-Laboratory
DS-No.: 0468 Rev.-No.: 06

22.09.1998
USLKG 3
Portrait
Dimensions
Terminal width: 5,2 mm
Terminal height (NS 32): 52 mm
Terminal height (NS 35/7,5): 47 mm
Terminal height (NS 35/15): 54,5 mm
Terminal length: 42,5 mm
Weight (approx.): 17,6 g
DS-No.: 0468 Rev.-No.: 06

EV-FEA/Ni/Schu
07.11.2003
Page 1(5)
D A T A S H E E T
Article: Universal terminal block
Type: UK 3 N
Part-No.: 3001501
Test specifications: IEC 947-7-1:1989
Note: This data sheet also covers the following variant(s).
No. type designation or title part-no.

1 UK 3 N BU 3001514
Please note the "General usage regulations for technical data sheets".
DS-No.: 0558 Revision-No.: 09

Data sheet EV-FEA/Ni/Schu
07.11.2003
UK 3 N Page 2(5)
Description
Straight-through terminal block with screw connection. Mounting on rail NS 32 or NS 35

acc. to DIN EN 60715:2001-09.
Rated data
Rated insulation voltage: 800 V
Rated current: 24 A
Rated cross-section: 2,5 mm2
Technical data
Rated connecting capacity

- rigid (solid or stranded): 0,2 mm2 up to 4 mm2
- flexible: 0,2 mm up to 2,5 mm2
2

(with plastic sleeve)
- flexible with TWIN ferrule: 0,5 mm2 up to 1 mm2
- AWG: 24 up to 12
Multi-wire connection
(2 conductors of the same cross-section)
- rigid (solid or stranded): 0,2 mm2 up to 1,5 mm2
Gauge (IEC 947-1:1988): A3
Stripping length: 8 mm
DS-No.: 0558 Rev.-No.: 09

07.11.2003
UK 3 N Page 3(5)
Technical data
Voltage drop (£3,2 mV): 1,2 mV

(I = 2,4 A/A = 2,5 mm2)
Max. current carrying capacity: 32 A

(A = 4 mm2)
Temperature-rise test (£45 K): 40 K

(I = 24 A/A = 2,5 mm2)
Short-time withstand current test: passed

(Ik = 0,3 kA/A = 2,5 mm2)
Voltage resistance: passed

1 min. power-frequency withstand voltage (³3 kV)
- between adjacent terminal blocks: 6 kV
- between terminal block and rail NS 32: 6 kV
- between terminal block and rail NS 35: 6 kV
Clearances and creepage distances
Basic requirements
- rated impulse withstand voltage: 8 kV
- pollution degree: 3
- installation category: III
- insulating material group: I
- supply system: unearthed
Minimum clearance: 8 mm
(case A, inhomogeneous field)
Shortest clearance
- between adjacent terminal blocks: 12,5 mm
- between terminal block and rail NS 32: 15,7 mm
Minimum creepage distance: 10 mm

Shortest creepage distance
- between adjacent terminal blocks: 12,5 mm
DS-No.: 0558 Rev.-No.: 09

07.11.2003
UK 3 N Page 4(5)
Technical data
Testing for damage to and accidental

loosening of conductors of a terminal block: passed
(flexion test)
- conductor cross-section/mass: 0,2 mm2/0,3 kg
2,5 mm2/0,7 kg
4 mm2/0,9 kg
- speed of rotation: 10 rpm
- revolutions: 135
Pull-out test: passed

- conductor cross-section/pull-out force:
(0,2 mm2/³10 N) 20 N
(2,5 mm2/³50 N) 100 N
(4 mm2/³60 N) 120 N
Torque test: passed

- screw thread: M3
- tightening torque: 0,6 - 0,8 Nm
Attachment of the terminal block

on its support: passed
- rails: NS 32/NS 35
- force (³1 N): 5N
Additional tests
Insulation resistance (DIN IEC 512-2:1994-05)

- between adjacent terminal blocks: 1012 W
- between terminal block and rail NS 32: 1012 W
- between terminal block and rail NS 35: 1012 W
Electric shock protection

(DIN VDE 0106-100:1983-03)
- back of hand safety: guaranteed
- finger safety: guaranteed
Current carrying capacity of

- insertion bridge (EBL 2-5): 24 A
- fixed bridge bar (FBRI 2-5 N): 30 A
Metal parts
- live parts: copper alloy
- surface plating: tin plated
DS-No.: 0558 Rev.-No.: 09

07.11.2003
UK 3 N Page 5(5)
Insulating material
Type of insulating material: polyamide
Colour: grey
blue
Quality features of insulating material
- Rel. temperature index (Elec., UL 746 B): 125 °C
- Temperature at operation conditions

(DIN IEC 60216-1/DIN VDE 0304 part 21)
in heat: 115 °C
in cold: -40 °C
- Resistance to tracking (DIN IEC 60112/VDE 0303 part 1): CTI 600
- Burning behaviour
UL 94: V2
Enclosure: Portrait
- Technical modifications reserved -
PHOENIX CONTACT
EV-FEA
DS-No.: 0558 Rev.-No.: 09

07.11.2003
UK 3 N
Portrait
Dimensions
Terminal width: 5,2 mm
Terminal height (NS 32): 52 mm
Terminal height (NS 35/7,5): 47 mm
Terminal height (NS 35/15): 54,5 mm
Terminal length: 42,5 mm
Weight (approx.): 7,2 g
DS-No.: 0558 Rev.-No.: 09

GE Fanuc Automation
Industrial Computers
WOLVERINE
Industrial Computer
Hardware Users Manual

MAN00055 Rev. E April 2007
MAN00055 Rev. E
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes

as Used in this Publication
Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages,
currents, temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this
equipment or may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to
equipment, a Warning notice is used.
Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.
Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein,
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes no
obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.
The following are trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

Alarm Master Genius PROMACRO Series Six
CIMPLICITY Helpmate PowerMotion Series Three
CIMPLICITY 90–ADS Logicmaster PowerTRAC VersaMax
CIMSTAR Modelmaster Series 90 VersaPro
Field Control Motion Mate Series Five VuMaster
GEnet ProLoop Series One Workmaster
©Copyright 2002 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.
Preface
Content of This Manual

This manual describes the features and operation of the following Wolverine industrial computers:
Standard Wolverine - 15.0" Industrial computer with Windows 2000 or XP
Wolverine with heater option - 15.0" Industrial computer with Windows 2000
or XP - includes heaters and front keypad overlay
Related Publications
MAN00055 Rev. E iii

Contents
Wolverine Industrial Computer Features .................................... 1-1

Feature Summary.............................................................................................................. 1-3
Standard Features ....................................................................................................... 1-3
Optional Features ....................................................................................................... 1-4
Back I/O Plate ............................................................................................................ 1-4
Gland Plate................................................................................................................. 1-6
Power Input ................................................................................................................ 1-8
Standard I/O ............................................................................................................... 1-8
Network Interface....................................................................................................... 1-8
Optional I/O ............................................................................................................... 1-8
Heaters ....................................................................................................................... 1-9
Front Overlay Keypad................................................................................................ 1-9
Hardware Installation.......................................................................................... 2-1

Installation Guidelines ...................................................................................................... 2-1
Warnings for Hazardous Location Approvals .................................................................. 2-2
Connectors & Cabling .......................................................................................... 3-1

Power Input....................................................................................................................... 3-1
Battery Backup ................................................................................................................. 3-3
Connector Layout ............................................................................................................. 3-4
Printer Port LPT1.............................................................................................................. 3-5
Serial Communication Ports ............................................................................................. 3-6
USB Ports ......................................................................................................................... 3-7
Network Interface ............................................................................................................. 3-7
Remote Dimming Connector............................................................................................ 3-8
4-20 mA Data Input.......................................................................................................... 3-8
Horn Output...................................................................................................................... 3-9
VGA Port........................................................................................................................ 3-10
Mouse & Keyboard Ports ............................................................................................... 3-11
System Operation ...................................................................................................... 4-1

Setup ................................................................................................................................. 4-1
Powering Up the Wolverine Industrial Computer...................................................... 4-2
Powering Down the Wolverine Industrial Computer................................................. 4-2
System Peripherals ........................................................................................................... 4-2
Removable Storage Media ......................................................................................... 4-3
PCMCIA Slots ........................................................................................................... 4-4
MAN00055 Rev. E v
Contents
PCMCIA Slots ........................................................................................................... 4-5

Compact Flash Socket................................................................................................ 4-5
External Keyboard and Mouse ......................................................................................... 4-6
Graphic System................................................................................................................. 4-6
Touch Screen .................................................................................................................... 4-6
Touch Screen Driver for Windows................................................................................... 4-6
Communications............................................................................................................... 4-7
Heater Operation............................................................................................................... 4-7
Front Overlay Keypad ...................................................................................................... 4-8
Shutting Down the Computer ........................................................................................... 4-9
BIOS Settings ................................................................................................................. 5-1

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting ........................................................... 6-1
Self-Test Diagnostics........................................................................................................ 6-1
System Test and Initialization.................................................................................... 6-1
System Configuration Verification ............................................................................ 6-1
Troubleshooting................................................................................................................ 6-2
Power up .................................................................................................................... 6-2
Display ....................................................................................................................... 6-3
Memory...................................................................................................................... 6-3
External PS/2 Mouse.................................................................................................. 6-3
Keyboard.................................................................................................................... 6-4
Communications ........................................................................................................ 6-4
COM Port Connection ...............................................................................................6-4
Network Communications .........................................................................................6-4
Printing ......................................................................................................................6-5
Corrective Actions............................................................................................................ 6-6
CMOS Checksum Error ............................................................................................. 6-6
Technical Data ............................................................................................................. A-1

Mechanical Specifications ............................................................................................... A-1
Front Assembly ......................................................................................................... A-1
Main Chassis ............................................................................................................. A-1
Gland Plate................................................................................................................ A-1
Functional Specifications ................................................................................................ A-2
Agency Approvals, Government Regulations & General Specifications .................................B-1

Agency Approvals......................................................................................................B-1
Government Regulations............................................................................................B-2
General Specifications ...............................................................................................B-3
vi WOLVERINE Industrial Computer Hardware User’s Manual–April 2007 MAN00055 Rev. E

Contents
DRW00245 .......................................................................................................................................B-4
MAN00055 Rev. E Contents vii

Chapter Wolverine Industrial Computer Features
1
The Wolverine industrial computers are high performance workstations designed primarily for use
in Hazardous Location and Harsh Environment running on Windows 2000® or XP® operating
systems.
Each member of the Wolverine industrial computer family is a fully self-contained PC-compatible
computer with a built-in flat screen display and resistive touch screen. The unit is housed in a
rugged metal case to protect the system against dust, water, and damage.
Wolverine industrial computers are available as either 24VDC units that accept a range of 18–30
VDC, or as 120/220VAC units that accept a range of 100-240 VAC.
Wolverine computers can be ordered with a heater option for extended temperature operation and a
front keypad overlay.
The unit is supplied completely assembled and requires only mounting and connecting.
MAN00055 Rev. E 1-1

1
Figure 1.1
Standard Wolverine
Figure 1.2
Wolverine with Heater Option
1-2 Wolverine Industrial Computer - Hardware User's Manual – April 2007 MAN00055 Rev. E
1
Feature Summary
When you purchase a Wolverine, you receive:
• Industrial computer with the operating system software installed.
• Installation hardware
• Microsoft Windows documentation, software distribution, Certificate of Authenticity and
license agreement
Standard Features
Feature Description
Operating Systems: Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows XP, Embedded XP
CPU Pentium-M processor 1.6GHz
Cache 1MB L2
Two PCMCIA Slots 16 bit PC Cards
Hard disk 40GB (minimum)
RAM 512MB, DDR266 installed by factory.
Display 15.0” Color Active Matrix TFT –XGA 1024 x 768 resolution
Touch Screen Resistive
Parallel port LPT1
Serial ports Com1 (RS232), Com2 (RS232/485)
USB ports Two USB 2.0,
Communications 10/100 Ethernet (RJ-45)
Keyboard port PS/2
Mouse port PS/2
PC/104 connector Populated by PCMCIA PC/104 adapter
Panel dimming I/O Plate Dimming knob (Standard Wolverine only)
Front Keypad Dimming buttons (Wolverine with heater option
only)
ATX Switch Momentary push button
VGA Port External VGA Port (Wolverine with heater option only)
MAN00055 Rev. E Chapter 1 Wolverine Industrial Computer Features 1-3

1
Optional Features
The following features are optional. Contact your GE Fanuc sales representative for details.
• Additional DDR (DIMMs) (Maximum upgrade to: 2GB)
• Higher/Lower speed CPU
• Enhanced option for Transflective Daylight readable TFT.
• Compact Flash Drive (Note: Refer to Appendix B for important Shock and Vibration
specifications)
• RS 422/485 (Bios selectable - Com2 only)
• Two Additional RS232 Ports (Com3, Com4)
• Remote Dimmer cable (Standard Wolverine only)
• Battery backup – 20 minutes (Only available on DC units without heater option)
• Mounting – VESA, Panel Mount, Yoke
• NEMA4 external connections (Gland Plate used to achieve NEMA 4 & Hazardous Location
approvals)
• Wireless Ethernet - 802.11b
• 4-20mA Data Input (Standard Wolverine only)
• Horn Output
• 2nd 10/100 Ethernet Port (RJ-45)
• Heater Option (not available on Standard Wolverine)
Back I/O Plate

The Wolverine industrial computers are equipped with a back I/O plate.
The back I/O plate on the Standard Wolverine units provide access to three serial ports, one printer
port, one PS/2 keyboard, one PS/2 mouse, two USB 2.0 ports, two Ethernet RJ45 ports, Dimming
POT, Remote POT connector, ATX power button, input power terminal block, fuse, and horn
output terminal block.
The back I/O plate on the Wolverine units with heater option provide access to four serial ports,
one printer port, one PS/2 keyboard, one PS/2 mouse, two USB 2.0 ports, two Ethernet RJ45 ports,
input power terminal block, fuse, horn output terminal block, and VGA port. Figures 1.2 and 1.3
indicate I/O Plates used on Wolverine units.
1
Figure 1.3 – Back I/O Plate - Standard Wolverine
Figure 1.4 – Back I/O Plate - Wolverine with heater option

1
Gland Plate
Figures 1.5 and 1.6 indicate Gland Plates used on Wolverine units.
All cabling will access the back I/O plate through a gland plate.
Note
Modification of Gland Plate invalidates the Type 4/4X enclosure rating.
Two NEMA4 keyboard and mouse connectors, the ATX switch, and 4 glands are available on the
standard gland plate shown in Figure 1.5.
Figure 1.5
1
Two NEMA4 keyboard and mouse connectors, the ATX switch, one gland, one NEMA4 USB
connector, and one Data Input connector are available on the optional gland plate shown in Figure
1.6.
Figure 1.6

1
Power Input
The input power consists of a three terminal power block. For DC-powered Wolverines, the
terminal denoted by the (+) sign is for the +24V, the (-) terminal is for the return of the power
supply, and the ground symbol denotes case ground. For AC-powered Wolverines, the terminal
denoted by the character “L” is for line voltage, the “N” terminal is for the neutral AC return, and
“G” denotes case ground.
The “ATX” switch near the terminal block powers on the unit when depressed. This switch tells
the motherboard to turn on the main power supply. Depressing the switch for 4 seconds shuts
down the unit. The “ATX” switch on the gland plate provides the same functions. Best practice is
for the operating system to power down the unit. Note: The “ATX” switch for Wolverine units
with heater option is located on the front keypad overlay.
Standard I/O
The Wolverine industrial computer provides the following I/O interface channels:
• 4 RS-232 serial ports. The user may request for the optional 422/485 port in place of RS232
for COM2. COM ports are accessible from the back I/O plate. Resources for COM3 and
COM4 are used by PC/104 boards such as the wireless Ethernet and A/D cards used in
Wolverines having wireless Ethernet or 4-20mA Data Input option; so, COM3 and COM4 are
not available to the user when the wireless Ethernet or 4-20mA Data Input option is ordered.
Com 4 consumes the cutout normally reserved for Remote pot/Gland ATX switch. Remote
pot/Gland ATX switch is not available when COM 4 is ordered.
• One enhanced parallel port. LPT1 is located on the back I/O plate.
• Two USB 2.0 Ports are accessible through the back I/O plate.
• VGA port is accessible through the back I/O plate. (Wolverine with heater option only)
Network Interface
The Wolverine includes an auto-sensing 10/100 Ethernet adapter that provides a RJ-45 connector
for unshielded twisted pair cable. As an option, the Wolverine also includes 802.11b wireless
Ethernet with external antenna that is capable of data transfers up to 11 mbps. Also optional is a
2nd 10/100 Ethernet port.
Optional I/O
The Wolverine industrial computer provides the following I/O interface options:
• 802.11b wireless Ethernet with external antenna that is capable of data transfers up to 11 mbps.
• 4-20mA Data Input
• Horn Output
• External USB
• 2nd 10/100 Ethernet Port (RJ-45)
1
Heaters
Wolverine computers can be ordered with a heater option for extended temperature operation. AC
units are equipped with AC heaters that are powered through the AC input terminal block. DC
units are equipped with DC heaters that are powered through the DC input terminal block. Battery
backup is not available on DC units with heaters installed.
Front Overlay Keypad

Wolverine units with heater option feature a front overlay keypad. The keypad provides an ATX
power button and dimming buttons for changing the backlight intensity. LEDs embedded in the
overlay provide indicators for system status and various I/O activities. These will be discussed in
further detail in Chapter 4 – System Operation.

Chapter Hardware Installation
This chapter describes the procedures for the safe location and securing of the Wolverine industrial
computer. The Wolverine industrial computers have been designed to ensure simple installation of
the system.
Installation Guidelines
• This unit is designed to operate in an outdoor environment.
• The computer is furnished with four ¼ -20 mounting holes two on each side and eight ¼-20
VESA mounting holes on the back of the Heat Sink. A panel mount option is also available
(see Fig. 2.3 for cutout dimensions and mounting instructions)
• When panel mounting, insert unit through front of panel and install panel mounting clips as
shown in Figure 2.3. Torque clips from 5 to 10 in-lbs.
• The mounting method must be able to support the weight of the unit under shock and vibration
conditions for the given application.
• To insure proper operation take care not to install unit in tight confined areas, during mid day
operations when the effects of solar heating are at peak radiance, surrounding walls and
surfaces can reflect additional solar energy and cause the unit to over heat and shut down until
temperatures fall back to normal operating conditions.
• The unit must have a minimum clearance of six inches per side and back.
• The unit is available with optional pass through glands for cable connections (required to
maintain enclosure protection rating). These glands are watertight and must be tightened to
two complete turns after hand tightening to keep water out. The customer must pass the
cables through the glands and wire the associated I/O connectors to the end of these cables.
See Figures 2.1, 2.2, and 2.3 for illustrations and dimensions of Standard Wolverine units.
See Figure 2.4 for illustrations and dimensions of Wolverine units with heater option.
MAN00055 Rev. E 2-1

2
Warnings for Hazardous Location Approvals

• Input and output wiring methods must be in accordance with Class I, Division 2
wiring methods and in accordance with the authority having jurisdiction.
• This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D or non-

hazardous locations only.
• WARNING - Explosion Hazard - Substitution of components may impair suitability

for Class I, Division 2.
• WARNING - Explosion Hazard - Do not connect or disconnect equipment unless

power has been switched off or the area is known to be non-hazardous.
• Do not install or remove SCSI devices or cards while circuit is alive.
• Gland Plate shall be installed for Division 2 applications.
• (DC version) Power supply is to be connected to an isolated secondary voltage which

is separated from the primary circuit by reinforced or double insulation. The power
supply shall be properly bonded to the main earthing terminal in the end product.
Power supply is to be connected to no greater than 50A maximum.
• (AC version) Product shall be connected to no greater than a 50 Amp branch circuit.
• The battery used in this device may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if
mistreated. Do not disassemble, heat above 100°C (212°F) or incinerate. Dispose of
used batteries promptly. Keep away from children.
Note
• The proper method for removing power from the unit is to switch off power at the
circuit breaker.
• See the control drawing located in Appendix B for non-incendive field wiring
parameters.
2
Figure 2.1 Standard Wolverine unit with rear exit gland plate
MAN00055 Rev. E Chapter2 Hardware Installation 2-3

2
Figure 2.2 Standard Wolverine unit with bottom exit gland plate
2
Figure 2.3 Panel Mount Option – Standard Wolverine

2
Figure 2.4 Wolverine unit with heater option - bottom exit gland plate
2
Figure 2.5 Panel Mount Option – Wolverine with heaters

Chapter Connectors & Cabling
This chapter describes the connector layout and cabling on the Wolverine industrial computers. All
power and communication connectors are described in this section.
Communication connectors are provided from the main CPU motherboard. These connectors are
located on the back I/O plate. If the gland plate is installed, the cabling to the I/O plate will be
accessed through the glands.
• PS/2 Keyboard (back I/O plate), NEMA4 connector (gland plate)
• PS/2 Mouse port (back I/O plate), NEMA4 connector (gland plate)
• Three serial ports, COM1, COM2, COM3 (back I/O plate).
• Parallel port (back I/O plate)
• Two USB 2.0 ports (back I/O plate), one USB NEMA4 connector (optional gland plate)
• Two Ethernet 10/100 base T ports (RJ-45) (back I/O plate)
• Remote POT/PWR (back I/O plate)
• 4-20mA Data Input (back I/O plate), military connector (optional gland plate)
• Horn Output (back I/O plate)
• VGA port (back I/O plate)
Power Input
Wolverine industrial computers are available as DC-powered or AC-powered. DC-powered
Wolverines are powered by 24VDC, and will operate from 18-30VDC. AC-powered Wolverines
are powered by 120/220VAC, and will operate from 100-240VAC. The unit is powered on
through the ATX button.
The power supply input to the industrial computer uses a terminal block that shall be connected to
no greater than a 50 AMP branch circuit. Connect earth ground to the ground terminal on the
terminal block. The terminal block is rated for wire size 12-22 AWG and has a torque rating of 7
in-lb. max. To remove power from the unit, the proper method is to switch off power at the circuit
breaker.
For power supply details, refer to specifications in Appendix A. There is one user-serviceable fuse
on the back I/O plate. DC-powered Wolverines without heaters come equipped with a 5A 250V
5x20mm fuse. Suggested replacement fuse – Littelfuse 217-005. AC-powered Wolverines without
MAN00055 Rev. E 3-1

3
heaters come equipped with a 2A 250V 5x20mm fuse. Suggested replacement fuse – Littelfuse
215002AC-powered Wolverines with heaters come equipped with an 8A 250V 5x20mm fuse.
Suggested replacement fuse – Littelfuse 215008. DC-powered Wolverines with heaters come
equipped with a 25A 32V 3AG fuse. Suggested replacement fuse – Littelfuse 312025P.
3-2 Wolverine Industrial Computer Hardware User's Manual – April 2007 MAN00055 Rev. E
3
Battery Backup
DC-powered Wolverines may be ordered with an optional internal 24V battery to act as a battery
backup when power is interrupted to the unit. The battery backup will automatically switch to
battery power when the external DC power is removed. Battery backup will support the unit for at
least 20 minutes at full load. To prevent loss of data, it is recommended to shut the unit down if
external DC power has been removed.
The battery charging board charges the battery when the unit is powered on. A completely
discharged battery will take approximately 4-5 hours to reach its peak charge. The battery charging
board will terminate the charge after the battery has reached its peak charge.
Battery backup is not available on Wolverine DC units with heaters installed.
Figure 3.1
Battery Backup System:
MAN00055 Rev. E Chapter 3 Connectors & Cabling 3-3

3
Connector Layout
Caution
External devices should not be powered up when connecting to
communication ports.
Back I/O Plate Connectors

Glands on the gland plate allow cabling to access the back I/O plate connectors.
The back I/O plate consists of:
• 2 USB ports
• ATX switch
• 4 RS232 ports – Com 1-4
• LPT port
• Input Power Terminal block
• Keyboard connector
• Mouse Connector
• Dimming Knob
• Remote dimming connector
• 2 RJ45 Ethernet ports
• Horn Output
• VGA Port
3
Printer Port LPT1

A 25-pin D-type female printer port connector is located on the back I/O plate and labeled
accordingly. In order to provide higher EMC immunity and maintain CE Mark compliance, the
USB cables must be shielded.
Figure 3.2
Pin Assignment Pin Assignment

1 Strobe 10 Acknowledge
2 Data Bit 0 11 Busy
3 Data Bit 1 12 Paper End
4 Data Bit 2 13 Select Out
5 Data Bit 3 14 Auto Feed XT
6 Data Bit 4 15 Error
7 Data Bit 5 16 Initialize Printer
8 Data Bit 6 17 Select In (from Printer)
9 Data Bit 7 18 to 25 Ground

3
Serial Communication Ports

3 RS232 COM ports (1-3) are available on the back I/O plate. COM3 and COM4 are used by
PC/104 boards (such as the wireless Ethernet and 4-20mA Data Input) and are not available to the
user when a PC/104 board option is ordered. Com 4 consumes the cutout normally reserved for
Remote pot/Gland ATX switch. Remote pot/Gland ATX switch is not available when COM 4 is
ordered. The standard 9-pin D-sub connector pin out is shown below.
Figure 3.3
RS-232C Name Pin Assignment

CF 1 DCD (Data Carrier Detect)
BB 2 RX (Receive Data)
BA 3 TX (Transmit Data)
CD 4 DTR (Data Terminal Ready)
AB 5 GND (Signal Ground)
CC 6 DSR (Data Set Ready)
CA 7 RTS (Request to Send)
CB 8 CTS (Clear to Send)
CE 9 RI (Ring Indicator)
RS485 Option:
Only COM2 can be selected for RS485 through SW1 located near the bios chip. To select
RS485 set SW1 to the following:
(1) On
(2) On
(3) Off
(4) On
Pin Assignment
1 RS485 TX-
2 RS485 TX+
5 GND
3
RS422 Option:
Only COM2 can be selected for RS422 through SW1 located near the bios chip. To select
RS422 set SW1 to the following:
(1) On
(2) On
(3) On
(4) On

1 TX- 6 RTS-
2 TX+ 7 RTS+
3 RX+ 8 CTS+
4 RX- 9 CTS-
5 GND
Shielding
In order to provide higher EMC immunity and maintain CE Mark compliance, the serial cables
must be shielded.
USB Ports
The two USB ports are 2.0 compliant and are located on the back I/O plate. In order to provide
higher EMC immunity and maintain CE Mark compliance, the USB cables must be shielded.
Network Interface
An RJ-45 Ethernet connector is available on the back I/O plate for connecting standard, unshielded
twisted pair cable. In order to meet EMC Directive, EN61000-4-6 test, the included ferrite (P/N
7COI0-0102-1500) must be installed on the Ethernet cable. The cable should be wrapped 2 times
through the ferrite with location as close as possible to the Wolverine RJ-45 connector. The
Wolverine also offers 802.11b, 2.4GHz wireless with an external antenna attached to the top of the
unit. A 2nd RJ-45 Ethernet connector is also offered as an option.

3
Remote Dimming Connector

Remote dimming is available by cabling a potentiometer to the Remote Pot connector. Maximum
cable length is limited to less than 3 meters.
Figure 3.4

1 Low 6
2 Wiper 7
3 High 8
4 9
5
4-20 mA Data Input

4-20mA Data Input is available by cabling either to the Remote Pot DB9 connector on the back I/O
plate, or to the 3-pin military connector on the optional gland plate. Maximum cable length is
limited to less than 30 meters. In the presence of severe RF interference (EN61000-4-3, 10V/m),
accuracy may be degraded to 2% of full scale.
Figure 3.5

6 EXC A EXC
7 RTN B RTN
C Chassis Gnd
EXC provides +20V output from the Wolverine for excitation of a remote transducer.
RTN is the return input to the Wolverine for current returned from the transducer.
3
Shielding
In order to provide higher EMC immunity and maintain CE Mark compliance, the Data Input cable
must be shielded.
Horn Output
The Horn Output is available on the back I/O plate through a terminal block. The terminal block is
rated for wire size 12-22 AWG and has a torque rating of 7 in-lb. max. For DC-powered
Wolverines, the terminal denoted by the (+) sign is +VDC switched through an internal relay, the (-
) terminal is DC return. For AC-powered Wolverines, the terminal denoted by the (+) sign is AC
Line voltage switched through an internal relay; the (-) terminal is AC return. Maximum cable
length is limited to less than 3 meters.
Figure 3.6

3
VGA Port
The VGA port is available on the back I/O plate. The standard 15-pin D-sub connector pin out is
shown below.
Figure 3.7

1 Red 9 +5V
2 Green 10 Ground
3 Blue 11 Pull-Up
4 N/C 12 DDC Data
5 V Ground 13 HSYNC
6 V Ground 14 VSYNC
7 V Ground 15 DDC Clock
8 V Ground
3
Mouse & Keyboard Ports

NEMA4 connectors are available on the gland plate to allow connections to a keyboard and mouse
without removal of the gland plate. This temporary maintenance connection is intended for such
things as initial setup, downloading data, uploading software, etc.
Two PS/2 ports are also available on the back I/O plate and labeled accordingly. This temporary
maintenance connection is intended for such things as initial setup, downloading data, uploading
software, etc.
NEMA4 Keyboard connector: Figure 3.8
Pin Signal
1 KB Data
2 NC
3 GND
4 +5V
5 KB Clock
6 NC
NEMA4 Mouse connector:
Pin Signal
1 Mouse Data
2 NC
3 GND
4 +5V
5 Mouse Clock
6 NC

Chapter System Operation
4
This chapter provides details of system operation. The following topics are covered:
• Setup
• System Peripherals
• External Keyboard and Mouse
• Graphic System
• Operator Interfaces
• Communications
• Heater Option
• Shutdown
Setup
This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D or nonhazardous
locations only. Before you attempt to power up the system for the first time, inspect the unit for
loose or damaged components.
Before you power up your system, you may want to attach a standard PS/2-type keyboard and
mouse to the external ports on the industrial computer. Most configuration activities that you
perform on the unit can be more easily completed using a keyboard and mouse.
MAN00055 Rev. E 4-1

4
Powering Up the Wolverine Industrial Computer

The system will power up when the ATX power button on the back I/O plate, gland plate, or front
keypad overlay is pressed. For DC-powered Wolverines, attach the +24V DC line to the (+)
connection, the return line to the (-) connection, and earth ground to the ground symbol connection
of the DC power terminal block on the back I/O plate. For AC-powered Wolverines, attach the
120/220V AC line to the “L” connection, the AC neutral to the “N” connection, and earth ground
to the “G” connection of the AC power terminal block on the back I/O plate. Product shall be
connected to no greater than a 50 AMP branch circuit.
During power up, the processor will run its normal diagnostic checks and indicate the presence of
any errors with a screen prompt.
Powering Down the Wolverine Industrial Computer

In a proper shutdown, the operating system will turn off the power supply and the unit will power
down. In the case of an emergency, the ATX switch can be depressed for a quick controlled
shutdown of Windows. The ATX switch can also be held down for four seconds for the system to
power down without Windows shutting down (this is not a recommended shut down process).
Explosion Hazard
Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or the area
is known to be nonhazardous. To ensure power has been switched off to the
unit, the main power should be removed at the circuit breaker, followed by
removal of the power cables at Wolverine’s power terminal block.
System Peripherals
Caution
Do not connect or disconnect external devices, such as a printer, keyboard,
mouse, USB, Ethernet, or 4-20mA Data Input while the unit is powered on
and the area is considered hazardous.
Do not install or remove Hard Disk Drive or PCMCIA cards while circuit is
alive. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the
equipment.
4
Removable Storage Media

The Wolverine industrial computer system has a single removable hard disk drive. The disk drive
has a standard EIDE/ATA-2 interface. The standard size is 40GB or larger. An optional dual
compact flash adapter may be substituted for the hard drive. An optional Solid State IDE Flash
Drive may also be substituted for the hard drive. Access to the storage media is from the bottom
access plate (Standard Wolverine – Figure 4.1) or from the rear access plate (Wolverine with heater
option - Figure 4.2). NOTE: To achieve the shock and vibe specs detailed in App B, a solid-state
media compact flash card must be used rather than the hard drive.
Figure 4.1 Storage Media Access – Standard Wolverine
MAN00055 Rev. E Chapter 4 System Operation 4-3

4
Figure 4.2 Storage Media Access – Wolverine with Heater Option
4
PCMCIA Slots
Wolverine industrial computers include two PCMCIA slots. These are accessible from the side
access plate (Standard Wolverine) or from the bottom access plate (Wolverine with heater option).
The Wireless Ethernet card occupies one slot. The customer can use the other slot. NOTE: The
lower slot is not available when the optional 2nd Ethernet port is selected.
Figure 4.3
Compact Flash Socket

The Wolverine contains one Compact Flash socket. This socket is not accessible by the user. Any
device populating the Compact Flash socket must be installed prior to the unit leaving the factory.
Figure 4.4
Compact Flash Socket

4
External Keyboard and Mouse

An external PS/2 keyboard and mouse can be attached via the two NEMA4 connectors (Figure 3.6)
on the gland plate or to the PS/2 keyboard and mouse connectors (Figure 1.2) on the back I/O plate.
The touch screen and PS/2 mouse will work simultaneously if the mouse is Microsoft or IBM PS/2
compatible.
Graphic System
The Wolverine industrial computers include a 15-inch color TFT (XGA resolution) screen. The
flat screen display has the following features:
• High Luminance (equal to or greater than 500cd/m2)
• Wide angle viewing
• A built-in back light with a long life back light tube (equal to or greater than 50,000 hrs)
• Optional Transflective technology – allows for sunlight readable viewing
Touch Screen
The Wolverine includes a Resistive touch screen on the flat panel display.
The touch screen has a resolution of 1024 x 1024 touch points (independent of screen size) and
provides an efficient and reliable method of entering information. The screen responds to the touch
of your finger with or without a glove.
The touch screen is connected internally to a USB port.
Touch Screen Driver for Windows

The touch screen driver is installed, configured and calibrated at the time of manufacture.
4
Communications
Your industrial computer has been configured with networking components that enable you to
establish new networks or connect to existing networks easily. If you intend to use Microsoft
NetBEUI, TCP/IP, or Direct Cable Connection, some minimal setup changes are required before
you can use the system for network applications. In Windows 2000 or XP systems, these settings
are changed using the Network application in the Control Panel program group.
Installed Network Components

Network Component Comments
PCI Network Adapter Automatically configured in system
TCP/IP Default settings must be changed before connecting to an existing network.
Contact your network administrator for appropriate settings.
NetBEUI Default settings must be changed before connecting to an existing network.
Contact your network administrator for appropriate settings.
System Identification Computer Name: Each system is uniquely identified by its serial number and
can be renamed before adding it to an existing network
Workgroup: The default workgroup is Workgroup. This should be renamed
before adding it to an existing network.
Heater Operation
Wolverine computers may be ordered with heaters to extend the operating temperature range.
Ambient temperatures below or near 0°c will require a warm-up period before power will be
applied to the internal ATX power supply. Once power is applied to the ATX power supply the
unit will power on automatically*. The heaters will continue to operate following power-up as
needed to maintain internal temperatures above the turn-off threshold.
The HTR LED on the front keypad overlay will illuminate steady when heat is being applied. If
the HTR LED flashes then an error has been detected within the heater control system. In this case
disconnect external power. Wait 10 seconds and reconnect power. If the problem persists contact
the GE Fanuc Hotline.
*NOTE: If the BIOS power setting for ‘Power on after Power Fail’ has been changed then
pressing the ATX switch will be required to power the unit on after the warm-up period. Under
most conditions the LCD should power on in less than 30 minutes. DC units will require a longer
warm-up time if the voltage is below 24VDC.

4
Front Overlay Keypad

Wolverine units with heater option include a front overlay keypad, which provides an ATX power
button, dimming buttons, and LEDs to indicate system status and I/O activity.
Figure 4.5
Keypad Buttons and Operation:

• ATX power button – press and release to power up or power down the unit. The ATX power
button can also be held down for four seconds for the system to power down without Windows
shutting down (this is not a recommended shut down process).
• Dimming buttons – used to change backlight intensity. There are seven distinct levels of
backlight intensity available. Pressing and releasing a dimming button will change the
backlight intensity one level. Holding down a dimming button will quickly scroll through the
various backlight intensity levels. The selected brightness level is stored in non-volatile
memory. On power up the unit will return to the last brightness level selected.
LED Operation:
LED Function Label Color Operation
Power Status PWR Green On when unit is powered on

OFF = Normal operation
ON STEADY = Heating Mode
Heater Status HTR Yellow FLASHING = Error Detected - unit will not heat or power on
Green when unit is running on external power
Green or Red when unit is running on battery power
Battery Status BAT Red Remains unlit on units that do not have battery backup
Hard Drive Status HDD Green On when there is Hard Drive/Compact Flash Activity
Green or Green when there is a Link on Ethernet 1
Ethernet 1 Status LINK1 Amber Amber when there is also Activity on Ethernet 1
Green or Green when there is a Link on Ethernet 2
Ethernet 2 Status LINK2 Amber Amber when there is also Activity on Ethernet 2
4
Shutting Down the Computer

Caution
To avoid damaging files, always shut down Windows software before
removing power from your Wolverine.
To shut down Windows 2000 or XP software, select Shut Down from the
Start menu.

Chapter BIOS Settings
It is normally not necessary to change the hardware configuration settings in the CMOS memory. If
settings become corrupted, follow the procedures here to reload the factory configuration.
1. Power down the computer, connect a keyboard and turn on the power. Enter the Setup mode
by pressing the DEL key when prompted during the computer power-up sequence. The main
BIOS setup utility screen will appear offering several options for changing settings.
2. Once in the Bios load optimized defaults – this will restore all defaults.
3. Save bios and exit.
MAN00055 Rev. E 5-1

Chapter Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
This chapter consists of “Self-Test Diagnostics,” “Troubleshooting,” and “Corrective Actions.”

“Self-Test Diagnostics,” describes how to respond to errors that could be detected by the automatic
self-test that is performed each time the Wolverine industrial computer powers up.
“Troubleshooting” contains tables of symptoms, their possible causes, and recommended corrective
actions. “Corrective Actions” contains detailed procedures that are too lengthy to include in the
Troubleshooting tables.
Self-Test Diagnostics
The computer automatically performs self-test diagnostics each time it is powered up. The self-test
consists of a series of checks that verify correct performance of the computer hardware. When the
self-test is being performed, you will see the message XXXX M OK displayed on the screen, where
XXXX is a number that increases until it matches the amount of usable memory.
System Test and Initialization

These routines test and initialize board hardware. If the routines encounter an error during the tests,
you will see an error message on the screen. There are two kinds of errors: fatal and non-fatal. If a
non-fatal error occurs, the system can usually continue the boot up sequence. Non-fatal error
messages usually appear on the screen with the following instruction:
Press <F1> to RESUME
Write down the message and press the F1 key to continue the bootup sequence.
System Configuration Verification

These routines check the current system configuration against the values stored in the CMOS
memory. If they don’t match, the program will generate an error message. To correct this condition,
you will need to run the BIOS setup program and correct the configuration information in memory.
There are three situations in which you might need to change the CMOS settings:
1. You are starting your system for the first time.
2. You have changed the hardware attached to your system.
3. The CMOS memory had lost power and the configuration information has been erased. If this
has happened, call GE Fanuc’s Support Hotline at 1-800-GEFANUC (800-433-2682).
MAN00055 Rev. E 6-1

6
Troubleshooting
Power up
Symptom Possible Causes Solution
Computer does not power up. 1. Power not on. 1. Make sure that computer
2. Improper shutdown – is plugged in. Make sure
loss of power that power source is
functioning properly.
3. Unit in ‘warm-up’ mode
(Wolverine with heaters 2. Depress “ATX” button
only) HTR LED will be for 4 seconds. Depress
on Steady the button again to
power on.
4. Error within heater
control system 3. Wait for unit to finish
(Wolverine with heaters heating. LCD should
only) HTR LED will be power on after warm-up
flashing is complete. Press the
ATX switch if LCD
does not power on
automatically after
warm-up period. See
Chapter 4 – Heater
Operation for more
details.
4. Disconnect external
power. Wait 10 seconds
and reconnect power. If
the problem persists
contact the GE Fanuc
Hotline.
Display is blank. See “Display” topic in this See “Display” topic in this
Chapter Chapter
Safe Recovery Error Occurs on initial power up if the The computer will power up
message displayed. unit is accidentally turned off normally.
without first shutting down the
Windows software.
CMOS checksum error — CMOS battery failure. This battery has a lifetime of up to
Defaults loaded 10 years under normal operating
CMOS battery failed conditions. For more information,
see “CMOS Checksum Error”
message displayed.
topic in this chapter.
A screen appears just after The DEL key has been Cycle power again. The computer
powerup, or just after reset, which accidentally pressed. will power up normally.
has the title “CMOS Setup
Utility.”
The computer has reset even The CTRL-ALT-DEL keys were This should never be done, unless
though the power was not pressed twice at the same time. you are attempting to reset the
interrupted. computer.
6
Display
Characters are dim. Computer screen is in direct light. Change lighting or adjust contrast.
Dimming is turned down Adjust dimming knob to increase
brightness
Display is blank. System temperature is outside Keep unit in 0C to 50C
operating range. temperature range.
Computer is set up for invalid Reboot. Select VGA Mode
video mode.
Screen saver is active. Touch the screen.
Memory
Out of Memory message is System ran out of memory for the Check the memory requirements
displayed or insufficient memory application. for the application. (Refer to the
error occurs during operation. application documentation.)
Too many terminate and stay Modify the startup folder to use
resident (TSR) programs running. only those TSR applications that
are really needed.
External PS/2 Mouse

Cursor does not respond to mouse Mouse not plugged in. Power down computer. Plug
movement mouse into mouse port on
computer and reboot.
The type of mouse is not Use a PS/2 mouse.
supported.
System is busy. Press CTRL-ALT-DELETE to
view task list.
Mouse not detected. Restart computer with external
mouse connected.
MAN00055 Rev. E Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting 6-3

6
Keyboard
External keyboard locks up The type of keyboard is not Use PS/2 compatible keyboard
supported.
Keyboard not plugged into Plug keyboard in. (Power down
keyboard port on the computer. computer first.)
System is busy. Press CTRL-ALT-DELETE to
view task list.
Communications
COM Port Connection

Communications between the host COM port not configured in Verify that the COM port is
computer and the controller are system. configured in the system.
unsuccessful.
Cabling between computer and Verify that the cable between the
controller. computer and the controller is
correctly wired.
Baud rate and parity configured Verify that the baud rate and
incorrectly. parity on the computer are
consistent with those on the
controller.
Wrong address. Verify that the slave address is
correct.
Network Communications
Conflicts on network. IP Address not unique. Change the IP address to a unique
address. (Contact your system
administrator if this or other
settings need to be changed.)
Identical computer name. Change computer name.
Computers cannot share computer
name on network.
6
Printing
Printer will not turn on. Cables not connected properly. Ensure that the cables are properly
Printer power cord not plugged in. connected and that the power cord
is connected to the electrical
outlet.
Printer will not print. Printer is not turned on. Turn on the printer
Printer is not online. Set the printer to online.
The device drivers for your Install the correct printer drivers
application are not installed. for your application in Windows.
Printer that is set up for a network Connect the printer to the network.
is not connected to the network.
Printer cable is too long, Replace the cable.
unshielded, or defective.
Printer is offline. Paper tray is empty. Fill the paper tray with paper. Set
printer to online.
Printer prints garbled information. Correct printer drivers not Install the correct printer driver.
installed.
Cable is not connected properly. Ensure that the printer cable is
connected properly to the
computer.
Problem specific to printer. Run a printer self-test. Refer to the
documentation provided with your
printer for instructions. If the self-
test fails, the problem is printer-
specific. The printing section of
the software documentation and in
Windows online Help may also be
helpful.
MAN00055 Rev. E Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting 6-5

6
Corrective Actions
CMOS Checksum Error

If the CMOS battery has failed, the following error messages will be displayed on the screen:
CMOS checksum error - Defaults loaded
CMOS battery failed
This battery has a lifetime of up to 10 years under normal operating conditions. If the battery
failed, contact the GE Fanuc Hotline.
Appendix Technical Data
Mechanical Specifications
Front Assembly
The Model Wolverine industrial computer provides a display screen and touch screen.
Main Chassis
The main chassis is manufactured from aluminum and houses the motherboard, which is mounted
securely in a vertical plane. The PC/104, PCMCIA add-on board plugs directly onto the
motherboard. Two access panels for the hard drive and PC cards are also located on the main
chassis.
Gland Plate
The gland plate is fixed to the main chassis so that yoke and pedestal mounting configurations have
necessary hardware to wire the unit in accordance with the National Electrical Code for Hazardous
Locations, and also to maintain the enclosure protection rating.
Note
Modification of Gland Plate invalidates the Type 4/4X enclosure rating.
MAN00055 Rev. E A-1

A
Functional Specifications
CPU and Memory
Microprocessor Pentium-M processor 1.6GHz∗
User Memory 512MB, DDR266 minimum installed by factory.*
Operating System Windows 2K or XP
Hard Disk 40Gbyte minimum*, IDE standard 2.5 inch mounting
Two PCMCIA Slots 16 bit PC Cards
Compact Flash Optional
PC/104 connector Populated by PCMCIA PC/104 adapter
Display
Display Variants 15 inch Color TFT – XGA
Active Display Area 15 inch - 246 x 184.5 mm
Power Requirements – DC Powered Wolverines without heaters

DC Input 24 VDC,
Voltage Range 18-30 VDC
Power Rating 120Watts, 5.0Amp max
Requirements – DC Powered Wolverines with heaters

DC Input 24 VDC
Voltage Range 18-30 VDC
Power Rating 560Watts, 18.6Amp max
Power Requirements– AC Powered Wolverines without heaters

AC Input 120/220 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Voltage Range 100-240 VAC
Power Rating For 100 VAC: 80 Watts, 0.8 Amp max
For 240 VAC: 120 Watts, 0.5 Amp max
Power Requirements– AC Powered Wolverines with heaters

AC Input 120/220 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Voltage Range 100-240 VAC
Power Rating For 100 VAC: 780 Watts, 5.8 Amp max
For 240 VAC: 780 Watts, 2.9 Amp max
∗
Contact your local distributor for upgrades.
A-2 Wolverine Industrial Computer - Hardware User's Manual – April 2007 MAN00055 Rev. E
A
Ports
Parallel Port LPT1 (back I/O plate)
Serial Ports COM1 external RS232 port (back I/O plate)
COM2 external RS232 port (back I/O plate), Optional
RS485/422
COM3 optional (no wireless Ethernet available)
COM4 optional (no wireless Ethernet available)
Keyboard Port PS/2 (back I/O plate), NEMA4 connector (optional)
Mouse Port PS/2 (back I/O plate), NEMA4 connector (optional)
USB Ports USB1 external USB port (back I/O plate)
USB2 external USB port (back I/O plate)
NEMA4 USB (gland plate) (optional)
Panel dimming Back I/O plate; Remote POT – (optional)
Front Overlay Keypad (Wolverine with heater option
only)
Data Input 4-20mA Data Input (optional)
Communication 10/100 Ethernet (RJ-45) (back I/O plate)
2nd 10/100 Ethernet (RJ-45) (back I/O plate) (optional)
VGA Port VGA port (back I/O plate) (Wolverine with heater
option only)
Physical – Standard Wolverine

Dimensions 404 mm wide (15.90 inches)
349 mm high (13.75 inches) without antenna
477 mm high (18.78 inches) with antenna
110 mm deep (4.32 inches) without gland plate
189 mm deep (7.44 inches)
with standard gland plate (See Figure 1.5)
with optional gland plate (See Figure 1.6)
Weight 15.0 Kg (33 lbs) with gland plate
13.6 Kg (30 lbs) without gland plate
Physical – Wolverine with heater option

Dimensions 404 mm wide (15.90 inches)
349 mm high (13.75 inches) without antenna
477 mm high (18.78 inches) with antenna
128 mm deep (5.02 inches) without gland plate
with standard gland plate (See Figure 1.5)
with optional gland plate (See Figure 1.6)
Weight 15.9 Kg (35 lbs) with gland plate
14.5 Kg (32 lbs) without gland plate
MAN00055 Rev. E Appendix A Technical Data A-3

Appendix Agency Approvals, Government Regulations
B & General Specifications
Agency Approvals
Description Agency Comments
Standard or
Marking
N.A. Safety for Industrial Control Certification by Underwriter's
Equipment Laboratories to UL508 standard and
equivalent CSA C22.2 No 142 -
M1987standard
N.A. Safety for Hazardous Locations Certification by Underwriter's
Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Laboratories to UL1604 standard and
equivalent CSA C22.2 No 213-M1987
standard
Low Voltage Directive Self-Declaration in accordance with
European Safety for Industrial Control European Directive
Equipment
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive Certification by Competent Body in
European EMC for Industrial Control accordance with European Directive
Equipment
Explosive Atmospheres Directive Certification in accordance with

European Safety for Hazardous Locations European Directive and Independent
Equipment Group II, Category 3, Gas 3rd Party Assessment Certificate;
Note: The agency approvals listed above and on the Declaration of Conformities are believed to be accurate,
however, a product’s agency approvals should be verified by the marking on the unit itself
MAN00055 Rev. E Appendix B Product Agency Approvals, Standards, and General Specifications B-1
B
Government Regulations
U.S., Canadian, Australian and European regulations are intended to prevent equipment from
interfering with approved transmissions or with the operation of other equipment through the AC
power source.
The Wolverine has been tested and found to meet or exceed the requirements of U.S. (47 CFR 15),
Canadian (ICES-003), Australian (AS/NZS 3548), and European (EN55022) regulations for Class
A digital devices when installed in accordance with the guidelines noted in the appropriate product
section. These various regulations share commonality in content and test levels with that of CISPR
22 and based on this commonality testing to the each individual standard was deemed
inappropriate.
The FCC requires the following to be published according to FCC guidelines:
Note
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with
the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at
his own expense.
Note
Any changes or modifications to the product or installation that are not expressly
approved by GE Fanuc Automation could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment under FCC rules
Industry Canada requires the following note to be published:
Note
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
B-2 Wolverine Industrial Computer – Hardware User's Manual – April 2007 MAN00055 Rev. E
B
General Specifications
Environmental Conditions
Temperature Operation 0°C to 50°C

AC & DC Powered Storage -20°C to 70°C
Wolverines without
heaters
Temperature Operation -40°C to 50°C

AC Powered Wolverines Storage -40°C to 70°C
with heaters
Temperature Operation -30°C to 50°C

DC Powered Wolverines Storage -40°C to 70°C
with heaters
Humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Enclosure Protection NEMA 4/4X, UL50 Type 4/4X
Vibration (Operating) 2g, 10 - 500Hz (compact flash media only)
Shock (Operating) 40 G pulse, 3 – Axis (compact flash media only)
B
DRW00245
Hazardous (Classified) Location Non-Hazardous Location
Class I, Division 2 Groups A, B, C and D
Keyboard Port
Associated
Wolverine: Mouse port Nonincendive Field
Wiring Apparatus
Ethernet
USB*
*Applicable to Wolverine AMS2000 only
1. Nonincendive Circuit Parameters:

Keyboard, Mouse, & Ethernet ports
Vmax = 5VDC Voc = 5 VDC
Imax = 100mA Isc = 100mA
Ci = 0.1 µF Ca = 1000 µF
Li = 0 mH La = 5 mH
* USB port (Wolverine AMS2000 only)

Vmax = 5VDC Voc = 5 VDC
Ci = 0.1 µF Ca = 15 µF
Li = 0 mH La = 3 µH
2. Selected Associated Nonincendive Field Wiring Apparatus shall satisfy the following:
Associated Non-Incendive
Wolverine Field Wiring Apparatus
Voc ≤ Vmax
Isc ≤ Imax
Ca ≥ Ci + C cable
La ≥ Li + L cable
3. If the electrical parameters of the cable are unknown, the following values may be
used: Capacitance – 60 pF/ft
Inductive – 0.20 uH/ft
4. Nonincendive Field Wiring must be installed in accordance with Article 501.4(B)(3) of the
National Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA 70.
B-4 Wolverine Industrial Computer – Hardware User's Manual – April 2007 MAN00055 Rev. E
B
Non-Hazardous Location Hazardous (Classified) Location

Class I, Division 2 Groups A,B,C and D
Wolverine
Associated
Nonincendive Field
+ Data Input Port
Wiring Apparatus (Voc, Isc, La, Ca)
PROTECTIVE
GND
1. Nonincendive Circuit Parameters (Data Input Port):

Vmax = 30VDC Voc = 30VDC
Ci = 0.055 µF Ca = 200 µF
Li = 0 mH La = 0.20 mH
2. Selected Associated Nonincendive Field Wiring Apparatus shall satisfy the

following:
Associated Non-Incendive
Wolverine Field Wiring Apparatus
Voc ≤ Vmax
Isc ≤ Imax
Ca ≥ Ci + C cable
La ≥ Li + L cable
3. If the electrical parameters of the cable are unknown, the following values may be
used: Capacitance – 60 pF/ft
Inductive – 0.20 uH/ft
4. Nonincendive Field Wiring must be installed in accordance with Article 501.4(B)(3) of

the National Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA 70.
Index
H
A Hard disk drive, 4-3
Audible warning, 4-2 Heaters, 1-9
B I
Battery Backup, 3-3 Initial startup, 4-1
Installation
C panel mounting, 2-1
Installed network components, 4-7
CD-ROM drive, 4-5
CMOS
battery, 6-6
K
failed battery, 6-2 Keyboard
settings, 6-1 troubleshooting, 6-4
CMOS checksum error, 6-6 Keypad, 1-9
COM ports
location, 3-4
pinout, 3-6 L
Communications, 4-7
troubleshooting, 6-4 LPT1
pinout, 3-5
Connectors, 3-1
layout, 3-4
Corrective Actions, 6-6 M
Memory
D troubleshooting, 6-3
Mounting
Diagnostics
guidelines, 2-1
bootup sequence, 6-1
self-test, 6-1
system configuration verification, 6-1
system test and initialization, 6-1
N
Display Network communications
troubleshooting, 6-3 troubleshooting, 6-4
Network components, 4-7
E Network interface, 1-8
Error messages
AUTOCONFIG/DEFAULT I/O, 6-4
O
CMOS checksum error, 6-2, 6-6 Optional features, 1-4
CMOS Setup Utility, 6-2 Optional I/O, 1-8
Insufficient memory, 6-3
non-fatal, 6-1
Out of Memory, 6-3 P
Safe Recovery, 6-2
External keyboard and mouse, 4-6 Parallel port
pinout, 3-5
Peripherals, 4-2
F PLC/CPU connection
troubleshooting, 6-4
FCC notice, B-2 Power input, 1-8, 3-1
Front access panel, 1-4, 1-6 Powering up, 4-2
G Printer port, 3-5
Printing
Graphic system, 4-6 troubleshooting, 6-5
MAN00055 Rev. E Index-1

Index
R
Reset
accidental, 6-2
RFI standards, B-2
S
Self-test diagnostics, 6-1
Serial communication ports, 3-6
Serial Mouse
Shutting down the computer, 4-9
Specifications
functional, A-2
general, B-3
mechanical, A-1
Standard features, 1-3
System Configuration Verification, 6-1
System Test and Initialization, 6-1
T
Temperature
effect on contrast setting, 6-3
Touch Screen, 4-6
driver for Windows, 4-6
Troubleshooting, 6-2
communications, 6-4
display, 6-3
keyboard, 6-4
memory, 6-3
network communications, 6-4
PLC/CPU connection, 6-4
powerup, 6-2
printing, 6-5
serial mouse, 6-3
TSRs, 6-3
W
Warning, audible, 4-2
Index-2 WOLVERINE Industrial Computer Hardware User’s Manual–April 2007 MAN00055 Rev. E
Technical Information
RTD TH13, TH14 and TH15
RTD assemblies in Thermowells with spring loaded insert and
enclosure for process industry
Areas of application
The TH13, TH14 and TH15 temperature sensors are RTD
assemblies installed in Thermowells and designed for use in
all types of process industries, including harsh environments,
due to their rugged design.
The sensor is made up of a measurement probe with an
insulated RTD element, sheath and a thermowell made of
bar-stock material.
The sensor assemblies can be used in process industries such
as:
• Chemicals
• Petrochemical
• Power plants
• Refineries
• Offshore Platforms
Head transmitters
Instead of directly wiring your temperature sensors to your
control system, use transmitters to reduce wiring and
maintenance costs while increasing measurement accuracy.
Field transmitters
Temperature field transmitters with HART® or
FOUNDATION Fieldbus™ protocol for highest reliability in
harsh industrial environments. Blue backlit display with large
measured value, bargraph and fault condition indication for
ease of reading.
Your benefits
• One source shopping for temperature measurement
solutions. World class transmitter with integrated sensor
offering for heavy process industry applications.
• Remove and install straight out of the box!
• Improved galvanic isolation on most devices (2 kV)
• Simplified model structure: Competitively priced, offers
great value. Easy to order and reorder. A single model
number includes sensor, thermowell and transmitter
assembly for a complete point solution
• All iTEMP® transmitters provide long term
stability ≤ 0.05 % per year
TI110R/24/ae
TH13, TH14, TH15
Function and system design

Measuring principle The RTD (Resistance Temperature Detector) element consists of an electrical resistance with a value of 100 Ω
at 0 °C (called Pt100, in compliance with IEC 60751), which increases at higher temperatures according to a
coefficient characteristic of resistor material (platinum). In industrial thermometers that comply with the
IEC 60751 standard, the value of this coefficient is α = 0.00385 °C-1, calculated between 0 and 100 °C
(32 and 212 °F).
Measuring system
Example of an application of the temperature assemblies

Water - heat Differential
Calculation of heat quantity which is emitted or absorbed by a water flow in a heating or cooling system. The quantity of
heat is calculated from the process variable for ∆p flow (Q) and the differential from the feed and return temperature
(T2 - T1). Bidirectional energy calculations, such as the calculating systems with changing flow direction (charging/
discharging the heat accumulator) are also possible.
Energy manager RMS621

Energy conservation and cost expenditures are significant issues in today's industry. Accurate flow monitoring
and calculation is the basis for thorough analysis and billing of energy. This data can serve as a basis to maximize
savings potential and help in controlling operational costs on a daily basis. Endress+Hauser's energy managers
provide accurate and reliable calculations for the monitoring and control of energy consumption (both
produced and consumed) according to international standards, e.g. IAPWS-IF 97, AGA8, ISO 5167 etc. For
RMS621 details see Technical Information.
iTEMP® TMT162 Temperature Field Transmitter
Aluminum or stainless steel dual compartment explosion - proof enclosure and compact, fully potted
electronics provide the ultimate protection in harshest environments. TMT162 prevents costly plant
shutdowns by detecting corrosion on RTDs or thermocouples before it corrupts the measured value.
Endress+Hauser's Field Temperature Transmitters with backlit display and sensor backup functionality are
designed with safety in mind to keep your plant, equipment and personnel safe. For TMT162 details see
Technical Information.
Deltabar S/Cerabar S
The evolution series of Cerabar S/Deltabar S represents a decisive step ahead in making pressure
instrumentation better and safer for the process industry. The development of new products thrives especially
on the knowledge, commitment and experience of staff members. Permanent high performance can only be
achieved if dedicated and enthusiastic people provide their ideas. Endress+Hauser's instruments are not only
supposed to distinguish themselves for customers and users by technological novelties but also by the presence
of people supporting this progress, be it in service, sales or production. For Deltabar S & Cerabar S details see
2 Endress+Hauser
TH13, TH14, TH15
Equipment architecture The single and duplex element RTDs are designed to measure temperature in a variety of processes and
laboratory applications. These RTDs are specifically designed for use in two different process temperature
ranges and they will provide accurate and repeatable temperature measurement through a broad temperature
range of -328 to 1112 °F (-200 to 600 °C). Low range thin film RTDs -58 to 392 °F (-50 to 200 °C) are
constructed using silver plated and copper internal leads, PTFE wire insulations with potting compounds to
resist moisture penetration. High range RTDs -328 to 1112 °F (-200 to 600 °C) are constructed with nickel
internal leads inside swaged MgO insulated cables to allow higher temperature measurements at the RTD
element and to provide higher temperature lead protection along the sheath.
Measurement range Construction Model code (class and type of sensor) max. range
TH13-_ _ _ _ _ (A/C/E/G/J/L) _ _ _ _ _
Low temperature range TH14-_ _ _ _ _ (A/C/E/G/J/L) _ _ _ _ _ -58 to 392 °F (-50 to 200 °C)
TH15-_ _ _ (A/C/E/G/J/L) _ _ _ _ _
TH13-_ _ _ _ _ (B/D/F/H/K/M) _ _ _ _ _
High temperature range TH14-_ _ _ _ _(B/D/F/H/K/M) _ _ _ _ _ -328 to 1112 °F (-200 to 600 °C)
TH15-_ _ _ (B/D/F/H/K/M) _ _ _ _ _ _
! Note!
Options J, K, L, M are duplex platinum elements of two sensors inside the same sheath.
Calibration specifications 3 point sensor calibration

-40 to 0 °C 0 to 100 °C +40 to 215 °C
-40 to 32 °F 32 to 212 °F 104 to 420 °F
Minimum length requirements for calibrated sensors = 6"
! Note!
Use option code ’B’ (Block: Test; calibration) for RTD calibration, the three temperature points need to be
specified in 5 °C (9 °F) increments.
The manufacturer provides comparison temperature calibrations from -40 to +215 °C (-40 to +420 °F) on the
international temperature scale of 1990. Calibrations are traceable to standards maintained by the national
institute of standards and technology (NIST). Calibration services are in conformance with ASTM E220, IEC
17025 and ANSI/NCSL Z540-1-1994. The report of calibration is referenced to the serial number of the RTD
assembly.
Three point calibrations are provided, given that the specified temperatures are within the recommended range
and the minimum length requirements are met as specified. The minimum length is based on overall length ’x’
of the spring loaded insert.
Endress+Hauser 3
TH13, TH14, TH15
Electronics
Family of temperature Measurement assemblies with iTEMP® transmitters are an installation ready solution to improve the
transmitters functionality of temperature measurement by increasing accuracy and reliability when compared to direct
wired sensors. Overall installation costs are lower than with direct wired sensors, since an inexpensive pair of
signal (4 to 20 mA) wires can be run over long distances.
PC programmable devices PC programmable head transmitters offer you extreme flexibility and help control costs with the ability to stock
TMT180 and TMT181 one device and program it for your needs. Regardless of your choice of output, all iTEMP® transmitters can be
configured quickly and easily with a PC. To help you with this task, Endress+Hauser offers free software
ReadWin® 2000 which can be downloaded from our website. Go to www.readwin2000.com to download
ReadWin® 2000 today. For details see Technical Information.
HART® TMT182 head HART® communication is all about easy, reliable data access and getting better information more
transmitter inexpensively. iTEMP® transmitters integrate seamlessly into your existing control system and provide painless
access to preventative diagnostic information.
Configuration with a DXR275 or 375 hand-held or a PC with configuration program (FieldCare, ReadWin®
2000) or configure with AMS or PDM. For details, see Technical Information.
Field transmitter TMT162 - Field transmitter with HART® communication, FOUNDATION Fieldbus™ protocol and blue backlit display.
Dual compartment housing Can be read easily from a distance, in sunlight and at night. Large measurement value, bargraph and fault
indication display. Benefits are: dual sensor input, highest reliability in harsh industrial environments,
mathematic functions, thermometer drift monitoring, sensor back-up functionality, corrosion detection and
sensor transmitter matching by accepting Callendar Van Dusen constants. For details, see Technical
Information.
Field transmitter TMT142 - Field transmitter with HART® communication. The one channel TMT142 allows for cost effective replacement
Single compartment housing of smaller transmitters with tiny display and old style analog transmitters. Large and brilliant blue backlit
display. Regardless of whether you install the transmitter in a dark location or in direct sunlight, you still get a
clear temperature reading. Reliable temperature measurement through advanced diagnostics. For details, see
PROFIBUS® PA TMT184 head Universally programmable head transmitter with PROFIBUS®-PA fieldbus communication. Converting various
transmitter input signals into a digital output signal. High accuracy in the total ambient temperature range. Swift and easy
operation, visualisation and maintenance using a PC direct from the control panel, e. g. using operating
software such as FieldCare, Simatic PDM or AMS. DIP switch for address setting, makes start up and
maintenance save and reliable. For details, see Technical Information.
Performance characteristics
Response time 63% response time per ASTM E644
RTD assembly TH15 without thermowell

Construction RTD insert ø ¼"
High temperature range 3s
Low temperature range 9s
! Note!
Response time for the sensor assembly without transmitter.
4 Endress+Hauser
TH13, TH14, TH15
Response time examples for RTD assemblies with thermowell TH13 and TH14
Construction Stepped thermowell Tapered thermowell ¾" straight thermowell
High temperature range 20 s 25 s 30 s
Low temperature range 25 s 30 s 35 s
! Note!
Response times for RTD assemblies with thermowell are provided for general design guidance without
transmitter
When the temperature of a process media changes, the output signal of a RTD assembly follows this change
after a certain time delay. The physical cause is the time related to heat transfer from the process media through
the thermowell and the insert to the sensor element (RTD). The manner in which the reading follows the
change in temperature of the assembly over time is referred to as the response time. Variables that influence
or impact the response time are:
• Wall thickness of thermowell
• Spacing between RTD insert and thermowell
• Sensor packaging
• Process parameters such as media, flow velocity, etc.
Maximum measured error RTD corresponding to IEC 60751
Class max. Tolerances (°C)

A ±(0.15 + 0.002 · |t|1), Temperature range: -100 °C to 450 °C
B ±(0.3 + 0.005 · |t|1), Temperature range: -200 °C to 600 °C
1) |t| = absolute value °C
! Note!
For measurement errors in °F, calculate using equation above in °C, then multiply the outcome by 1.8.
Measurement accuracy
transmitter
TMT180 TMT181 multi- TMT182 TMT184 TMT162 FF TMT142 and TMT162
Pt100 PCP functional PCP HART® PROFIBUS®- Field trans- HART® Field transmitter
PA mitter
Accuracy
Digital D/A2
0.36 °F (0.2 °C) 0.36 °F (0.2 °C) 0.36 °F (0.2 °C) 0.27 °F 0.18 °F 0.18 °F 0.02%
or 0.08%1 or 0.08%2 or 0.08%2 (0.15 °C) (0.1 °C) (0.1 °C)
1) % is related to the adjusted measurement range (the larger value applies)

2) % relates to the set span. Accuracy = digital + D/A accuracy
Transmitter long-term ≤ 0.18 °F / year (≤ 0.1 °C/year) or ≤ 0.05% / year

stabiltiy Data under reference conditions; % relates to the set span. The larger value applies.
Insulation resistance Insulation resistance between terminals and probe sheath, test voltage 250 V.
• ≥100 MΩ at 77 °F (25 °C)
• ≥10 MΩ at 572 °F (300 °C)
Endress+Hauser 5
TH13, TH14, TH15
Self heating RTD elements are not self-powered and require a small current be passed through the device to provide a
voltage that can be measured. Self-heating is the rise of temperature within the element itself, caused by the
current flowing through the element. This self-heating appears as a measurement error and is affected by the
thermal conductivity and velocity of the process being measured; it is negligible when an Endress+Hauser
iTEMP® temperature transmitter is connected.
Sensor current Sensor current of Endress+Hauser iTEMP® transmitters
Transmitter type Sensor current
TMT180 & TMT181 PCP ≤ 0.6 mA
TMT182 HART® ≤ 0.2 mA
TMT184 PROFIBUS®-PA ≤ 0.2 mA
TMT162 HART®, FF Field transmitter ≤ 0.3 mA
TMT142 HART® Field transmitter ≤ 0.3 mA
Galvanic isolation Galvanic isolation of Endress+Hauser iTEMP® transmitters (input/output)
Transmitter type Galvanic isolation
TMT181 PCP Û = 3.75 kV AC
TMT182 HART®
TMT184 PROFIBUS®-PA
U = 2 kV AC
TMT162 HART®, FF Field transmitter
TMT142 HART® Field transmitter
6 Endress+Hauser
TH13, TH14, TH15
Wiring
Wiring diagrams Type of sensor connection
Head mounted transmitter Field mounted transmitter
T09-TH1112xx-04-xx-XX-ae-000 T09-TH131415-04-xx-xx-ae-000
Terminal block mounted
T09-TH1112xx-04-xx-XX-ae-001
! Note!
The blocks and transmitters are shown as they sit inside the heads in reference to the conduit opening.
Endress+Hauser 7
TH13, TH14, TH15
Wire specifications 24AWG, 19 strand silver plated copper with 0.010” PTFE extruded outer.
Electrical connection
Flying leads, standard 3" for wiring in connection head, head mounted transmitter or terminal block mounted
Flying leads, 5½" for wiring with TMT162 or TMT142 assemblies
Design of leads
Flying leads 3" or 5½" with

brass crimped sleeves
Installation conditions
Orientation No restrictions for installation orientation.
Installation instructions
T09-TH1314x15-11-xx-xx-ae-000
Examples for pipe installation - In pipes with a small cross section the sensor tip should reach or extend slightly past the
center line of the pipe (=U).
A: TH13 assembly socket weld installation
B: Threaded, tilted installation of TH13 assembly
C: Flange installation of TH14 assembly
8 Endress+Hauser
TH13, TH14, TH15
Immersion
Minimum immersion per ASTM E644, ∆T ≤ 0.09 °F (0.05 °C)
Immersion RTD assembly TH15 without thermowell
Construction RTD Insert ø ¼"

Minimum Immersion (Inch)
High temperature range 1¼"
Low temperature range ¾"
For temperature assemblies with themowell (TH13 and TH14) the minimum immersion is the depth to which
the thermowell is immersed in the medium, measured from the tip. To minimize errors from ambient
temperature the following minimum immersion lengths are recommended:
Construction Minimum Immersion (Inch)
Stepped thermowell 2½"
Tapered thermowell 4½"

¾" straight thermowell 4"
Weld in thermowell 4½"
Environmental conditions
Ambient temperature Housing without head-mounted transmitter

• Aluminum pressure die-cast housing -40 to 300 °F (-40 to 150 ºC)
• Plastic housing -40 to 185 °F (-40 to 85 °C)
• Deep drawn SS housing without display -40 to 300 °F (-40 to 150 °C)
Housing with head-mounted transmitter
• -40 to 185 °F (-40 to 85 °C)
Field transmitter without display
• -40 to 185 °F (-40 to 85 °C)
Shock and vibration resistance 4g / 2 to 150 Hz as per IEC 60 068-2-6
Process conditions
Thermowells are used in measuring the temperature of a moving fluid in a conduit, where the stream exerts
an appreciable force. The limiting value for the thermowells is governed by the temperature, the pressure and
the speed of the medium, the immersion length, the materials of the thermowells and the medium, etc.
Calculations for stress and vibration of thermowells can be done according to ASME PTC 19.3-1974 standard,
please consult Endress+Hauser.
Endress+Hauser 9
TH13, TH14, TH15
Mechanical construction
Design, dimensions All dimensions in inches. For the values related to this graphic please refer to the tables and equations below.
T09-TH131415-06-xx-xx-ae-000
*For TH13 thermowells with ½"NPT - 1" Process thread length and ¾" Hex length dimensions are reversed.
Pos. P: Pipe size
Pos. Q: Thermowell diameter
Pos. T: Lag dimension (see product structure)
Pos. U: Thermowell immersion length
Pos. XA, A: Immersion length RTD sensor; Thermowell drilled length
Pos. X: Insert overall length
10 Endress+Hauser
TH13, TH14, TH15
All thermowells are marked with:

• Material I.D.
• CRN# (Canadian Registration Number)
• Heat No.
Dimensions of TH13
U E T Process Shape of Thermowell øQ

connection
2½", 4½", 7½", Hex nipple = 1" 3" or ½" NPT Stepped (Standard duty) 5/8"
11
10½" or specified length Tapered (Heavy duty) /16"
specified length Nipple Union 1" to 6" in
¾" NPT Stepped (Standard duty) ¾"
2" to 18" in Nipple ½" increments
Tapered (Heavy duty) 7/8"
½" increments (NUN) = 4" or 7"
Material: 1" NPT Stepped (Standard duty) 7/8"
Steel or 316SS Tapered (Heavy duty) 1 1/16"
¾" Socket weld Stepped (Standard duty) ¾"

Tapered (Heavy duty) ¾"
1" Socket weld Stepped (Standard duty) 7/8"

Tapered (Heavy duty) 1"
¾" weld in Tapered (Heavy duty) 1.050"

1" weld in Tapered (Heavy duty) 1.315"
Immersion length RTD sensor = Thermowell drilled length XA = A = U + 1½" + T

Insert overall length X = A + E + 1"
P = Pipe size
• Nom. ¾"; Dia. = 1.050"
• Nom. 1"; Dia. = 1.315"
Dimensions of TH14
Flange rating: ASME B16.5
U E T Flange size ø Q, Tapered

version
2", 4", 7", 10" Hex nipple = 1" specified length 1" 7/8"
specified length or 1" to 10" in
2" to 18" Nipple Union ½" increments 1½" 11/16"
in ½" increments Nipple 2" 11/16"
(NUN) = 4" or 7"
Material:
Steel or 316SS
Immersion length RTD sensor - Thermowell drilled length XA = A = U + 2" + T

Insert overall length X = A + E + 1"
Dimensions of TH15 (without Thermowell)
Immersion length RTD sensor XA E

4", 6", 9", 12", 14" Hex nipple = 1"
specified length 4" to 30" in ½" increments or
Nipple Union Nipple (NUN) = 4" or 7"
Weight From 1 to 10 lbs
Endress+Hauser 11
TH13, TH14, TH15
Material Wetted parts 316SS

Thermowell material
Wetted parts 316SS for usage up to 1700 °F (927 °C). 316SS has good oxidation and corrosion resistance in a
wide range of industrial environments with improved resistance to mild acid and pitting corrosion. Exposure
to carbide precipitation, reduces corrosion resistance in the 800 to 1000 °F (427 to 538 °C) temperature range.
Good mechanical properties for -300 to 1450 °F (-184 to 788 °C) temperature range. Generally regarded as
standard protection tube material, other materials are available upon request.
System components
Housing
Type of housing Specification
Connection head Aluminum • Material: Die-cast Aluminum head

• Sensor connection: ½" NPT Female
• Cable entry: ½" NPT or ¾" NPT Female. ½" NPT has a Al reducer bushing
• Body paint: Spray SPU, RAL5012
Cover paint: Spray SPU, RAL7035
• Coating thread (body-cover), lubricant acc. E+H standard, MgO coating;
benefits include ease of opening/closing cover and improved thread
engagement. Improves lifetime of the connection head.
• Degree of protection NEMA 4X (IP 66)
T09-TH11xxxx-06-xx-xx-ae-001
Connection head plastic • Polyprolylene, FDA compliant

• Sensor connection: ½" NPT Female
• Cable entry: ½" NPT or ¾" NPT Female. ½" NPT with nylon reducer bushing
(FDA compliant)
• Degree of protection NEMA 4X
T09-TH11xxxx-06-xx-xx-ae-000
Temperature field transmitter iTEMP® TMT162 • Material: Die-cast aluminum housing AlSi10Mg with powder coating on
polyester base
• Separate electronics compartment and connection compartment
• Display rotatable in 90° increments
• Cable entry: 2 x ½" NPT
• Brilliant blue backlit display with ease of visibility in bright sunshine or pitch
darkness
• Gold plated terminals to avoid corrosion and additional measurement errors
Details see Technical Information (see 'Documentation')
T09-TMT162ZZ-06-00-xx-ae-001
12 Endress+Hauser
TH13, TH14, TH15
Type of housing Specification

® ®
Temperature field transmitter iTEMP HART TMT142 • Material: Die-cast aluminum housing AlSi10Mg with powder coating on
polyester base
• Display rotatable in 90° increments
• Cable entry: 3 x ½" NPT
• Brilliant blue backlit display with ease of visibility in bright sunshine or pitch
darkness
• Gold plated terminals to avoid corrosion and additional measurement errors
Details see Technical Information (see 'Documentation')
T09-TMT142ZZ-06-00-06-ae-001
Connection head deep drawn stainless steel, TA20J style • Material: Deep drawn stainless steel AISI 316L SS (hygienic design)
• Optional with display and/or head transmitter
• Sensor connection: ½" NPT female
• Cable entry: ½" NPT female
Display:
• 4 digits 7-segments LC display (loop powered)
• Maximum error: 0.1% of programmed range
• Loop drop: 2.5 V at 22 mA
• Max. ambient temperature: -4 to 160 °F (-20 to 70 °C)
The programming is executed through 3 keys mounted on the bottom of the
display.
a0005938
* dimensions with optional display
Head transmitter
Type of transmitter) Specification

®
iTEMP TMT18x • Material
Housing: PC
Potting: PUR
• Terminals: Cable up to max. 16 AWG (secure screws) or with wire end
ferrules
• Eyelets for easy connection of a HART®-handheld terminal with alligator
clips
• Degree of protection NEMA 4 (see also type of connection head)
Details see Technical Information (see ’Documentation’)
R09-TMT182ZZ-06-06-xx-ae-001
iTEMP® PA TMT184
T09-TMT184ZZ-06-06-xx-ae-001
Endress+Hauser 13
TH13, TH14, TH15
Fieldbus connector Type (dimensions in inches [mm]) Specification
Fieldbus connector to PROFIBUS® -PA or • Ambient temperature: -40 to 300 °F (-40 to 150 °C)
FOUNDATION Fieldbus™ • Degree of protection IP 67
Wiring diagram:
T09-FFCONNEC-06-xx-xx-ae-000 a0006023
Pos. A: PROFIBUS® -PA FOUNDATION Fieldbus™

M12 on PROFIBUS® -PA connector Pos 1: grey (shield) Pos 1: blue (-)
7/8-16 UNC on FOUNDATION Fieldbus™ Pos 2: brown (+) Pos 2: brown (+)
connector Pos 3: blue (-) Pos 3: not connected
Pos 4: not connected Pos 4: ground (green/yellow)
Certificates and approvals

CE Mark The iTEMP® Series of temperature transmitters complies with the legal requirements laid out within the EU
regulations.
Other standards and • IEC 60529:

guidelines Degrees of protection by housing (IP-Code).
• IEC 61010:
Safety requirements for electrical measurement, control and laboratory instrumentation.
• ASTM E644:
American society for testing and materials, standard test methods for testing industrial
resistance thermometers.
• NEMA - ANSI / NEMA 250
Standardization association for the electrical industry.
• IEC 60571
Industrial platinum resistance thermometer
• ASME PTC 19.3 - 1974
Performance test codes
UL Temperature transmitters are recognized components to UL 3111-1 (iTEMP® Series) except for TMT184
PROFIBUS®-PA.
CSA GP The installed and assembled transmitters (iTEMP® Series) are CSA GP approved, except TMT184 PROFIBUS®
PA
14 Endress+Hauser
TH13, TH14, TH15
Ordering information
Product structure, RTD TH13- RTD assembly in thermowell, TH13
assembly in thermowell TH13
TW Immersion length U:
1 2½ inch
2 4½ inch
3 7½ inch
4 10½ inch
8 .... inch (0.5" increments)
Y special
Process connection, TW Material, 1 inch:

A1 ½" NPT 316SS
A2 ¾" NPT 316SS
A3 1" NPT 316SS
B1 Socket weld ¾" 316SS
B2 Socket weld 1" inch 316SS
C1 Weld in ¾" 316SS
C2 Weld in 1" inch 316SS
YY Special
Shape of TW:
2 Stepped, Standard Duty
3 Tapered, Heavy Duty
9 Special
Lag of TW T:
A None
E 3 inch
X ... inch (0.5" increments)
Y Special
Extension:
1 Hex nipple 316SS, E=1"
2 Nipple Union Nipple 316SS, E=4"
3 Hex nipple steel, E=1"
4 Nipple Union Nipple, steel, E=4"
6 Nipple Union Nipple, 316SS, E=7"
9 Special
Class; Type Sensor IEC751; Connection:

A 1 Pt100 class B, 3 wire low, -50 to 200 °C (-58 to 392 °F)
B 1 Pt100 class B, 3 wire high, -200 to 600 °C (-328 to 1112 °F)
C 1 Pt100 class A, 3 wire low, -50 to 200 °C (-58 to 392 °F)
D 1 Pt100 class A, 3 wire high, -200 to 600 °C (-328 to 1112 °F)
E 1 Pt100 class B, 4 wire low, -50 to 200 °C (-58 to 392 °F)
F 1 Pt100 class B, 4 wire high, -200 to 600 °C (-328 to 1112 °F)
G 1 Pt100 class A, 4 wire low, -50 to 200 °C (-58 to 392 °F)
H 1 Pt100 class A, 4 wire high, -200 to 600 °C (-328 to 1112 °F)
J 2 Pt100 class B, 3 wire low, -50 to 200 °C (-58 to 392 °F)
K 2 Pt100 class B, 3 wire high, -200 to 600 °C (-328 to 1112 °F)
L 2 Pt100 class A, 3 wire low, -50 to 200 °C (-58 to 392 °F)
M 2 Pt100 class A, 3 wire high, -200 to 600 °C (-328 to 1112 °F)
Y Special
TH13- ← Order code (Part 1)
Endress+Hauser 15
TH13, TH14, TH15
Enclosure; communication:
A None
B E+H blue Al + cover, ½" NPT cable entry
C E+H blue Al + cover, ¾" NPT cable entry
D Plastic PP white ½" NPT cable entry
E Plastic PP white ¾" NPT cable entry
F SS316L (TA20J), ½" NPT
G SS316L (TA20J), LCD, ½" NPT
H AL Field Housing, 1 Input, ½" NPT, HART
I AL Field Housing, 1 Input, Display, HART, ½" NPT
J AL Field Housing, 2 Input, ½" NPT, HART
K AL Field Housing, 2 Input, Display, HART, ½" NPT
L AL Field Housing, 2 Input, ½" NPT, FF
M AL Field Housing, 2 Input, Display, FF, ½" NPT
Y Special
Electrical connection:
A Programmable RTD TMT180
C Programmable TMT181 NON Ex
D Programmable TMT181 FM IS
E Programmable TMT181 CSA IS
F Profibus PA TMT184, non Ex
G Profibus PA TMT184, FM IS
H Profibus PA TMT184, CSA IS
I TMT162, non Ex, Dual Compartment
J TMT162, FM IS, Dual Compartment
K TMT162, CSA IS, Dual Compartment
L HART TMT142 non Ex, Single Compartment
M HART TMT142, FM IS, Single Compartment
N HART TMT142, CSA IS, Single Compartment
O HART TMT182, FM IS Advanced Diagnostic
P HART TMT182 NON Ex
R HART TMT182 FM IS
T HART TMT182 CSA IS
Y Special
2 Flying Leads
3 Terminal block
Additional option:
1 None
2 Profibus PA Plug M12
3 Foundation Fieldbus Plug 7/8"
9 special version
Test; Calibration:
A None
B Sensor calibration certificate
Y Special version
Model:
K Standard model, North American region
Y Special version
TH13- ← Order code (complete)
16 Endress+Hauser
TH13, TH14, TH15
Product structure, RTD TH14- RTD assembly in flanged thermowell, TH14

assembly in flanged
TW Immersion length U
thermowell TH14
1 2 inch
2 4 inch
3 7 inch
4 10 inch
Y Special version
Flange size; TW Material per 1 inch:

A 1 inch 316SS
B 1½ inch 316SS
C 2 inch 316SS
Y Special
Rating; Type:
1 150 psi; RF
2 300 psi; RF
3 600 psi; RF
9 Special
Shape of TW; Welding:

1 Straight; standard
2 Tapered; standard
3 Straight; full penetration
4 Tapered; full penetration
9 Special
Lag of TW, T:
A None
X .... inch (0.5" increments)
Y Special
Extension:
9 Special

Y Special
TH14- ← Order code (Part 1)
Endress+Hauser 17
TH13, TH14, TH15
A None
Y Special
R HART TMT182 FM IS
Y Special
2 Flying Leads
3 Terminal block
Additional option:
1 None
9 special version
Test; Calibration:
A None
Y Special version
Model:
Y Special version
18 Endress+Hauser
TH13, TH14, TH15
Product structure, RTD TH15- RTD assembly, TH15

assembly TH15
Immersion length XA
1 4 inch
2 6 inch
3 9 inch
4 12 inch
5 14 inch
Y Special version
Sheath diameter price per 2 inch:

A ¼ inch 316SS
Y Special
Extension:
9 Special

Y Special
A None
Y Special
TH15- ← Order code (part 1)
Endress+Hauser 19
TH13, TH14, TH15
R HART TMT182 FM IS
Y Special
2 Flying Leads
3 Terminal block
Documentation Requirement:
1 Standard
9 Other
Test; Calibration:
A None
Y Other
Model:
Y Other
Additional option:
1 None
9 special version
20 Endress+Hauser
TH13, TH14, TH15
Documentation
• Compact instructions TH13 RTD assembly in thermowell (KA190r/24/ae)
• Compact instructions TH14 RTD assembly in flanged thermowell (KA192r/24/ae)
• Compact instructions TH15 RTD assembly - spring loaded (KA195r/24/ae)
• Technical information Temperature field transmitter iTEMP® TMT162 (TI086r/24/ae)
• Technical information Temperature field transmitter iTEMP® HART® TMT142 (TI107r/24/ae)
• Technical information Temperature head transmitter iTEMP® Pt TMT180 (TI088r/24/ae)
• Technical information Temperature head transmitter iTEMP® PCP TMT181 (TI070r/24/ae)
• Technical information Temperature head transmitter iTEMP® HART® TMT182 (TI078r/24/ae)
• Technical information Temperature head transmitter iTEMP® PA® TMT184 (TI079r/24/ae)
Application example:
• Technical information Energy manager RMS621 (TI092r/24/ae)
• Technical information Cerabar S (TI383r/24/ae)
• Technical information Deltabar S (TI384r/24/ae)
Endress+Hauser 21
TH13, TH14, TH15
TH13, TH14, TH15
TH13, TH14, TH15
United States Canada Mexico
Endress+Hauser, Inc. Endress+Hauser Canada Endress+Hauser (Mexico) S.A. de C.V.

2350 Endress Place 1075 Sutton Drive Av. Gustavo Baz No. 43
Greenwood, IN 46143 Burlington, ON L7L 5Z8 Fracc. Bosques de Echegaray
Tel: 317-535-7138 Tel: 905-681-9292 Naucalpan de Juárez, C.P. 53310,
Sales: 888-ENDRESS 800-668-3199 Estado de Mexico
Service: 800-642-8737 FAX: 905-681-9444 Mexico
FAX: 317-535-8498 www.ca.endress.com Tel: (52) 55 5371 1110
inquiry@us.endress.com FAX: (52) 55 5371 1128
www.us.endress.com E-mail: eh.mexico@mx.endress.com
TI110R/24/ae/06.06
FM+SGML 6.0 ProMoDo
Actuating elements available also for Zone 21 and 22
Actuating elements
Features Technical data

■ easy installation
Impact resistance
■ certified for zones 1 and 21 7 Nm
(lamp actuators 4 Nm)
■ high IP degree of protection
Enclosure material
Enclosure thermoplast
Seals EPDM (NBR)
Description Protection class
BARTEC offers a variety of actuator versions and IP 66/IP 67
options for the local ComEx control and indicating
units.
All actuating elements are of high-quality Explosion protection
thermoplast and correspond to protection class
IP 66/IP 67. Useful accessories complete the Ex protection type
actuating elements. II 2GD EEx e II
For offshore applications special oil-resistant Class 1, Div. 2 - Class 1, Zone 1
attachments are available. Certification
PTB 00 ATEX 3114 U
UL E184198
Ambient temperature
(-55 °C to +70 °C)
-20 °C to +70 °C for Zone 21 and 22
03-0330-0191-02/06-BCS-A200865/1E
10
Actuating elements available also for Zone 21 and 22
Selection chart
Illustration Dimensions Description Order no.
for ComEx enclosure Position selector switch black

with protective collar, lockable*
34 20.5 only for switch module (2-pole)
26
0-I for ComEx enclosure 05-0003-007101

M30 x 1.5 for control unit (flat) 05-0003-007001
Ø 65
I - II for ComEx enclosure 05-0003-007102

for control unit (flat) 05-0003-007002
I - 0 - II for ComEx enclosure 05-0003-007303
for control unit 05-0003-007203
HAND - 0 - AUTO for ComEx enclosure 05-0003-007324
for Control unit ComEx 316L for control unit (flat) 05-0003-007224
34 20.5 MAN - 0 - AUTO for ComEx enclosure 05-0003-007325
26 for control unit (flat) 05-0003-007225
*In principle, there are 3 boreholes in the protective

M30 x 1.5
Ø 65
collar to fit padlocks. If no further details are given on

which switching position is to be locked, the
boreholes are provided in the switch position 0 (I),
other to customer specifications.
for ComEx enclosure Double push button actuator 05-0003-007500

for ComEx enclosures
20 39 with rubber membrane,
20 supplied with five loose coloured centre discs:
red, green, yellow, white, black
For offshore applications (with NBR seal) 05-0003-007500BN

M30 x 1.5
75
1-6
for Control unit ComEx 316L Double push button actuator 05-0003-007400
20 39 for control units
20 with rubber membrane,
supplied with five loose coloured centre discs:
M30 x 1.5

75
1-6
Pushbutton 05-0003-000700
13 20 with rubber membrane,
supplied with five loose coloured centre discs:
M 30x1.5

ø 38
Weight: 24 g
1-6 6
03-0330-0191-02/06-BCS-A200865/2E
38 Mushroom pushbutton 05-0003-001800

20
black, Weight: 24 g
M 30x1.5
ø 38
ø 40
6
1-6
11
Actuating elements available also for Zone 21 and Zone 22
Emergency Stop 05-0003-000800

38 DIN EN 60204 T1/VDE 0113 T1
20
and EN 60947-5-1/DIN VDE 0660 T200,
pushbutton marked
M30 x 1.5
ø 40
ø 38
"NOT-AUS EMERGENCY STOP"

"Pull to Release"
1-6 6
Weight: 46 g
26 Locking mushroom pushbutton 05-0003-001203

13 20 Push in without key, unlock with key;
Lock (DOM) 4 A 185
M 30x1.5
20 Weight: 70 g
ø 38
6 For offshore applications (with NBR seal) 05-0003-001203BN

1-6
Lock (DOM)
26 lockable in both positions, 05-0003-001200
13 20
key retractable in both positions, *05-0003-001200BN
lock 4 A 185
M 30x1.5
ø 38
lockable in the depressed position, 05-0003-001201

key retractable in the depressed position, *05-0003-001201BN
6
1-6 lock 4 A 185
lockable in the initial position, 05-0003-001202

key retractable in the initial position, *05-0003-001202BN
lock 4 A 185 (tip lock)
Weight: 69 g
*For offshore applications (with NBR seal)
31 Lock (RONIS)
20
Lock: 455 05-0003-006100
Lockable in both positions
M30 x 1.5
ø 38
Key retractable in both positions
1-6 5 For offshore applications (with NBR seal) 05-0003-006100BN
30 20 90° Position selector switch BS

2 positions 0 - I, black, for control unit 05-0003-000900BS
90° turned for ComEx 05-0003-000901BS
M 30x1.5
ø 45
Position selector switch BS

3 positions I - 0 - II, black, I + II latchning;
for control unit 05-0003-001000BS
1-6 90° turned for ComEx 05-0003-001100BS
I + II momentary contact; for control unit 05-0003-001001BS
30 20 60 90° turned for ComEx 05-0003-001101BS
0° °
03-0330-0191-11/05-BCS-A200865/3E
6
I - latching, II - latching; for control unit 05-0003-001002BS
M 30x1.5
ø 45
I - momentary contact; II - latching; for control unit 05-0003-001003BS

1-6 Weight: 33 g
12
Actuating elements available also for Zone 21 and Zone 22
Position selector switch 3 positions I - 0 - II,

28 black, I + II latching; for control unit 05-0003-001000
60
13 20 6 0° °
*05-0003-001000BN
90° turned for ComEx 05-0003-001100
M 30x1.5
ø 38
*05-0003-001100BN
I + II momentary-contact; for control unit 05-0003-001001
6 *05-0003-001001BN
1-6 90° turned for ComEx 05-0003-001101
*05-0003-001101BN
I - latching, II - momentary-contact; for control box, 05-0003-001002
*05-0003-001002BN
turned 90° for ComEx 05-0003-001102
*05-0003-001102BN
I - momentary-contact; II - latching; for control box, 05-0003-001003
*05-0003-001003BN
turned 90° for ComEx 05-0003-001103
*05-0003-001103BN
Weight: 33 g
28 90°
Position selector switch
13 20 2 positions 0 - I, black 05-0003-000900
for control unit *05-0003-000900BN
M 30x1.5
90° turned for ComEx 05-0003-000901

ø 38
*05-0003-000901BN
Weight: 33 g
6
1-6 *For offshore applications (with NBR seal)
Lamp Weight: 19 g
red 05-0003-001300
*05-0003-001300BN
22 20 green 05-0003-001400
*05-0003-001400BN
M 30x1.5
yellow 05-0003-001500
ø 38
*05-0003-001500BN
with 05-0003-001600
1-6 *05-0003-001600BN
blue 05-0003-001700
*05-0003-001700BN
Illuminated button actuator Weight: 19 g

red 05-0003-006500
14.5 *05-0003-006500BN
20
13 green 05-0003-006600
*05-0003-006600BN
M 30x1.5
yellow 05-0003-006700
ø 38
*05-0003-006700BN
white 05-0003-006800
1-6 *05-0003-006800BN
blue 05-0003-006900
*05-0003-006900BN
26 Potentiometer actuator 05-0003-007600

20
with scale gradation 0-10
(durable and abrasion-resistant), black
M30 x 1.5
Weight: 28 g
*For offshore applications (with NBR seal) 05-0003-007600BN

03-0330-0191-11/05-BCS-A200865/4E
1-6
20 Blanking plug 05-0003-001900

17
13 to cover unused holes in the front panel
M 30x1.5
Weight: 20 g
ø 38

1-6
13
Actuating elements accessories
Selection chart
Illustration Description Order no.
Fixing nut 05-1138-0009

M 30 to fix the actuating elements
in the mounting wall of enclosure
resp. in the enclosure
Printed pushbutton labels 05-0091-0019

6 loose pushbutton labels
1 x green marked START, ON, I
1 x red marked STOP, OFF, O
Spanner 05-1191-0001
Label holder 05-0044-0001

Label holder for actuating elements
with label insert 03-5412-0056
Contrast plate 03-5412-0057

for Emergency/Off impact switch
yellow ∅ 90 mm
Label 03-3600-0021
unmarked, for device information
Marking tag 05-1105-0020

for an additional label,
for all actuating elements
03-0330-0191-11/05-BCS-A200865/5E
Examples Label (without marking) 03-5412-0060

I II HAND AUTO for marking tag
0 II AUTO MANU Labelling to your specifications
UP 0 DOWN DROP 0 LIFT
(see examples)
HAND AUTO UP 0 DOWN
28
Actuating elements accessories
Selection chart
Illustration Description Order no.
ComEx flange set 05-0091-0046

for the connection of two ComEx enclosures
includes 1 threaded sleeve, 1 lock nut
and 1 O-ring
Locking device 05-0037-0007

(without padlock) for ComEx enclosure
NIRO frame, transparent hood of high-quality
thermoplast
Locking device 05-0037-0006

(without padlock) for control boxes
NIRO frame, transparent hood of high-quality
thermoplast
Protective metal shroud 05-0032-0009

for emergency stop actuating element
to prevent accidental switching
External earth stud 05-0012-0124

for outside-connection
UL adapter
tested adapter for ComEx enclosure
with NPT internal thread
Thread 1/2'' NPT 05-0004-0009
Thread 3/4'' NPT 05-0004-0010
03-0330-0191-11/05-BCS-A200865/6E
Earth plate ComEx

for earthing of metal cable glands
Thread 1 x M20 05-0012-0114
Thread 2 x M20 05-0012-0115
Thread 1 x M25 05-0012-0116
29
Switch module for local control stations
Switch module
for panel-mounted installation
with terminals
Technical data Explosion protection Dimensions

Protection class Ex protection type 37
Switch module IP 66 in conjunction with II 2G EEx de IIC
actuator element and installed in an I M2 EEx de I
appropriate IP enclosure Class 1, Div. 2 - Class 1, Zone1
57
terminals IP 20 (IEC 60529)
46
Certification
Rated insulation voltage PTB 99 ATEX 1043 U
690 V UL E184198
33.5 65
Rated voltage Ambient temperature
400 V 400 V 110 V 24 V 230 V -55 °C to +60 °C
Utilization category
AC-12 AC-15 DC-13 DC-13
Rated operating currents Selection chart
16 A 10 A 0.5 A 1A 10 A Code Code
Type of contact Actuating element no.
no.
Nominal currents Ithe 2 NC Pushbutton 0700
16 A/+40 °C, 11 A/+60 °C
Double push button actuator 7400
Contact options 1
contacts with positive break operation Emergency stop Not-Aus 0800
(self cleaning) Selector switch 0 + I latching, 2 positions 0900
1 NC and 1 NO or
2 NC or 2 NO 2 NO Selector switch I + II latching, 3 positions 1000
Contact material Selector switch I + II momentary-contact, 3 positions 1001

AgSnO2 2
Selector switch I latching, II momentary-contact, 3 positions 1002
Enclosure material
Thermoplastic Selector switch I momentary-contact, II latching, 3 positions 1003
Connection Mushroom pushbutton, black 1800

Terminals 2.5 mm2, fine stranded 1 NC
+ 1 NO Lockable in both positions, DOM lock 1200
Mechanical life
106 switching cycles 4 Lockable in the depressed position, DOM lock 1201
Storage-/transport temperature Lockable in the initial position, DOM lock 1202

-55 °C to +70 °C
Locking-type mushroom pushbutton 1203
Weight
Lockable in both positions, RONIS lock 6100
approx. 87 g
Shock resistance
DIN IEC 68 part 2-27, 30 g 18 ms Complete order no.
03-0330-0192-11/05-BCS-A200866/2E
Switch module
without actuating element 07-3323-1 00
Actuating element
Standard 05-0003-00
for Offshore 05-0003-00 BN
Please enter code number.
36
Switch module for installation on panel
(front installation with connection cable)
Description
As completely certified equipment, BARTEC
modules with connection cable can be directly
installed in industrial control cabinets in hazardous
Features areas. A high IP degree of protection can be
maintained due to easy installation of the actuating
■ self-cleaning contacts
elements in the control cabinet. The respective
■ positive break contacts modules can be single-handedly installed to the
■ single-handed installation actuating elements.

37
Protection class Ex protection type 35.5 88
Switch module IP 67 in conjunction with II 2G EEx d IIC T6
actuator element Class 1, Div. 2 - Class 1, Zone 1
Rated insulation voltage Certification
46
Ui = 690 V, only with corresponding core PTB 00 ATEX 1092 X
(e. g.: 750 V) UL E184198
Ui = 400 V, If standard type corresponds Ambient temperature 104.5
with oelflex 100 -40 °C to +60 °C (-55 °C on request)
Rated voltage
250 V 250 V 110 V 24 V 230 V Selection chart
Utilization category Code Code
Type of contact Actuating element no.
no.
AC-12 AC-15 DC-13 DC-13
2 NC Pushbutton 0700
Rated operating currents
16 A 10 A 0.5 A 1A 10 A 1 7400
Double push button actuator
Nominal currents Ithe GY Emergency stop NOT-AUS 0800

16 A/+40 °C, 11 A/+60 °C
2 NO
Selector switch 0 + I latching, 2 positions 0900
Contact options
contacts with positive break operation 2
(self cleaning) Selector switch I + II latching, 3 positions 1000
1 NC and 1 NO or GY
2 NC or 2 NO or Selector switch I + II momentary-contact, 3 positions 1001
1 NC or 1 NO 1 NC
+ 1 NO 1002
Selector switch I latching, II momentary-contact, 3 positions
Contact material
AgSnO2 4
Selector switch I momentary-contact, II latching, 3 positions 1003
Enclosure material GY
Thermoplastic Mushroom pushbutton, black 1800
1 NC
Connection
flexible cord 4 x 1.5 mm² (∅ 9.1 mm) Lockable in both positions, DOM lock 1200
resp. 2 x 1.5 mm², (∅ 7.7 mm) 7
Lockable in the depressed position, DOM lock 1201
Mechanical life
106 switching cycles Lockable in the initial position, DOM lock 1202
1 NO
Storage-/transport temperature
-55 °C to +70 °C 8 Locking-type mushroom pushbutton 1203
Weight Lockable in both positions, RONIS lock 6100

approx. 160 g without cable
03-0330-0192-11/05-BCS-A200866/3E
Cable length
3 m, indicate greater lengths in
Complete order no.
plain text Switch module without actuating element 07-3323-3 03*)
Shock resistance Actuating element
DIN IEC 68 part 2-27, 30 g 18 ms Standard 05-0003-00
for Offshore 05-0003-00 BN
*)
Please enter code number. Standard length 3 m, indicate greater lengths in plain text.
6
Lamp module for local control stations
Lamp module
with terminals
Protection class Ex protection type 65

37
Lamp module IP 66/67 in conjunction II 2G EEx de IIC
with actuator and installation in an I M2 EEx de I
appropriate IP enclosure Class 1, Div. 2 - Class 1, Zone1
57
Terminals IP 20 (IEC 60529)
ø 19
46
Certification
Rated insulation voltage PTB 97 ATEX 1064 U
300 V UL E184198 33.5 97
Rated operating voltage Ambient temperature

AC 12 V to 250 V (-55 °C to +50 °C) -55 °C to +50 °C
DC 12 V to 60 V (-55 °C to +50 °C)
AC/DC 12 V to 24 V (-55 °C to +60 °C)
Power consumption Selection chart
<1W
Wiring diagram Colour LED Code no. Colour actuator Code no.
Lamp
LED
red 1 red 3
red, green, yellow, white, blue
X1
Illumination green 2 green 4
very bright, over a visible angle of 180°
yellow 3 yellow 5
Enclosure material
Thermoplastic
X2 white 4 white 6
Connection
Terminals 2.5 mm2, fine stranded blue 5 blue 7
Electrical life
>105 running hours Complete order no.
Storage-/transport temperature
Lamp module
-55 °C to +70 °C
without actuating element 07-3353-11 0
Weight
Actuating element
approx. 90 g
Standard 05-0003-0001 00
Mounting
by bayonet lock for Offshore 05-0003-0001 00BN
Shock resistance
DIN IEC 68 part 2-27, 30 g 18 ms
03-0330-0192-11/05-BCS-A200866/5E
37
Lamp module for installation on panel
Description
installed in industrial control cabinets in
Features hazardous areas. A high IP degree of protection
can be maintained due to easy installation of the
■ long service life
actuating elements in the control cabinet. The
■ illumination 180° respective modules can be single-handedly
■ brilliant colours installed to the actuating elements.

37 120
Protection class Ex protection type 35.5 88
Lamp module IP 67 in conjunction with II 2G EEx d IIC T6
actuator element Class 1, Div. 2 - Class 1, Zone 1
ø 19
Rated insulation voltage
46
Certification
300 V PTB 97 ATEX 1065 X
UL E184198
Rated operating voltage
AC 12 V to 250 V (-55 °C to +50 °C) Ambient temperature 136.5
DC 12 V to 60 V (-55 °C to +50 °C) -40 °C to +50 °C (-55 °C on request)
AC/DC 12 V to 24 V (-55 °C to +60 °C)
Power consumption
<1W Selection chart
Lamp
LED Wiring diagram Colour LED Code no. Colour actuator Code no.
red, green, yellow, white, blue
red 1 red 3
Illumination
very bright, over a visible angle of 180° green 2 green 4
Enclosure material
Thermoplastic yellow 3 yellow 5
Connection white 4 white 6

flexible cord 2 x 0.75 mm² (∅ 6.4 mm)
Electrical life blue 5 blue 7
>105 running hours

Storage-/transport temperature Complete order no.
-55 °C to +70 °C
Lamp module without actuating element 07-3353-31 3*)
Weight
approx. 180 g without cable Actuating element
Standard 05-0003-0001 00
Mounting
by bayonet lock for Offshore 05-0003-0001 00BN
Cable length Please enter code number.
3 m, indicate greater lengths in plain text *)
Standard length 3 m, indicate greater lengths in plain text.
Shock resistance
DIN IEC 68 part 2-27, 30 g 18 ms
Note
The connection cable for lamp modules must
03-0330-0192-11/05-BCS-A200866/6E
be installed in a way which ensures that no

capacitive influence (voltage transmission) is
possible through lines routed in parallel.
7
Illuminated button for local control stations
Illuminated button
with terminals
Protection class Ex protection type

Illuminated button IP 66/67 in conjunction II 2G EEx de IIC
37 65
with actuating element and installation in I M2 EEx de I
an appropriate enclosure Class 1, Div. 2 - Class 1, Zone 1
Certification
57
ø 19
PTB 97 ATEX 1064 U
46
300 V UL E184198
AC 12 V to 250 V (-55 °C to +50 °C) Ambient temperature 33.5 90
DC 12 V to 60 V (-55 °C to +50 °C) -55 °C to +50 °C
AC/DC 12 V to 24 V (-55 °C to +60 °C) +60 °C (AC/DC 12 to 24 V)
Power consumption
<1W
Lamp Selection chart
LED: red, green, yellow, white, blue
Illumination Type of contact Code no. Colour LED Code no. Colour actuator Code no.
1 NC
■ Contact element X1 red 1 red 5
Nominal voltage
AC 250 V 7
green 2 green 6
Nominal current
AC 5 A
X2
Contacts yellow 3 yellow 7
1 NC or 1 NO as snap switch element 1 NO
Switching capacity X1
AC-15 1 A/230 V white 4 white 8
DC-13 0.25 A/24 V 8
Enclosure material
Thermoplastic blue 5 blue 9
Connection X2
Terminals 2.5 mm2, fine stranded
Electrical life Complete order no.
>105 running hours
Illuminated button
Mechanical life without actuating element 07-3363-1 0
>105 switching cycles
Storage/transport temperature
Actuating element
03-0330-0295-11/05-BCS-A217100E
-55 °C to +70 °C
Standard 05-0003-006 00
Weight
approx. 130 g for Offshore 05-0003-006 00BN
Mounting
by bayonet lock
Shock resistance
DIN IEC 68 Part 2-27, 30 g 18 ms
38
Illuminated button for installation on panel
Description
■ high service life
■ brilliant colours modules can be single-handedly installed to the

37 114
Illuminated button IP 66/67 in conjunction II 2G EEx d IIC T6 35.5 88
with actuating element Class 1, Div. 2 - Class 1, Zone 1
Rated insulation voltage Certification
46
300 V PTB 97 ATEX 1065 X
UL E184198
AC 12 V to 250 V (-55 °C to +50 °C) Ambient temperature
131
DC 12 V to 60 V (-55 °C to +50 °C) -40 °C to +50 °C
AC/DC 12 V to 24 V (-55 °C to +60 °C) +60 °C (AC/DC 12 to 24 V)
-55 °C on request
Power consumption
<1W
Lamp
LED: red, green, yellow, white, blue
Selection chart
Illumination Type of contact Code no. Colour LED Code no. Colour actuator Code no.
1 NC
■ Contact element red 1 red 5
Nominal voltage
AC 250 V 7
green 2 green 6
Nominal current
AC 5 A GY
Contacts yellow 3 yellow 7
1 NC or 1 NO as snap switch element 1 NO
Switching capacity white 4 white 8

AC-15 1 A/230 V 8
DC-13 0.25 A/24 V
Enclosure material blue 5 blue 9
Thermoplastic GY
Connection
flexible cable 4 x 0.75 mm2 (ø 7.2 mm) Complete order no.
Electrical life
Illuminated button 07-3363-3 3*)
>105 running hours
without actuating element
Mechanical life
Actuating element
>105 switching cycles
Standard 05-0003-006 00
Storage and transport temperature
-55 °C to +70 °C for Offshore 05-0003-006 00BN
Weight
03-0330-0296-11/05-BCS-A217101E

approx. 200 g without cable
*)
Cable length
3 m, indicate greater lengths in plain text
Mounting
by bayonet lock
Note
Shock resistance The connection cable for illuminated buttons must be installed in a way which ensures that no
DIN IEC 68 Part 2-27, 30 g 18 ms capacitive influence (voltage transmission) is possible through lines routed in parallel.
8
Potentiometer for installation on panel
Description
■ high end stop torque
■ high IP degree of protection modules can be single-handedly installed to the

Protection class (with connection cable) 37 88
Potentiometer IP 66/67 in conjunction with 35.5
actuating element Ex protection type
II 2G EEx d IIC T6
Ui = 500 V, only with corresponding cable Certification
46
Ui = 400 V, corresponds to standard version PTB 05 ATEX 1065 X
with oilflex 100 Ambient temperature
Max. rated operating voltage -40 °C to +60 °C 104.5
AC/DC 320 V (-55 °C on request)
Resistance
1 kΩ to 10 kΩ
Characteristic curve
linear Selection chart
Resistance tolerance
Wiring diagram Resistance value Code no.
± 20 %
Power consumption 1 kΩ 4
max. 1 W
2.2 kΩ 5
Resistance material
carbon layer on ceramics
4.7 kΩ 6
Rotation range
mech. 285° -5° 10 kΩ 7
electr. effective approx. 250°
Other resistances on request.
Torque (beginning)
0.5 to 1.5 Ncm Complete order no.
Torque (end stop) Potentiometer without actuating element 07-3373-3D 3*)
> 100 Ncm Please enter code number.
*)
Enclosure material
Thermoplastic
Actuating element Order no.
Connection Standard (Scale 1-10) 05-0003-007600
flexible cable 3 x 0.75 mm²
for Offshore (Scale 1-10) 05-0003-007600BN
Mechanical life
25000 sinusoidal cycles
-55 °C to +70 °C
Weight
approx. 240 g with 1 m cable
Cable length
03-0330-0426-02/06-BCS-A240844E
3 m, indicate greater lengths in plain text

Notes for installation and inspection:
At rated voltage: < AC 40 V/< DC 120 V
(protection low voltage in accordance with VDE 0100 T. 410)
potentiometer drive shaft can be operated without actuating element.
At rated voltage: > AC 40 V to max. AC/DC 320 V
potentiometer drive shaft can only be operated with actuating element
or has to be deenergized.
9
Potentiometer for local control stations
Potentiometer
with terminals

Potentiometer IP 66/67 in conjunction with II 2G EEx de IIC 37
actuator element and installed in an I M2 EEx de I
appropriate IP enclosure
Certification
PTB 05 ATEX 1064 U
57
46
Ambient temperature
500 V
-55 °C to +60 °C
Max. rated voltage 33.5 65
AC/DC 320 V
Resistance
1 kΩ to 10 kΩ
Curve shape
linear Selection chart
Resistance tolerance
Wiring diagram Resistance Code no.
± 20 %
Rated output 1 kΩ 4
max. 1 W
2.2 kΩ 5
Resistor material
carbon film on ceramics
4.7 kΩ 6
Rotation
mech. 285° -5° 10 kΩ 7
electr. about 250°
Other resistances on request.
Torgue (beginning)
0.5 to 1.5 Ncm Complete order no.
Torgue (end stop) Potentiometer
> 100 Ncm without actuating element 07-3373-1D 0
Enclosure material
Thermoplastic Actuating element
Connection Standard (scale 1-10) Order no. 05-0003-007600
Double terminals 2 x 2.5 mm2, fine stranded For Offshore (scale 1-10) Order no. 05-0003-007600BN
Mechanical life
25000 sinusoidal cycles
03-0330-0427-02/06-BCS-A240845E
-55 °C to +70 °C
Weight Notes for installation and inspection:
approx. 88 g At rated voltage: < AC 40 V/< DC 120 V
(protection low voltage in accordance with VDE 0100 T. 410)
potentiometer drive shaft can be operated without actuating element.
At rated voltage: > AC 40 V to max. AC/DC 320 V
potentiometer drive shaft can only be operated with actuating element
or has to be deenergized.
39
2: 5: 50: 95: 98: 100:
SYS19: BASE2 JOB: CRMAIN06-0428-6 Name: 5C-428 DATE: JAN 19 2006 Time: 5:25:03 PM Operator: GK COLOR: CMYK TCP: 15001 Typedriver Name: TS name csm no.: 100 Zoom: 100
5C EFS and EDS Factory Sealed Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*,C,D Explosionproof
Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E,F,G Dust-Ignitionproof
Control Devices and Manual Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F,G Raintight
Motor Starting Switches Cl. III Wet Locations
NEMA 3,7B*CD,9EFG
Dimensions Pg. 430
Application: ɀ Shafts – stainless steel Certifications and

Factory sealed enclosures are installed in a ɀ Shaft bushings – stainless steel
rigid metallic conduit system for surface ɀ Rocker handle and pushbutton guards – Compliances:
mounting adjacent to or remote from type 6/6 nylon ɀ NEC/CEC:
equipment being controlled and are used: ɀ Sealing enclosures – copper-free aluminum Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B*,C,D
ɀ to prevent arcing of enclosed device from Class II, Division 1, Groups E,F,G
causing ignition of a specific hazardous
Standard Finishes: Class II, Division 2, Groups F,G
atmosphere or atmospheres external to the Feraloy iron alloy – electrogalvanized and Class III
enclosure aluminum acrylic paint ɀ NEMA/EEMAC: 3,7B*CD,9EFG
ɀ in industrial areas such as chemical plants, ɀ Copper-free aluminum – natural ɀ UL Standard: 894, 698
oil and gas refineries, paint and varnish ɀ Type 6/6 nylon – black ɀ CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
manufacturing plants, gasoline bulk loading ɀ Stainless steel – natural
terminals, grain elevators, grain processing
industries, coal processing or handling areas,
or metal handling or finishing areas where
Options:
atmosphere may contain hazardous gases The following special options are available
and/or dust from the factory by adding suffix to Cat. No.
ɀ in non-hazardous areas where sturdy,
durable enclosures are required
ɀ in conjunction with magnetic starters or
contactors for remote control of motors Suffix to be
Manual motor starting switch enclosures are Added to
used: Description Cat. #
ɀ for manual starting of small ac or dc motors Emergency ‘‘Stop’’ button (momentary) – front operated red mushroom button . . . . . . . . . . S111
ɀ to provide manual starting and stopping
and, in the case of units with heaters, motor Lockout provision on front operated pushbutton cover (standard on buttons
running protection marked ‘‘OFF’’ and ‘‘STOP’’) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S153
For 24 VDC operation on pilot lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S300
Features:
Three-position selector switches with modified operation:
Factory sealed devices have many distinct
Momentary contact clockwise operation, spring return to center, maintained
advantages:
contact counter-clockwise operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S634
ɀ reduce installation problems
ɀ eliminate external seals Momentary contact counter-clockwise operation, spring return to center,
ɀ lower installation costs maintained contact clockwise operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S635
ɀ improve safety Bodies and covers (single and two gang units) – copper-free aluminum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA
ɀ are used with general purpose snap and
pushbutton type switches Where indicated in the catalog listings, EDS units suitable for Class I, Division 1,
ɀ standard neoprene covers for front Group B usage can be supplied, add suffix - GB, EFS units are suitable for Class I, Division 1,
operated pushbuttons. Prevents Group B as standard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GB
accumulation of dirt and entrance of water Maintained contact mushroom head with lockout and guard. Maximum one per cover
around operating shafts and cannot be used with a pilot light with a transformer or another standard pushbutton.. . S769
ɀ mounting lugs and taper tapped hubs with
integral bushings
ɀ large machine screws for fastening covers
to bodies EDS bodies and factory sealed cover and device sub-assemblies are available for field
ɀ lockout provisions on front operated push assembly (see pages 394 to 396).
button (marked ‘‘STOP’’ and ‘‘OFF’’) and
selector switch covers
ɀ lockout hole for padlock having 1⁄4⍯ hasp is
provided when used with covers for front
lever and side rocker type operation
ɀ close tolerances in machining of wide,
mating flanges and journalled shafts and
bearings for front button operation, produces
flametightness of enclosure joints
ɀ on enclosures with front lever and side
rocker type operating handles, threaded type
shafts and bushings are used to ensure Suffix S769
flametightness
ɀ dead end (EFS or EDS) or through feed
(EFSC or EDSC) hubs – 1⁄2⍯ to 1⍯ sizes
Standard Materials:
ɀ Bodies – Feraloy® iron alloy; copper-free
aluminum.
ɀ Front operated pushbutton and pilot light
covers – Feraloy iron alloy * See Options: suffix GB
ɀ Side operated type pushbutton covers –
copper-free aluminum
428 US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2006 Cooper Crouse-Hinds
STIBOINFO((CRH:66008com:5C:428))
PDFINFO CH0 0 5 C- 0
2: 5: 50: 95: 98: 100:
SYS19: BASE2 JOB: CRMAIN06-0439-3 Name: 5C-439 DATE: JAN 19 2006 Time: 5:25:16 PM Operator: RB COLOR: CMYK TCP: 15001 Typedriver Name: TS name csm no.: 100 Zoom: 100
EDS Factory Sealed General Use Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*,C,D Explosionproof 5C
Snap Switches Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F,G Raintight
Dimensions Pg. 430 Cl. III Wet Locations
NEMA 3,7B*CD,9EFG
EDSC2129 EDS2229
General Use Snap Switch – Front Operated

Single Gang Two Gang ‡
Through Through
Hub Amperes Dead End Feed Dead End Feed
Size Style† 120VAC§ 277VAC§ Cat. # Cat. # Cat. # Cat. #
3⁄4 1-pole 20 20 EDS2129 EDSC2129† EDS2229 EDSC2229†
3⁄4 2-pole 20 20 EDS218 EDSC218† EDSC228†
3⁄4 3-way 20 20 EDS2130 EDSC2130 EDS2230 EDSC2230
3⁄4 4-way 20 20 EDS2140 EDSC2140 EDSC2240
1 1-pole 20 20 EDS3129 EDSC3129† EDS3229 EDSC3229†
1 3-way 20 20 EDS3130 EDSC3130 EDS3230 EDSC3230
† ON-OFF standard marking for 1-pole and 2-pole units.

‡ Combinations of switches can be furnished.
§ AC rated switches are tested for resistive, inductive and tungsten filament loads up to the
full current rating and for motor loads up to 80% of the ampere rating.
* Class I, Group B: All units on this page can be modified for Class I, Group B usage. Add
suffix GB to the Cat. No. Seals must be installed within 11⁄2⍯ of each conduit opening in
Division 1. In Canada, for Group B applications consult factory.
US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2006 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 439
STIBOINFO((CRH:66008com:5C:439))
PDFINFO CH0 0 5 C- 9
2: 5: 50: 95: 98: 100:
SYS19: BASE2 JOB: CRMAIN06-0556-1 Name: 2A-556 DATE: JAN 19 2006 Time: 5:35:18 PM Operator: RB COLOR: CMYK TCP: 15001 Typedriver Name: TS name csm no.: 100 Zoom: 100
2A EDS and EFD Enclosures Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*C,D Explosionproof
with General Use Snap Switches Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F,G Raintight
Front Operated Cl. III Wet Locations
NEMA 3,7B*CD,9EFG,12
Application: Certifications and

EDS and EFD enclosures are installed in a Compliances:
rigid metallic conduit system for surface
mounting adjacent to or remote from ɀ NEC/CEC: Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups
equipment being controlled and are used: B*,C,D
ɀ to prevent arcing of enclosed switch from Class II, Div. 1, Groups E,F,G
causing ignition of a specific hazardous Class II, Div. 2, Groups F,G
atmosphere or atmospheres external to the Class III
enclosure ɀ NEMA/EEMAC: 3,7B*CD,9EFG,12
ɀ in industrial areas such as chemical plants, ɀ UL Standard: 894
EDS Enclosed
oil and gas refineries, paint and varnish ɀ CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
Snap Switch
manufacturing plants, gasoline bulk loading
terminals, grain elevators, grain processing Options:
industries, coal processing or handling areas, Suffix to be
or metal handling or finishing areas where Added to Encl.
atmosphere may contain hazardous gases Description Cat. #
and/or dust ɀ Two or three gang bodies can be supplied with
ɀ in non-hazardous areas where sturdy, combinations of devices listed for one gang enclosures . . . . Refer to modular listing, section 4C
durable enclosures are required ɀ Class I Group B, NEMA 7B – see listing pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GB
ɀ Flush wall mounting cover with 1⁄2⍯ overhang – single gang only –
Features: dull black instrument finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S173
ɀ Small and compact in design. Complies with U.L. snap switch test requirements as follows:
ɀ Used with snap switches.
ɀ Mounting lugs and taper tapped hubs with Type of Test AC-Rated (only) Switch
integral bushings. Overload Rated Amp. +380%
ɀ Large machine screws for fastening covers Power Factor .40-.50
to bodies. 100 cycles, 6-10 cycles per minute
ɀ Lockout hole for padlock having 1⁄4⍯ hasp is
provided. Non-Inductive Endurance 10,000 cycles, 18-24 cycles per minute at
ɀ Threaded type shafts and bushings are rated current – .98 min. P.F.
used to insure flametightness. Inductive Endurance 10,000 cycles, 18-24 cycles per minute –
.75-.80 P.F.
Standard Materials: Tungsten Filament Lamp Endurance 10,000 cycles, 6-10 cycles per minute at
ɀ Bodies and covers – Feraloy® iron alloy rated current and 120 volts
ɀ Shafts – stainless steel
ɀ Shaft bushings – stainless steel Temperature Rise Not to exceed 30°C
Dielectric Withstand 1500 volts
Standard Finishes:
ɀ Feraloy iron alloy – electrogalvanized and
aluminum acrylic paint
ɀ Stainless steel – natural
Dimensions† (in inches)

Hub Dim. Dim.
Size ‘‘h’’ ‘‘l’’
3⁄4 7⁄8 13⁄16
1 1 15⁄16
† Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes.

* See suffix GB.
556 US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2006 Cooper Crouse-Hinds
STIBOINFO((CRH:66008com:2A:556))
PDFINFO CH0 0 2 A - 4
2: 5: 50: 95: 98: 100:
SYS19: BASE2 JOB: CRMAIN06-0557-6 Name: 2A-557 DATE: JAN 19 2006 Time: 5:35:22 PM Operator: RB COLOR: CMYK TCP: 15001 Typedriver Name: TS name csm no.: 100 Zoom: 100
EDS and EFD Enclosures Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*,C,D Explosionproof 2A
with General Use Snap Switches Front Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F,G Raintight
Operated Single Gang and Two Gang Cl. III Wet Locations
NEMA 3,7B*CD,9EFG,12
Dead end Through feed
Single Gang Two Gangɍ

Through Through
Hub Amperes§ Dead End Feed Dead End Feed
Size Style 120VAC 277VAC Cat. # Cat. # Cat. # Cat. #
3⁄4 1-pole 20 20 EDS2129 EDSC2129† EDS2229 EDSC2229†
3⁄4 2-pole 20 20 EDS218 EDSC218† EDSC228†
3⁄4 3-pole ‡ ‡ EDS2123 EDSC2123 EDSC2223
3⁄4 3-way 20 20 EDS2130 EDSC2130 EDS2230 EDSC2230
3⁄4 4-way 20 20 EDS2140 EDSC2140 EDSC2240

1 3-pole ‡ ‡ EDS3123 EDSC3123 EDSC3223
1 1-pole 30 30 EFD3591 EFDC3591† EFD3691 EFDC3691†

1 2-pole 30 30 EFD3593 EFDC3593† EFDC3693†
1 3-way 30 30 EFD3594 EFDC3594 EFD3694 EFDC3694
*Class I, Group B:
All units listed on this page can be modified
for Class I, Group B usage. Add suffix GB to
the Cat. No.. Example: EDS2129-GB. Seals
must be installed within 11⁄2⍯ of each conduit
opening for Group B usage.
§ See table on page 556 for AC-rated switch information.

† ON-OFF standard marking for 1-pole and 2-pole units
‡ 15A, 125 VAC; 10A, 250 VAC
ɍ Combinations of switches can be furnished.
US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright© 2006 Cooper Crouse-Hinds 557
STIBOINFO((CRH:66008com:2A:557))
PDFINFO CH0 0 2 A - 5
078 9
54 43 6!74"96"23"8##$ !% 4"
"4842$"&'
()*+)4 ,
-
.4"
' 1/ !&4"2##2 !0(1)%2)" 43
453678 9 :; "<+=42##
ijklmnopqrslktnutvlwtxtrnulyzt
¡¢
¡©ª«
¬®ª¬ª«
gh
kxn{lk|}po~tz ¢ ¯°ª¬®±¬
²³¬´µ°¬ª
£¡¤¥¦§ ¨¡¢
¶·5¸¹¸ ¶·5¸¸¸
º969»7¼3½¾93567¿35ÀÁÂÃÄ3Å3Æ»Ç6Â3È ¿9»7Â9É
5Á6Ê¼93º76Ê 4ÀÇ3º76ÊË
4Ä»ÇÍÊÄ 4Ä»ÇÍÊÄ
ÌÍÎ 8 ¿9»9¾ ·97É3¶6É Æ99É ·97É3¶6É Æ99É
5ÁÏ9 5ÂÐ¼9Ñ ¹¸Ò Ó ¸ÔÔÒ Ó 7ÂÕ3Ö 7ÂÕ3Ö 7ÂÕ3Ö 7ÂÕ3Ö
×Ø
P KLXWÙa VU VU ÚÛIVKVÜ ÚÛIRVKVÜÝ ÚÛIVVVÜ ÚÛIRVVVÜÝ
×Ø
P VLXWÙa VU VU ÚÛIVKM ÚÛIRVKMÝ ÚÛIRVVMÝ
×Ø
P ×LÞßY VU VU ÚÛIVK×U ÚÛIRVK×U ÚÛIVV×U ÚÛIRVV×U
×Ø
P PLÞßY VU VU ÚÛIVKPU ÚÛIRVKPU ÚÛIRVVPU
K KLXWÙa VU VU ÚÛI×KVÜ ÚÛIR×KVÜÝ ÚÛI×VVÜ ÚÛIR×VVÜÝ
K VLXWÙa VU VU ÚÛI×KM ÚÛIR×KMÝ ÚÛI×VM ÚÛIR×VMÝ
K ×LÞßY VU VU ÚÛI×K×U ÚÛIR×K×U ÚÛI×V×U ÚÛIR×V×U
K PLÞßY VU VU ÚÛI×KPU ÚÛIR×KPU ÚÛI×VPU ÚÛIR×VPU
ÝàTLàáá`c^ßefßZf`â ßZã[e\`äWZ`KLXWÙa`ßef`VLXWÙa`be[^cå
æRWâ ç[eß^[Wec`Wä`cÞ[^è]ac`èße`ça`äbZe[c]afå
ÓSR`Zßâf`cÞ[^è]ac`ßZa`âcâf`äWZ`Zac[c^[éaê`[efbè^[éa`ßef`^be\câe`ä[Ùßâ ae^`ÙWßfc`bX`^W`^]a
äbÙÙ`èbZZae^`Zß^[e\`ßef`äWZ`â W^WZ`ÙWßfc`bX`^W`MUë `Wä`^]a`ßâ XaZa`Zß^[e\å
ì¼7¾¾3í3º»ÇÍ¿3,î3SÙÙ`be[^c`We`^][c`Xß\a`èße`ça`â Wf[ä[af`äWZ`RÙßcc`ïê`ðZWbX`ñ`bcß\aå`Sff
cbää[ò`ðñ`^W`^]a`Rß^å`TWåÌaßÙc`â bc^`ça`[ec^ßÙÙaf`Þ[^][e`KKØVóWäàßè]`èWefb[^`WXae[e\`[e
Û[é[c[We`Kå`ïe`Rßeßfßê`äWZ`ðZWbX`ñ`ßXXÙ[èß^[Wec`èWecbÙ^`äßè^WZYå
HIJKLMNNLONPLQPQP RSTJKLMUULVNQLUQUV RWXYZ[\]^_ VUUN`RWWXaZ`RZWbcaLd[efc EFG
0!?5
?@
AA.B4$$##C:+ 443DD
EVEN MORE
THAN YOU EXPECT.
Cold environments pose a tough challenge for electrical products — and the people who
maintain them. Regardless of where you operate, you can’t afford to sacrifice perform-
ance or dependability. That’s why Cooper Crouse-Hinds® brings you a wide selection of
cold-environment solutions you can count on.
You may already be familiar with many of the products you’ll see here. It’s likely they’re
in your facility now, working hard to maximize uptime and minimize maintenance.
But what you may not expect is the breadth of our line. We’re your source for cold-
tolerant lighting, power distribution and control equipment plus fittings and connectors for
all types of conduit and cable systems. We also bring you electric heaters for personnel
comfort, equipment protection or process control, and cold-tolerant products for haz-
ardous areas.
Because this broad selection is from Cooper Crouse-Hinds, you can specify with complete
confidence. And you’ll save time, because you won’t have to track down the products you
need from multiple sources.
GET COMPLETE DETAILS.

For more information on any of our cold-environment products, see our catalog, visit our
website (www.crouse-hinds.com) or contact your nearest Cooper Crouse-Hinds distributor.
Don’t have our current catalog?

Just ask your Cooper Crouse-Hinds distributor or sales representative. You can easily find
them by using the Locator feature on our website.
Lightning Service™ Delivery PartSpec® Mechanical Parts

Look for the Lightning Service symbol Library (from Thomas Register)
throughout this brochure. These made-to- Fast and efficient, PartSpec and PlantSpec®
order products can be shipped faster than allow you to tap into our ever-expanding data-
you might expect to meet tight project base of product drawings and insert them into
deadlines. Lightning Service products are your AutoCAD® session. After insertion the
also designated in our price book, catalog drawing retains part number, scale and view.
and website. Also see the Resources area of our website for
these CAD drawings.
PlantSpec and PartSpec are registered trademarks of Thomas Publishing Company.
AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk, Inc.
C O O P E R C R O U S E - H I N D S | 2
COLD ENVIRONMENT COOPER CROUSE-HINDS
PROBLEM SOLUTION
COMPROMISED ENVIRONMENTAL SEALING WEATHER-RESISTANT CONSTRUCTION
Cold outdoor environments bring snow, sleet, and Choose from our rugged, cold-weather-resistant NEMA 4 and 4X
freezing rain—causing potentially damaging ice watertight products designed to withstand the elements … small-
formation. And without proper enclosure design, the surface-area gasket designs for superior performance in areas
performance of enclosed electrical components may be where ice build-up is likely … and silicone gaskets for moving
adversely affected. parts that stay resilient at temperatures as low as -57°C (-70°F),
ensuring flexibility and dependable sealing.
NPJ Nonmetallic Arktite®

Plugs and Receptacles
Catalog Section 2P
• NEMA 4X watertight and corrosion
resistant.
• Rugged Krydon® fiberglass-reinforced
polyester construction.
• Choose from 30, 60 and 100 amps.
• Operating temperature range: -50° to
40°C (-58° to 104°F).
VMV Champ® Luminaires,

LMV Champ® Luminaires,
DMV Champ® Luminaires,
and CPMV Champ-Pak™ Wall
Pack Luminaires
Catalog Section 3L
• For indoor and
outdoor applica-
tions—NEMA
4X, Marine and
Wet Locations.
• Corro-free™ epoxy powder-coated alu-
EDS, EFS and DSD Control minum housings offer superior corro-
AB12 Fluorescent Luminaire
Stations sion resistance.
CEAG Catalog
Catalog Sections • Silicone gaskets stay resilient to ensure
• Small gasket sur- a dependable seal.
4C and 5C
faces fight ice
• Choose from a • Operating temperature range: -50° to
accumulation.
broad array of push 40°C (-58° to 104°F).
• Rigid aluminum
buttons, pilot Note: For starting temperatures, see the
end enclosures
lights, and selector table on page 5.
ensure sealing
switches.
integrity.
• Silicone gaskets ensure dependable
• Operating tempera-
seals.
ture range: -20° to
55°C (-4° to • Operating temperature range: -50° to
131°F). 40°C (-58° to 104°F).
3 | W W W . C R O U S E - H I N D S . C O M
PROBLEM SOLUTION
STUCK OPERATORS AND SHAFTS TEMPERATURE-RESISTANT LUBRICANT AND
When cold temperatures are extreme, lubricants on shafts LUBRICANT-FREE DESIGN
and bushings can stiffen to the point that it becomes diffi- Choose from Cooper Crouse-Hinds products that are designed lubri-
cult to actuate switches or other rotating equipment. cant-free to provide trouble-free operation in cold environments. And,
where lubrication is required by design or for maintenance purposes,
we have the low-temperature lubricant you need.
WSRD Arktite® Interlocked

Receptacles with Enclosed
Disconnect Switches
Catalog Section 3P
• Lever-actuated switch prevents cold-
temperature freeze-ups.
• Dust, moisture, and corrosion resistant.
• Fusible for short-circuit protection.
40°C (-58° to 104°F).
EBBR Arktite® Interlocked

Receptacles with Circuit
Breakers
Catalog Section 4P
• Lever-actuated
switch prevents
cold-temperature
freeze-ups.
• For Class I and
II hazardous locations.
• Choose from 30, 60 and 100 amps.
40°C (-58° to 104°F).
HTL4 Thread Lubricant

Catalog Section 4F
• Extremely wide
temperature
tolerance: -56°
to 982°C (-70° to
1800°F).
• Conductive to
maintain ground continuity.
• Fights corrosion.
PROBLEM SOLUTION
LUMINAIRES THAT WON’T START BUILT-IN LOW-TEMPERATURE START CAPABILITY
When it’s cold, luminaires may have a difficult time start- Lamp starting and ballast striking temperatures determine how
ing and maintaining their lumen output. well a luminaire starts in cold temperatures. We offer a full range
of lamp technologies coupled with low-temperature ballasts,
resulting in low-temperature starting capabilities.
Champ® H.I.D. Luminaires—

VMV, DMV and LMV
High-Pressure Sodium
Metal Halide Pulse Start
Catalog Section 3L
• Low-temperature start performance.
• Start at -40°C (-40°F); once started,
can operate at temperatures as low as
-50°C (-58°F).
• Full range of mounting styles for any
location.
• Epoxy-coat, copper-free aluminum
construction for excellent corrosion
resistance.
40°C (-58° to 104°F).
SpecOne™ CPMV Champ-

Pak™ Wall Pack Luminaire
High-Pressure Sodium
Metal Halide Pulse Start
Induction
Catalog Section 6L
• Enclosure Type 4X,
IP66, Marine Listed.
High-pressure sodium and metal halide pulse start lamps offer the best • New induction
performance in cold temperatures. lamp system offers
up to 100,000
hours of lamp life.
LAMP TYPE STARTING TEMPERATURE
• HPS and MH:
High-Pressure Sodium -40°C (-40°F) - Start at -40°C (-40°F); once started
Metal Halide -30°C (-22°F) can operate at temperatures as low
Metal Halide Pulse Start -40°C (-40°F) as -50°C (-58°F).
Mercury Vapor -30°C (-22°F) - Operating temperature range: -50° to
Fluorescent -29° to 10°C (-20° to 50°F)* 40°C (-58° to 104°F).
Incandescent any • Induction:
- Starting and operating temperature
*Varies depending on type of lamp and wattage. Straight tubes perform better in cold
temperatures than U-shaped tubes.
range: -40° to 40°C (-40° to 104°F).
PROBLEM SOLUTION
CONDENSATION DUE TO TEMPERATURE CYCLING BREATHERS AND DRAINS
Even at very low temperatures, temperature cycles over Install our breathers and drains in enclosures or conduit systems
the course of a day can cause moisture build-up—which for proper ventilation to minimize condensation—and allow any
can cause ice problems. accumulated condensate to drain. Many Cooper Crouse-Hinds
products are built with—or can be ordered with—breathers
and drains.
ECD Breathers and Drains

Catalog Section 8F
• Stainless steel construction for corro-
sion resistance and durability.
• Available in standard, universal and
combination configurations.
60°C (-58° to 140°F).
Cooper Crouse-Hinds offers fittings

that are fully compatible with cold-
weather-tested cables and cords.
CGB Cable
Fittings
Catalog Section 5F
• Fully compatible
with cold-weather-
tested cables and cords.
• Rugged construction protects cables
and cords from damage.
• Tightening a single nut provides a
watertight seal.
• Operating temperature range: -50°
to 60°C (-58° to 140°F).
TECK Connectors
Catalog Section 5F
• Fully compatible
with cold-weather-
tested cables and
cords.
• Rugged construc-
tion protects cables and cords from
damage.
• Operating temperature range: -50°
to 60°C (-58° to 140°F).
PROBLEM SOLUTION
TOO COLD FOR PERSONNEL OR PROCESSES EXPLOSIONPROOF HEATERS OR PANELBOARDS
TO WORK EFFECTIVELY FOR HEAT TRACE APPLICATIONS
You may need to prevent process heat loss … maintain Our explosionproof heaters can provide heat just where it’s needed—
constant temperatures … or keep personnel comfortable safely and conveniently. And we offer a number of panelboard
during maintenance or repair operations. choices that are ideal for heat trace installations to keep your
process flowing.
XC and EXH
Explosionproof Heaters
Catalog Section 4A
• Suitable for hazardous locations.
• Extra-rugged construction withstands
harsh environments.
• Compact designs for easy handling and
installation.
40°C (-49° to 104°F).
Power and Lighting

Panelboards
Powerplus™ EPL/D2L Series
Unibody™ EPLU/D2LU Series
Exactra™ LP1/LP2 Series
SpecOne™ D2Z Series
Catalog Section 1A
• Suitable for haz-
ardous locations.
• The industry’s
broadest lighting
panelboard selec-
tion to match your needs exactly.
• Excellent corrosion resistance in both
metallic and nonmetallic enclosure
designs.
40°C (-58° to 104°F)—all except D2Z.
55°C (-67° to 131°F)—D2Z only.
PROBLEM SOLUTION
INCREASED EXPLOSION PRESSURE IN COLD EXPLOSIONPROOF CONDUIT SEALS—
TEMPERATURES OR FACTORY-SEALED DEVICES
As ambient temperatures drop, the potential for increased Use our explosionproof conduit seals to prevent an explosion from
explosion pressures exists, which can result in increased traveling throughout the conduit system—and minimize the passage of
pressure piling effects. gas or vapors through the conduit. Or you may be able to eliminate the
need for external seals using Cooper Crouse-Hinds
factory-sealed equipment.
Condulet® Explosionproof Seals

ES Series EYD Series EYS Series
EZD Series EZS Series Chico® A Compound
Chico® SpeedSeal™ Compound
Catalog Section 8F & Brochure #4811
• A complete range of rugged conduit seals
for enhanced safety.
• Chico SpeedSeal compound sets up in cold
environments in 4-10 minutes and hardens in
less than 20 minutes. Eliminates need to build
temporary shelters around sealing fittings.
• Operating temperature range -50° to 60°C
(-58° to 140°F). See page 12 for Chico A and
Chico SpeedSeal installation information.
N2SU Factory-Sealed
Control Stations
Catalog Section N
• Pushbutton stations,
pilot lights, and selector
switch are factory sealed.
• Fiberglass-reinforced
polyester enclosures
provide excellent corro-
sion resistance.
• Operating temperature range: -50° to 50°C
(-58° to 122°F).
SpecOne™ GHG 43 Factory- SpecOne™ GHG 26
Sealed Control Stations Explosion-Protected SpecOne™ D2Z Nonmetallic
Catalog Section N Disconnect Switches Factory-Sealed Panelboards
• NEMA 4X, IP 66 Catalog Section 2A Catalog Section 1A
enclosure with • Factory-sealed motor • Unique design allows
formed-in-place circuit switches. for panels with more
gasket. • Innovative break-line than 42 circuits.
• Available with all in cover allows full • UL, cUL and PTB certi-
operators: indica- access for fast, easy fied for Class I, Division
tor lights, potentiometers, control wiring. 2 and Zone 1 hazardous
switches, terminal blocks and meters. • High-impact design with excellent areas.
• Easy change-out components snap in corrosion resistance. • NEMA 4X, IP66 construction.
place on DIN rail. • Operating temperature range: -55° to • Operating temperature range: -55° to 55°C
• Operating temperature range: -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F). (-67° to 131°F).
55°C (-67° to 131°F).
OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGES FOR
LIGHTING
LIGHTING OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE
AB12 Fluorescent Luminaire -20° to 55°C (-4° to 131°F)
AEV Luminaires—IEC Certified -45° to 45°C (-49° to 113°F). Test report for -45°C available.
Consult factory.
AEVBH Luminaires—IEC Certified -45° to 45°C (-49° to 113°F). Test report for -45°C available.
Consult factory.
Champ® HID Luminaires HID Minimum Starting Temperature:
CPMV Wall Pack Luminaire HPS/MH Pulse Start: -40°C (-40°F)
MH/MV: -30°C (-22°F)
Operating Temperature: -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
Fluorescent Minimum Starting Temperature: -18°C (0°F)
Operating Temperature: -18° to 40°C (0° to 104°F)
Induction Minimum Starting Temperature: -40°C (-40°F)
Selected lamps/wattages suitable for 55° and 65°C—consult
factory for temperature performance data.
Champ® HID Luminaires Minimum Starting Temperature:
DMV HPS/MH Pulse Start: -40°C (-40°F)
LMV MH/MV: -30°C (-22°F)
VMV Operating Temperature: -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
VMV High-Wattage Selected lamps/wattages suitable for 55° and 65°C—see
temperature performance data in catalog for details.
DMVF & DMVFB Fluorescent 26 & 39 W: 0° to 40°C (32° to 104°F)
DMVF 52 & 64 W: -20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)
DMVFB 52 & 64 W: 0° to 40°C (32° to 104°F)
eLLK 92 Light Fitting -20° to 50/55°C (-4° to 122/131°F)
eLLK Fluorescent NEC/CEC: -25° to 55°C (-13° to 131°F)
IEC: -25° to 50°C (-13° to 122°F)
Lumen output is reduced at low temperatures.
EV Incandescent -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
EVF Fluorescent 32 W T8: -18° to 40°C (0° to 104°F)
60 & 110 W: -20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)
EVFDR Fluorescent 32 W T8: -18° to 40°C (0° to 104°F)
60 & 110 W: -20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)
EVFT IlluminatorTM Fluorescent 10° to 40°C (50° to 104°F)
EVLP Fluorescent and Fluorescent EVLPF: -20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)
with Emergency Ballast EVLPFB: 0° to 40°C (32° to 104°F)
EVLP HID Series Minimum Starting Temperature:
HPS/MH Pulse Start: -40°C (-40°F)
MH/MV: -30°C (-22°F)
Fluorescent: -18°C (0°F)
Selected lamps/wattages suitable for 55° and 65°C—see temperature
performance data in catalog for details.
EVM Luminaires—IEC Certified -45° to 50°C (-49° to 122°F). Test report for -45°C available. Consult factory.
EVP EVM Floodlight -20° to 55°C (-4° to 131°F)
F2MV HID Compact Floodlight Minimum Starting Temperature:
FMV HID Champ® Floodlight HPS/MH Pulse Start: -40°C (-40°F)
FMV1000 Series Floodlight MH/MV: -30°C (-22°F)
Selected lamps/wattages suitable for 55° and 65°C.
LIGHTING
LIGHTING OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE
FVN Fluorescent 32 W: -18° to 40°C (0° to 104°F)
40 W with suffix BY: -18° to 40°C (0° to 104°F)
60 & 110 W: -29° to 40°C (-20° to 104°F)
FVS Compact Fluorescent -18° to 55°C (0° to 131°F)
Hazard-Gard® HID Floodlight Minimum Starting Temperature:
MH/MV: -30°C (-22°F)
Selected lamps/wattages suitable for 55°, 65° and 75°C—see temperature
Hazard-Gard® HID Luminaire Minimum Starting Temperature:
MH/MV: -30°C (-22°F)
Selected lamps/wattages suitable for 55°, 65° and 75°C—see temperature
HE 5 EN Torch -20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)
HE 8... Handlamp -20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)
HF, HFL Stabex -20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)
HLE 7 L EN Inspection Cap Lamp -20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)
M0 Stabex -20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)
N2MV HID Champs Minimum Starting and Operating Temperatures:
HPS/MH Pulse Start: -40° to 40°C (-40° to 104°F)
MH/MV: -30° to 40°C (-22° to 104°F)
Selected lamps/wattages suitable for 55°C—see temperature
N2MVF & N2MVFB Fluorescent N2MVF: -20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)
N2MVFB: 0° to 40°C (32° to 104°F)
NFL Fluorescent (2) lamp 32 W 4': -18° to 40°C (0° to 104°F)
All others: 0° to 40°C (32° to 104°F)
NFMV Luminaires—IEC Certified -20° to 50°C max (-4° to 122°F). Test report for -45°C available. Consult factory.
nLL. 98. Zone 2 Light Fitting -20° to 50°C (-4° to 122°F)
nLL. 98058/58 Zone 2 Light Fitting -20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)
nLLK Fluorescent NEC/CEC: -18° to 40°C (0° to 104°F)
IEC: -20° to 40°C max (-4° to 104°F)
NVMV Large Body Luminaires— -20° to 55°C max (-4° to 131°F). Test report for -45°C available. Consult factory.
IEC Certified
NVMV Small Body Luminaires— -20° to 55°C max (-4° to 131°F). Test report for -45°C available. Consult factory.
IEC Certified
RCDE-6 and RCDE-10 -40° and below to 40°C (-40° to 104°F)
Incandescent Floodlight
SEB 8, SEB 8 L Searchlight -20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)
Stabex Mini -20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)
V2PC Photocell -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F). Suitable for higher temperatures with selected lamps/wattages.
VF VaporgardTM Fluorescent 5,7 W: -18° to 40°C (0° to 104°F)
9 W: -4° to 40°C (25° to 104°F)
POWER DISTRIBUTION
POWER DISTRIBUTION OPERATING TEMP. RANGE POWER DISTRIBUTION OPERATING TEMP. RANGE
CESD Arktite® Receptacle -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F) GHG 514 Plugs and Sockets -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
D2D Panelboards -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F) GHG 542 5 Flange Socket -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
D2DU Panelboards -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F) GHG 591 Plugs and Sockets -20° to 55°C (-4° to 131°F)
D2L Panelboards -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F) GHG 591/511 Plugs and Sockets -20° to 55°C (-4° to 131°F)
D2LU Panelboards -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F) GHG 60.0 Terminal Box -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
D2PB Panelboards -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F) GHG 619 Distribution Board -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
D2Z Panelboards -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F) GHG 72 Terminal Box -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
EBBR Interlocked Arktite -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F) GHG 73 Terminal Box -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
Receptacle with Circuit Breaker GHG 74 Terminal Box -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
ENR Interlocked Circuit -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F) GHG 758 Bus Bar System -55° to 40°C (-67° to 104°F)
Breaking Receptacle
GHG 981 Socket Distribution -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
EPL Panelboards -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
IEC 309 Plugs and Receptacles -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
EPLU Panelboards -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
LP1 Panelboards -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
EXD Panelboards -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
LP2 Panelboards -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
EXDU Panelboards -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
NBR/NSR Interlocked Receptacle -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
GHG 26 Disconnect Switches -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
NPJ Plugs -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
GHG 5 Zone 2 Plugs and Sockets -20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)
NPR Connectors -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
GHG 511 8 Flange Socket -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
NRE Receptacles -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
GHG 511 Plugs and Sockets -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
NRS Disconnect Switches -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
GHG 511/512 Socket Distribution -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
WSRD Interlocked Receptacle -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
GHG 512 8 Flange Socket -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
GHG 512 Receptacle -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
CONTROL EQUIPMENT
CONTROL EQUIPMENT OPERATING TEMP. RANGE CONTROL EQUIPMENT OPERATING TEMP. RANGE
dLS 92 Built-in Switch -55° to 70°C (-67° to 158°F) GHG 292/293 Control Switch -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
EDS/EFS/DSD Control Stations -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F) GHG 41 Built-in Switch -55° to 50°C (-67° to 122°F)
EXH Electric Heaters -45° to 40°C (-49° to 104°F) GHG 41/43 Control Station -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
(not available in Canada) GHG 418 Signal Light -55° to 40°C (-67° to 104°F)
FB Intrinsically Safe Remote I/O -20° to 40°C (T6) (-4° to 104°F) GHG 44 Control Station -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
-20° to 55°C (T4) (-4° to 131°F)
GHG 61. MCB -55° to 110°C (-67° to 230°F)
GHG 2 Control Switch 20 A -55° to 45°C (-67° to 113°F)
GHG 610 Actuating Flap -55° to 60°C (-67° to 140°F)
GHG 23 Main Switch -55° to 40°C (-67° to 104°F)
GHG 635 Motor Starter -20° to 55°C (-4° to 131°F)
GHG 261 Switch -55° to 52°C (-67° to 125°F)
Intrinsically Safe Barriers -40° to 60°C (-40° to 140°F)
GHG 262/263 Control Switch -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
Intrinsically Safe DIN Rail Devices -20° to 60°C (-4° to 140°F)
20 A/40 A
LB Local Bus Intrinsically Safe -20° to 60°C (-4° to 140°F)
GHG 263 Main Switch 40 A -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
.M45/.M72 Measuring Instrument -55° to 58°C (-67° to 136°F)
GHG 264 Main Switch -36° to 55°C (-32° to 131°F)
N2SU Control Stations -50° to 50°C (-58° to 122°F)
GHG 265/266 Main Switch 125 A -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
Signal Light Components for -55° to 50°C (-67° to 122°F)
GHG 270 Installations Switch -55° to 40°C (-67° to 104°F)
Switch Board
GHG 29 Control Switch -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
XC Electric Heaters -45° to 40°C (-49° to 104°F)
WIRING METHODS
WIRING & INSTALLATION OPERATING TEMPERATURE WIRING & INSTALLATION OPERATING TEMPERATURE
METHODS RANGE METHODS RANGE
Blanking Plug GHG 960 -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F) EZS Seals -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)*
Bus Bar System GHG 758 -55° to 40°C (-67° to 104°F) Flameproof Cable Bushing -20° to 100°C (-4° to 212°F)
Cable Entry GHG 960 -55° to 70°C (-67° to 158°F) Flameproof Enclosure GHG 6 -45° to 40°C (-49° to 104°F)
CD Drain -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F) Form 7, Form 8, Mark 9 -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)
CGB Cable Fittings -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F) Conduit Outlet Bodies
CHICO® A and Chico® CHICO A installation must be FS/FD Device Boxes -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)
SpeedSeal™ Sealing performed at or above 2°C GHG 960 Cable Entry -55° to 70°C (-67° to 158°F)
Compound (35°F) for Groups C & D, at or above GHG 960 Drainage Plug -20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F)
4.4°C (40°F) for Group B, and must cure GUA/EAB/EAJ Conduit -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)
according to instructions enclosed with Outlet Boxes
product. The temperature of Chico
GUB Junction Boxes -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)
SpeedSeal compound must be between
10° and 29°C (50° and 85°F) before mix- HTL Lubricant -56° to 982°C (-70° to 1800°F)
ing. The sealing fitting must be kept at or NCG Nonmetallic Cable Glands -30° to 60°C (-22° to 140°F)
above 4°C (40°F) during the 4 to 10 NH Fuse GHG 611 -55° to 100°C (-67° to 212°F)
minute expansion/gel time of the com- PLG Plugs -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)
pound. Remove all ice crystals from inside
RE/REC Reducers -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)
the conduit seal before dispensing Chico
SpeedSeal compound. After curing, the STL Lubricant -28° to 148°C (-20° to 300°F)
operating temperature is determined by TECK Connectors -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)
the fitting with which it is installed. Terminal Box GHG 60.0 -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
Distribution Board GHG 619 -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F) Terminal Box GHG 72 -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
ECD Breathers, Drains and -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F) Terminal Box GHG 73 -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
Universal Drain/Breathers Terminal Box GHG 74 -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
EJB Junction Boxes -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F) Terminal Box GHG 79 -50° to 40°C (-58° to 104°F)
ES Seals -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)* Terminal GHG 240 -55° to 55°C (-67° to 131°F)
EYD Seal and Drain -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)* TMC Fittings -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)
EYDX Expanded Fill Sealing -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)* TMCX Fittings -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F).
Fittings and Drain Epoxy installation must be performed at
EYS Seals -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)* or above 4.4°C (40°F) and must cure
EYS29 Elbow Seals -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)* according to instructions enclosed with
EYSR Retrofit Seal/Drain Seal -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)* product.
EYSX Expanded Fill Sealing -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)* Trumpet-Shaped Cable Entry -50° to 80°C (-58° to 176°F)
Fitting GHG 960
EZD Inspection Seal -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)* UNY/UNF Unions -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)
and Drains W-Series Junction Boxes -50° to 60°C (-58° to 140°F)
*CHICO A installation must be performed at or above 2°C (35°F) for Groups C & D, at or above 4.4°C (40°F) for Group B, and must cure according to instructions enclosed
with product. The temperature of Chico SpeedSeal compound must be between 10° and 29°C (50° and 85°F) before mixing. The sealing fitting must be kept at or above 4°C
(40°F) during the 4 to 10 minute expansion/gel time of the compound. Remove all ice crystals from inside the conduit seal before dispensing Chico SpeedSeal compound.
For more information:

Contact an authorized Cooper Crouse-Hinds Distributor,
Sales Office or Customer Service Department:
In the U.S.: In Canada:

Cooper Crouse-Hinds Cooper Crouse-Hinds Canada
P.O. Box 4999 (905) 507-4187
Syracuse, NY 13221 FAX: (905) 568-7048
(315) 477-5531 For office locations outside of North America
FAX: (315) 477-5179
crouse.customerctr@crouse-hinds.com
or for additional product information, visit our
website at: www.crouse-hinds.com
Mexico • Latin America/Caribbean • Germany • Australia • Asia • Dubai • India
Solutions.Worldwide. TM
Crouse-Hinds is a registered trademark of Cooper Industries, Inc.

4822-0903 © 2003 Cooper Industries, Inc. Printed in U.S.A.

Instruction Operation and Maintenance Manual Unit Control Panel

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Instruction Operation and Maintenance Manual Unit Control Panel

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

g GE Oil & Gas Nuovo Pignone

INSTRUCTION, OPERATION AND

NUOVO PIGNONE JOBS : 110.2313/190.0533

MANUFACTURER : GE Oil & Gas

10-08-E 110.2313/190.0533 P. 1-1

MOD. INPR/SVIL/ P.F. 01/01

Status and description of the revisions

Stato di revisione Data Eseguito Controllato Approvato Descrizione della revisione

Revision Status Date Prepared Checked Approved Description of the revisions

ISSELnord Nuovo Pignone Nuovo Pignone

DATE: 05-10-2008 N.P. JOB: 110.2313/190.0533 P. 1-1

MOD. INPR/SVIL/ P.F. 01/01

Introduction to Nuovo Pignone after-sales service

Nuovo Pignone organization is structured in such a way as to guarantee a comprehensive and

- the use of design criteria that enhance maintainability,

06-01-E After-Sales Service P. 1-2

MOD. INPR/SVIL/D.L./P.F. 06/01

- diagnostic analysis of machines in operation

06-01-E After-Sales Service P. 2-2

MOD. INPR/SVIL/D.L./P.F. 06/01

- DESCRIPTION & OPERATION - CENTRIFUGAL COMPRESSOR Volume I

- COMPRESSOR DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST Volume II

- DESCRIPTION & OPERATION - STEAM TURBINE Volume III

- TURBINE DRAWINGS AND PARTS LIST Volume IV

- AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT Volume V

- UNIT CONTROL PANEL Volume VII

- PLC CONTROL SYSTEM Volume VIII

- OVERSPEED MONITORING SYSTEM Volume IX

- VIBRATION MONITORING SYSTEM Volume X

10-08-E .2313/.0533 P. 1-1

MOD. INPR/SVIL/ P.F. 12/00

N.P. Job: 110.2313/190.0533

UNIT CONTROL PANEL

10-08-E .2313/.0533 P. 1-1

MOD. INPR/SVIL/ P.F. 12/00

N.P. Job: 110.2313/190.0533

POS. NAME DRAWING N°

1 CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL SOS 9971645/4

2 UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM SOS 9971994/3

3 CONTROL SYSTEM SCHEMATIC SOS 9971568/3

4 CONTROL SYSTEM I/O LIST SOS 9972092/3

5 FUNCTIONAL LOGIC DIAGRAM SOS 9971642/4

6 UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM LAYOUT AND MAIN SOS 9971691/3

7 CAUSE/EFFECT DIAGRAM SOS 9971591/3

8 UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM LOOP DIAGRAM SOS 9972157/3

9 LOCAL CONTROL PANEL LAYOUT SOS 9971701/3

10 UNIT CONTROL SYSTEM SERIAL LIST SOS 9971995/3

11 LOCAL CONTROL PANEL WIRING DIAGRAM SOS 9972008/3

10-08-E .2313/.0533 P. 1-1

MOD. INPR/SVIL/ P.F. 12/00

POS. NAME DRAWING N°

12 STEAM TURBINE GOVERNOR CONFIGURATION SOL 45717/4

13 HMI VIDEO PAGES SOS 9971996/3

10-08-E .2313/.0533 P. 1-1

MOD. INPR/SVIL/ P.F. 12/00

CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL

CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL

2. CONTROL SYSTEM OVERALL DESCRIPTION

1. Distributed Control System (DCS) (supplied by customer)

The Unit Control Panel consists of the following major components:

 A selection “LOC.HMI/REM.HMI mode” (HS 3200) located on local and remote

CONTROL SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL

STEAM TURBINE SPEED CONTROL

- Operator Interface Terminal (LOCAL HMI) – GE Wolverine Panel PC with